{"1": {"fulltext": "wsmm\\nM\\nliWMBBBm\\nit 111 Hi\\nSKIS\\nJBU\\nnHHBD\\nHHI\\noral\\niffi", "height": "4179", "width": "2502", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0001.jp2"}, "2": {"fulltext": "\\\\V\\nv", "height": "3955", "width": "2268", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0002.jp2"}, "3": {"fulltext": "r\\nr\\n~2-\\no\\no\u00c2\u00b0VL l\\ns\\nO", "height": "4024", "width": "2287", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0003.jp2"}, "4": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3955", "width": "2268", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0004.jp2"}, "5": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3955", "width": "2268", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0005.jp2"}, "6": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3955", "width": "2268", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0006.jp2"}, "7": {"fulltext": "SCHOOL-GRAMMAR\\nLATIN LANGUAGE.\\nBY\\nC. G. Z\\nZUMPT,\\nPROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY, AND MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ACADEMY\\nOF SCIENCES, OF BERLIN.\\nTRANSLATED, AND ADAPTED TO THE USE OF\\nTHE HIGH SCHOOL OF EDINBURGH,\\nBY\\nLEONHARD SCHMITZ, Ph.D., F.R.S.E.,\\nRECTOR OF THE HIGH SCHOOL OF EDINBURGH.\\nLONDON:\\nPRINTED FOR\\nONGMAN, BKOWN, GREEN, AND LONGMANS,\\nPATERNOSTER-ROW.\\n1846.", "height": "4053", "width": "2268", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0007.jp2"}, "8": {"fulltext": "r\\nLondon\\nPrinted by A. Spottiswoode,\\nNew-Street-Square.", "height": "3955", "width": "2268", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0008.jp2"}, "9": {"fulltext": "QO\\nAUTHOR S PREFACE,\\nIn my larger Grammar I have endeavoured methodically\\nto put together everything which relates to the Latin\\nlanguage in its best period, and serves to explain the\\nlanguage of the Roman classics. Although I have\\nabstained from accumulating examples which only con-\\nfirm the rules, and which the pupil, with much more\\npleasure and profit, may collect for himself, still th^\\nsize of the work has become larger than is commonly\\nthought desirable for schools. Youthful beginners are\\neasily frightened by the sight of voluminous school-\\nbooks, although the intention may be that the pupils\\nshould go through only part of them the eye and\\nmind of beginners are often attracted by those parts\\nwhich, for the time, should not engage their atten-\\ntion, and fill them with unnecessary alarm. The price\\nof a school-book, too, is a matter of some consider-\\nation for only a small number of those who learn the\\nelements of Latin continue the study of it with a view\\nto acquire a perfect knowledge of it.\\nFor these reasons it was found necessary in Germany,\\nafter the publication of the third edition of the larger\\nGrammar, to prepare an abridgment for the use of\\nschools; and I have ever since been endeavouring to\\nA 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0009.jp2"}, "10": {"fulltext": "*V PREFACE.\\ncomprise in each of the two works, in agreement nth\\neach other, the matter which appeared to me necessary\\nfor the acquisition of the Latin language, in the differ-\\nent stages of the beginner and of the reader of classical\\nauthors. The sixth edition of this abridgment, corre-\\nsponding with the ninth of the larger work, has recently-\\nappeared in Germany, and is now presented to the\\nEnglish public. I take this opportunity of making a\\nfew observations respecting the principles on which the\\nabridgment is made, and the manner in which it should\\nbe used.\\nIntelligent teachers have always been of opinion, that\\nit is desirable for a beginner, in learning a language or\\na science, to adhere to one and the same book, that he\\nmay gradually become acquainted with the whole and\\nall its parts, and thus make it, as it were, his own. In\\nlaying down such a rule, it is, of course, assumed that\\nthe book is based upon a profound and correct knowledge\\nof the subject it treats of, and that it is methodically\\narranged and if such is the case, the habit acquired by\\nthe learner, of referring for all the particulars he meets\\nwith to certain parts of his manual, is the best assist-\\nance for his memory, and insures an easy, regular, and\\ncontinuous progress: the unavoidable difficulties con-\\nnected with the subject itself or the terminology of the\\nrules are removed, by frequent recurrence to and con-\\nsideration of them and the knowledge, once acquired,\\nthus takes firm root and becomes easy in its application.\\nDifferent books on the same science for each particular\\nstage of the pupil, produce confusion. Setting aside\\nthe fact that different authors entertain different views\\non the same subject, the mere difference of expression\\nis quite enough to puzzle the youthful mind and no-", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0010.jp2"}, "11": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\nthing is worse than to compel a pupil to learn the same\\nthing twice or three times in different ways.\\nKnowledge is acquired step by step in every science\\nthe elements must be set forth first, and be impressed\\nupon the memory and in Grammar in particular the\\npupil has first to learn the paradigms of the declensions\\nand conjugations, the rules about gender and the irre-\\ngular conjugation, next the formation of derivative and\\ncompound words then the regular syntax and lastly,\\nthe special peculiarities of syntax and their rhetorical\\napplication, or the syntaxis ornata. These different\\nstages are distinguished in every grammar by different\\nsections or chapters and, in mine, in particular, the\\ndivision is carried on further by the system of text and\\nnotes, printed in larger and smaller types, by which\\nmeans the more important parts are separated from\\nthose of less importance. If, therefore, the study of a\\nbeginner is directed by an intelligent teacher, there can\\nbe no danger of a pupil being overwhelmed by the\\nquantity of the materials contained in the grammar.\\nBut if, nevertheless, a smaller book is to be put into\\nhis hands, it is evident from the foregoing remarks,\\nthat the main difference between it and the larger\\nwork must consist in omissions. For this reason\\nthe division into chapters and the paragraphs are the\\nsame in the Grammar and in the present Abridgment\\ngo that the two books may be used by the side of each\\nother, and the pupil who has commenced his studies in\\nthe School Grammar, will at once find himself at home\\nin the larger work and by recognising that which he\\nhas already learned, he will be inspired with confidence\\nthat he can acquire the rest also, and without much\\ndifficulty. The parts omitted in the School Grammar\\nA 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0011.jp2"}, "12": {"fulltext": "PREFACE.\\nare the Syntaxis Ornata, all specialities and peculiarities\\nin the idioms of particular authors, and everything that\\nis poetical and unclassieal, which is noticed, even in the\\nlarger Grammar, for the most part only in notes. By\\nthis means the Syntax is reduced to the simplest funda-\\nmental rules concerning the use of cases, tenses, and\\nmoods. The part containing the Accidence may, per-\\nhaps, still appear to be rather full but I believe that\\nthe vague manner in which many persons are acquainted\\nwith Latin is, for the most part, owing to the neglect\\nof this very portion in Latin grammars. That which\\nactually exists in the classical language must be stated\\nwith proper minuteness and systematically; the rest\\nmay be left to the teacher, who has to select what is\\nnecessary in every particular instance.\\nThe list of the Irregular Verbs contains the very\\nessence of the language, but has been very much\\nabridged in regard to particulars and to compound\\nverbs. The section on Etymology can be clear and\\ninstructive only when the pupil is in possession of a\\nsufficient number of analogies.\\nIt may, perhaps, be said that the style of the syn-\\ntactical rules is not sufficiently easy and concise for\\nboys and though it may be admitted that it is per-\\nfectly appropriate for the larger Grammar, some persons\\nperhaps may still demand for the School Grammar\\na different mode of expression ad captum puerorum,\\neven if it should be at the expense of correctness\\nand accuracy. But on this point I am of a different\\nopinion. A grammatical rule must be simple and concise,\\nbut accurate, and ought not to contain either one word\\ntoo much or too little and in this respect there should\\nbe no difference between a larger and a smaller grammar;", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0012.jp2"}, "13": {"fulltext": "PREFACE. Vll\\na puerile plainness and a superficiality which is half\\ntrue and half false, are in direct opposition to the ob-\\njects of grammatical instruction. A grammar is not a\\nthing to be put into the hands of helpless children, but\\na school of training for the understanding it requires a\\nteacher who explains and illustrates by examples that\\nwhich, from its nature, is difficult and, after such illus-\\ntrations, the pupil himself will see that the rule could\\nnot have been expressed more plainly and concisely.\\nI have not neglected to give such illustrations in some\\nof the notes. For this purpose the examples of the\\nlarger Grammar have, on the whole, not been curtailed,\\nfor they are intended to give the teacher an opportunity\\nof showing the application of the rules, and they are,\\nat the same time, a treasure for the memory of the\\npupil, from which he may derive pleasure even in the\\nlatest years of his life. With regard to Latin Metres, I\\nhave added an Appendix, containing the most necessary\\nelements, the metrical feet, the structure of the iambic\\nsenarius and of the dactylic hexameter and pentameter\\nand this will, I think, be sufficient for those who read\\nPhaedrus, Ovid, or Virgil, provided it is combined\\nwith the rules about the length and shortness of sylla-\\nbles, which form an indispensable part of grammar.\\nIn conclusion, I may be permitted to express my wish\\nthat this work also may contribute towards a prosper-\\nous and successful study of language, the influence of\\nwhich on the cultivation of the understanding, and, if\\nproperly directed, also on the cultivation of the feelings,\\nis universally acknowledged.\\nC. G. ZUMPT.\\nBerlin, July, 1846.", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0013.jp2"}, "14": {"fulltext": "", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0014.jp2"}, "15": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS.\\nELEMENTARY PART.\\nIntroduction\\nChap.\\nI. Of the Vowels and Consonants\\nII. Of Syllables\\nIII. Of the Length and Shortness of Syllables\\nIV. Of the Accent of Words\\nPage\\n1\\n2\\n5\\n6\\n13\\nTHE ACCIDENCE.\\nV. Division of Words according to their Signification 15\\nVI. Nouns Substantive. General Rules of Gender 16\\nVII. Number, Case, and Declension 19\\nVIII. First Declension -20\\nIX. Greek Words in e, as, and es- 21\\nX. Gender of the Nouns of the First Declension 21\\nXL Second Declension 22\\nXII. Greek Words of the Second Declension 24\\nXIII. Gender of the Nouns of the Second Declension 24\\nXIV. Third Declension. Genitive 25\\nXV. The remaining Cases of the Third Declension 31\\nAppendix 37\\nXVI. Greek Words of the Third Declension 39\\nXVII. Gender of Words of the Third Declension.\\nMasculines 40\\nXVIII. Feminines- 41\\nXIX. Neuters 43\\nXX. Fourth Declension 44\\nXXI. Fifth Declension 45\\nXXII. Irregular Declension. Indeclinables. Defectives 46\\nXXIII. Heteroclita Heterogenea 50\\nXXIV. Nouns Adjective. Terminations. Declension 53\\nAppendix 54\\nXXV. Comparison of Adjectives 58\\nXXVI. Comparison of Adverbs and increased Comparison 59\\nXXVII. Irregular and defective Comparison 60", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0015.jp2"}, "16": {"fulltext": "X CONTENTS.\\nChap. Page\\nXXVIII. Numerals. I. Cardinal Numerals -62\\nXXIX. II. Ordinal Numerals -65\\nXXX. III. Distributive Numerals 67\\nXXXI. IV. Multiplicative Numerals -68\\nXXXII. V. Proportional Numerals 68\\nXXXIII. VI. Numeral Adverbs 69\\nXXXIV. Pronouns and Adjective Pronouns 70\\nXXXV. Declension of Pronouns -72\\nXXXVI. Declension of the Possessive Pronouns and of Pro-\\nnominals 75\\nXXXVII. The Verb -76\\nXXXVIII. Moods. Tenses 78\\nXXXIX. Numbers. Persons- 79\\nXL. Formation of the Tenses 80\\nf XLI. The Verb esse 84\\nXL 1 1. The four Conjugations 86\\nXLIII. Remarks on the Conjugations 101\\nList of Verbs which are irregular in the Formation of\\ntheir Perfect and Supine.\\nXLIV. First Conjugation 104\\nXLV. Second Conjugation 106\\nXL VI. Third Conjugation. 1. Verbs which have a Vowel\\nbefore o including those in vo 113\\nXL VII. 2. Verbs in do and to 1 16\\nXLVIII. 3. Verbs in bo and po 120\\nXLIX. 4. Verbs with a Palatal Letter, g, c, ct, h, qu, and gu\\n(in which u is not considered as a vowel) before o 121\\nL. 5. Verbs which have Z, m 9 n 9 r before o 1 24\\nLI. 6. Verbs in so and xo 127\\nLII. Inchoatives -129\\nLIII. Fourth Conjugation -131\\nLIV. List of Deponent Verbs of the First Conjugation 132\\nLV. Deponents of the Second Conjugation 135\\nLVI. Deponents of the Third Conjugation 135\\nLVII. Deponents of the Fourth Conjugation 137\\nLVI 1 1. Irregular Verbs 138\\nLIX. Defective Verbs 145\\nLX. Impersonal Verbs 148\\nLXI. Etymology of Nouns and Verbs 150\\nLXII. Etymology of Particles 165\\nLXIIL Primitive Adverbs 168\\nLXIV. Comparison of Adverbs 172\\nLXV. Prepositions 172\\nLXVI. Prepositions in Compound Words 175\\nLXVII. Conjunctions 178\\nLXVIII. Interjections 181", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0016.jp2"}, "17": {"fulltext": "CONTENTS.\\nXI\\nSYNTAX.\\nI. Connection of Subject and Predicate.\\nChap.\\nLXIX. Subject and Predicate\\nPage\\n182\\nII. On the Use of Cases.\\nLXX. Nominative Case\\nLXXI. Accusative Case\\nLXXII. Dative Case\\nLXXIII. Genitive Case\\nLXXIV. Ablative Case\\nLXXV. Vocative Case\\n186\\n186\\n191\\n196\\n203\\n212\\nIII. Use of the Tenses.\\nLXXVI. The Tenses\\n212\\nIV. Of the Moods.\\nLXXVII. Indicative Mood\\nLXXVIII. Subjunctive Mood\\nLXXIX. Imperative Mood\\nLXXX. Infinitive Mood\\nLXXXI. Use of the Participles\\nLXXXII. Use of the Gerund\\nLXXXIII. Use of the Supine\\n220\\n221\\n235\\n237\\n248\\n253\\n256\\nAPPENDIX\\n258", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0017.jp2"}, "18": {"fulltext": "", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0018.jp2"}, "19": {"fulltext": "LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nELEMENTARY PART,\\nINTRODUCTION.\\nThe Latin language was once spoken by the Romans, at\\nfirst only in a part of Middle Italy, but subsequently in all\\nItaly and in other countries subject to the Romans. At\\npresent it can be learnt only from books and the monumental\\ninscriptions of that people.\\nThe earliest Latin writings that we possess, were com-\\nposed about 200 years before the birth of Christ, and in the\\nsixth century after Christ Latin, as a spoken language, died\\nentirely away. It had then become quite corrupted through\\nthe influence of the foreign nations which had settled in the\\nRoman dominions, and it became so mixed up with the lan-\\nguages of the invaders that a number of new languages\\n(Italian, French, Spanish, Portuguese,) were gradually\\nformed out of it. All persons who wrote Latin in later\\ntimes had learnt it as a dead language.\\nDuring the long period in which the Latin language was\\nspoken, it underwent various changes, not only in the num-\\nber of its words and their meanings, in their forms and\\ncombinations, but, to some extent, in its pronunciation also.\\nWe shall in this Grammar describe the language, though\\nnot exclusively, such as it was spoken and written during\\nthe most important period of Roman literature, that is, about\\nthe time of Julius Caesar and Cicero, till shortly after the\\nbirth of Christ. That period is commonly called the golden", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0019.jp2"}, "20": {"fulltext": "2 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nage, and the subsequent one, till about A. d. 120, the silver\\nage of the Latin language.\\nThe Latin language in its origin is nearest akin to the\\nGreek, and at the time when the Romans became acquainted\\nwith the literature, arts, and institutions of Greece, they\\nadopted a great many single words, as well as constructions,\\nfrom the Greek. Both languages, moreover, belong to the\\nsame family from which the English, German, northern, and\\nmany other languages have sprung.\\nCHAPTER I.\\nOF THE VOWELS AND CONSONANTS.\\nl.] 1. The Vowels of the Language are A, a; E, e;\\nI, i 0,o; U, u (Y, y) and the diphthongs, AE, ae OE,\\noe AU, au and EU, eu. Their ancient pronunciation\\ndid not differ in any essential point from that of the modern\\nItalian or German; but the modern pronunciation varies\\nin the different countries of Europe, though the length\\nand shortness of the vowels are and ought to be observed\\neverywhere. (See Chap. HI.) The Latin language has no\\nsigns to distinguish a long from a short vowel.\\nNote. The vowel y (called y psilon) occurs only in words which were\\nintroduced into the Latin language from or through the Greek, at a time\\nwhen the former was already developed, such as syllaba, pyramis, Cyrus\\nwhereas other words, the Greek origin of which leads us back to more\\nancient times, or has been obscured by changes of sound, have lost their\\noriginal y such as mus (from the Greek fivs), silva (from v\\\\rj), and\\nlacrima (from Mupvov). The word stilus, too, is better written with i, since\\npractice did not acknowledge its identity with the Greek arvAos.\\nThe diphthong eu, if we except Greek words, occurs only in heu, heus, seu,\\nneu, and in neuter and neutiquam. The diphthongs ei, oi, and ui, occur\\nonly in interjections, such as hex, eia, oiei, and hui, and in cases where dein,\\nproin, huic, or cut, are contracted into one syllable, as is commonly done\\nin poetry.\\n3.] 2. The Consonants are, B, b; C, c D, d; F, f\\nG, g H, h; (K, k L, I; M, m; N, n; P, p; Q, q;\\nBy r; s; T,t; X, x (Z, z). With regard to their", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0020.jp2"}, "21": {"fulltext": "VOWELS AND CONSONANTS. 3\\nclassification, it is only necessary here to observe that m,\\nn, r, are called liquids (liquidae), and the rest mutes (mutae),\\nwith the exception of s, which, being a sibilant (littera\\nsibilans), is of a peculiar nature. The mutes may again be\\nclassified, with reference to the organ by which they are\\npronounced, into labials (v, b, p, palatals (g, c, k, qu), and\\nUnguals (d, t). X and z (called zetd) are double consonants.\\nNote. Z occurs only in words borrowed from the Greek j and v\\nwere expressed by the Latins by the same signs as the vowels i and u\\nbut in pronunciation they were distinguished but we who have two\\ndistinct signs, ought to distinguish them also in writing. But in Greek\\nwords, we must every where write i and u Iambus, Iones, La ius, Agaue,\\nand not Jonia, Agave, for the Greeks had neither aj nor a v.\\nK became a superfluous letter in Latin, as its place was generally\\nsupplied by c w can be used only when modern words are introduced into\\nthe Latin language without undergoing any change in their orthography.\\nHis only an aspiration, whence it does not make position. SO.]\\n6 3. Respecting the pronunciation of the consonants,\\nit must be observed, that the rule with the Latins was to\\npronounce them just as they were written. Every modern\\nnation has its own peculiar way of pronouncing them and\\namong the many corruptions of the genuine pronunciation\\nthere are two which have become firmly rooted, and which it\\nis, perhaps, impossible to banish from the language. We\\npronounce c, when followed by e, i, y, ae, or oe, both in Latin\\nand Greek words, like our s, and when followed by other\\nvowels or by consonants like a k. The Romans on the other\\nhand, as far as we can ascertain, always pronounced c like k;\\nand the Greeks, in their intercourse with the Romans, did\\nnot hear any other pronunciation. A similar corruption is\\nobserved in the pronunciation of ti like ski, when followed\\nby a vowel, as in justitia, otium. It would, however, be\\nquite wrong to pronounce the ti in totius in the same manner,\\nsince the i in this w r ord is long. But there are some cases\\nin which the short ti, even in our common pronunci-\\nation, retains its proper sound: 1) in Greek words, such as\\nMiltiades, Boeotia, Aegyptius 2) when the t is preceded by\\nanother t, by s or x, e. g. Bruttii, ostium, mixtio and 3)\\nwhen it is followed by the termination of the infinitive passive\\ner, as in nitier, quatier.\\nNote 1. The conjunction cum (when, as) is commonly written quum,\\nto distinguish it from the preposition cum (with), although guum is always\\npronounced like cum, and not like qwum.\\nb 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0021.jp2"}, "22": {"fulltext": "4 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n8.] Note 2. The meeting of two vowels, one of which forms the ending\\nand the other the beginning of a word, causes an hiatus or yawning which\\nis usually avoided in verse by the former of the vowels being thrown out\\n(elisio). As the m at the end of a word was not audibly uttered when the\\nnext word began with a vowel, the vowel preceding the m is likewise\\npassed over in reading verse. The verse multum Me et terris jactatus et\\nalto, is therefore read mulV UV et terris, c.\\n12.] 4. There is no necessity for giving any special\\nrules about the orthography in Latin, since there is absolutely\\nnothing arbitrary in the spelling of words that requires to be\\nlearned but there are a great many separate words, of which\\nneither the pronunciation nor the spelling is established, and\\nwith regard to which the ancients themselves were uncertain,\\nas we see from the monuments still extant. We spell and\\npronounce, e. g. anulus, belua, litus, paulus, better with one\\nconsonant than with two whereas immo, nummus, sollemnis,\\nsollers, sollicitus, Juppiter, and quattuor are more correctly\\nspelled with two consonants than one. It is not certain\\nwhether we ought to write litera or littera. The words\\nsaeculum, saepire are better with the diphthong than with\\nthe simple vowel e whereas in heres, fetus, and fenus, the\\nsimple vowel is better than the diphthong. In general it\\nmay be said, that the mode of spelling now adopted in the\\nbest editions of Latin writers is the correct one.\\n13.] 5. The Romans had no other point than the full\\nstop, and our whole artificial system of punctuation was un-\\nknown to them but, to facilitate the understanding of their\\nworks, we now use in Latin the same signs which have be-\\ncome established in our own language viz. the comma\\ncolon semicolon sign of exclamation sign of inter-\\nrogation and the parenthesis\\n6. With regard to the use of capital and small letters, it\\nmust be observed, that the Romans, generally speaking, wrote\\nonly in capital letters (litterae unciales), until in the latest\\nperiod of antiquity, the small letters came into use, which are\\nnow employed in writing Latin. Capital initials are at\\npresent used a) at the beginning of a verse or at least of\\na strophe b) at the beginning of a new sentence, both in\\nprose and in verse, after a full stop, and after a colon when\\na person s own words are quoted c) in proper names, and in\\nadjectives and adverbs which are derived from them, e. g.,\\nLatium, ermos Latinus, Latine loqui d) in words which\\nexpress a title or office, such as Consul, Tribunus, and Sena-\\ntus, but not in their derivatives.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0022.jp2"}, "23": {"fulltext": "SYLLABLES. O\\n7. The diaeresis (puncta diaereseos) is a sign to facilitate\\nreading it is put upon a vowel which is to be pronounced\\nseparately, and which is not to be combined with the pre-\\nceding one into a diphthong, as in aer, aeris, poeta. The\\nsigns to indicate the length or shortness of a vowel or syl-\\nlable and v,) were sometimes used by the ancients them-\\nselves.\\nCHAP. n.\\nOF SYLLABLES.\\n14.] 1. A vowel or a diphthong may by itself form a\\nsyllable, as in u-va, me-o all other syllables arise from a\\ncombination of consonants and vowels. The Latin language\\nallows only two consonants to stand at the end of a syllable,\\nand three only in those cases where the last is s. At the\\nbeginning of a syllable, also, there can be no more than two\\nconsonants, except when the first is a c, p, or s, followed by\\nmuta cum liquida and at the beginning of a word there\\nnever are three consonants, except in the case of sc, sp, and\\nst being followed by an r or I for example, do-ctrina, cor-\\nru-ptrix.\\n2. It often appears doubtful as to how a word is to be\\ndivided into syllables, and where the division is to be made\\nat the end of a line, when the space does not suffice. The\\nfollowing rules, however, which are founded on the structure\\nof the language, should be observed 1) A consonant\\nwhich stands between two vowels belongs to the latter, as in\\nma-ter. 2) Those consonants which, in Latin or Greek,\\nmay together begin a word, go together in the division of\\nsyllables e. g., pa-tris, and not pat-ris, as tr occurs at the\\nbeginning of tres. In like manner, li-bri (brevis), i-gnis\\n(gnomon), o~mnis, da-mnum (fxraofjiat), a-ctus, pun-ctum\\n(kt^julo), ra-ptus, scri-ptus, pro-pter (Ptolemaeus), Ca-dmus\\n(^fjLweg), re-gnum (yvovg), va-fre (fretus), a-thleta (\u00e2\u0080\u00a2S-Xt ^w),\\ni-pse, scri-psi (\\\\//a^w), Le-sbos (o-ScVvv/u), e-sca, po-sco\\n(scando), a-sper, ho-spes (spes\\\\ pastor, fau-stus, i-ste {stare).\\n3) In compound words, the division must be made so as to\\nB 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0023.jp2"}, "24": {"fulltext": "6 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nkeep the parts distinct, as inter-eram (not inte-reram), be-\\ncause the word is composed of inter and eram. So also\\nab-utor, ab-rado, abs-condo, dis-quiro, et-iam, ob-latum\\nand red-eo, red-undo, prod-eo, and sed-itio, for the d, here\\ninserted to prevent hiatus, must go with the preceding\\nvowel. But when the component parts of a word are doubt-\\nful, or when the first word has dropped its termination to\\nprevent hiatus, the syllables are divided as if the word were\\nnot a compound e. g., po-tes (from pote or potts es), ani-\\nmadverto and not anim-adverto. ve-neo (from venum eo\\\\\\nma-gnanimus, am-bages.\\nCHAP. III.\\nOF THE LENGTH AND SHORTNESS OP SYLLABLES.\\n15.] Syllables are long or short, either by the nature\\nof the vowel they contain, or they become long by their\\nshort vowel being followed by two or more consonants, that\\nis, by their position. We shall first speak of the natural\\nlength and shortness of vowels.\\n1 All Diphthongs are long, and also all those single vowels\\nwhich have arisen from the contraction of two into one, such\\nas cogo (from codgo), mdlo (from mdvolo), tibicen (from\\ntibiicen and tibia, but tubicen from tuba), blgae (from biju-\\ngae), bubus and bobus (from bovibus), and so also dis for\\ndiis, gratis for gratiis, and nil for nihil.\\n16.] 2. A Yowel is short, when it is followed by an-\\nother vowel Vocalis ante vocalem brevis est), as in deus,\\nfilms, pius, ruo, corruo and, as h is not considered as a\\nconsonant, also in such words as trdho, contraho, veho, and\\nadveho.\\nNote. Exceptions. 1) The vowel e in eheu is always long, and\\nthe o in ohe is frequently long. 2) The e in the termination of the\\ngenitive and dative of the fifth declension is long when it is preceded\\nby a vowel, as in diet, speciei. 3) a and e are long in the vocative ter-\\nminations di and ei of words ending in ajus and ejus; e. g., Gai,\\nVultei. (See Chap. XL note 3.) 4) All the genitives in ius, except\\nalterius, have the i commonly long the poets however use the i in illius,\\nistius, ipsius, unius, totius, ullius, and utrius, sometimes as a long and some-\\ntimes as a short vowel; but alius, being a contraction for aliius, can never", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0024.jp2"}, "25": {"fulltext": "LENGTH AND SHORTNESS OF SYLLABLES. 7\\nbe made short. Alterius on the other hand, is sometimes made long. 5) The\\nverb^o has the i long, except when an r occurs in it, as in Ovid Omnia jam\\nf lent, fieri quae posse negabam. 6) Greek words retain their own original\\nquantity, and we therefore say aer, eos, (rjc6s), Amphion, Agesildus, and\\nMenelaus, The e and i in the terminations ea and eus, or ia and ius,\\ntherefore, are long when they represent the Greek eta and eios (the\\nRomans, not having the diphthong ei in their language, represent the\\nGreek ei sometimes by e and sometimes by f, but these vowels, of course,\\nare always long); e. g., Galatea, Medea, uEneas, Dareus, or Darius,\\nIphigenla Alexandria, Antiochla, Nicomedla, Samaria, Seleucla, Thalia,\\nArlus, Basillus, crocodilus, and the adjectives Epicureus, Pythagoreus,\\nspondeus but when the Greek is ea or ia the e and i are short, as in\\nidea, philosophia, theologia. The same is the case with the patronymic\\nwords in ides, since the Greek may be lBtjs, as in Priamides and\\nJEacides or eifys, as in Atrldes, Pelldes, which are derived from Atreus\\nand Peleus.\\n17 3. Usage (auctoritas) alone makes the vowel in\\nthe first syllable of mater, f rater, pravuSy mano (I flow),\\ndicOy ducOy miror, nitor, scribo, dono, pono, utor, mutOy sumo,\\ncura, c. long; and short in pater, cado, rego, tego, bibo,\\nminor, colo, moror, probo, domus, soror, and others. It\\nmust be presumed that the student makes himself acquainted\\nwith the quantity of such words as these by practice, for\\nrules can here be given only with regard to derivatives. It\\nmust further be observed, that the i in the following words\\nis long formica, lecticay lorica, vesicay urtlcay saliva,\\ncastigo, and formido.\\na) Derivative words retain the quantity of their root, as\\nis the case also in declension and conjugation thus the a in\\namor and amo is short, and therefore also in amoris, amat,\\namabam, dmavi, c. except when the consonants after the\\nvowel of the root produce a difference. New words formed\\nfrom roots likewise retain the quantity as from amo\\namor, amicus, amabilis from lux, lucis luceo, lucidus\\nfrom mater rndternus, mdtertera and from pater\\npatriuSy pdternus.\\n18 -3 With regard to Conjugation, however, the following rules also\\nmust be observed.\\n1. The perfect and supine, when they consist of two syllables, and the\\ntenses formed from them, have the first syllable long, even when in the\\npresent tense it is short, e. g,, video, vldi fugio, fugi lego, legi, legisse,\\nlegeram, c. video, visum moveo, motum, motus, moturus (except, however,\\nwhen one vowel stands before another, in which case the general rule\\nremains in force, as in ruo, rui, dirui). Seven dissyllabic perfects, how-\\never, and nine dissyllabic supines together with their compounds make\\ntheir penultima short viz. bibi, dedi, fldi (from jindo), steti, stiti, tuli,\\nB 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0025.jp2"}, "26": {"fulltext": "8 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nand sctdi (from scindd), and datum, ratum, sdtum, itum, litum, citum, quitum,\\nsitum, and rutum. Sisto makes its supine statum, whence status, a, urn,\\nand the compounds adstitum, destitum, restitum.\\n2. Perfects which are formed by reduplication, as tundo, tutudi cano,\\ncecini, pello, pepuli, have the first two syllables short but the second\\nsometimes becomes long by position, as in mordeo, momordi,; tendo,\\ntetendi. Pedo and caedo are the only two words which retain the long\\nvowel in the syllable which forms the root, pepedi, cecldi whereas cddo,\\nin accordance with the rule, has cecldi.\\n3. The perfect posui and the supine positum have the o short, although\\nin pono it is long.\\nWith regard to Declension, we must notice the exception that the\\nwords lar, par, sal, and pes shorten their vowel throughout their declen-\\nsion sdlis, pedis, c.\\n19 J n tne formation of new words by Derivation, there are several\\nexceptions to the above rule. The following words make the short vowel\\nlong mdcer, mdcero lego, lex legis, legare rego-, rex, regis, regula tego,\\ntegula sedeo, sedes sero, semen, sementis suspicor, suspicio persono 9\\npersona voco, vox, vocis homo, humanus, and a few others. The fol-\\nlowing words have a short vowel, although it is long in the root: labare\\nfrom labi ndtare from nare pdciscor from pax, pads ambitus and\\nambitio from amblre, ambitum dicax from dlcere fides and perfidus from\\nfido and fldus (but we regularly find infidus); molestus from moles;\\nwota and ndtare from notus odium from odi sopor from sopire; dux,\\nducis, and redux, reducis, from duco lucerna from luceo.\\n20.] The Terminations or final syllables, by means of which\\nadjectives are formed from substantives, are of a different kind. Among\\nthese alis, aris, anus, ivus and osus, have a long vowel but idus and icus,\\na short one e. g., letalis, vulgaris, montanus, aestlvus, vinosus aridus,\\navidus, cupidus, modicus, publicus, rusticus, bellicus. A long i, however, occurs\\nin amicus, aprlcus,pudicus, and posticus, and in the substantives mendlcus and\\numbilicus. The terminations His and bilis have the i short when they make\\nderivatives from verbs, but long when from substantives; e.g., facilis\\nand amabilis, from facto and amo but civllis, puerllis, from civis and puer.\\nThe only exceptions are humilis and parilis, from humus and par. The tin the\\ntermination inus may be long or short it is long in adjectives derived\\nfrom names of animals and places, as asinlnus, canlnus, Latlnus, and a few\\nothers, such as divinus, genulnus, clandestlnus, intestlnus, marlnus, and vici-\\nnus it is short in most adjectives which express time, as crastinus, diutinus,\\npristinus, and in those which indicate a material or substance, as crys-\\ntallinus, elephantinus, cedrinus, oleaginus. Some adjectives expressive of\\ntime, however, have the i long, viz. matutinus, vespertinus, and repentlnus.\\n21.] b) Compound words retain the quantity of the\\nvowels of their elements thus from dvus and nepos we\\nmake abdvus and abnepos, from probus improbus, from jus\\n(juris) perjurus, from lego (I read) perlego, and from lego\\n(I despatch), ablego, delego y collega. Even when the vowel\\nis changed, its quantity remains the same e. g., laedo, illido;\\ncaedo, incido aequus, iniquus fauces, suffoco claudo^", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0026.jp2"}, "27": {"fulltext": "LENGTH AND SHORTNESS OF SYLLABLES. 9\\nrecludo facto, efficio; cado, incido rdtus, irritus rego,\\nerigo lego, elxgo. We may therefore infer from compound\\nwords the quantity of those of which they consist e. g., from\\nadmlror and abutor we conclude that miror and utor have\\nthe first syllable long and from commoror and desuper, that\\nthe first syllable in moror and super is short, which is not\\nalways accurately distinguished in pronunciation, because\\nthese syllables have the accent. (See Chap. IV.)\\nBut there are some exceptions, and the following compound words\\nchange the long vowel into a short one: dejero and pejero from juro cau-\\nsidicus, fatidicus, maledxcus, veridlcus, from dicere aynitus and cognitus\\nfrom nolus; innub(us), -a, and pronub(us), -a, from nubo. The case is\\nreversed in imbecillus from bdculus.\\n22. In respect to Composition with Prepositions, it is to be re-\\nmarked, that prepositions of one syllable which end in a vowel are long,\\nand those which end in a consonant are short deduco, aboleo, perimo. Tra\\n(formed from trans), as in trado, is long but the o (for ob) in omitto and\\noperior is short. Pro, in Greek words, is short, as in propheta, but in\\nLatin words it is long e. g. prodo, promitto in many however it is short\\nprofugus, prqfiteor, profanus, projiciscor, profundus, and a few others. Se\\nand di (for dls) are long the only exceptions are dlrimo and disertus. Re\\nis short it is long only in the impersonal verb refert, being compounded\\nof rem and fert in all other cases where it appears long, the consonant\\nwhich follows it must be doubled (in verse), as in reppuli, repperi, rettuli,\\nreccido, redduco, relligio. The termination a in prepositions of two syl-\\nlables is long, as in contrddico all the others are short, as antefero,\\npraetereo.\\n23 1 When the first part of a compound is not a preposition, it is\\nnecessary to determine the quantity of the final vowel (a, e, i, o, u, y) of\\nthe first word. 1) a is long, as in qudre and quapropter, except in quasi.\\n2) e is mostly short, as in calefacio (notice especially neque, nequeo,\\nnefas, nefastus, nefarius, nefandus), but long in nequam, nequidquam,\\nnequaquam. and nemo (which is contracted from ne and homo) also in se-\\ndecim and the pronouns memet, mecum, tecum, and secum in veneficus,\\nvidelicet, vecors, and vesanus. 3) i is short, e. g. significo, sacrilegus,\\ncornicen, tubicen, omnipotens, undique but long in compound pronouns,\\nas qullibet, utrique, in ibidem, ubique, utroblque, ilicet and scilicet also in\\nthe compounds of dies, as blduum, triduum, meridies and lastly, in all\\nthose compounds of which the parts may be separated, such as lucrlfacio,\\nagricultura, slquis, because the i at the end of the first word is naturally\\nlong, and remains so. 4) o is short, hodie, duodecim, sacrosanctus but\\nlong in compounds with contra, intra, retro, and quando (quandoquidem\\nalone forms an exception) it is long in alioqui, ceterdqui, utroque, and in\\nthose Greek words in which the o represents the Greek eu, as in\\ngeometria. 5) u and y are short, as in quadrupes, Polyphemus,\\n4. In regard to the quantity of Final Syllables, the follow-\\ning special rules must be observed\\nb 5", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0027.jp2"}, "28": {"fulltext": "10 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nA. Monosyllabic Words,\\n24.] 1) All monosyllables ending in a vowel are long;\\nexcept the particles which are attached to other words que,\\nve, ce, ne, te (tute), pse (reapse), and pte (suopte).\\n2) Of the monosyllables ending in a consonant, the sub-\\nstantives are long, as sol, ver, fur, jus and all those are\\nshort which are not substantives, as ut, et, in, an, ad, quid,\\nsed, quis, quot The following substantives however are\\nshort: cor, fel, mel, vir, and os (gen. ossis), and probably\\nalso mas, a male being, and vas, a surety, since they have\\nthe a short in the genitive maris, vddis. Some words, on\\nthe other hand, are long, although they are not substantives\\nas en, non, quin, sin, eras, plus, cur, and par with its com-\\npounds, and also the adverbs in ic or uc, as sic, hie, hue.\\nThe monosyllabic forms of declension and conjugation follow\\nthe general rules about the quantity of final syllables, and\\ndas, fles, and scls accordingly are long, while ddt, flet, and\\nscit are short his, hos, quds, quds are long, like the termi-\\nnations is, os, and as in declension. So also the ablatives\\nsingular hoc and hdc. The nominative hie and the neuter\\nhoc, on the other hand, although the vowel is naturally short,\\nare commonly used as long, because the ancient form was\\nhice, hoce. The abridged imperatives retain the quantity of\\nthe root, so that die and dice are long, while fdc and fer\\nare short.\\nNote. Ne, the interrogative particle, is always short, being attached to\\nother words as an enclitic, as in videsne. The conjunction ne (lest, that\\nnot) is long. (See 24. 1.)\\nB. Final Syllables in Words of Two or more Syllables.\\n25.] 1) Such as terminate in a Vowel.\\nA is short in nouns, except in the ablative singular of the\\nfirst declension and in the vocative of Greek proper names\\nin as, e. g. jEnea, Palla. A is long in verbs and indeclinable\\nwords, such as ama, frustra, erg a, anted, and posted (unless\\nit be separated into post ed), except ltd, quid, ejd. In the\\nindeclinable numerals, as triginta and quadraginta, the a is\\nsometimes long and sometimes short.\\nE is short, as in patre, curre, nempe but long in the\\nablative of the fifth declension and in the imperative of the", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0028.jp2"}, "29": {"fulltext": "LENGTH AND SHORTNESS OP SYLLABLES. 11\\nsecond conjugation. Adverbs in e formed from adjectives\\nof the second declension are likewise long, as docte, recti;\\nalso fere, ferme, and ohe (but bene and male are always\\nshort), and Greek words of the first declension terminating\\nin e, as Circe, Tempe.\\n26.] is long. It is short only in the vocative of\\nGreek words in is, e. g. Alexi, and in nisi, quasi, and cm,\\nwhen it is used as a dissyllable. The i is common or doubt-\\nv- \\\\j V v* \\\\s\\nful in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi and ubi in compounds we com-\\nmonly find ibidem and ubique, whereas in ubwis and ubinam\\nthe i is always short. In uti for w\u00c2\u00a3 the i is long, but short\\nin the compounds utinam and utique. u w\\nO is common in the present tense, as rc #o, carco, awdio,\\nand in the nominative of the third declension, as in sermo,\\nvirgo; the Greek words in o (to, Gen. ovg) however remain\\nlong in Latin, as Id, Dido. But o is long in the second\\ndeclension, as in lecto, and in adverbs formed from nouns\\nand pronouns by means of this termination, e. g.falso, merito,\\npaulo, eo, quo, and also ergo, iccircb, quando and retro.\\nThe adverbs modo (with all its compounds), cito, illico, and\\nimmo, and also cedo (in the sense of die or da), ego, duo,\\nand octo are always short, whereas ambo is generally long.\\nU is always long, as in diu, vultu, cornu,\\nY in Greek words is always short.\\n2) Suck as terminate in a Consonant.\\n27.] All final syllables ending in a consonant are short,\\nand special rules are required only for those ending in the\\nsibilant s\\nNote. Greek words retain their original quantity in their final syl-\\nlables, except those in or, as Hector, Nestor, which are short in Latin,\\nalthough in Greek they end in ap.\\n28.] As is long in Latin words, with the exception of\\nanas, andtis but the Greek nominatives in as, which make\\ntheir genitives in acoc and in Latin in adis, such as llias,\\nPallas, and the Greek accusatives plural oij the third declen-\\nsion, are always short, as in herods.\\nEs is long, e. g. ames, leges, audies, patres. But Latin\\nnominatives in es, which increase in the genitive, and have\\ntheir penultima short, are themselves short e. g. miles,\\nmilitis except abies, aries, paries, Ceres, and the compounds\\nB 6", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0029.jp2"}, "30": {"fulltext": "12 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nof pes. The preposition penes and the second person of the\\nverb sum, es, have the es short but the es (for edis) from\\nedo is long.\\n29.] Is is generally short, but long in all the cases of\\nthe plural, as armls, vobls; and also in the second person\\nsingular of verbs whose second plural is Itis, that is, in the\\nfourth conjugation, and in possls, veils, noils, malls, and vis\\n(thou wilt), with its compounds, mavis, quivls, quamvls.\\nOs is long, as in nepbs, honbs, vivos, nos it is short only\\nin compos and impos, and in Greek words in og, e. g. Delos.\\nUs is short in verbs and nouns except monosyllables, but\\nlong in the genitive singular, in the nominative, accusative,\\nand vocative plural of the fourth declension, and in the\\nnominatives of the third, which have u in the genitive, as\\nvirtus, utis paliis, udis.\\nYs in Greek words is short, as Halps, chlamys.\\nso.] 5. Syllables (as was remarked in the beginning\\nof this Chapter) may become long by their vowel being fol-\\nlowed by two or more consonants, that is, by their position:\\nx and z are accounted as two consonants. Aposition may be\\nformed in three ways: 1. When a syllable ends in two or\\nthree consonants, as in est, vult, mens, rex. 2. When the\\nfirst syllable ends in a consonant and the second begins with\\none, as in vel-le, ar-ma, vul-tis, or in two distinct words, as\\nin silvis, et populus. By these two kinds of position, a\\nsyllable is always lengthened, although its vowel may be\\nnaturally short. 3. When the first syllable ends in a vowel,\\nand the one following begins with two consonants, or a\\ndouble consonant (x and z), we must distinguish as to\\nwhether the position occurs within a word or between two\\nwords. Within a word a syllable ending in a short vowel is\\nregularly made long, as in a-ptus, fa-ctus, a-xis when., how-\\never, the first consonant is a mute and the second a liquid\\n(which is called positio debilis), they make the vowel, for poetical\\npurposes, only common. Thus, we may pronounce either\\ncerebrum, volucris, lugubris, mediocris, integri, or cerebrum,\\nvolucris, lugubris, mediocris, integri. But between two\\nwords the short vowel before a muta cum liquida is rarely\\nlengthened.\\nQu is not accounted as two consonants, for u is not a true\\nconsonant, though we usually pronounce it as such. But j\\nalone is sufficient to make position within a word e. g.,\\nmajor, ejus, Troja.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0030.jp2"}, "31": {"fulltext": "ACCENT OF WOKDS. 13\\nCHAP. IV.\\nOF THE ACCENT OF WORDS.\\n32.] 1. It is a general rule that every word has an\\naccent on one particular syllable. This accent is twofold,\\neither the circumflex A or the acute for what is called\\nthe grave in Greek means only the absence of either accent.\\nSome words, however, have no accent, viz., the enclitics ne,\\nque, ve, ce, which never appear by themselves, but are\\nattached to other words. Prepositions lose their accent when\\nthey precede the cases which they govern.\\n33.] 2. Monosyllables are pronounced with the cir-\\ncumflex, when their vowel is long by nature and not merely\\nby position, as in dos, mos, flos, jus, lux, spes, fons and\\nmons but when the vowel is naturally short, they are pro-\\nnounced with the acute, although the syllable may be long\\nby position e. g. drs, fax, dux,\\n3. Words of two syllables have the accent on the first,\\neither as circumflex, when the vowel of that syllable is\\nnaturally long, and that of the second one short or as acute,\\nwhen the vowel of the first syllable is short, and that of the\\nsecond long or when the vowel of the first as well as that\\nof the second is long e. g. Roma, musd, luce, juris but\\nhomo because both syllables are short deos, because the first\\nis short and the second long arte, because the first is long\\nonly by position doti, for although the vowel of the first is\\nnaturally long, yet that of the second is likewise long and\\ndrti, because both syllables are long.\\n4. Words of three syllables may have the accent either on\\nthe antepenultima or penultima the acute on the antepenul-\\ntima, when the penultima is short, as in caedere, pergere,\\nhomines the accented syllable itself may be long or short.\\nThe circumflex is placed on the penultima on the conditions\\nbefore-mentioned, as in amasse, Romanus and the acute\\nwhen those conditions do not exist, and yet the penultima is\\nlong, as in Romdnis, Metellus. No word can have the\\naccent further back than the antepenultima, so that we must\\npronounce Constantinopolis, solicitudinibus.\\n34.] o. Words of two or more syllables never have\\nthe accent on the last.", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0031.jp2"}, "32": {"fulltext": "14 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n35.] 6. These rules concerning accentuation ought to\\nlead us to accustom ourselves to distinguish accent from\\nquantity to read, for example, homines and not homines,\\nand to distinguish in our pronunciation lego (I read) from\\nlego (I despatch) and in like manner mdlus (bad) from mains\\n(an apple tree), palus, udis (a marsh), from palus, i (a post),\\nand po pulus (the people) from po pulus (a poplar). In our\\nown language accent and quantity coincide, but it is very\\nwrong to apply this peculiarity to a language to which it is\\nforeign.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0032.jp2"}, "33": {"fulltext": "15\\nTHE ACCIDENCE.\\nCHAP. V.\\nDIVISION OF WORDS ACCORDING TO THEIR SIGNIFICATION.\\n36.] The words of every language are either nouns, verbs,\\nor particles.\\nA noun serves to denote an object or a quality of an ob-\\nject, and may accordingly be either a substantive, as domus\\n(a house), a pronoun, as ego (I), or an adjective, as parvus\\n(small). Nouns are declined to indicate different relations.\\nA verb expresses an action or condition which is ascribed\\nto a person or a thing, as scribo, ire, dormire, amari. A\\nverb is conjugated in order to indicate the different modes\\nin which an action or condition is ascribed to a person or a\\nthing.\\nParticles are those parts of speech, which are neither de-\\nclined nor conjugated, and which are neither nouns nor verbs.\\nThey are divided into the following classes. 1) Adverbs\\nexpress the circumstances of an action or condition, as scribit\\nbene, he writes well diu dormit, he sleeps long. 2) Prepo-\\nsitions express, either directly or indirectly, the relations of\\npersons or things to one another or to actions and conditions\\nas, amor meus erga te, my love towards thee eo ad te, I go\\nto thee. 3) Conjunctions express the connexion between\\nthings, actions, or propositions as ego et tu clamavit, sed\\npater non audivit 4) Interjections are the expressions of\\nemotion by a single word as ah, ohe, vae.\\nThese are the eight parts of speech in Latin all of them\\noccur in the following hexameter\\nVae tibi ridenti, quia mox post gaudia flebis.", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0033.jp2"}, "34": {"fulltext": "16 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP. VI\\nNOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. GENERAL RULES OF GENDER.\\n37.] Nouns substantive are either proper, i. e. the names\\nof one particular man or thing, or common, i. e. such as de-\\nnote a class of objects.\\nAll nouns have one of three genders masculine, feminine,\\nor neuter.\\nThe gender of substantives is determined partly by their termination,\\nand partly by their signification. In reference to the latter point the\\nfollowing general rules must be observed.\\n1. The names of men and of male beings, of rivers, winds,\\nand months, are of the masculine gender.\\n39.] 2. The names of women, female beings, and most\\ntrees, towns, countries, and islands, are feminine.\\nExceptions. The names of trees and shrubs in er, of the third declen-\\nsion, are neuter as siler, cicer, papaver. Masculine are oleaster and\\npinaster, which belong to the second, and styrax which belongs to the\\nthird declension: also many shrubs and smaller plants in us, genit. i;\\ne. g. amarantus, asparagus, calamus, dumus, helleborus, intubus, rhamnus,\\nand spinus.\\nOf the names of towns, the following are masculine 1) All plurals in\\ni, as Argi, Delphi, Veji 2) Five in o: Hippo (with the surname regius),\\nNarbo Marcius, Frusino, Sulmo and Croto. 3) Tunes, etis, and Canopus.\\nThe following are neuter 1 Those ending in urn, and the Greek names\\nin on, as Tusculum, Ilion 2) The plurals in a, genit. orum, e. g. Susa,\\nEcbatana, Leuctra. 3) Those ending in e and ur, which follow the third\\ndeclension, as Caere, Tergeste, Anxur, and Tibur Tuder is likewise neuter\\n4) The indeclinable names in i and y, as Illiturgi, Asty, and some bar-\\nbarous names, the declension of which is defective. Argos, as a neuter,\\noccurs only in the nominative and accusative, otherwise Argi, orum, is\\nused. The poets occasionally use some of these names, according to the\\ngeneral rule, as feminines, the word urbs being understood this is the\\ncase especially with Praeneste.\\nNames of countries in urn and plurals in a are neuter, as Latium,\\nBactra; the names Bosporus, Pontus, and Hellespontus, are masculine.\\nThe names of islands ending in um and the Egyptian Delta are neuter.\\nMost names of precious stones are feminine as in Greek but beryllus,\\ncarbunculus, opdlus and smaragdus are masculine.\\n40.] 3. There are many names of persons, which are\\ncommon to both sexes, as they denote an occupation or quality\\nwhich may belong either to a man or a woman. Such\\nwords are called common (communid). Those found in Latin", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0034.jp2"}, "35": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 17\\nwith two genders are contained in the following hexameter\\nlines\\nAntistes, rates, adolescens, auctor et augur,\\nDux, judex, index, testis, cum cive sacerdos,\\nMunicipi adde parens, patrueli affinis et heres,\\nArtifici conjux atque incola, miles et hostis,\\nPar juvenis, martyr, comes, infans, obses et hospes,\\nInterpres, praesul, custos, vindexque, satelles.\\nAntistes, president. Heres, edis, heir.\\nVates, seer, prophet. Artifex, artist.\\nAdolescens, a youth. Conjux, husband or wife.\\nAuctor, author. Incola, inhabitant.\\nAugur, augur. Miles, soldier.\\nDux, leader, commander. Hostis, enemy.\\nJudex, judge. Par, colleague, partner.\\nIndex, indicator, denouncer. Juvenis, a young man or wo-\\nTestis, witness. man.\\nCivis, citizen. Martyr, martyr.\\nSacerdos, priest, priestess. Comes, companion.\\nMuniceps, a citizen of a mu- Infans, infant, child.\\nnicipal town. Obses, hostage.\\nParens, parent in the plural, Interpres, interpreter.\\nhowever, it is only mascu- Praesul, president.\\nline. Custos, guard.\\nPatruelis, aunt or uncle. Vindex, avenger.\\nAffinis, relation. Satelles, satellite.\\n41.] 4. Substantiva mobilia are those substantives\\nwhich receive different terminations for the masculine\\nand feminine genders. The termination for the feminine\\nis always a or trix, and the latter occurs in those cases in\\nwhich the masculine ends in tor, as in victor, vie trix prae-\\nceptor, praeceptrix inventor, inventrix. (See 236.) The\\nfeminine is indicated by a when the masculine ends in us or\\ner, or any other termination, e. g. coquus, coqua puer,\\npuera magister, magistra rex, regina caupo, copa tibi-\\ncen, tibicina.\\n42.] o. Some names of animals have special terminations\\nto distinguish the two sexes cervus, cerva equus, equa\\ngallus, gallina juvencus, juvenca lupus, lupa leo, lea and\\nleaena vitulus, vitula ursus, ursa. In some cases the\\nwords are altogether different, as in taurus, vacca, a bull\\nand cow aries, ovis, ram and sheep hoedus, capella.", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0035.jp2"}, "36": {"fulltext": "18 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nMost other names of animals are common (epicoend) that\\nis, they have only one grammatical gender which comprises\\nboth sexes, e. g. passer, anser, corvus, cards are masculine\\nand aguila, felis, anas, vulpes are feminine, though they may\\ndenote animals of either sex. If the sex of the particular\\nanimal is to be stated, the word mas or femina are added to\\nthe name; as, anas mas, anas femina, femina piscis. Instead\\nof mas we may also use masculus or mascula, e. g, vulpes\\nmascula, a male fox pavo masculus, a male peacock.\\nSome of these nouns however, in which the difference of\\nsex is more frequently noticed, are used as real common\\nnouns 40.), so that they are masculine when the male\\nanimal, and feminine when the female animal, is to be par^\\nticularly specified. Of this kind are bos, canis, elephantus,\\nlepus, mus, which are masculine when the difference of sex\\nis not noticed but feminine when the female .is designated.\\nThus we generally find, e. g., elephanti prudentissimi haben-\\ntur, lepores timidi sunt; but at the same time elephantus\\ngravida, lepus fecunda.\\nThe following nouns are sometimes masculine and some-\\ntimes feminine, without regard to difference of sex anguis\\nand serpens, a serpent dama, fallow-deer talpa, a mole\\nalso sus, a pig and tigris, tiger but sus is commonly femi-\\nnine, while tigris is commonly masculine. Others are of un-\\ncertain gender, in as far as they have both a masculine and\\na feminine form, which, however, are used indiscriminately\\nand without regard to sex. Thus we have the feminine forms\\ncolubra, lacerta, luscinia, and simia along with the mascu-\\nlines coluber, lacertus, luscinius, and simius, without simia,\\nfor instance, having any reference whatever to a female\\nmonkey.\\n43 *3 6. The following are neuter. All indeclinable\\nsubstantives, as gummi, pascha, sinapi, and pondo which is\\nused as an indeclinable noun in the sense of pound the\\nnames of the letters of the alphabet, as c triste, o longum,\\nc, and all words and expressions which, without being sub-\\nstantives, are conceived and used as such, or quoted merely\\nas words e. g. ultimum vale, scire tuum nihil est, hoc ipsum\\ndiu mihi molestum est, lacrimas hoc mihi paene movet, where\\nthe words diu and paene are quoted from the sayings of\\nanother person, and it is said that the very word diu or\\npaene is painful.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0036.jp2"}, "37": {"fulltext": "NUMBER, CASE, AND DECLENSION. 19\\nCHAP. VII.\\nNUMBER, CASE, AND DECLENSION.\\n44.] The Latin language distinguishes, in nouns and\\nverbs, the singular and plural (numerus singularis and plu-\\nralis) by particular forms it has also different forms to dis-\\ntinguish six different cases (casus) in the relations and con-\\nnections of nouns. The ordinary names of these cases are\\nnominative, genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, and ablative.\\nThe different forms of these cases are seen in the terminations\\nwhich are annexed to the crude form of a word. Declension\\nis the deriving of these different forms, both in the singular\\nand plural, from one another, the nominative forming the\\nstarting point. The nominative and vocative are called\\ncasus recti, and the others casus obliqui.\\nThere are five declensions distinguished by the termina-\\ntion of the genitive singular, which ends\\n12 3 4 5\\nae I is us e i\\nAll declensions have the following points in common\\n1. In the second, third, and fourth declensions there are\\nneuters which have three cases alike, viz. nominative, accu-\\nsative, and vocative.\\n2. The vocative is like the nominative, except in the\\nsingular of the second declension and in some Greek words\\nin the first and third.\\n3. Where no exception arises from neuters, the accusative\\nsingular ends in m.\\n12 3 4 5\\nam um em um em\\n4. The genitive plural ends in urn.\\n12 3 4 5\\ndrum drum um uum erum\\n5. The dative plural is in all declensions like the ablative\\nplural.\\n12 3 4 5\\nis Is thus xbus (ubus) ebus", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0037.jp2"}, "38": {"fulltext": "20\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nThe following table contains the terminations of all the\\nfive declensions:\\nNom. a (e, as,\\nes)\\nGen. ae (es)\\nDat. ae\\nAce. am (en)\\nVoc. like nom.\\nAbl. a (e)\\nus,\\nneut.\\ner, um\\ni\\no\\num\\ne, er,\\no\\num\\nneut.\\nNom.\\nae\\ni, a\\nGen.\\narum\\norum\\nDat.\\nis\\nis\\nAce.\\nas\\nos, a\\nVoc.\\nae\\ni, a\\nAbl.\\nis\\nis\\nSingular.\\na, e, o, c, I,\\nIt, I, S, V, Jb\\nis\\ni\\nem (im)\\nlike nom.\\ne(i)\\nPlural.\\nneut.\\nes, a (ia)\\num (ium)\\nibus\\nes, a (ia)\\nes, a (ia)\\nibus\\nneut.\\nus, u\\nus\\nui\\num, u\\nlike nom.\\nu\\nes.\\nei\\nel\\nem.\\nlike nom.\\ne.\\nneut.\\nus, ua\\nes.\\nuum\\nerum.\\nibus (ubus)\\nebus.\\nus, ua\\nes.\\nus, ua\\nes.\\nibus (ubus)\\nebus.\\nchap. vin.\\nFIRST DECLENSION.\\n45.] The first declension comprises all nouns which form\\nthe genitive singular in ae. The nominative of genuine\\nLatin words of this kind ends in a. Greek words in a, as\\nmusa, Medusa, Thalia, follow the example of the Latin\\nones. Some Greek words in e, as, and es have peculiar ter-\\nminations in some of their cases. (See Chap. IX.)\\nSingular.-\\nNom. vi-d, the way. Nom.\\nGen. vi-ae, of the way. Gen.\\nDat. vi-ae, to the way. Dat.\\nAce. vi-am, the way. Ace.\\nYoc. vi-d, O way Voc.\\nAbl. vi-d, from the way. Abl.\\nPlural.\\nvi-ae, the ways.\\nvi-arum, of the ways.\\nvi-is, to the ways.\\nvi-as, the ways.\\nvi-ae, O ways\\nvi-ls, from the ways.\\nIn like manner are declined, for example, the substantives barba, beard\\ncausa, cause cura, care epistola, letter fossa, ditch hora, hour mensa,\\ntable noverca, step-mother penna, feather porta, gate poena, com-\\npensation sagitta, arrow silva, wood stella, star uva, grape victoria,\\nvictory.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0038.jp2"}, "39": {"fulltext": "NOUNS OF THE FIRST DELCENSION. 21\\nCHAP. IX.\\nGREEK WORDS IN e, as, AND es.\\n46.] 1. In the dative singular and throughout the plural,\\nGreek words in e, as, and es do not differ from the regular\\ndeclension. In the other cases of the singular they are de-\\nclined in the following manner\\nas es.\\nae ae.\\nam (sometimes an) en.\\na e and a.\\na e\\nNote. Words of this kind in e are aloe, crambe, epitome, Circe, Danae;\\nin as Aeneas, Boreas, Gorgias, Midas, Messias, Satanas in es anagnostes,\\ncometes, dynastes, pyrites, sophistes, Anchises, Thersites, and patronymics,\\n(i. e. names of persons derived from their parents or ancestors, see\\n245) e. g, Aeneades, Alcldes, Pelldes, Priamides, Tydides,\\nGenerally speaking, however, the patronymics in 77s, genit. ov, are the\\nonly Greek words that follow the second declension and the majority of\\nproper names ending in es follow the third declension, as Alcibiades, MiU\\ntiades, Xerxes. But many of them form the accusative singular in en,\\nafter the first declension.\\nNom.\\nGen.\\ne\\nes\\nAce.\\nen\\nVoc.\\nAbl.\\ne\\ne\\nCHAP. X.\\nGENDER OF THE NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.\\n47.] Nouns in a and e are feminine, and those in as and\\nes (being chiefly names of men) are masculine.\\nNote. Nouns denoting male beings are of course masculine, though\\nthey end in a, as aurlga, coachman coUega, colleague nauta, sailor\\nparriclda, parricide poeta, poet scriba, scribe. Names of rivers\\nin a, such as Garumna, Trebia, Sequana, Himera, and Hadria (the\\nAdriatic) are masculine, according to the general rule. (See Chap. VI.)\\nThe three rivers Allia, Albula, and Matrona, however, are feminine.", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0039.jp2"}, "40": {"fulltext": "22\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP. XI.\\nSECOND DECLENSION.\\n48.] All nouns which form the genitive singular in a,\\nbelong to the second declension. The greater part of them\\nend in the nominative in us, the neuters in um some end in\\ner, and only one in ir, viz. vir with its compounds, to which we\\nmust add the proper name, Trevir. There is only one word\\nending in ur, viz. the adjective satur, satur a, saturum.\\nThe genitive of those in us and um is formed by changing\\nthese terminations into L The vocative of words in us ends\\nin e in all other cases the vocative is like the nominative.\\nSingular.\\nNom. gladi-us, the sword.\\nGen. gladi-i, of the sword.\\nDat. gladi-o, to the sword.\\nAce. gladi-um, the sword.\\nVoc. gladi-e, O sword\\nAbl. gladi-o, from the sword.\\nPlural.\\nNom. gladi-i, the swords.\\nGen. gladi-brum, of the\\nswords.\\nDat. gladi-is, to the swords.\\nAce. gladi-os, the swords.\\nVoc. gladi-i, O swords\\nAbl. gladi-is, from the swords.\\nThe neuters in um are declined in the same way but in\\nthe plural they have the termination a, and the nominative,\\naccusative, and vocative are alike in the singular as well as\\nin the plural.\\nPlural.\\nNom. scamn-a, the benches.\\nGen. scamn-orum, of the\\nbenches.\\nDat. scamn-is, to the benches.\\nAce. scamn-a, the benches.\\nVoc. scamn-a, O benches\\nAbl. scamn-is, from the\\nbenches.\\nSingular.\\nNom. scamn-um, the bench.\\nGen. scamn-t, of the bench.\\nDat. scamn-o, to the bench.\\nAce. scamn-um, the bench.\\nVoc. scamn-um, O bench!\\nAbl. scamn-o, from the\\nbench.\\nVir and its compounds, as well as satur, simply add the\\nterminations of the different cases to the nominative.\\nSome of the words in er are likewise declined by merely\\nadding the terminations to the nominative, as puer, puer-i,\\npuer-d, puer-um, puer-orum, puer-is, puer-os others reject", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0040.jp2"}, "41": {"fulltext": "SECOND DECLENSION. 23\\nthe short e in the oblique cases, as liber (a book), libr-i,\\nlibr-o, libr-um, c. Those which retain the e are not very\\nnumerous, viz. adulter, gener, puer, socer, vesper, Liber (the\\ngod Bacchus), and liberi (the children, only in the plural)\\nthe adjectives asper, lacer, liber (free), miser, prosper, and\\ntener. To these we must add the compounds of ferre and\\ngerere, as Lucifer, armiger, and the words presbyter, Iber,\\nand Celtiber (plural Celtiberi), The adjective dexter has\\nboth forms, dextera and dextra, dexterum and dextrum.\\n49 1* The genitive of nouns in ius and ium, in the\\nbest age of the Latin language, was not ii, but i, as fill,\\nTulli, mancipi.\\n2. The following nine adjectives or adjective pronouns,\\nunus, solus, totus, ullus, uter, neuter, alter, nullus, and alius,\\ntogether with their compounds, uterque, utervis, uterlibet,\\nutercunque, and alteruter, form the genitive in all their\\nthree genders in ius, and the dative in i in addition to\\nwhich uter and neuter eject the e preceding the r. The i of\\nthis genitive is long in prose, but in verse it is sometimes\\nmade short. Alterius alone has the i short both in prose\\nand generally also in verse. Hence unus, Gen. unlus, Dat.\\nuni alius, Gen. alius, Dat. alii; uter, Gen. utrius, Dat. utru\\n50 3. The vocative of proper names in his ends in i\\ninstead of ie, e. g. Antoni, Merciiri, Terenti, Tulli, Virgili,\\nIn like manner the proper names in jus, being sometimes\\nsoftened down into ius, make the vocative in a simple i, as\\nGai, Pompei, But all common nouns and adjectives regu-\\nlarly form their vocative in ie, as fluvie, gladie, pie, even\\nwhen such adjectives have become proper names, as Pius.\\nFilius and genius, however, make their vocative fili, geni,\\nand meus (though not mea or meum) makes mi, Deus in\\nthe vocative is like the nominative, as deus mi deus\\n51 4. The genitive plural of some words, especially\\nthose which denote money, measure, and weight, is com-\\nmonly um instead of orum, particularly nummum, sestertium,\\ndenarium, medimnum, modium, jugerum, talentum. So also\\ndeum and liberum, instead of deorum and liberorum,\\n5. Deus has three forms in the nom. dat. and ablat. plur.,\\nviz. dei, dii, and di, and deis, diis, and dis.\\nThe following words may serve as exercises of declension Annus,\\nyear corcus, raven hortus, garden lectus, bed medicus, physician\\nmorbus, illness nuntius, messenger populus, people rivus, brook\\ntaurus, bull ventus, wind. Neuters in um Astrum, star helium, war;", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0041.jp2"}, "42": {"fulltext": "24 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ncollum, neck dolium, cask donum, present membrum, limb negotium,\\nbusiness ovum, egg poculum, cup proelium, battle sepulcrum,\\nsepulchre signum, sign tergum, back vinculum, fetter. Those in er,\\ngenit. eri, have been mentioned above. The following are the most com-\\nmon among those which reject the e before the r: Ager, field; aper,\\nboar arbiter, arbitrator auster, south wind cancer, cancer or crab\\ncoluber, snake; culter, knife; faber, workman; liber, book; magister,\\nteacher minister, servant. To these must be added the proper names in\\ner, e. g. Alexander, gen. Alexandri. The adjectives which reject the e are\\naeger, ater, creber, glaber, macer, niger, piger, impiger, pulcher, ruber, sacer,\\nscaber, sinister, taeter, vafer.\\nCHAP. XII.\\nGREEK WORDS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION\\n52.] Greek words in os and neuters in ov, which make ov in the\\ngenitive, are commonly Latinized in the nominative by the terminations\\nus and um, such as the common nouns taurus, antrum, theatrum, and the\\nproper names Homerus, Pyrrhus, Codrus or by the termination er, e. g.\\nAlexander, Maeander, Teucer. Others admit of both terminations in the\\nnominative, as Delos, Paros, and Delus, Parus Ilion and Ilium. The\\ngenitive plural in on instead oiorum occurs in the titles of books, such as\\nBucolicon, Georgicon.\\nGreek words in evs such as Orpheus, Idomeneus, Phalereus, were pro-\\nnounced in Latin sometimes eus as one syllable, and sometimes eus. The\\nbest way is to make them follow entirely the second Latin Declension, as\\nOrphe i, Orpheo, Orpheum, with the exception of the vocative, which (ac-\\ncording to the Greek third declension) ends in eu.\\nCHAP. XIII.\\nGENDER OF THE NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.\\n53.] 1. Nouns in us, er, and ir are masculine those in\\num and the Greek nouns in on are neuter.\\n2. Of those in us however the following are feminine the\\nnames of plants and precious stones, as well as those of\\ntowns, countries, and islands, with a few exceptions. (See\\nabove, 39.) It must be observed, that in many cases", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0042.jp2"}, "43": {"fulltext": "THIRD DECLENSION. GENITIVE. 25\\nwhere the name of a tree ends in us fern., there is a form in\\num denoting the fruit of the tree, e. g. cerasus, a cherry tree\\ncerasum, a cherry malus, malum morus, morum pirus,\\npirum prunus, prunum pomns, pomum but ficus signifies\\nboth the tree and the fruit. There are only four other genuine\\nLatin words in us which are feminine, viz. alvus, humus, van-\\nnus, and colus, which however is sometimes declined after the\\nfourth declension, gen. us. Pampinus, a branch of a vine, is\\nrarely feminine, but commonly masculine. Virus (juice or poi-\\nson) and pelagus (to irekayoQ, the sea) are neuter. Vulgus (the\\npeople) is sometimes masculine, but more frequently neuter.\\n54.] Note. With regard to the numerous Greek feminines in us\\n(or os), which have been adopted into the Latin language, we notice\\nespecially the compounds of rj 080s exodus, methodus, periodus, and\\nsynodus, and the words biblus, papyrus, dialectus, diphthongus, paragrdphus\\ndiametrus and perimetrus.\\nCHAP. XIV.\\nTHIRD DECLENSION. GENITIVE.\\n55.] Nouns of the third declension form their genitive\\nin is.\\nThe nominative has a great variety of terminations, for sometimes\\nthere is no particular ending, and the nominative itself is the crude form,\\nsuch as it usually appears after the separation of the termination of the\\ngenitive frequently however the nominative has a special ending. 1.) The\\nformer is, generally speaking, the case with those words the crude form\\nof which ends in I or r, so that the nominative ends in the same con-\\nsonants, and the genitive is formed by simply adding is; e. g. sol, consul,\\ncalcar, agger, auctor, dolor, murmur. Words like pater and imber, the\\ncrude form of which appears in the genitive and ends in r with a con-\\nsonant before it, as patr-is, imbr-is, admit of a double explanation: either\\nthe nominative was increased for the purpose of facilitating the pro-\\nnunciation, or the genitive rejected the short e (patris for pateris) the\\nformer however is the more probable supposition. In some words the\\nnominative has s instead of r, as flos, gen. Jlor-is tellus, tellur-is in\\naddition to which the vowel sometimes undergoes a change, as in corpus,\\ncorpor-is onus, oner-is. When the crude form ends in n with a vowel\\nbefore it, the formation of the nominative is likewise accompanied by\\nchanges on throws off the n, and in becomes en or is changed into o.\\nThus leo is made from leon (leon-is), carmen from carmin (carmin-is), and\\nvirgo from virgin (virgin-is). Only when the genitive ends in enis, the\\nnominative retains en, as in lien-is, Ken. 2) The particular termination\\nwhich the nominative receives in other cases is e for neuters, as mar-is,\\nmar-e, and s or x which arises out of s, for masculines and feminines.\\nC", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0043.jp2"}, "44": {"fulltext": "26 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nThis s is sometimes added to the final consonant of the crude form with-\\nout any change, as in urb-is, urb-s due-is, dux (dues); leg-is, lex (legs);\\nwhen the crude form ends in d or t, these consonants are dropped before\\nthe s; e. g. frond-is, frons mont-is, mons aetdt-is, aetds seget-is, seges\\nin addition to this the vowel i also is sometimes changed into e, as in\\nmilit-is, miles; judic-is, judex. In all these cases where the nominative\\nis formed by. the addition of an 5 to the final consonant of the crude form,\\nthe nominative has one syllable less than the genitive, or in other words,\\nthe s assumes an e or I before it, and then the nominative has the same\\nnumber of syllables as the genitive, or in case the nominative assumes 1,\\nboth cases are quite the same e. g. nub-es, civ-is, pan-is.\\nThese are the most essential points in the formation of the nominative\\nin the third declension.\\nWe shall take the nominative, as is the usual practice, as\\nthe case given, and shall point out in what way the genitive\\nis formed from it.\\n56.] 1. The nouns in a, which are neuters of Greek\\norigin, make their genitive in dtis, as po ema, poematis.\\n2. Those in e change e into is, as mare, maris.\\n3. The nouns in i and y are Greek neuters. Some of\\nthem are indeclinable, as gummi, and others have the regu-\\nlar genitive in is, as sinapi, sinapis misy, misyis and misys\\nor misyos. The compounds of meli (honey) alone make\\ntheir genitive according to the Greek in itis, as melomeli,\\nmelomelitis oxymeli, oxymelitis.\\n4. Those in o (common) add nis to form the genitive,\\nsometimes only lengthening the o, and sometimes changing it\\ninto 1. Of the former kind (genit. onis) are car bo, latro, leo,\\nligo, pavo, praedo, sermo; and all those ending in io, as actio,\\ndictio, pugio. Of the latter kind (genit. mis) are all abstract\\nnouns in do, as consuetudo, mis most nouns in go, as imago,\\nvirgo, origo and a few others, as cardo, hirundo, turbo,\\nhomo, nemo. Caro has car nis. The names of nations in\\no have this vowel mostly short, as Macedones, Senones,\\nSaxones it is long in Lacones and a few others.\\n5. The only nouns ending in c are alec, gen. alecis and\\nlac, gen. lactis.\\n6. Nouns ending in I form the genitive by merely adding\\nis, such as sol, sal, consul, pugil, animal. Mel has mellis,\\nand plur. mella fel has fellis, but has no plural.\\n7. Those in en (which are all neuters, with the exception\\nof pecten, a comb,) make mis, as carmen, fiumen, lumen,\\nnomen. Those in en retain the long e and have enis but\\nthere are only two genuine Latin words of this kind, ren and\\nlien for lichen, splen, and attagen are of Greek origin.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0044.jp2"}, "45": {"fulltext": "THIRD DECLENSION. GENITIVE. 27\\nGreek words in an, en, in, fin, and on follow the Greek\\nrules in regard to the length or shortness of the vowel and\\nalso in regard to the insertion of a t: Cimon, Cimbnis\\nXenophon, Xenophontis. It is, however, to be observed\\nthat most Greek words in \u00c2\u00abv, tovog have in Latin the nomina-\\ntive o e. g. Laco, Plato, Zeno. The name Apollo is com-\\npletely Latinized, and makes the genitive Apollinis.\\n57# 8. Those ending in r must be distinguished\\naccording to the vowel which precedes it they may end in\\nar, er, yr, or, or ur.\\na) Those in ar have sometimes arts, as in calcar, pulvinar,\\ntorcular and sometimes aris, as jubar, nectar, lar (plur.\\nlares), par and its compounds (e. g. impar, imparls), and the\\nproper names Caesar, Hamilcar. But far makes farris,\\nand hepar, hepatis.\\nb) Latin words in er sometimes make eris, as mulier,\\nmulieris, career, vomer; and sometimes they drop the short\\ne, as, for instance, all those ending in ter (e. g. venter, uter,\\npater), with the exception of later, and the words imber,\\nSeptember, October, November, December. Iter makes its\\ngenit. (from a different nominat.) itineris. Juppiter {JovV\\npater) makes the genitive Jovis. Greek words in er follow\\nthe rules of the Greek language, whence we say crater, eris;\\naer, aeris. Ver (the spring), gen. veris, originally belonged\\nto the same class.\\nc) Nouns ending in yr are Greek, and follow the rules of\\nthe Greek grammar martyr, martyris.\\nd) Those in or have oris, as amor, error, soror, uxor;\\nbut arbor, the three neuters ador, aequor, marmor, and the\\nadjective memor, have oris. Cor has cordis, and so also\\nin the compound adjectives concors, discors, misericors.\\nGreek proper names, such as Hector, Nestor, and others,\\nhave oris, as in Greek.\\ne) Those in nr have uris, e. g. fulgur, murmur, sulphur,\\nvultur, and the adject, cicur. Fur (a thief) alone has Juris\\nand the four neuters, ebur, femur, jecur, and robur have oris,\\nas eboris, roboris. Jecur has, besides jecoris, also the forms\\njecinoris, jocinoris, and jocineris.\\n58 p- ^ou 118 ending in s are very numerous they\\nmay terminate in as, es, is, os, us, aus or in s with a con-\\nsonant preceding it.\\na) Those in as form their genitive in atis, as aetas, aetatis.\\nAnas alone has anatis mas has maris; vas (a surety),\\nc 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0045.jp2"}, "46": {"fulltext": "28 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nvddis vas (a vessel), vasis, and as, assis. The Greek words\\nvary according to their gender the masculines make antis,\\nthe feminines ddis, and the neuters dtis.\\nb) Those ending in es must be divided into two classes.\\nThose belonging to the first increase in the genitive, the\\nletters d or t, which were dropped in the nominative, being\\nrestored to their place, and their genit. termination is either\\nitis, etis, etis, or Mis, edis, edis.\\nThe genitive in itis occurs in most of them, as in antistes,\\ncomes, eques, hospes, miles, pedes, satelles, caespes, fames,\\ngurges, limes, merges, palmes, stipes, and trames, together\\nwith the adjectives ales, codes, dives, sospes, and super stes.\\nThe following make their genitive in etis abies, aries,\\nparies, interpres, seges, teges, and the adjectives hebes, in-\\ndiges, praepes, and teres.\\nThe genit. in etis occurs in the Greek words lebes, tapes,\\nMagnes; in the words quies, inquies, requies, and the adjec-\\ntive locuples.\\nThose which make idis are obses, praeses, and the adject.\\ndeses and reses.\\nThe genitive in edis occurs in pes, pedis, and its compounds,\\ne. g. the plural compedes. Heres and merces, lastly, make\\ntheir genitive in edis.\\nThe following words must be remembered separately: bes,\\nbessis Ceres, Cereris pubes, and impubes, puberis and im-\\npuberis.\\nThe second class of words in es change the es of the nomi-\\nnative into is, without increase, such as caedes, clades, fames,\\nnubes, rupes it must also be observed, that several words\\nbelonging to this class vary in the termination of the nomi-\\nnative between es and is, so that along with feles, vulpcs,\\nvehes, aedes, we also have vulpis, vehis, aedis.\\nc) Most words in is form their genitive in is, without any\\nincrease, as avis, civis, panis, piscis, and a great many others,\\ntogether with the adjectives in is, neut. e. Others increase by\\none syllable, and make their genitive in Mis, Itis or eris Mis\\noccurs in cassis, cuspis, lapis, and in the Greek words aegis\\nand pyramis itis occurs only in lis, Quiris, and Samnis,\\nplur. Quirites, Samnites and eris only in cir^s, cucumis,\\nand pulvis, gen. pulveris, cucumeris, and cineris. Glis has\\ngllris and sanguis has sanguinis (but the compound exsan*\\nguis remains in the genit. exsanguis) semis, being a com-\\npound of as, makes semissis.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0046.jp2"}, "47": {"fulltext": "THIRD DECLENSION. GENITIVE. 29\\nGreek words which have the genit. in loq or eojq form\\ntheir genit. in Latin in is, without increase but if their\\ngenit. is idog, they increase in Latin and have idis. (See\\n\u00c2\u00a762.)\\n59.] d) Nouns in os sometimes have otis, as cos, dos,\\nnepos, sacerdos, and sometimes oris, like os (the mouth), fios,\\nglos, mos, ros, and in like manner honos, and lepos, the more\\ncommon forms for honor and lepor. Custos makes custodis;\\nos (bone), ossis bos, bovis. The adjectives compos and\\nimpos have potis.\\ne) Of the words in us, the feminines in us make their\\ngenitive in utis, as virtus, virtutis or iidis, as the three\\nwords incus, palus, and subscus. Tellus alone has telluris,\\nand Venus, Veneris. The neuters in us have sometimes\\neris, viz. foedus, funus, genus, latus, munus, olus, onus, opus,\\npondus, scelus, sidus, ulcus, vulnus and sometimes oris, as\\ncorpus, decus, dedecus, f acinus, fenus, frigus, litus, nemus,\\npectus, pecus (which in another sense has pecudis), pignus,\\nstercus, tempus, and the common noun lepus, leporis, a hare.\\nAll monosyllables which have a long u, form their genitive\\nin uris, as crus, jus, pus, rus, tus, and mus. Grus and sus\\nhave gruis, suis the adjective vetus has veteris, and inter-\\ncus, intercutis.\\nf) Greek words in ys make the genitive yis, contracted\\nys, or altogether in the Greek form yos. Some few, as\\nchlamys, have ydis.\\ng) The only nouns ending in aes are aes, aeris, and praes,\\npraedis.\\nh) There are only two words in aus, viz. laus and fraus,\\nof which the genitives are laudis, fraudis.\\ni) Among the nouns ending in s preceded by a consonant,\\nthose in Is (except puis), ns (consequently all participles in\\nns), and rs change the s into tis, e. g. fons, mons, pons, ars,\\npars, Mars fontis, partis, c. There are only a few, such\\nas frons (a branch), glans, juglans, and some others, which\\nmake dis frondis but frons (the forehead) makes fronds.\\nThe other words in s with a consonant before it, that is,\\nthose in bs, ps, and ms, form their genitive in bis, pis, ?nis,\\ne. g. urbs, urbis plebs, plebis stirps, stirpis hiems, hiemis,\\nwhich is the only word of this termination. Caelebs has\\ncaelibis the compounds of capio ending in ceps have tpis,\\nas princeps, particeps principis, participis. The compounds\\nc 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0047.jp2"}, "48": {"fulltext": "30 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nof caput, which likewise end in ceps, such as anceps, make\\ntheir genitive in cipitis, like caput, capitis.\\n10. The termination t occurs only in caput and its com-\\npounds, gen. capitis.\\n60.] 11. The genitive of words in x varies between\\ncis and gis, according as the x has arisen from cs or gs, which\\nmay be ascertained by the root of the word. The former is\\nmore common, and thus the following monosyllables with a\\nconsonant before the x make their genit. in cis arx, calx,\\nfalx, lanx, merx gis occurs only in the Greek words pha-\\nlanx, sphinx, and syrinx.\\nBut when the x is preceded by a vowel, it must be ascer-\\ntained whether this vowel remains unchanged, and whether\\nit is long or short. The Latin words in ax have acis, as pax,\\nfornax, and the adjectives, e. g. audax, efficax. Fax a lone\\nhas a short a, fads. Greek words too have mostly acis, as\\nthorax, Ajax, and only a few have acis, as corax, climax,\\nwhile the names of men in nax have nactis, such as Astya-\\nnax, Demonax. Words in ex generally make their genitive\\nin ids, as judex, artifex, supplex but egis occurs in rex and\\nlex, and egis in aquilex, grex ecis in nex, foenisex, and in\\nprecis (from prex which is not used) ecis in vervex, Myi*~\\nmex. Remex has remigis senex, senis and supellex, supel-\\nlectilis. The words in ix sometimes make their genitive in\\nwis and sometimes in wis. Of the former kind are cervix,\\ncicatrix, comix, coturnix, lodix, perdix, phoenix, radix, vibix,\\nand all the words in trix denoting women, such as nutrix,\\nvictrix, and the adjectives felix, and pernix, and probably\\nalso appendix icis occurs in calix, choenix, coxendix, filix,\\nfornix, fulix, hystrix, larix, natrix, pix, salix, varix, and Ci-\\nlix. Nix has nivis, and strix, strigis. The words ending in\\nox have ocis, e. g. vox, vocis ferox, ferocis but two words\\nhave ocis, viz. Cappadox and the adjective praecox. JVox\\nhas noctis Allobrox, Allobrogis. The following words in\\nux form the genitive in ucis crux, dux, nux, and the adjec-\\ntive trux the u is long only in two words, viz. lux and Pollux,\\ngenit. lucis, Pollucis. Conjux (or conjunx) has conjugis, and\\nfrux (which, however, does not occur), frugis. There is only\\none word ending in aex, viz. faex, gen. faecis, and in aux\\nonly faux, gen.faucis. The words in yx are Greek, and vary\\nvery much in the formation of their genitive it may be yds\\n(Eryx), ycis (bombyx), ygis (Japyx, Phryx, Styx), ygis (coc-\\ncyx), and ychis (onyx).", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0048.jp2"}, "49": {"fulltext": "REMAINING CASES OF THIRD DECLENSION. 31\\nCHAP. XV.\\nTHE REMAINING CASES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n61.] All the remaining cases follow the genitive in regard\\nto the above mentioned changes. It should be remarked\\nthat any other of the oblique cases might have been chosen,\\ninstead of the genitive, for the purpose of showing the changes\\nin which all participate but we have followed the common\\npractice. The following is a tabular view of the termina-\\ntions.\\nSingular.\\nPlural.\\nNom.\\nNom.\\nes, neut. a (some id)\\nGen.\\nis Gen.\\num (some turn).\\nDat.\\ni Dat.\\nthus.\\nAce.\\nem (neut. like nom.). Ace.\\nlike nom.\\nYoc.\\nlike nom. Voc.\\nlike nom.\\nAbl.\\ne (some I Abl.\\nthus.\\nWe subjoin some examples of the complete declension, in\\nwhich it will be seen how the nominative either remains un-\\nchanged before the terminations, or undergoes a modifica-\\ntion. Many more examples may be taken from the preceding\\nChapter.\\nSingular.\\nNom. agger, the mound. Nom. pater, the father.\\nGen. agger-is, of the mound. Gen. patr-is, of the father.\\nDat. agger -i, to the mound. Dat. patr-i, to the father.\\nAce agger-em, the mound. Ace. patr-em, the father.\\nVoc. agger, O mound Voc. pater, O father\\nAbl. agger-e, from the mound. Abl. patr-e, from the father.\\nPlural.\\nNom. agger-es, the mounds. Nom. patr-es, the fathers.\\nGen. agger -um, of the mounds. Gen. patr-um, of the fathers.\\nDat. agger-ibus, to the mounds.Dat. patr-ibus, to the fathers.\\nAce. agger-es, the mounds. Ace. patr-es, the fathers.\\nVoc. agger-es, mounds Voc. patr-es, O fathers\\nA.#^er-^ws,fromthemounds.A. patr-ibus, from the fathers.\\nc 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0049.jp2"}, "50": {"fulltext": "62\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSingular.\\nNom\\nleo, the lion.\\nNom. homo, the man.\\nGen.\\nleon-is.\\nGen. homin-is.\\nDat.\\nleon-i.\\nDat. homin-i.\\nAce.\\nleon-em.\\nAce. homin-em.\\nVoc.\\nleo.\\nVoc. homo.\\nAbl.\\nleon-e.\\nAbl. homin-e.\\nPlural.\\nNom\\nleon-es, the lions.\\nNom. homin-es, the men.\\nGen.\\nleon-um.\\nGen. homin-um.\\nDat.\\nleon-ibus.\\nDat. homin-ibus.\\nAce.\\nleon-es.\\nAce. homin-es.\\nYoc.\\nleon-es.\\nVoc. homin-es.\\nAbl.\\nleon-ibus.\\nAbl. homin-ibus.\\nSingular.\\nNom.\\nmiles, the soldier.\\nNom. fios, the flower.\\nGen.\\nmilit-is.\\nGen. fior-is.\\nDat.\\nmilit-i.\\nDat. fior-i.\\nAce.\\nmilit-em.\\nAce. flor-em.\\nVoc.\\nmiles.\\nVoc. fios.\\nAbl.\\nmilit-e.\\nAbl. fior-e.\\nPlural.\\nNom.\\nmilit-es, the soldiers. Norn, fior-es, the flowers.\\nGen.\\nmilii-um,\\nGen. fior-um.\\nDat.\\nmilit-ibus.\\nDat. fior-ibus.\\nAce.\\nmilit-es.\\nAce. fior-es.\\nVoc.\\nmilit-es.\\nVoc. fior-es.\\nAbl.\\nmilit-ibus.\\nAbl. fior-ibus.\\nSingular.\\nNom.\\nlex, the law.\\nNom. dux, the commander.\\nGen.\\nleg-is.\\nGen. due-is.\\nDat.\\nleg-i.\\nDat. duc-i.\\nAce.\\nleg-em.\\nAce. due -em.\\nVoc.\\nlex.\\nVoc. dux.\\nAbl.\\nleg-e.\\nAbl. duc-e.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0050.jp2"}, "51": {"fulltext": "REMARKS ON THE SEPARATE CASES. 33\\nPlural.\\nNom. leg-es, the laws. Nom. duc-es, the commanders.\\nGen. leg-um. Gen. duc-um.\\nDat. leg-ibus. Dat. duc-ibus.\\nAce. leg-es. Ace. duc-es.\\nYoc. leg-es. Yoc. duc-es.\\nAbl. leg-ibus. Abl. duc-ibus.\\nNeuters.\\nSingular.\\nNom. fulgur, lightning. Nom. opws, the work.\\nGen. fidgur-is. Gen. oper-is.\\nDat. fugur-i. Dat. oper-i.\\nAce. fulgur. Ace. opws.\\nVoc. fulgur. Voc. opws.\\nAbl. fulgur-e. Abl. oper-e.\\nPlural.\\nNom. fulgur-a, lightnings. Nom. oper-a, the works.\\nGen. fulgur-um. Gen. oper-um.\\nDat. fulgur -ibus. Dat, oper-ibus.\\nAce. fulgur-a. Ace. oper-a.\\nVoc. fulgur-a. Voc. oper-a.\\nAbl. fulgur -ibus. Abl. oper-ibus.\\nRemarks on the separate Cases.\\n1. The genitive of some Greek proper names in es is\\ninstead of e. g. Themistocles Neocli filius, instead of\\n62.] 2. Many words in make the accusative singular\\nim instead of em, viz.\\na) All Greek nouns which form the accusative in that\\nlanguage in ii basim, poesim, paraphrasim, Charybdim,\\nNeopolim, Persepolim, Tanaim those which have in Greek\\nboth terminations iv and toa (i. e. the barytons in ig, gen. iCoq)\\nprefer in Latin the accusative in im, e. g. Memphim, Osirim,\\nPhalarim, Serapim, Zeuxim. But those which in Greek\\nend in lg, gen. idog (oxytona), have in Greek only Ida, and in\\nLatin only idem e. g. aegis, pyramis, tyrannis, Aeneis.\\nc 5", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0051.jp2"}, "52": {"fulltext": "34 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nb) Many proper names (not Greek) of rivers and towns in\\nis which do not increase in the genitive, make, according to\\nthe analogy of the Greek, the accusative in im instead of\\nem, e. g. Albim, Athesim, Baetim, Tiberim, Bilbilim, His-\\npalim.\\nc) The following Latin common nouns amussis, ravis,\\nsitis, tussis, and vis. In the following the termination em is\\nless common than im febris, pelvis, puppis, restis, turris,\\nand especially securis,\\n63.] 3. The ablative singular terminates in i instead\\nof e\\na) In all words which form their accusative in im instead\\nof em, with the exception of those Greek words which make\\nthe genitive in idis. Thus we have poesi, Neapoli, Tiberi,\\nand among Latin common nouns not only ravi, tussi, and vi,\\nbut febri, pelvi, puppi, turri, and securi. But restim has\\nmore commonly reste, and navem on the contrary more\\nusually navi than nave. Clave and clavi, and semente and\\nsementi, are equally in use.\\nb) In neuters in e, al, and ar, e. g. mari, vectigali, calcari,\\nc but far, f arris, and baccar, jubar, hepar, nectar, and\\nsal, which have a short a in the genitive, form the ablative\\nin e. Names of towns in e always make their ablative in e,\\nas Praeneste.\\nc) In adjectives and names of months ending in is and er\\nhence facili, celebri, celeri, Aprili, Septembri, and generally\\nalso in those substantives in is which are properly adjectives,\\ne. g. aequalis, affinis, annalis, bipennis, canalis, familiaris,\\ngentilis, popularis, sodalis, vocalis, triremis, and quadri-\\nremis. But juvenis always makes juvene, and aedilis com-\\nmonly aedile.\\n64.] 4. The ablative singular in i or e indiscriminately\\noccurs, generally speaking, in adjectives of one termination\\nand in comparatives, as prudens prudente, and prudenti\\nelegans, elegante and eleganti vetus, vetere and veteri\\nlocuples, locuplete and locupleti dives, divite and diviti\\nfelix, felice and felici major, majore and majori. But i\\nis preferable in adjectives of one termination, and e in com-\\nparatives.\\nNote. It should however be observed that the majority of adjectives in\\nes, viz. hospeSf sospes, deses, pubes, impubes, and superstes, pauper, senex, and\\nprincepsy form the ablative exclusively in e. It must further be observed,\\nthat the words in ans and ens, when used substantively, as infans, sapiens,", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0052.jp2"}, "53": {"fulltext": "REMARKS ON THE SEPARATE CASES. 35\\nand when they are real participles, always have e. Hence we regularly\\nfind it in the ablative absolute, e. g. Tarquinio regnante.\\n65] 5. The nominative, accusative, and vocative plural\\nof neuters end in a but neuters in e, al, and ar, which also\\nform the ablative singular in i, and all participles and adjec-\\ntives which make the ablative singular either in i alone, or\\nvary between e and i, have ia instead of a, except the\\nadjective vetus and all comparatives e. g. maria, vectigalia,\\ncalcaria, paria, facilia, sapientia, ingentia, victricia\\namantia, sedentia, audientia; but major a, doctiora, c.\\nNote. Sal has no neuter plural, but only sales with masculine gender.\\nAll adjectives of one termination, make the plural in ia, for of those\\nwhich form the ablative singular in e exclusively, the neuter does not\\noccur. Thus there remains only vetus, vetera, although the ablative sing,\\nis vetere or veteri. Complures (several or some) makes both compluria and\\ncomplura.\\n66.] 6. The following words make their genitive\\nplural in ium instead of um\\na) All neuters which have ia in the nominative plural,\\nthat is, those in e, al, and ar, and all participles and adjec-\\ntives which follow the third declension. Comparatives there-\\nfore (with the exception of plurium and complurium) and\\nthose adjectives which have only e in the ablative singular,\\nretain the termination um in the genit. plur., as pauperum\\nsuper stkum. To these we must add the adjectives caelebs,\\nceler, cicur, compos, impos, dives, memor, immemor, supplex,\\nuber, vetus, and vigil; all compounds of facto and capio,\\nand of such substantives as make the genitive plur. in um,\\ne. g. degenerum, bicorporum, inopum, quadrupedum, trici-\\npitum, versicolorum.\\nb) Words in es and is, which do not increase in the\\ngenitive singular (e. g. nubes, nubium; civis, civium but\\nmilitum and lapidum from miles and lapis, gen. militis,\\nlapidis) the following words in er imber, linter, venter f\\nuter, and the word caro, carnium. Vates, strues, the plural\\nambages, and generally also sedes, together with apis, canis,\\njuvenis, and volucris, form exceptions, and make their\\ngenitive plur, in um. Panis is uncertain.\\nc) Many monosyllabic substantives, and without exception\\nthose ending in s and x preceded by a consonant, make ium,\\nas montium, dentium, arcium, mercium, from mons, dens,\\narx, merx. Lynx however has lyncum and opes, from ops,\\nhas opum. But the greater number of monosyllabic words\\nc 6", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0053.jp2"}, "54": {"fulltext": "ob LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nending in s and x preceded by a vowel make their genitive\\nplur. more frequently in um than in turn. The latter occurs\\nonly in as, assium glis, glirium lis, litium mas, marium\\nos, ossium vis, virium and generally also in /rates, frau-\\ndium, and mus, murium. To these we must add faux,\\nfaucium nix, nivium strix, strigium and nox, noctium.\\nFur and ren have furum, renum lar has more frequently\\nlarum than larium. Of cor we only find cordium.\\nd) Substantives of two or more syllables ending in ns and\\nrs have ium and um, though the latter occurs more rarely\\nas in cliens, cohors, Picens, Vejens, Camers and in like\\nmanner those which, like adolescens, infans, parens, sapiens,\\nserpens, are properly participles, and admit um only because\\nthey are substantives (whence we frequently find parentum\\nfrom parentes), commonly make their genitive in ium:\\nadolescentium, sapientium, c. The names of people in as,\\natis, such as Arpinas, Fidenas, form their genitive almost\\nexclusively in ium Arpinatium, Fidenatium. Penates and\\noptimates, which usually occur only in the plural, follow\\ntheir analogy. Other substantives (common nouns, appel-\\nlativd) in as generally have um e. g. aetatum, civitatum\\nbut ium also is correct, and civitatium in particular occurs\\nfrequently. Quiris and Samnis, contrary to the rule, gene-\\nrally make Quiritium, Samnitium.\\n67 Names of festivals in alia which are used only\\nin the plural, as Bacchanalia, Compitalia, make their\\ngenitive plural in ium or orum, as Bacchanalium or Baccha-\\nnaliorum.\\n8. In the dative and ablative plural, the Greek words in\\nma prefer the termination is of the second declension to\\nibus e. g, poematis, epigrammatis, for poematibus and epi-\\ngrammatibus.\\n68.] 9. The accusative plural of words which make\\nthe genitive plur. in ium ended, in the best age of the Latin\\nlanguage, in Is, instead of es hence we find artis, civis,\\nomnis, tris.\\n69.] 10. Juppiter (see 12.) is declined as follows\\ngenit. Jovis, dat. Jovi, accus. Jovem. voc. Juppiter, abl. Jove.\\nIn the plural Joves only is found.\\nBos, bovis, makes the nominat. and accus. plur. boves, gen.\\nbourn, dat. and ablat. bubus, and less frequently bobus. Sus\\nmakes the dat. and ablat. plur. subus, which is a contraction\\nof suibus.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0054.jp2"}, "55": {"fulltext": "REMARKS ON THE SEPARATE CASES. 37\\nAPPENDIX.\\nWe have, in the preceding chapter, arranged the deviations\\nfrom the regular or ordinary declension, according to the\\norder in which the cases follow one another in the paradigm\\nbut for the purpose of assisting the learner, we shall here\\narrange the same observations according to the terminations\\nof the nouns, viz.\\na. Substantives.\\n1. The neuters in e, al, and ar, make the ablat. sing, in i 9\\nthe nom. accus. and vocat. plur. in ia, and the genit. plur. in\\nium.\\n2. Substantives in es and is, which do not increase in the\\ngenit., as well as several ending in er, make the genit. plur.\\nin ium.\\n3. Greek words in is, together with the names of rivers\\nand towns of the same termination, though they may not be\\nGreek, and a few Latin words in is, make the accus. sing, in\\nim, the ablat. in i, and the genit. plur. (if they occur in the\\nplural) in ium.\\n4. Monosyllabic words in s and x, preceded by a consonant,\\nand several in which s or x is preceded by a vowel, form the\\ngenit. plur. in ium.\\n5. Polysyllabic words in ns and rs commonly make the\\ngenit. plur. in ium the same is the case with the appellatives\\nin as, though more rarely.\\nb. Adjectives*\\n1. Adjectives in is, e, and er, is, e, make the ablat. sing, in\\ni, the neuter plur. in ia, and the genit. plur. in ium.\\n2. Adjectives of one termination make the ablat. sing, on\\nthe whole more commonly in i than in e, the neuter plural in\\nia, and the genit. plur. in ium. (Comparatives, however, make\\nthe ablat. sing, in e, the neuter plur. in a, and the genit. plur.\\nin um.)\\nWe subjoin a few of these nouns as models for the de\\nclension of the rest.", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0055.jp2"}, "56": {"fulltext": "38\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nNeuters in e, al, and ar.\\nSingular.\\nNom.\\nmare, the sea.\\nNom. animal, the animal.\\nGen.\\nmar-is.\\nGen. animal-is.\\nDat.\\nmar-i.\\nDat. animal-i.\\nAce.\\nmare.\\nAce. animal.\\nVoc.\\nmare.\\nYoc. animal.\\nAbl.\\nmar-i.\\nAbl. animal-i.\\nPlural.\\nNom.\\nmar-ia, the seas.\\nNom. animal-ia, the animals\\nGen.\\nmar-ium.\\nGen. animal-ium.\\nDat.\\nmar-ibus.\\nDat. animal-ibus.\\nAce.\\nVoc. mar-ia.\\nAce. Voc. animal-ia.\\nAbl.\\nmar-ibus.\\nAbl. animal-ibus.\\nNouns\\nin es, is, and er.\\nSingular.\\nNom. Voc. nubes, a cloud. N. V. imber, a shower of rain.\\nGen. nub-is. Gen. imbr-is.\\nDat. nub-i. Dat. imbr-i.\\nAce. nub-em. Ace. imbr-em.\\nAbl. nub-e. Abl. imbr-e.\\nPlural.\\nNom, Voc. nub-es, clouds. ~N. Y.imbr-es, showers of rain.\\nGen. nub-ium. Gen. imbr-ium.\\nDat. nub-ibus. Dat. imbr-ibus.\\nAce. nub-es. Ace. imbr-es.\\nAbl. nub-ibus. Abl. imbr-ibus.\\nSingular,\\nNom. Voc. c?ws, citizen. Nom. Voc. securis, axe.\\nGen. civ-is.\\nDat. czv-i.\\nAce. civ -em.\\nAbl. ceW.\\nGen. secur-is.\\nDat. secur-L\\nAce. secur-im.\\nAbl. secur-i.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0056.jp2"}, "57": {"fulltext": "GREEK WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 39\\nPlural.\\nNom. Voc. civ-es, citizens. Nom. Voc. secur-es, axes.\\nGen. civ-ium. Gen. secur-ium.\\nDat. civ-ibus. Dat. secur-ibus.\\nAce. civ-es. Ace. secur-es.\\nAbl. civ-ibus. Abl. secur-ibus.\\nNouns in s and x, with a Consonant preceding.\\nSingular.\\nNom. Voc. ars, art. N. V. sapiens, a wise man.\\nGen. art-is. Gen. sapient-is.\\nDat. art-i. Dat. sapient-i.\\nAce. art-em. Ace. sapient-em.\\nAbl. artf-e. Abl. sapient-e.\\nPlural.\\nNom. Voc. art-es, arts. N. V. sapient-es, wise men.\\nGen. art-ium. Gen. sapient-ium.\\nDat. art-ibus. Dat. sapient-ibus.\\nAce. art-es. Ace. sapient-es.\\nAbl. art-ibus. Abl. sapient-ibus.\\nCHAP. XVI.\\nGREEK WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.\\n70.] A great number of Greek words, especially proper names,\\nbelong to the third declension as their genitive terminates in os (ecus,\\nous), they follow the third declension in their own language also.\\nAmong the terminations of the nominative mentioned above, some belong\\nexclusively to Greek words, viz. ma, i, y, an, In, on, yn, er, yr, ys, eus, yx,\\ninx, ynx, and the plurals in e but there are also Greek words with other\\nterminations, most of which, however, are quite treated as Latin words,\\nand the Greek forms are used by Latin writers, especially the poets, only\\nin some cases.\\n1. In the genitive singular, the poets frequently use the Greek ter-\\nmination os instead of the Latin is, e. g. Panos, Tethyos.\\nThe feminines in o, however, as echo, Calypso, Dido, Sappho, have\\nusually the Greek genitive in us, as echus, Didus, Sapphus, the Latin", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0057.jp2"}, "58": {"fulltext": "40 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ntermination onis being less common. Their dative, accusative, and\\nablative end in o, and the Latin terminations owz, onem, one, are but rarely\\nused.\\n71 -1 2. The Greek accusative of the third declension in a is very\\noften used by the Latin poets instead of em e. g. hebdomada from heb-\\ndomas, Pana, aethera, Lacedaemona, Babylona.\\n72 3. The vocative singular in most Greek words ending in s\\nis formed by rejecting that consonant both in Greek and Latin e. g.\\nDaphni, Phylli, Thai, Tiphy, Orpheu, Perseu. Nouns in as, antis, make\\ntheir vocative in Greek dv and a, but the latter only is used in Latin; e. g.\\nAtla, Calcha.\\n73 4 1\u00c2\u00b0 tne genitive plural only a few words retain the Greek\\ntermination on (wy), but on the whole only in titles of books e. g. meta-\\nmorphoseon, epigrammaton.\\n74 5. The Greek accusative plural in as often occurs in proper\\nnames e. g. Cyclopas, Macedonas.\\nCHAP. XVXI.\\nGENDER OF WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. MAS-\\nCULINES.\\n75.] Masculine are those which end in o, or, os, and er,\\nand those in es which increase in the genitive, especially\\nthose in es, itis, e. g. sermo, error, sudor, flos, mos, venter,\\nstipes.\\nExceptions in o, Words ending in do, go and to are\\nfeminine, e. g. consuetudo, grando, legio, contio, natio, c,\\nalso caro. The following, however, are masculine in do,\\nthe words cardo and ordo, together with ado and cudo or\\ncudon in go ligo, margo, and harpago and all words in\\nto, which are not abstract nouns, but common names of\\nthings, such as pugio (a dagger), scipio (a staif), septentrio\\n(north pole), titio (a fire-brand) several names of animals,\\nas curculio, papilio, scorpio, stellio, vespertilio, and a few\\nothers of rare occurrence and lastly, unio, in the sense of a\\nparticular pearl (margarita).\\n76.] Exceptions in or. The following words in or,\\noris, are neuter ador, aequor, marmor, and cor, cordis.\\nArbor is feminine according to the general rule.", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0058.jp2"}, "59": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF WORDS OF THIRD DECLENSION. 41\\nExceptions in os. Cos, dos, and the Greek eos are femi-\\nnine os, ossis, and os, oris, are neuter.\\nExceptions in er. A great many words in er are neuter,\\nviz. cadaver, iter, spinther, tuber (a hump), uber, ver, and\\nverber (rarely used in the singular), and ail the names of\\nplants in er cicer, laser, papaver, piper, siler, siser, suber,\\nand zingiber. Tuber (a kind of peach tree) is feminine but\\nwhen it denotes the fruit, it is masculine.\\nExceptions in es increasing in the genitive. The follow-\\ning are feminine merges, itis seges and teges, etis merces,\\nedis quies, etis, with its compounds inquies and requies.\\nCompes, which, however, does not occur in the nominative\\nsing., but only in the plural compedes, is feminine. Aes,\\naeris, is neuter ales and quadrupes are properly adjectives,\\nbut as substantives they are mostly used as feminines.\\nCHAP. xvni.\\nGENDER OF WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. FEMI-\\nNINES.\\n77.] Feminine are those which end in as, is, ys, aus, and\\nx, those in es, which do not increase in the genitive, and\\nthose in s preceded by a consonant, e. g. aetas, navis, chlamys,\\nlaus and fr aus, pax, radix, arx, nubes, pars, mors, hiems.\\nExceptions in as. The following are masculine as,\\ngen. assis, and its compounds, though they have different\\nterminations, as quadrans, a fourth of an as bes, two-thirds\\nof an as and the Greek words which make their genitive in\\nantis, as adamas, elephas, and the names of mountains\\nAcragas, Atlas, Mimas. Mas, maris, and vas, vadis, are,\\nof course, masculine. The following are neuters vas, vasis,\\nand fas and nefas, which, however, occur only in the nom.\\nand accus.\\nExceptions in is. The following are masculine 1)\\nThose in is, gen. eris, as cinis, cucumis, pulvis, and vomis\\n(commonly vomer) 2) The following which increase in the\\ngenitive glis, lapis, pollis, and sanguis 3) The following", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0059.jp2"}, "60": {"fulltext": "42 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nwhich do not increase: amnis, axis, callis, canalis, cassis\\n(used especially in the plural casses, a hunter s net, and not\\nto be confounded with cassis, idis, a helmet, which is femi-\\nnine) caulis or colis, collis, crinis, ensis, fascis (generally in\\nthe plural fasces), finis, follis, funis, fustis, ignis, mensis,\\nor bis, panis, piscis, postis, scrobis, sends, torquis, torris, un-\\nguis, vectis, vermis.\\nAs mensis is masculine, Aprilis, Quintilis (Julius), and\\nSextilis (Augustus), have the same gender. Some substan-\\ntives in is are properly adjectives, and a substantive mascu-\\nline being always understood, they are themselves used as\\nmasculines e. g. annalis, commonly in the plural annates\\n(libri), annals jugales (equi), two horses yoked together\\nmolaris (lapis), a millstone, or if dens is understood, a back-\\ntooth or grinder natalis {dies), birth-day pugillares (libelli),\\na tablet for writing.\\nNote. All the masculines in is, whatever may be their genitive, are\\ncontained in the following hexameter lines\\nMascula sunt panis, piscis, crinis, cinis, ignis,\\nFunis, glis, vectis, follis, fascis, lapis, amnis,\\nSic fustis, postis, scrobis, axis, vermis et unguis,\\nEt penis, collis, callis, sic sanguis et ensis,\\nMugilis et mensis, pollis, cum caule canalis,\\nEt vomis, sentis, pulvis, finis, cucumisque,\\nUnguis, item torquis, torris, cum cassibus orbis.\\nExceptions in ys. All words of this termination are\\nGreek. Names of rivers and mountains in ys are masculine,\\naccording to the general rule e. g. Halys, Oihrys.\\n78.] Exceptions in x. The following are masculine\\n1) The Greek words in ax as cordax, thorax. 2) The ma-\\njority of those in ex, so that only lex, nex,faex, and supellex,\\nare feminine. 3) Some in ix viz. calix, fornix, phoenix,\\nsorix and generally also varix. 4) One word in ux viz.\\ntradux, properly an adjective, palmes being understood.\\n5) The following Greek words in yx calyx, coccyx, onyx,\\noryx and bombyx (in the sense of silkworm; it is femin.\\nwhen it signifies silk) and the names of mountains, such as\\nEryx. 6) The subdivisions of an as which end in unx as\\nquincunx, septunx, deunx.\\nNote. Many words in ex commonly enumerated in these lists are mas-\\nculine from their signification, such as rex, pontifex, carnifex, foenisex,\\nvervex. The other masculines in ex are apex, caudex, codex, cimex,", "height": "4053", "width": "2351", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0060.jp2"}, "61": {"fulltext": "GENDER OF WORDS OF THIRD DECLENSION. 43\\ncortex, culex, frutex, grex, irpex, latex, murex, obex, podex, poUex, pulex,\\npumex, ramex, silex, sorex, ulex, vertex or vortex.\\nExceptions in es, gen. is without increase. The Greek\\nword acinaces alone (aiuv Kifc, ov) is masculine. Vepres,\\nwhich rarely occurs in the singular, and palumbes, though\\ncommonly masculines, are found also as feminines.\\nExceptions in s preceded by a consonant. The following\\nare masculine dens, fons, mons, and pons, and commonly\\nalso adeps. Some words are properly adjectives, but are\\nused as masculine substantives, because a substantive of that\\ngender is understood confluens or confluentes (amnes), tor-\\nrens (amnis), oriens and occidens (sol), rudens (funis), bidens\\nand tridens and several Greek words, such as ellops, epops,\\nmerops, gryps, hydrops, chalybs.\\nCHAP. XIX.\\nGENDER OF WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. NEUTERS*\\n79.] Words ending in a, e, i, y, c, I, n, t, ar, ur, us are\\nneuter e. g. poema, mare, sindpi, misy, lac, animal, mel,\\ncarmen, fiumen, caput (the only word of this termination),\\ncalcar, pulvinar, fidgur, f acinus, opus, tempus.\\n1. Exceptions in I. The following are masculine: sol, sal,\\nand mugil. Sal in the singular is sometimes found as a\\nneuter, but in the plural the ancients use only sales,\\n2. Exceptions in n. There are only three Latin words in\\nen which are masculine, viz. pecten, pectinis, ren, and lien\\n(or lienis) the others in en are of Greek origin e. g. atta-\\ngen, lichen and splen. In an, paean; in on, agon, canon,\\ngnomon, horizon, and the names of mountains in on, as Ci-\\nthaeron, Helicon, The following in on are feminine a edon,\\nicon, and sindon and many Greek names of towns.\\n3. Exceptions in ar. Par is common in the sense of\\nmate, but neuter in the sense of a pair.\\n4. Exceptions in ur, Astur, turtur, vultur, and furfur\\nare masculine, and/wr on account of its meaning.\\no. Exceptions in us. All words of two or more syllables", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0061.jp2"}, "62": {"fulltext": "44 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nwhich retain the u in the genitive, that is, which end in utis\\nor udis, are feminine e. g. juvenilis* salus, senectus, servitus,\\nvirtus incus, palus, and subscus also tellus, telluris, and\\npecus, pecudis, a sheep. The monosyllables, such as tus,\\nturis jus, juris, and those polysyllabic words which change\\ntheir vowel (see 59.), are neuter according to the general\\nrule. Respecting the names of animals in us, see above,\\n42. Lepus and mus are masculine grus and sits are femi-\\nnine, when the particular sex is not to be specified.\\nCHAP. XX.\\nFOURTH DECLENSION.\\n80 The fourth declension is only a particular species\\nof the third, which has arisen from contraction and elision.\\nThe nominative of masculine and feminine words ends in us,\\nand of neuters in u. The following is the form of their\\ndeclension\\nSingular.\\nNom. fruct-us, fruit.\\ncorn-u, horn.\\nGen. fruct-us.\\ncorn-us.\\nDat. fruct-ui.\\n(corn-ui) corn-u.\\nAce. fruct-um.\\ncorn-u.\\nVoc. fruct-us.\\ncorn-u.\\nAbl. fruct-u.\\ncorn-u.\\nPlural.\\nNom. fruct-us.\\ncorn-ua.\\nGen. fruct-uum.\\ncorn-uum.\\nDat. fruct-ibus.\\ncorn-ibus.\\nAce. fruct-us.\\ncorn-ua.\\nVoc. fruct-us.\\ncorn-ua.\\nAbl. fruct-ibus.\\ncorn-ibus.\\nThe following words may be used as exercises actus,\\ncoetus, cursus, gradus, lusus, magistratus, motus, sensus,\\nsumptus, vultus the only neuters are genu, gelu, veru, pecu\\n(the same as pecus, oris). Tonitrus and tonitruum, plur. toni-\\ntrua, are more commonly used than tonitru.", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0062.jp2"}, "63": {"fulltext": "FIFTH DECLENSION. 45\\n82.] Note. Some words make the dative and ablative plural in\\nubus instead of ibus. They are contained in the following two\\nhexameters\\nArcus, acus, portus, quercus, ficus, lacus, artus,\\nEt tribus et partus, specus, adde veruque pecuque.\\nBut it must be observed, that instead of jicubus a better form is ficis,\\nfrom Jicus, i, and portus has both forms, ubus and ibus.\\n83.] Domus takes, in some of its cases, the forms of the second de-\\nclension; especially in the genit. domi in the sense of at home in the\\nabl. domo in the sense of from home and in the ace. plur. domos in\\nthe sense of home, when several places are alluded to. In the other\\nsignification, the forms of the fourth declension prevail.\\nGender of Words of the Fourth Declension.\\n84.] The words in us are masculine. The following\\nonly are feminines acus, domus, mantis, porticus, tribus,\\nand the plurals idus, iduum, and quinquatrus, quinquatruum.\\nTo these must be added colus, which however also follows\\nthe second declension. The words anus, nurus, socrus, and\\nquercus are feminine, according to the general rule, on ac-\\ncount of their signification.\\nThe few words in u are neuter, without exception.\\nCHAP. XXL\\nFIFTH DECLENSION.\\n85.] The fifth declension, like the fourth, may, with a\\nfew changes, be traced to the third. The nominative ends\\nin es, and the declension is as follows\\nSingular. Plural.\\nNom. di-es, a day. Nom. di-es, days.\\nGen. di-ei. Gen. di-erum.\\nDat. di-ei. Dat. di-ebus.\\nAce. di-em. Ace. di-es.\\nVoc. di-es. Yoc. di-es.\\nAbl. di-e. Abl. di-ebus.\\nThe following may serve as examples for declension res and species\\nhave their plural complete^ The words acies, fades, effigies, series, and", "height": "4090", "width": "2374", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0063.jp2"}, "64": {"fulltext": "46 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nspes, are found in good prose writers only in the nominative sing, and in\\nthe nom. and accusative plural the others, fides, macies, pernicies and\\nscabies have, from their signification, no plural.\\nNote. The e in the termination of the genitive and dative singular is\\nlong when preceded by a vowel, as in diet, maciei, but short after a\\nconsonant, as in Jidei, rei.\\nGender of Words of the fifth Declension.\\n86 The words of the fifth declension are feminine,\\nwith the exception of dies, which is mascul. and femin. in\\nthe singular, and masculine only in the plural. The com-\\npound meridies is masculine only, but does not occur in the\\nplural.\\nCHAP. XXII.\\nIRREGULAR DECLENSION. INDECLINABLES DEFECTIVES.\\n87.] The irregularities in the declension of substantives\\nmay be comprised under two general heads A. Indeclinables\\nand defectives B. Heteroclita and heterogenea.\\nA. Some substantives have a defective declension, inas-\\nmuch as they have either no terminations at all to mark the\\ndifferent cases (indeclinables), or want particular cases, or\\neven a whole number (defectives).\\nI. Indeclinables, or words which retain the same form in\\nall cases, are chiefly the names of the letters of the Greek\\nand Latin alphabets, e. g. alpha, beta, gamma, delta, iota,\\na, v, c. Further, a number of foreign words, such as\\nmanna, pascha, and a few Greek substantives in i and y,\\nsuch as gummi. Hebrew proper names, which differ in their\\nterminations from Greek and Latin words, are -either not\\ndeclined at all, as Bethleem, Gabriel, Ruth, or they take a\\nLatin termination in the nominative also, e. g. Abrahamus,\\nJacobus, Josephus, Juditha. David and Daniel are the\\nonly names which, without taking any termination in the\\nnominative, make the genitive Davidis, and Danielis.\\nOthers, as Joannes, Moses, Judas, Maria, have already", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0064.jp2"}, "65": {"fulltext": "IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 47\\nacquired through the Greek a declinable termination, and\\nare accordingly declined after the first or third declension.\\nJesus makes the accusat. Jesum, but in the other cases it\\nremains unchanged, Jesu.\\nAmong the genuine Latin words we must notice pondo\\n(properly an ancient ablative), which is used only as a plural,\\nand remains unchanged in all its cases, e. g. auri quinque\\npondo, five pounds of gold.\\n88.] II. Defectives in case are those substantives which\\nwant one or more cases. There are many words of which\\nthe nominative singular cannot be proved to have existed, as\\nfor instance, of the genitives dapis, dicionis, frugis, opis, vicis,\\nand of the plurals preces and verbera (for which we use as a\\nnom. sing, plaga or ictus). The genitive neminis from nemo\\noccurs very rarely, and its place is supplied by nullius. The\\ngenitive plural is wanting, that is, does not occur in our au-\\nthorities, in several monosyllabic words, as os, oris vas,\\nvadis glos, pax, and others. The genit. and dat. sing, of\\nvis is very rare, but the plural vires, virium, c, is complete.\\n89.] With regard to words which want several cases,\\nit most frequently happens, that only those cases exist which\\nare alike (i. e. especially the nominat., accusat., and vocat.,\\nall the others being wanting). Thus /as, nefas, nihil, parum\\n(too little), and instar, are used only as nom. and accus.\\nThis is the case especially with the plural of such words as\\nneces, kinds of death jura, rights rura, fields silentia,\\ngrates, and munia.\\nThe following must be remembered separately fors occurs\\nonly in the nom. and abl. singular {forte by chance) mane,\\nin the nom., ace, and abl. singular, and is alike in all of them,\\nbut it is generally used only as an adverb.\\n90.] Some words occur only in particular combinations\\nand in a particular case dicis with causa, and gratia nauci\\nin the phrase non nauci facere or esse derisui and despica-\\ntui, in combination with duci or esse infitias with ire venum\\nwith ire and dare, whence venire and vendere diu et noctu\\n(for which, however, noctu et inter diu is more common); natu\\nwith major and minor in promptu and in procinctu com-\\nmonly with esse and stare sponte with a pronoun, as mea,\\ntua, sua, or a genitive. We must particularly notice some\\nverbal substantives, which rarely occur in any other form\\nthan the ablat. sing, in combination with a genitive or a pro-\\nnoun, such as meo, tuo, c, e. g. concessu and permissu;", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0065.jp2"}, "66": {"fulltext": "48 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nadmonitu, rogatu, oratu, arbitratu, jussu bxi injussu coactu\\nand efflagitatu.\\n91.] III. Defectives in number are words which have\\neither no plural or no singular.\\n1. Many words from their signification can have no plural,\\nand are termed singularia tantum. This is the case a)\\nWith abstract nouns which have a simple and universal\\nmeaning, e. g. justitia, temper antia, pueritia, fames, sitis\\nb) With words which denote a substance or mass without di-\\nvision or subdivision, as aurum, argentum, sabulum, coenum,\\nsanguis, and panis, inasmuch as we thereby do not understand\\na single loaf but the substance of bread in general. Some\\nwords of this kind however, when used in the plural, denote\\nseparate objects, consisting of the substance indicated by the\\nname, as aera, works in bronze cerae, wax-tablets ligna,\\npieces of wood c) Collective words, as indoles, the whole\\nnatural abilities of a person plebs and vulgus, victus, supel-\\nlex. Proper names should strictly have no plural, but cases\\noften occur where a plural is necessary, viz. when persons of\\nthe same name or character are spoken of, and it may be\\nremarked in general, that in such cases the person who\\nspeaks or writes must decide for himself. It is surprising\\nthat there exists no plural of the words vesper (vespera),\\nmeridies, ver, and specimen.\\n93.] 2. Other words (pluralia tantum) occur only in\\nthe plural. This is the case a) With the following collective\\nnames of personal beings: liberi, gemini, majores, posteri,\\nprimores and proceres, superi and inferi, coelites, consentes,\\npenates, lemures, excubiae, operae. When in any of these\\ncases an individual is to be indicated, it can be done only by\\nmaking it a part of the collective, e. g. one child, unus or una\\nliberorum or ex liberis. Manes or dii manes however is used\\nin the plural also to denote the departed soul of an individual.\\nb) A great number of other pluralia tantum denote a com-\\nplex of things, the constituent parts of which are not con-\\nceived separately, or at least are not designated by the same\\nword as the whole complex itself. Such words are rendered\\nin English either by plurals or collective words. The most\\nimportant among them are: a) Artus, exta, intestina and\\nviscera, foria (orum), tormina, ilia, armamenta, impedimenta,\\nutensilia, induviae, exuviae, manubiae, parietinae, reliquiae,\\nsentes, vepres, virgulta, bellaria, crepundia, scruta, donaria,\\nlautia, inferiae, justa, serta compedes, verbera, grates, la-", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0066.jp2"}, "67": {"fulltext": "IUREGULAR DECLENSION. 49\\nmenta, minae, preces, dirae, ambages, argutiae, deliciae, divi-\\ntiae, facetiae, nttgae, gerrae, quisquiliae, insidiae, praestigiae,\\ntricae. To these we may add some other but similar ideas,\\nwhich are more frequently expressed by the plural than the\\nsingular, as angustiae, blanditiae, illecebrae, ineptiae, minu-\\ntiae, latebrae, salebrae.\\n94.] /3) The following words are used in Latin in the\\nplural, because they denote things composed of several parts,\\nwhereas we frequently express the same things in the singu-\\nlar Altaria (altare is less common), anna, moenia, bigae,\\ntrigae, quadrigae, cancelli and clathri, casses and plagae, exe-\\nquiae, fides (a lyre, properly the strings which were called\\nnervi), fores and valvae, loculi, phalerae, salinae, scalae,\\nscopae, codicilli, pugillares, tabulae, cerae, dunes and nates.\\nThe meaning of the plural is to us more obscure in the fol-\\nlowing words cervices, fauces, cliteUae, cunae, cunabuln\\nand incunabula, inimicitiae, induciae, nuptiae, obices, panti-\\nces, praecordia ioruni), sordes, tenebrae.\\n95.] The names of certain days in the Eoman calendar\\nare plurals, as calendae* nonae, idus, nundinae and feriae\\nso also the names of festivals and festive games (like ludi it-\\nself), e. g. Bacchanalia, Floralia, Saturnalia, Olympia,\\nand natalicia, sponsalia and repotia further, many names of\\ntowns, such as Athenae, Thebae, Gades, the neuters Arbela,\\nBactra, Leuctra, and a considerable number of names of\\ntowns which are properly names of the people, as Delphi,\\nLeontini, Parisii, Treviri.\\n96 Some words which are apparently the same vary in meaning\\naccording to their number, which is sometimes accompanied by a differ-\\nence of gender. Lustrum is a period of five years, and lustra, dens of\\nwild beasts fastus, us, plur. fastus, pride and fasti, the calendar\\nforum, market, and fori, passages tempus, time, and tempora (sometimes\\ntempus also), the temples of the head.\\nIn other words the plural has a different meaning from the singular,\\nthough one nearly allied to it, and without giving up the meaning of the\\nsingular for the plural, e. g.\\nSingular. Plural.\\nAedes, a temple. Aedes, a house.\\nAqua, water. Aquae, medicinal springs.\\nAuxiiium, help. Auxilia, auxiliary troops.\\nBonum, something good. Bona, property.\\nCareer, a prison. Carceres, the barriers of a race-course.\\nCastrum, a fort. Castra, a camp.\\nD", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0067.jp2"}, "68": {"fulltext": "oO LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nComitium, a part of the Roman forum. Comitia, assembly of the people.\\nCopia, abundance. Copiae, troops.\\nCapedia, daintiness. Cupediae, or cupedia, dainties.\\nEpulum, a solemn feast. Epulae, a feast, a meal.\\nFacultas, power to do something. Facidtates, property.\\nFortuna, fortune. Fortunae, goods of fortune.\\nHortus, a garden. Horti and hortidi, pleasure-grounds.\\nLittera, letter of the alphabet. Litterae, an epistle.\\nLudus, pastime. Ludi, public games.\\nNaris, nostril. Nares, turn, nose nasus.\\nNatalis (dies), birth-day. Natales, birth, high or low.\\nOps, obsol.) Opis, help. Opes, power, wealth.\\nOpera, labour. Operae, workmen.\\nPars, a part. Partes, (commonly) a party.\\nRostrum, a beak, pointed head of Rostra, the raised place from which\\na ship. the orators spoke.\\nSal, salt. Sales, witticisms.\\nCHAT. XXIII.\\nIRREGULAR DECLENSION. HETEROCLITA. HETEROGENEA.\\n97.] B. The second kind of irregularity in the declension\\nof substantives consists in too great an abundance of forms.\\nIt happens either, that although there is but one nominative,\\nthe other cases have two forms after different declensions, or\\nthat both the nominative, and all the other cases have two\\ndifferent forms. If, owing to the different terminations, such\\na word has at the same time different genders, it is called a\\nheterogenes if it has merely different forms, it is called a\\nheterocliton. It must however be observed that there are\\nonly very few words in which the practice of good prose does\\nnot give preference to one of the forms, and in the following\\nlist we shall always put the preferable form first.\\nForms of different declensions are found with the word\\njugerum for, besides the ablative sing, and plur. jilgero and\\njugeris, poets use jugere and jug eribus. Some names of trees\\nin us, viz. cupressus, ficus, laurus, pinus, besides the forms\\nof the second declension, also take those of the fourth in us\\nand u, i. e. in the genit. and ablat. singular, and in the nom.\\nand accus. plural, e. g. laurus (after the second and fourth", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0068.jp2"}, "69": {"fulltext": "IRREGULAR DECLENSION.\\n51\\ndeclension), gen. lauri and laurus, dat. lauro, ace. laurum,\\nvoc. laure, abl. lauro and lauru. Nom. plur. lauri and Z\\nrws, gen. laurorum, dat. and abl. lauris, accus. lauros and\\nlaurus, voc. lauri. The same is the case with colus, a dis-\\ntaff; but the cases in i, orum, is, do not exist. Vas, vasis,\\na vessel, makes the plural vasa, vasorum, vasis.\\n98.] Words which have different forms in the nomina-\\ntive as well as in the other cases may follow the same declen-\\nsion in either case, as halteus and balteum, callus and callum,\\nclipeus and clipeum (especially a consecrated shield), carrus\\nand carrum, commentarius and commentarium, cubitus and\\ncubitum, pileum and pileus, baculum and baculus, palatum\\nand palatus, jugulum and jugidas, catinus, catillus, and\\ncatinum, catillum and some names of plants, as lupinus and\\nlupinum, papyrus and papyrum, porrum and porrus or\\nthey follow different declensions as\\nAlimonia, ae.\\nAmygdala, ae.\\nVespera, ae.\\nCingulum. i.\\nEssedum, i.\\nIncestum, i.\\nDelphinus, i.\\nElephantus, i.\\nConsortio, onis.\\nMendum, i.\\nPenum, i.\\nTergum, i.\\nPavo, onis.\\nScorpio, onis.\\nPalumbes, is.\\nColluvio, onis.\\nCrater, eris.\\nPlebs, is.\\nPaupertas, atis.\\nJuventus, utis.\\nSenectus, utis.\\nalimonium, i.\\namygdalum, i.\\nvesper, i, the evening star, is regular. In\\nthe sense of evening, we find the nom.\\nvesper and accus. vesperum, but the\\nablative vespere and vesperi, from ves-\\nper, is.\\ncingula, ae.\\nesseda, ae.\\nincestus, us.\\ndelphin, inis.\\nelephas, antis.\\nconsortium, i.\\nmenda, ae.\\npenus, us and penus, oris.\\ntergus, oris.\\npavus, i.\\nscorpius, i.\\npalumbus, i; vcoApalumba, ae.\\ncolluvies, ei.\\ncratera, ae.\\nplebes, ei.\\npauperies, ei.\\n-juventa, ae and juventas, atis.\\nsenecta, ae.\\nD 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0069.jp2"}, "70": {"fulltext": "52 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nGausape,is( \\\\so gausapum, i; and gausapa, ae.\\ngausapes, is,\\nmasc).\\nPraesepe, es(also praesepium, i.\\npraesepes, is,\\nfern.).\\nTapete, is. tapetum, i and tapes, etis.\\nAngiportus, us. angiportum, L\\nRictus, us. rictum, i.\\nArcus, us. arcus, i (in Cic. De Nat. Deor. iii. 20.).\\nTonitrus, us tonitruum.\\n(tonitru).\\nIt is of comparatively frequent occurrence that substantives\\nhave two different forms, one belonging to the first and the\\nother to the fifth declension, as barbaria, barbaries luxuria,\\nes duritia, es materia, es mollztia, es segnitia, es and\\nthat verbal substantives of the fourth declension have a\\nsecond form in um, genit. i, like the participle of the perfect,\\nas conatus and conatum, eventus and eventum, praetextus and\\npraetextum, suggestus and suggestum.\\n99.] To this class belong those substantives which, in\\nthe plural, assume a different gender and a different form, in\\nsome instances, along with the regular one\\n1. Masculines, which in the plural become also neuters:\\njocus, -phir.joci smdjoca; locus, plur. loci (passages in books\\nor subjects for investigation and discussion topics) and\\nloca (in the common sense of places\\n2. Feminines which in the plural become also neuters\\ncarbasus, a species of flax, plur. carbasi and carbasa, sails\\nmade of it; ostrea, plur. ostreae and ostrea, orum marga-\\nvita, plur. margaritae, but also margarita, orum.\\n3. The following neuters become a) Masculines coelum,\\ncoeli siser, siseres porrum, porri b) Feminines delicium,\\ndeliciae epulum, epulae balneum, balneae (in the sense of\\na public bath balnea is more frequent) c) Both masculines\\nand neuters rastrum, rastri and rastra frenum, fren and\\nfrena.", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0070.jp2"}, "71": {"fulltext": "NOUNS ADJECTIVE. Oo\\nCHAP. XXIV.\\nNOUNS ADJECTIVE. TERMINATIONS. DECLENSION.\\nloo.] 1. The noun adjective denotes a quality of a per-\\nson or a thing, expressed either by a substantive or a pronoun.\\nThe participle is an adjective formed from a verb, and, as\\nfar as its form is concerned, is an adjective. An adjective\\nhas three genders, and can thus be joined with substantives\\nof different genders. But there are only two classes of ad-\\njectives in which the three genders are indicated by three\\ndifferent terminations namely, the adjectives and participles\\nin us, a, um, such as bonus, bona, bonum amatus, amata,\\namatum; and those in er, a, um, such as liber, libera, liberum\\nand the isolated satur, satura, saturum.\\nTo these adjectives of three terminations the following\\nthirteen in er, is, e must be added acer, acris, acre alacer,\\nalacris, alacre campester, campestris, campestre celeber,\\nCelebris, celebre celer, celeris, celere; equester, equestris,\\nequestre paluster, palustris, palustre pedester, pedestris,\\npedestre; puter, putris, putre; saluber, salubris, salilbre\\nSilvester, silvestris, silvestre terr ester, terrestris, terrestre\\nvolucer, volucris, volucre. Originally they had only two\\nterminations, is for the masculine and feminine, and e for\\nthe neuter. The termination er for the masculine exclusively\\nwas afterwards added to them.\\n101.] 2. Other adjectives have in reality only two\\nforms, the one for the masculine and feminine in common\\n(generis communis), and the other for the neuter. This\\nclass consists of those in is, neut. e, as levis (masc. and fern.),\\nleve, and the comparatives in or (masc. and fern.), us (neut.),\\nas levior, levius.\\n102.] 3. All other adjectives have only one termination\\nfor all three genders as felix, prudens, anceps, sollers,\\npauper, dives, vetus. So also the present participles in ns,\\nas laudans, monens, leg ens, audiens. But all the adjectives\\nof this class have the termination ia in the nom., accus., and\\nvocative plural of the neuter gender. Very few, and pro-\\nperly speaking only vetus, veteris, have the termination a,\\n(respecting which see above, 65.) E. g. felicia, prudentia,\\nancipitia, sollertia, laudantia, Vetera,\\nd 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0071.jp2"}, "72": {"fulltext": "54 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n103.] 4. With regard to the declension of adjectives,\\nit must be observed that the feminines in a follow the first\\ndeclension the masculines in us and er, which make the\\nfeminine in a, and the neuters in um, follow the second.\\nAll other terminations belong to the third declension. As\\ntherefore adjectives follow the same declensions as substan-\\ntives, they have been treated of above, and their irregu-\\nlarities have been already pointed out (see \u00c2\u00a7\u00c2\u00a751. and 66.,\\nc.) especially that many in er, a, um, throw out the e, and\\nthat the adject, of the third declension commonly make the\\nablat. sing, in i, the neuter plur. in ia, and the genit. plur.\\nin ium.\\nNote. We say commonly, for the abl. sing, in i occurs in all the ad-\\njectives in is, e, and in er, is, e, and also in the majority of those which\\nhave only one termination e exclusively occurs only in very few, but\\nseveral have i alone, or e and i indiscriminately. With regard to the\\nneuter plural in ia, it should be remembered that only the comparatives\\nand vetus, vetera form an exception. The neuter plural however occurs\\nonly in adjectives ending in ans, ens, rs and x, and a few others. The\\ngenitive plur. in um is more frequent.\\n5. Indeclinable adjectives are: nequam frugi (properly\\na dative of the obsolete frux, but is used quite as an ad-\\njective), praesto, and semis, which is always added to other\\nnumerals in the sense of and a half, e. g. recipe uncias\\nquinque semis, take five ounces and a half. It must not be\\nconfounded with the substantive semis, gen. semissis.\\nAdjectives defective in number are pauci and plerique,\\nwhich, in ordinary language, have no singular. Of mactus,\\na, um, we have only made and macti, joined with the im-\\nperative of esse.\\nParum, too little, is the neuter of the obsolete parus, and\\nis used as a substantive only in the nom. and accusative.\\nNecesse exists only as a neuter in connection with est, erat,\\nc, and with habeo, habes, c, the adjective necessarius, a,\\num, being used in its stead.\\nAPPENDIX.\\nAs in Chapter XV. we confined ourselves to giving speci-\\nmens of the declension of substantives, we here subjoin\\nsome examples of adjectives which follow the first, second\\nand third declensions.", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0072.jp2"}, "73": {"fulltext": "NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 55\\nAltus, a, urn, high.\\nSingular.\\nNom. alt-us, alt-d, alt-um.\\nGen. alt-i, alt-ae, alt-i.\\nDat. alt-o, alt-ae, alt-o.\\nAce. alt-wn, alt-am, alt-um.\\nYoc. alt-e, alt-a, alt-um.\\nAbl. alt-o, alt-a, alt-o.\\nPlural.\\nNom. alt-i, alt-ae, alt-a.\\nGen. alt-orum, alt-arum, alt-orum.\\nDat. alt-is, alt-is, alt-is.\\nAce. alt-os, alt-as, alt-a.\\nYoc. alt-i, alt-ae, alt-a.\\nAbl. alt-is, alt-is, alt-is.\\nMiser, era, erum, wretched.\\nSingular.\\nNom. miser, miser-d, miser-um.\\nGen. miser-i, miser-ae, miser-i.\\nDat. miser-o, miser-ae, miser-o.\\nAce. miser-um, miser-am, miser-um.\\nVoc. miser, miser-d, miser-um.\\nAbl. miser-o, miser-d, miser-o.\\nPlural.\\nNom. miser-i, miser-ae, miser-d.\\nGen. miser-orum, miser-arum, miser-orum.\\nDat. miser-is, miser^is, miser-is.\\nAce. miser-os, miser-as, miser-a.\\nYoc. miser-i, miser-ae, miser-a.\\nAbl. miser-is, miser-is, miser-is.\\nAeger, aegra, aegrum, z7/.\\nSingular.\\nNom. aeger, aegr-d, aegr-um.\\nGen. aegr-i, aegr-ae, aegr-i.\\nDat. aegr-o, aegr-ae, aegr-o.\\nAce. aegr-um, aegr-am, aegr-um.\\nYoc. aeger, aegr-d, aegr-um.\\nAbl. aegr-o, aegr-d, aegr-o.\\nD 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0073.jp2"}, "74": {"fulltext": "56 LATIN GRAMMAR*\\nPlural.\\nNom. aegr-i, aegr-ae, aegr-a.\\nGen. aegr-orum, aegr-arum, aegr-orum.\\nDat. aegr-is, aegr-is, aegr-is.\\nAce. aegr-os, aegr-as, aegr-a.\\nVoc. aegr-i, aegr-ae, aegr-a.\\nAbl. aegr-is, aegr-is, aegr-is.\\nCeler, celeris, celere, quick.\\nSingular.\\nNom. celer, celer-is, celer-e.\\nGen. celer-is for all genders.\\nDat. celer-i for all genders.\\nAce. celer-em, celer-em, celer-e.\\nVoc. celer, celer-is, celer-e.\\nAbl. celer-i for all genders.\\nPlural.\\nNom. celer-es, celer-es, celer-ia.\\nGen. celer-ium for all genders.\\nDat. celer-ibus for all genders.\\nAce. celer-es, celer-es, celer-ia.\\nVoc. celer-es, celer-es, celer-ia.\\nAbl. celer-ibus for all genders.\\nGravis,\\nneut\\ngrave, heavy.\\nSingular.\\nNom\\ngrav-is,\\nneut.\\ngrav-e.\\nGen.\\ngrav-is.\\nDat.\\ngruv-i.\\nAce.\\ngrav-em\\nneut\\ngrav-e.\\nVoc.\\ngrav-is,\\nneut.\\ngrav-e.\\nAbl.\\ngrav-i.\\nPlural.\\nNom. grav-es, neut. grav-ia.\\nGen. grav-ium.\\nDat. grav-ibus.\\nAce. grav-es, neut. grav-ia.\\nVoc grav-es, neut. grav-ia.\\nAbl. grav-ibus.", "height": "4098", "width": "2396", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0074.jp2"}, "75": {"fulltext": "NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 57\\nComparative altior, neut altius, higher.\\nSingular.\\nNom. altior, neut. altius.\\nGen. altior -is.\\nDat. altior-i.\\nAce. altior-em, neut. altius.\\nYoc. altior, neut. altius.\\nAbl. altior-e, or altior-i.\\nPlural.\\nNom. altior-es, neut. altior-a.\\nGen. altior-um.\\nDat.\\naltior-ibus.\\nAce.\\naltior-es, neut. altior-a.\\nVoc.\\naltior-es, neut. altior-a.\\nAbl.\\naltior-ibus.\\nAdjectives of one Termination,\\nDives, rich. Felix, happy.\\nSingular.\\nNom\\ndives.\\nGen.\\ndivit-is.\\nDat.\\ndivit-i.\\nAce.\\ndivit-em, neut. dives.\\nVoc.\\ndives.\\nAbl.\\ndivit-e, or divit-i.\\nPlural.\\nNom\\ndivit-es, neut. dit-ia (divit-ia).\\nGen.\\ndivit-um.\\nDat.\\ndivit-ibus.\\nAce.\\ndivit-es, neut. dit-ia.\\nVoc.\\ndivit-es, neut. dit-ia.\\nAbl.\\ndivit-ibus.\\nSingular.\\nNom\\n.felix.\\nGen.\\nfelic-is.\\nDat.\\nfelic-i.\\nAce.\\nfelic-em, neut. felix.\\nVoc.\\nfelix.\\nAbl.\\nfelic-i, or felic-e.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0075.jp2"}, "76": {"fulltext": "58 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nPlural.\\nNom. felic-es, neut. felic-ia.\\nGen. felic-ium.\\nDat. felic-ibus.\\nAce. felic-es, neut. felic-ia*\\nYoc. felic-es, neut. felic-ia.\\nAbl. felic-ibus.\\nCHAP. XXV.\\nCOMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.\\n104.] 1. Adjectives (also the present and past par-\\nticiples when used as adjectives) may, by means of a change\\nin their termination, be made to indicate that the quality\\nthey denote belongs to a subject in a higher or in the highest\\ndegree. The degrees of comparison (gradus comparationis),\\nas this change is called, are, the comparative, when a com-\\nparison is made between two (persons, things, or conditions),\\nand the superlative, when a comparison takes place among\\nthree or more. The fundamental form of the adjective in\\nthis respect is called the positive.\\nNote. The comparative is also used, in an elliptic mode of speaking,\\ninstead of our too (nimis) e. g. homo tristior, more sad, viz. than is\\nright or natural, hence too sad. In like manner the superlative, when\\nused without the objects of comparison being mentioned, indicates only\\nthat the quality exists in a high degree, which we express by the adverb\\nvery e. g. homo doctissimus, does not always mean the most learned,\\nbut very often a very learned man and intemperantissime vixit, he lived\\nvery intemperately.\\n2. The comparative has the termination tor for the mas-\\nculine and feminine, and ius for the neuter and these ter-\\nminations are added to the stem of the word such as it\\nappears in the oblique cases. The rule may be practically\\nexpressed thus to form the comparative add or or us to\\nthat case of the positive which ends in i, that is, in adjectives\\nof the second declension to the genitive, and in those of the\\nthird to the dative, e. g. doctus (docti), doctior; liber (liberi),\\nliberior pulcher (pulchri), pulchrior levis, levior acer\\n{acri), acrior; prudens, prudentior; indidgens, indidgentior\\naudaXy audacior; velox, velocior.", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0076.jp2"}, "77": {"fulltext": "COMPARISON EY ADVERBS. 59\\n3. The superlative ends in issimus, a, um, and is formed\\nas the comparative by adding this termination to the stem of\\nthe positive, such as it presents itself in the genitive and the\\nother oblique cases, after the removal of the terminations,\\ne. g. doct-issimus, prudent-issimus, audac-issimus, concord-\\nissimus,\\n105.] 4. The following adjectives must be noticed as\\nexceptions\\na) All adjectives in er (those in er, a, um, as liber and\\npidcher, as well as those in er, is, e, as acer, celeber, and those\\nof one termination, as pauper, gen. pauperis) make the su-\\nperlative in er rimus, by adding rimus to the nominative of\\nthe masculine gender, as pulcher -rimus, acer-rimus, celeber-\\nrimus, pauper-rimus. Vetus and nuperus, too, have veter-\\nrimus, nuperrimus. Maturus has both forms, maturissimus\\nand matur rimus, though the latter chiefly in the adverb.\\nb) Some adjectives in His, viz. facilis, difficilis, similis,\\ndissimilis, gracilis, and humilis, make the superlative in illi-\\nmus, by adding limus to the positive after the removal of the\\ntermination is, as, facil-limus, humil-limus. Imbecillus has\\ntwo forms, imbecillissimus and imbecillimus.\\nc) Adjectives compounded with dicus, ficus and volus\\n(from the verbs dicere, facere, velle) make the comparative\\nin entior and the superlative in entissimus, from the unusual\\nand obsolete forms dicens, volens, faciens, e. g. maledicentior,\\nbenevolentior, munificentior, munific entissimus, magnificen-\\ntissimus.\\nCHAP. XXVI.\\nCOMPARISON BY ADVERBS AND INCREASED COMPARISON.\\n106.] 1. Instead of the peculiar forms of the compara-\\ntive and superlative, we sometimes find a circumlocution,\\nmagis and maxime, or summe, being added to the positive.\\nThis rarely occurs in the case of adjectives which form their\\ndegrees of comparison in the regular way but where the\\nregular or grammatical comparison cannot be used, its place\\nis supplied by circumlocution. (See below, 114.)\\nD 6", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0077.jp2"}, "78": {"fulltext": "60 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n107.] 2. A degree is also expressed by the adverbs\\nadmodum, bene, apprlme, imprimis, sane, oppido, valde, and\\nmultum, and by the particle per, which is united with the\\nadjective into one word, as in perdifficilis, permagnus, and is\\nmade still more emphatic by the addition of quam, e. g. locus\\nperquam difficilis, an extremely difficult passage. Some few\\nadjectives are increased in the same way by being compounded\\nwith prae, e. g. praedives, praepinguis, praelongus.\\n108.] 3. When the adverb etiam (still) is added to the\\ncomparative, and longe or multo (by far) to the superlative,\\nthe meaning of the degrees is enhanced. Vel, even, and quam,\\nas much as possible, likewise serve to denote an increase of\\nthe meaning expressed by the superlative, e. g. Cicero vel\\noptimus oratorum Romanorum i. e. Cicero, a good or rather\\nthe very best of Roman orators gratias tibi ago quam maxi-\\nmas, or quam maximas possum tibi gratias ago. As these\\nwords increase the meaning, so paulum or paulo, paululum or\\npaululo, on the other hand, diminish it, as paulo doctior, only\\na little more learned. Aliquanto increases the sense, and has\\nan affirmative power; it maybe expressed by considerably\\nor much.\\nCHAP. XXVII.\\nIRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON.\\n109.] 1. Some adjectives make their degrees of com-\\nparison from obsolete forms, or take them from other words\\nof a similar signification.\\nBonus, good, melior, optimus.\\nMalus, bad, pejor, pessimus.\\nMagnus, great, major, maximus.\\nMultus, much, neut. plus (pi. plures, plurimus (equivalent in\\nplurd), the plural to plerique).\\nParvus, little, minor, minimus.\\nNequam\\\\ See \u00c2\u00a7103. f nequior, nequissimus.\\nFrugi J indeclin. \\\\frugalior, frugalissimus.\\nEgenus, needy, egentior, egentissimus (egens).\\nProvidus, provident, providentior, providentissimus (pro-\\nvidens).", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0078.jp2"}, "79": {"fulltext": "IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 61\\nDives makes the comparative divitior and ditior, and the\\nsuperlative divitissimus and ditissimus.\\nno.] 2. The following adjectives have a double irregu-\\nlar superlative\\nExter or extents, a, itm, exterior, extremus and extimus.\\n[Infer or inferus), a, um, inferior, infimus and imus.\\n{Super cr superas), a, um, superior, supremus and summits,\\n{Poster or posterus), a, um, posterior, postremus and postu-\\nmus,\\n[\u00c2\u00a7m.] 3. There are some forms of the comparative and\\nsuperlative which have no adjective for their positive, but an\\nadverb which is derived from an adjective.\\n{citra),\\nciterior,\\ncitimus.\\n(ultra),\\nulterior,\\nultimus.\\n{intra),\\ninterior,\\nintimus.\\n(prope),\\npropior,\\nproximus.\\nThe following, on the other hand, have neither an adjec-\\ntive nor an adverb for their positive\\ndeterior, deterrimus.\\nocior, ocissimus.\\npotior, potissimus.\\nprior, primus.\\n112,] 4. The following adjectives have a superlative,\\nbut no comparative\\nFalsus, falsissimus diversus, diversissimus inclltus, in-\\nditissimus novus, novissimus sacer, sacerrimus vetus\\n(the comparative is supplied by vetustior), veterrimus {vetus-\\ntissimus), and some participles which are used as adjectives,\\nas meritus, meritissimus.\\n113.] 5. Most adjectives in ilis and bilis derived from\\nverbs, together with those in ilis derived from substantives,\\nhave no superlative. To these we must add the following\\nagrestis, alacer, ater, caecus, longinquus, propinquus, salu-\\ntaris, surdus, vulgaris, and some others. In like manner\\nthere is no superlative of adolescens, jitvenis (comparative\\njunior contracted from juvenior), and senex (comparative\\nsenior), though these words must be regarded as adjectives.\\n6. The two adjectives, anterior and sequior, exist only as\\ncomparatives. The neuter of the latter is sequius.\\n114.] 7. Many adjectives have no degrees of compari-", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0079.jp2"}, "80": {"fulltext": "62 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nson at all, because their signification precludes comparison\\ne. g. those which denote a substance, origin, possession, or\\na definite time e. g. aureus, peregrinus, paternus, aestivus,\\nhibernus, vivus.\\nOthers do not form the comparative and superlative in the\\nusual grammatical manner by the terminations ior and issi-\\nmus, but by the adverbs magis and maxime, which are put\\nbefore the adjective, and by the particles mentioned above.\\nSuch ad ectives are\\na) Those in which the termination us is preceded by a\\nvowel, as idoneus, dubius, necessarius, arduus comparative\\nmagis necessarius, superlative maxime necessarius, c. In\\nqu however, the u is not regarded as a vowel hence an-\\ntiquus, e. g., has its regular comparative, antiquior, and\\nsuperlative antiquissimus.\\nb) Many adjectives compounded with substantives and\\nverbs, e. g. inops, magnanimus, pestifer and those which\\nhave the derivative terminations icus, idus, ulus, alis, llis,\\nbundus, e. g. modicus, credulus, rubidus, exitialis, hostilis,\\nfuribundus.\\nc) A great number of adjectives which cannot be clas-\\nsified their want of the degrees of comparison is surpris-\\ning, and they must be carefully committed to memory\\nalbus, almus, caducus, calvus, canus, curvus, ferus, gnarus,\\nlacer, mutilus, lassus, mediocris, memor, merits, mirus,\\nmutus, navus, nefastus, par, parilis, dispar, properus,\\nrudis, trux (the degrees may be formed from truculentus),\\nvagus.\\nCHAP. XXVIII.\\nNUMERALS. CARDINAL NUMERALS.\\n115.] Numerals (nomina numeralia) are partly adjec-\\ntives and partly adverbs. The adjectives are: 1) Cardinal,\\ndenoting simply the number of things, as tres, three 2)\\nOrdinal, indicating the place or number in succession, as\\ntertius, the third 3) Distributive, denoting how many each\\ntime, as terni, each time three, or three and three together\\n4) Multiplicative, denoting how manifold, as triplex, three-", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0080.jp2"}, "81": {"fulltext": "CARDINAL NUMERALS. 63\\nfold 5) Proportional) denoting how many times more, as\\ntriplum, three times as much and 6) Adverbial numerals,\\ndenoting how many times, as ter, thrice or three times.\\nI. CARDINAL NU3IERALS.\\nThe cardinal numerals form the roots of the other nume-\\nrals. The first three, unus, duo, tres, are declined, and have\\nforms for the different genders the rest, as far as one hun-\\ndred, are indeclinable. The hundreds, as 200, 300, c, are\\ndeclinable, and have different terminations for the genders.\\nMille, a thousand, is indeclinable, but has a declinable plural\\n(millia, or better milia,) for the series of numbers which\\nfollow. A higher unit, such as a million or billion, does not\\nexist in Latin, and a million is therefore expressed by the\\nform of multiplication decies centena milia, i. e. ten times a\\nhundred thousand, or decies alone, with the omission of cen-\\ntena milia, and in like manner vicies, two millions octogies,\\neight millions centies, ten millions millies, a hundred mil-\\nlions bis millies, two hundred millions.\\nSingular. Plural.\\nOI-TSIjU L.A.K.. XLUKAli,\\nNom. unus, una, unum, one. Nom. uni, unae, una.\\nGen. unius. Gen. unorum, unarum, uno-\\nrum.\\nDat. uni. Dat. unis.\\nAce. unum, unam, unum. Ace. unos, unas, una.\\nAbl. uno, una, uno. Abl. unis.\\nNote. The Plural uni, unae, una, occurs as a numeral only in con\\nnexion with pluralia tantum, i. e. such nouns as have no singular, e g.\\nunae nuptiae, one wedding una castra, one camp unae litterae, one\\nletter. (See 119). Unus is used also in the sense of alone, or the\\nsame, and is then a pure adjective, e. g., uni Ubii legatos miserant, the\\nUbians alone had sent ambassadors Lacedaemonii septingentos jam annos\\nunis moribus vivunt, with the same manners.\\nDuo and tres are naturally plurals.\\nNom. duo, duae, duo. Nom. tres (mas. and fern.), tria.\\nGen. duorum, duarum, duo- Gen. trium.\\nrum.\\nDat. duobus, duabus, duobus. Dat. tribus.\\nAce. duos and duo, duas, duo. Ace. tres (mas. and fern.), tria.\\nAbl. duobus, duabus, duobus. Abl. tribus.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0081.jp2"}, "82": {"fulltext": "64\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nNote. Ambo, ae, o, both, is declined like duo. Duum, a second form of\\nthe genit. of duo, is the regular one in compounds, as duumvir, but is fre-\\nquently used also in connexion with milium. Thus Pliny says that he\\nhad compiled his work e lectione voluminum circiter duum milium. See\\n\u00c2\u00a751.)\\n4. im. or iv. quattuor. 30.\\n5. v. quinque. 40.\\n6. VI. sex. 50.\\n7. vn. septem. 60.\\n8. vih. octo. 70.\\n9. ix. novem. 80.\\n10. x. decern. 90.\\n11. xi. undecim. 99.\\n12. xii. duodecim. [tres.\\n13. xni. tredecim or decern et\\n14. xiv. quattuor decim. 100.\\n15. xv. quindecim. 109.\\n16. xvi. sedecim or decern et sex.\\n17. xvii. decern et septem, or 200.\\nseptendecim. 300.\\n18. xviii. decern et octo, or duo- 400.\\ndeviginti.\\n19. xix. decern et novem, or 500.\\nundeviginti.\\n20. xx. viginti. 600.\\n21. xxi. ^w^s e\u00c2\u00a3 viginti, or 700.\\nviginti unus. 800.\\n22. xxn. #wo e\u00c2\u00a3 viginti, or 900.\\nviginti duo. 1000.\\n23. xxm. \u00c2\u00a3res e\u00c2\u00a3 viginti, or 2000.\\nviginti tres.\\n28. xxvm. duodetriginta, or 5000.\\nocfo e\u00c2\u00a3 viginti. 10,000.\\n29. xxix. undetriginta, or wo- 100,000.\\nvem e\u00c2\u00a3 viginti.\\n116.] The intermediate numbers are expressed in the\\nfollowing manner from twenty to a hundred, either the\\nsmaller number followed by et precedes, or the greater one\\nprecedes without the et e. g. quattuor et sexaginta, or sexa-\\nginta quattuor. For 18, 28, 38, c, and for 19, 29, 39, c. the\\nexpressions duodeviginti, duodetriginta, undeviginti, unde-\\ntriginta, up to undecentum, are more frequent than decern et\\nxxx. triginta.\\nxl. quadraginta.\\nL. quinquaginta.\\nlx. sexaginta.\\nlxx. septuaginta.\\nlxxx. octoginta.\\nxc. nonaginta.\\nIC. undecentum, no-\\nnaginta novem, or\\nnovem et nonaginta.\\nC. centum.\\ncix. centum et novem,\\nor centum novem.\\nCC. ducenti, ae, a.\\nCCC. trecenti, ae, a.\\nCCCC. quadringenti,\\nae, a.\\nd. or io. quingenti,\\nae, a.\\nDC. sexcenti, ae, a.\\ndcc. septingenti, ae, a.\\ndccc. octingenti, ae, a.\\ndcccc. nongenti, ae, a.\\nm. or cio. mille.\\nCiocio.orMM. duo mi-\\nlia, or ow mille.\\nIOO. quinque milia.\\nccioo. decern milia.\\nccciooo. centum milia.", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0082.jp2"}, "83": {"fulltext": "ORDINAL NUMERALS. 65\\nocto, or octo et viginti c. In such combinations neither\\nduo nor un (unus) can be declined. Above 100, the greater\\nnumber always precedes, either with or without et, as centum\\nunus, mille unus, mille duo, mille trecenti, or mille et unus,\\nmille et duo, mille et trecenti sexaginta sex.\\nThe thousands are generally expressed by the declinable\\nsubstantive milia and the cardinal numerals, as duo milia,\\ntria milia, quattuor milia, unum et viginti milia, quadraginta\\nquinque milia. The objects counted are expressed by the\\ngenitive which depends on the substantive milia e. g. Xerxes\\nMardonium in Graecia reliquit cum trecentis milibus arma-\\ntorum, unless a lower declined numeral is added, in which\\ncase the things counted may be used in the same case with\\nmilia e. g. habuit tria milia trecentos milites, or milites tria\\nmilia trecentos habuit but even then the genitive may be\\nused, e. g. habuit militum tria milia trecentos, or habuit tria\\nmilia militum et trecentos. It is only the poets that express\\nthe thousands by the indeclinable adjective mille preceded\\nby an adverbial numeral, as bis mille equi, for duo milia\\nequorum.\\nCHAP. XXIX.\\nn. ORDINAL NUMERALS.\\n117.] The ordinals denote the place in the series which\\nany object holds, and answer to the question quotus? All of\\nthem are adjectives of three terminations, us, a, um.\\n1. primus.\\n11. undecimus*\\n2. secundus\\n(alter).\\n12. duodecimus.\\n3. tertius.\\n13. tertius decimus.\\n4. quartus.\\n1 4. quartus decimus.\\n5. quintus.\\n15. quintus decimus.\\n6. sextus.\\n16. sextus decimus.\\n7. septimus.\\n17. septimus decimus.\\n8. octavus.\\n18. octavus decimus, or duode-\\n9. nonus.\\nvicesimus. [cesimus.\\n10. decimus*\\n19. nonus decimus, or undevi-", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0083.jp2"}, "84": {"fulltext": "66 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n20. vicesimus, sometimes vige- 200. ducentesimus.\\nsimus. 300. trecentesimus.\\n21. ^nws e\u00c2\u00a3 vicesimus, vicesi- 400. quadringentesimus.\\nmus primus, 500. quingente simus.\\n22. a/fer e\u00c2\u00a3 vicesimus, vicesi- 600. sexcentesimus.\\nmus secundus. 700. septingentesimus.\\n30. tricesimus, sometimes \u00c2\u00a3n- 800. octingente simus.\\ngesimus. 900. nongentesimus.\\n40. quadragesimus. 1000. millesimus.\\noO. quinquagesimus. 2000. fo s millesimus.\\n60. sexagesimus. 3000. fer millesimus.\\n70. septuagesimus. 10,000. decies millesimus.\\n80. octogesimus. 100,000. centies millesimus.\\n90. nonagesimus. 1,000,000. decies centies mille-\\n100. centesimus. simus.\\n118.] In expressing the intermediate numbers, the most\\ncommon practice is to place the smaller number before the\\ngreater one with the conjunction e\u00c2\u00a3, or to make the greater\\nnumber precede the smaller one without et, as quartus et\\nvicesimus, or vicesimus quartus. But there are many in-\\nstances in which the smaller number precedes without et;\\ne. g. quintus tricesimus and from 13 to 19 this is the ordi-\\nnary method, e. g. decimus tertius, though tertius et decimus\\nand decimus et tertius also occur. Instead of primus et vicesi-\\nmus, c, we find still more frequently unus et vicesimus, fern.\\nuna et vicesima, or with the elision of the vowel, unetvice-\\nsima. The 22d, 32d, c, is more frequently and better ex-\\npressed by alter et vicesimus or vicesimus et alter, than by\\nsecundus et vicesimus. It then goes on regularly tertius et\\nvicesimus, quartus et vicesimus, c. but the 28th, 38th, c,\\nare expressed also by duodetricesimus, duodequadragesimus,\\nand the 29th, 39th, 99th by undetricesimus, undequadrage-\\nsimus, undecentesimus, the words duo and unus (un) being\\nindeclinable and both forms are of more frequent occur-\\nrence than octavus and nonus et vicesimus, or vicesimus octa-\\nvus, vicesimus nonus.", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0084.jp2"}, "85": {"fulltext": "DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS.\\n67\\nCHAP. XXX.\\nHI. DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS.\\n119] Distributive numerals denote an equal number\\ndistributed among several objects or at different times, and\\nanswer to the questions How many apiece and, How\\nmany each time (quoteni They are always used in the\\nplural. The English language having no corresponding nu-\\nmerals has recourse to circumlocution e. g. Scipio et Han-\\nnibal cum singulis interpretibus congressi sunt, each with an\\ninterpreter Senatus agri Vejentani septena jugera plebi di-\\nvisit, the senate gave to each plebeian seven jugera.\\nHence the distributives are applied, instead of cardinals,\\nwith words which have no singular e. g. bird codicilli, bina\\npost Romulum spolia opima and with those substantives the\\nplural of which, though it has a different signification from\\nthe singular, yet retains the meaning of a singular, e. g. aedes,\\ncastra, litter ae, ludi. It must however be observed, that in\\nthis case the Romans commonly used uni instead of singulis\\nand trini instead of terni, since singuli and terni retain their\\nown distributive signification. We therefore say, for example,\\nbina castra uno die cepit trinae hodie nuptiae celeb rantur\\nquotidie quinas aut senas litteras accipio for duo castra\\nwould mean two castles, duae aedes two temples, and\\nduae litterae two letters of the alphabet. They are all ad-\\njectives of three genders, i, ae, a.\\n1. singidi. 14. quaterni deni,\\n2. bird, 15. quini deni.\\n3. terni, or trini, 16. seni deni.\\nsepteni deni.\\noctoni denL\\nnoveni deni.\\n4. quaterni.\\n5. qidni.\\nseni.\\nsepteni.\\noctoni.\\nnoveni,\\ndeni.\\nundeni.\\nduodeni.\\nterni deni.\\n6,\\n9.\\n10.\\n11.\\n12.\\n13.\\n17\\n18\\n19\\n20. viceni.\\n21. viceni singuli.\\n22. viceni bini.\\n23. viceni terni, c. 600.\\n30. triceni. 700,\\n40. quadrageni.\\n50. qidnquageni\\n60. sexageni,\\n70. septuageni.\\n80. octogeni.\\n90. nonageni.\\ncenteni,\\nduceni,\\ntreceni,\\nquadringeni,\\nqidngeni,\\nsexceni.\\nseptingeni,\\n800. octingeni.\\n900. nongeni.\\n100.\\n200.\\n300.\\n400.\\n500.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0085.jp2"}, "86": {"fulltext": "68 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nNote. The genitive of these numerals is commonly in um instead of\\norum, as binum, ternum, quaternum, quinum, c, but not singulum for\\nsingulorum.\\nThe thousands are expressed by singula milia, bina milia,\\nterna, quaterna, quina milia; e. g. Legavit Augustus prae-\\ntorianis militibus singula milia nummum (that is, one\\nthousand to each) in singulis legionibus Romanis quaterna\\nmilia duceni pedites cum trecenis equitibus erant.\\nHere too there is a certain freedom of combination, for\\ninstead of viceni quaterni, we also find quaterni et viceni,\\nand quaterni viceni and 18 and 19 are expressed also by\\nduodeviceni and undeviceni.\\nCHAP. XXXI.\\nIV. MULTIPLICATIVE NUMERALS.\\n120.] Multiplicatives answer to the question, How-\\nmany fold? (quoticplex They are: simplex (gen. icis) 9\\nduplex, triplex, quadruplex, quincuplex (sexuplex or seplex),\\nseptemplex, octuplex, novemplex, decemplex, centuplex.\\nIt will not be out of place here to add the Latin expres-\\nsions for fractions, which are always denoted by pars is\\ndimidia pars, -l tertia pars, quarta pars, quinta, sexta,\\nseptima pars, c. In cases where the number of the parts\\ninto which a thing is divided, exceeds the number of parts\\nmentioned only by one, as in f, 4, the fractions are ex-\\npressed in Latin simply by duae, tres, quattuor partes, that\\nis, two out of three, three out of four, and four out of five\\nparts. In all other cases fractions are expressed as in\\nEnglish f, duae septimae tres septimae, c.\\nCHAP. XXXII.\\nV. PROPORTIONAL numerals.\\n121.] Proportional numerals express how many times\\nmore one thing is than another, but they cannot be used", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0086.jp2"}, "87": {"fulltext": "NUMERAL ADVERBS.\\n69\\nthroughout. They answer to the question quotuplus They\\nare simplus, a, um duplies, triplus, quadruplus, quinqui-\\nplus, (sexuplus), septuplus, octuplus, (nonuplus), decuplus,\\ncentuplus, and according to the same analogy we might form\\nducentuplus, and so on, as in the multiplicatives above.\\nchap. xxxm.\\nVI. NUMERAL ADVERBS.\\n122.] 1. The numeral adverbs answer to the question,\\nHow many times? quotiens? to which totiens is the\\ndemonstrative, and aliquotiens the indefinite. The form in\\nns is the original, and is preferable to the termination es,\\nwhich has become the established ending in adverbs formed\\nfrom real numerals.\\n1. semeh\\n21. semel et vicies.\\n2. bis\\n22. bis et vicies.\\n3. ter.\\n23. ter et vicies, c\\n4. quater.\\n30. tricies.\\n5. quinquies.\\n40. quadragies.\\n6. sexies.\\n50. quinquagies.\\n7. sep ties.\\n60. sexagies.\\n8. octies.\\n70. septuagies.\\n9. novies.\\n80. octogies.\\n10. decies.\\n90. nonagies.\\n11. undecies.\\n100. centies.\\n12. duodecies.\\n200. ducenties.\\n13. ter decies or tredecies.\\n300. trecenties.\\n14. quater decies\\nor quattuor\\n400. quadringenties.\\ndecies.\\n500. quingenties, c.\\n15. quinquiesdecies or quinde-\\n800. octingenties, c.\\ncies.\\n1,000. millies.\\n16. sexiesdecies oi\\nsedecies.\\n2,000. bis millies.\\n17. septiesdecies.\\n3,000. fez* millies, c.\\n18. duodevicies oi\\noctiesdecies.\\n100,000. centies millies.\\n19. undevicies, or\\nnoviesdecies. 1,000,000. millies millies.\\n20. vicies.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0087.jp2"}, "88": {"fulltext": "70 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nWith regard to the intermediate numbers, 21, 22, 23, c,\\nthe method above adopted is the usual one, but we may also\\nsay vicies semel and vicies et semel, though not semel vicies;\\nfor bis vicies, for example, would mean twice twenty, i. e.\\nforty.\\n123.] 2. The numeral adverbs terminating either in\\num or o, and derived from the ordinals, or rather the\\nordinals themselves in the ace. or ablat. singular neuter\\ngender, are used in answer to the question of what num-\\nber? or what in number e. g. primum or primo, for\\nthe first time, or first; secundum or secundo, tertium or\\ntertio, c, decimum, tertium decimum, duodevicesimum.\\nCHAP. XXXIV.\\nPRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.\\n125.] 1. Pronouns are words which supply the place of\\na substantive, such as I, thou, we, and in Latin ego, tu, nos,\\nc. These words are in themselves substantives, and\\nrequire nothing to complete their meaning hence they are\\ncalled substantive pronouns {pronomina substantival), but\\nmore commonly personal pronouns, pronomina personalia.\\n128.] 2. Besides these there is a number of words which\\nare in reality adjectives, inasmuch as they have three distinct\\nforms for the three genders, and their meaning is not com-\\nplete without a substantive either expressed or understood.\\nBut their inflection differs so widely from what are com-\\nmonly called adjectives, and they are so frequently used\\ninstead of a substantive, that they are not unjustly termed\\npronouns. They are\\n1) The adjunctive ipse, ipsa, ipsum, self.\\n2) The demonstrative hie, haec, hoc iste, ista, istud\\nille, ilia, Mud is, ea, id, and the compound idem, eadem,\\nidem.\\n3) The relative: qui, quae, quod, and the compounds\\nquicunque and quisquis.\\n4) The two inter rogatives viz. the substantive interro-\\ngative, quis, quid? and the adjective interrogative, qui, quae,\\nquod", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0088.jp2"}, "89": {"fulltext": "PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.\\n5) The indefinite pronouns aliquis, aliqua, aliquid and\\naliquod quidam, quaedam, quiddam and quoddam ali-\\nquispiam, or abridged quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam and\\nquodpiam quisquam, neuter quidquam quivis, quilibet,\\nand quisque and all the compounds of qui or quis.\\n130.] 3. The possessive pronouns are derived from\\nthe substantive pronouns, and in form they are regular\\nadjectives of three terminations: mens, tuus, suus, noster,\\nvester to which we must add the relative cujus, a, um and\\nthe pronomina gentilicia (which express origin), nostras,\\nvestras, and cujas.\\n4. Lastly, we include among the pronouns also what are\\ncalled pronominalia, that is, adjectives of so general a mean-\\ning, that, like real pronouns, they frequently supply the place\\nof a noun substantive. Such pronominalia are. a) Those\\nwhich answer to the question, who? alius, ullus, nullus,\\nnonnullus. If we ask, which of two it is expressed by\\nuter and the answer to it is alter, one of two neuter,\\nneither alter uter, either the one or the other utervis and\\nuterlibet, either of the two. The relative pronoun (when\\nreferring to two) is likewise uter, and in a more general\\nsense utercunque. b) Those which denote quality, size, or\\nnumber in quite a general way. They stand in relation to\\none another (whence they are called correlatives), and are\\nformed according to a fixed rule. The interrogative begin-\\nning with qu coincides with the form of the relative the\\nindefinite is formed by prefixing all; the demonstrative\\nbegins with t, and its power is sometimes increased by the\\nsufiix dem; the relative may acquire a more general mean-\\ning by being doubled, or by the suffix cunque and the\\nindefinite generality is expressed by adding the words libet\\nor vis to the (original) interrogative form. In this manner\\nwe obtain the following pronominal correlatives\\nInterrog\\nDemonst,\\nRelat.\\nRelat. generale.\\nIndefin. Indef. gener.\\nqualis\\ntalis\\nqualis\\nqualisqualis,\\nqualiscunque.\\nqualislibet.\\nquantus\\ntardus, tan-\\nquantus\\nquantusquantus,\\naliquantus quantuslibet,\\ntundem\\nquantuscunque\\nquantusvis.\\nquot\\ntot, totidem,\\nquot\\nquotquotj quot-\\ncunque\\naHquot quotlibet.\\nquotus\\ntotus\\nquotus\\nquotuscunque\\n(aliquotus.)", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0089.jp2"}, "90": {"fulltext": "72\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP. XXXV.\\nDECLENSION OP PRONOUNS.\\n[\u00c2\u00a7131.] 1. Declension of the personal pronouns ego, tu,\\nsui.\\nSingular.\\nNom. Ego, I. Tu, thou.\\nGen. mei, of me. tui, of thee.\\nDat. mihi, to me. tibi, to thee.\\nAce. me, me. te, thee.\\nVoc. like nom. like nom.\\nAbl. me, from me. te, from thee.\\nPlural.\\nNom. Nos, we. Vos, you.\\nGen. nostri, nos- vestri, vestrum*\\ntrum, of us. of you.\\nDat. nobis, to us. vobis, to you.\\nAce. nos, us. vos, you.\\nVoc. like nom. like nom.\\nAbl. nobis, from us.vobis, from you.\\nsui, of himself, her-\\nself, itself.\\nsibi, to himself, c.\\nse, himself, c.\\nse, from himself, c.\\n5^ of themselves.\\nszfie, to themselves.\\nse, themselves.\\nse, from themselves.\\nNote. The contracted form of the dative, mi for mihi (like W2*Z for nihil)\\nis frequently found in poetry, but rarely in prose. The genitives mei, tui, sui,\\nnostri, vestri, are properly genitives of the possessive pronouns meum, tuum,\\nsuum, nostrum, vestrum, for originally the neuters meum, tuum, Sfc. were\\nused in the sense of my being, or of as regards me, thee, c. The\\nbeginner may pass over the origin of these forms, since they are used as\\nthe real genitives of the personal pronouns but he must be reminded of\\nit in the construction of the gerund, 660. Respecting the difference\\nbetween nostri, vestri, and nostrum, vestrum, see 431.\\nThe suffix met may be added to all the cases of these three pronouns to\\nexpress the English emphatic self, as egomet, mihimet, temet, semet, and even\\nwith the addition of ipse after it, as mihimet ipsi, temet ipsum. The genit.\\nplur. and the nominat. tu alone do not admit this suffix. Instead of it\\nthe emphasis is given to tu by the suffix te, as tute, and to this again by\\nthe addition of met, as tutemet. The accus. and ablat. singular of these\\npronouns admit a reduplication, meme, tete, sese of the pronoun sui alone\\nit is used in the plural as well as in the singular.\\nWhen the preposition cum occurs with the ablat. of these pronouns, it is\\nappended to them, as mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum. The same\\nis the case with quo, qua, and quibus, though we may also say cum quo,\\ncum qua, cum", "height": "4098", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0090.jp2"}, "91": {"fulltext": "DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 73\\n132.] 2. Declension of the demonstrative pronouns,\\nhie, iste, Me, is.\\nSingular. Plural.\\nNom. Yoc. Hie, haec, hoc, Nom. Voc. hi, hae, haec,\\nthis. these.\\nGen. hujus, of this. Gen. horum, harum, horum,\\nof these.\\nDat. huic (or huic), to this. Dat. his, to these.\\nAce. hunc, hanc, hoc, this. Ace. hos, has, haec, these.\\nAbl. hoc, hac, hoc, from this. Abl. his, from these.\\nNote. The ancient form of this pronoun was hice, haece, hoce. The\\ncases ending in c arose from the omission of the e. In ordinary language\\nthe cases in s also sometimes take the ce to render the demonstrative\\npower more emphatic, e. g. hujusce, hisce, hosce.\\nThe pronouns iste, ista, istud, and Me, Ma, Mud, are\\ndeclined alike, and in the following manner\\nSingular. Plural.\\nNom. Yoc. Me, Ma, Mud, Nom. Voc. Mi, Mae, Ma,\\nhe, or that. they or those.\\nGen. illlus. Gen. Morum,illarum,illorum.\\nDat. Mi. Dat. Mis.\\nAce. Mum, Mam, Mud. Ace. Mos, Mas, Ma.\\nAbl. Mo, Ma, Mo. Abl. Mis.\\nIpse, ipsa, ipsum, is declined like Me, except that the\\nneuter is ipsum and not ipsud.\\nSingular. Plural.\\nNom. is, ea, id, he, she, it, Nom. ii (ei), eae, ea, they or\\nor that. those.\\nGen. ejus. Gen. eorum, earum, eorum.\\nDat. ei. Dat. Us (eis).\\nAce. eum, earn, id. Ace. eos, eas, ea.\\nAbl, eo, ea, eo. Abl. Us (eis).\\nBy the addition of the suffix dem we form from is idem,\\neadem, idem (as it were isdem, eadem, iddem), which is\\ndeclined in the other cases exactly like the simple is, ea, id.\\nIn the accusative eundem and eandem are preferable to\\neumdem, eamdem, and in like manner in the genitive plur.\\neorundem, earundem.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0091.jp2"}, "92": {"fulltext": "74 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n133.] 3. Declension of the relative pronoun, qui, quae,\\nquod.\\nSingular. Plural.\\nNom. Qui, quae, quod, who Nom. qui, quae, quae, who or\\nor which. which.\\nGen. cujus (quojus, obsol.), Gen. quorum, quarum, quo-\\nof whom. rum.\\nDat. cut or cm (quoi, obsol.), Dat. quibus.\\nto whom.\\nAce. quern, quam, quod, Ace. quos, quas, quae.\\nwhom.\\nAbl. quo, qua, quo, from Abl. quibus.\\nwhom.\\nNote. An ancient ablat. singular for all genders was qui, especially\\nwhen joined with cum, as quicum vixit, instead of quocum or quacum.\\nInstead of quibus there is an ancient form quis, or quels.\\n134.] There are two interrogative pronouns, quis, quid?\\n(substantive), and qui, quae, quod? (adjective), the latter\\nof which is quite the same in form as the relative pronoun,\\nand the former differs from it only by its forms quis and\\nquid. The interrogatives quisnam, quidnam and quinam,\\nquaenam, quodnam? express a more lively or emphatic\\nquestion than the simple words, and the nam answers to the\\nEnglish pray.\\n135.] The indefinite pronoun aliquis, plur. aliqui, is used\\nas a substantive and as an adjective. In ordinary language\\nthe form aliquis alone is used, both as a substantive and as\\nan adjective but in the neuter the two forms aliquid and\\naliquod exist, and the difference between them must be\\nobserved e. g. da mihi aliquid, give me something aliquod\\nnegotium, some business. The femin. singul. and the neuter\\nplur. are both aliqua, and the form aliquae is the femin.\\nnom. plural.\\n136.] But there is also a shorter form of the indefinite\\npronoun, without the prefix ali, and exactly like the inter-\\nrogative pronoun quis, quae, quid, as a substantive, and qui,\\nquae, quod, as an adjective. This form is generally used\\nonly after the conjunctions si, nisi, ne, num, and after rela-\\ntives, such as quo, quanto, and quum. This rule is commonly\\nexpressed thus the prefix ali in aliquis and its derivatives\\naliquo, aliquando, and alicubi is rejected when si, nisi, ne,\\nnum, quo, quanto, or quum, precede e. g. Quo quis est doc", "height": "4135", "width": "2343", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0092.jp2"}, "93": {"fulltext": "POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINALS. (5\\ntior, eo esse humanior solet, the more learned a person is, the\\nmore humane he usually is Consul videat, ne quid respublica\\ndetrimenti capiat. The combinations of this indefinite quis\\nor qui with the conjunctions si, ne, num, and with the inter-\\nrogative syllable en (ec) may be considered as peculiar and\\ndistinct words, as siquis or siqui, nequis or nequi, numquis or\\nnumqui. In the femin. singul. and the neuter plur. the form\\nqua is used along with quae, likewise according to the ana-\\nlogy of aliquis. We may therefore say siqua, nequa, num*\\nqua, ecqua, but also si quae, ne quae, num quae, ecquae.\\n137.] The compounds of qui and quis, viz. quidam,\\nquilibet, quivis, quisque, quispiam, and unusquisque, are de-\\nclined like the relative, but have a double form in the neuter\\nsingular, quiddam and quoddam, unumquidque and unum-\\nquodque, according as they are used as substantives or as ad-\\njectives. Quisquam and quisquis are commonly used only\\nas substantives, for ullus supplies their places as adjectives,\\nand the regular form of the neuter therefore is quidquani (quic-\\nquam), and quidquid (quicquid), and more rarely quodquam,\\nquodquod. Quicunque, however, has only the form of quod-\\ncunque for the neuter.\\n138.] Each of the two words of which unusquisque is\\ncomposed is declined separately, as gen. uniuscuj usque, dat.\\nunicuique, ace. unumquemque, c.\\nCHAP. XXXVI.\\nDECLENSION OP THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND OF PRO-\\nNOMINALS.\\n139.] 1. The possessive pronouns meus, mea, meum\\ntuus, tua, tuum suus, sua, suum noster, nostra, nostrum\\nv ester, vestra, vestrum, are declined entirely like adjectives of\\nthree terminations. Meus makes the vocative of the mascu-\\nline gender mi, as mi pater I\\n2. The possessive pronoun cujus, a, um, has, besides the\\nnominative, only the accusative singular, cujum, cujam, cu-\\njum cvja, the ablative singular feminine, and cujae, cujas,\\nthe nominative and accusative plural feminine but all these\\nforms cccur very rarely.\\nE 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0093.jp2"}, "94": {"fulltext": "76 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n3. Nostras, vestras, and cujas (i. e. belonging to our, your\\nnation, family, or party), are regularly declined after the\\nthird declension as adjectives of one termination genit.\\nnostratis, dat. nostrdti, c, plural nostrates, and neuter nos-\\ntratia.\\n140.] 4. The peculiar declension of the adjective pro-\\nnouns uter, utra, utrum alter, altera, alterum alius (neut.\\naliud\\\\ ullus, and nullus, has already been explained in\\n\u00c2\u00a749.\\nNom. uter, Gen.\\nutrlus,\\nDat\\nutri.\\nneuter,\\nneutrlus,\\nneutri.\\nalter,\\nalter tus,\\nalteri.\\nalius (neut. aliud),\\nalius,\\nalii.\\nullus,\\nulllus,\\nulli.\\nnullus,\\nnullius,\\nnulli.\\nThe compound alteruter (the one or the other) is either\\ndeclined in both words, genitive alteriusutrius, accusative al-\\nterumutrum, or only in the latter, as alterutri, alterutrum.\\nThe other compounds with uter, viz. uterque, uterlibet, uter-\\nvis, and utercunque, are declined entirely like uter, the suf-\\nfixes being added to the cases without any change. The\\nwords unus, solus, and totus are declined like ullus.\\nCHAP. XXXVH.\\nTHE VERB.\\n142.] 1. The verb is that part of speech by which it is\\ndeclared that the subject of a sentence does or suffers some-\\nthing. This most general difference between doing which\\noriginates in the subject, and suffering which presupposes the\\ndoing or acting of another person or thing, is the origin of\\nthe two main forms of verbs, viz. the active and passive (ac-\\ntivum et passivum).\\n2. The active form comprises two kinds of verbs trans-\\nitive or active properly so called, and intransitive or neuter\\nverbs. The difference between them is this an intransitive\\nverb expresses a condition or action which is not communis", "height": "4135", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0094.jp2"}, "95": {"fulltext": "THE VERB.\\ncated from the agent to any other object e. g. I walk, I stand,\\nI sleep whereas the transitive verb expresses an action which\\naffects another person or thing (which in grammar is called the\\nobject, and is commonly expressed by the accusative) e. g. I\\nlove thee, I read the letter. As far as form is concerned this\\ndifference is important, for neuter verbs cannot have a pas-\\nsive voice, whereas every transitive or active verb (in its\\nproper sense) must have a passive voice, since the object of\\nthe action is the subject of the suffering e. g. I love thee\\nthou art loved I read the letter the letter is read.\\n147.] 3. It is a peculiarity of the Latin language, that\\nit has a class of verbs of a passive form, but of an active\\n(either transitive or intransitive) signification. They are\\ncalled deponents (laying aside, as it were, their passive sig-\\nnification), e. g. consolor, I console imitor, I imitate fateor,\\nI confess sequor, I follow mentior, I lie morior, I die.\\nThese verbs, even when they have a transitive signification,\\ncannot have a passive voice, because there would be no dis-\\ntinct form for it.\\n148.] 4. Before proceeding we must notice the follow-\\ning special irregularities\\nThe three verbs, fio, I become, or am made, vapulo, I am\\nbeaten, and veneo, I am sold or for sale, have a passive sig-\\nnification, and may be used as the passives of facio, verbero,\\nand vendo but, like all neuter verbs, they have the active\\nform, except that Jio makes the perfect tense f actus sum, so\\nthat form and meaning agree. They are called neutralia\\npassiva.\\nThe verbs audeo, fido, gaudeo, and soleo, have the passive\\nform with an active signification in the participle of the\\npreterite, and in the tenses formed from it as ausus, fisus,\\ngavisus, solitus sum, eram, c. They may therefore be called\\nsemideponentia.\\nTo these we must add, but merely with reference to the\\nparticiple of the preterite, the verbs jurare, coenare, pran-\\ndere, and potare, of which the participles juratus, coenatus,\\npransus, and potus, have, like those of deponents, the signi-\\nfication one that has sworn, dined, breakfasted, and\\ndrunk.\\nS", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0095.jp2"}, "96": {"fulltext": "78 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP, xxxvm.\\nMOODS. TENSES.\\n149.] There are four general modes (moods, modi) in\\nwhich an action or condition expressed by a verb may be\\nrepresented 1) Simply as a fact, though the action or con-\\ndition may differ in regard to its relation and to time this is I\\nthe Indicative 2) As an action or condition which is merely\\nconceived by the mind, though with the same differences as\\nthe indicative, Conjunctive or Subjunctive 3) As a com-\\nmand, Imperative 4) Indefinitely, without defining any per-\\nson by whom, or the time at which, the action is performed,\\nalthough the relation of the action is defined, Infinitive,\\nTo these moods we may add the Participle which is, in\\nform,, an adjective, but is more than an adjective by express-\\ning at the same time the different relations of the action or\\nsuffering, that is, whether it is still lasting or terminated. A\\nthird participle, that of the future, expresses an action which\\nis going to be performed, or a condition which is yet to come.\\nThe Gerund, which is in form like the neuter of the parti-\\nciple passive in dus, supplies by its cases the place of the in-\\nfinitive present active. The two Supines are cases of verbal\\nsubstantives, and likewise serve in certain connections (which\\nare explained in the syntax) to supply the cases for the\\ninfinitive.\\n150.] When an action or condition is to be expressed\\nas a definite and individual fact, either in the indicative or\\nsubjunctive, it is expressed in a verb by its Tenses. We\\nmust further know its position in the series of actions with\\nwhich it is connected, that is, the relation of the action, viz.\\nwhether it took place while another was going on, or whether\\nit was terminated before another began. If we connect these\\nconsiderations, we shall obtain the following six tenses of the\\nverb\\nAn action not terminated in the present time I write, scribo Present\\ntense.\\nAn action not terminated in the past time I was writing or wrote,\\nscribebam Imperfect tense.\\nAn action not terminated in the future I shall write, scribam Future\\ntense.", "height": "4128", "width": "2418", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0096.jp2"}, "97": {"fulltext": "NUMBERS. PERSONS. 79\\nAn action terminated in the present time I wrote or have written,\\nscripsi Perfect tense.\\nAn action terminated in the past time; I had written, scrip ser am Plu-\\nperfect tense,\\nAn action terminated in the future I shall have written, scripsero\\nFuture perfect tense.\\nThe same number of tenses occurs in the passive voice,\\nbut those which express the terminated state of an action can\\nbe formed only by circumlocution, with the participle and\\nthe auxiliary verb esse scribor, scribebar, scribar, scriptus\\nsum, scriptus eram, scriptus ero. The subjunctive has no\\nfuture tenses respecting the manner in which their place is\\nsupplied, see 496. The infinitive by itself does not express\\ntime, but only the relation of an action, that is, whether it is\\ncompleted or not completed. By circumlocution we obtain\\nalso an infinitive for an action or a suffering which is yet to\\ncome.\\nCHAP. XXXTK.\\nNUMBERS. PERSONS.\\n151.] The Latin verb has two numbers, singular, and\\nplural, and in each number three persons. These three per-\\nsons, the one speaking, thou, the one spoken to, and he or\\nshe, the one spoken of, are not expressed in Latin by special\\nwords, but are implied in the forms of the verb itself. The\\nsame is the case in the plural with we, you, they, and these\\npersonal pronouns are added to the verb only when the per-\\nson is to be indicated in an emphatic manner.\\nThe following is a general scheme of the changes in ter-\\nmination, according to the persons, both in the indicative\\nand subjunctive\\nIn the Active.\\nPerson: 1. 2. 3.\\nSing. s, t.\\nPlur. mus, tis, nt.\\nThe termination of the first person singular cannot be\\nstated in a simple or general way, since it sometimes ends in\\nE 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0097.jp2"}, "98": {"fulltext": "80\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\ns^^in^eSir 6 in i (see the\\ntive forms an exception fnTT the perfect indi\\nvowel which preSth^I Res Pecting the\\ncan be said, except Sat*?, te atwns ^thing general\\nfeet indicative P 1S a m the lm P erfe c* and pluper-\\nIn the Passive.\\nPerson 1. 2\\nSine r\\npiur. w 2;;.\\nsiv^r a Te e \\\\te S d n bt Pl7 H\u00c2\u00b0 th Se tenSeS f the P-\\nwith a tense of theTe b else C mbmatlon of *\u00c2\u00bbe participle\\nvJot t^lmltt^l aDd PaSSive haS two\\nthat which is to be none n J*, e and another\\nand an imperative futre She r Z Z\u00e2\u0084\u00a2^\u00e2\u0084\u00a2 P^sent\\nson, owing to the nature A%^ P 6\\nimperative fh w Wever here are distinct forms. The\\nCHAP. XL.\\nFORMATION OF THE TENSES.\\nThe present indicatives of these conjugations end in\\n1, o, as. 2. So, es. 3. o, Is. 4. io, is.\\nNote. Attention must be paid to the difference of quantity in the ter-", "height": "4135", "width": "2343", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0098.jp2"}, "99": {"fulltext": "FORMATION OF THE TEXSES. 81\\nmination of the second person in the third and fourth conjugations, in\\norder to distinguish the presents of the verbs in io, which follow the third\\nconjugation, e. g. fodio, fugio, capio, from those verbs which follow the\\nfourth, such as audio, erudio.\\n153.] 2. In order to obtain the forms of the other\\ntenses, we must further know the perfect and the supine\\nfor the three tenses of the completed action in the active are\\nderived from the perfect and the participle perfect passive,\\nwhich is necessary for the formation of the same tenses in\\nthe passive, is derived from the supine. These four princi-\\npal forms, viz. Present, Perfect, Supine, and Infinitive, end\\nthus\\nPres.\\nPerf.\\nSupine.\\nInfinit.\\n1.\\no,\\navi,\\natum,\\nare.\\n2.\\neo,\\nui,\\nitum,\\nere.\\n3.\\no,\\nh\\nturn,\\nere.\\n4.\\nio,\\nivi,\\nItum,\\nIre.\\n3. With regard to the first, second, and fourth conjuga-\\ntions, no particular rule is needed as to how the perfect and\\nsupine are formed. According to the above scheme they\\n1.\\nlaud-o,\\nlaud-avi,\\nlaud-atum,\\nlaud- are.\\n2.\\nmon-eo,\\nmon-ui,\\nmon-itum,\\nmon-ere.\\n4.\\naud-io,\\naud-ivi,\\naud-ltum,\\naud-ire.\\n154.] 4. But in the third conjugation the formation of\\nthe perfect and supine presents some difficulty. The follow-\\ning general rules therefore must be observed (for the details\\nsee the list of verbs of the third conjugation). When the\\ntermination of the infinitive ere, or the o of the present tense,\\nis preceded by a vowel, the forms of the perfect and supine\\nare simply those mentioned above, that is, i and turn are\\nadded to the stem of the verb, or to that portion of the verb\\nwhich remains after the removal of the termination, e. g.\\nacuere, acu-o, acu-i, acu-tum. The vowel becomes long in\\nthe supine, even when it is otherwise short. So also in\\nminuo, statuo, tribuo, and solvo, solutum, for v before a con-\\nsonant is a vowel.\\nBut when the o of the present is preceded by a consonant\\nthe perfect ends in si. The s in this termination is changed\\ninto x when it is preceded by c, g, h, or qu (which is equal\\nto c) when it is preceded by b, this letter is changed into\\nE 5", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0099.jp2"}, "100": {"fulltext": "82 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\np if d precedes, one of the two consonants must give way,\\nand either the d is dropped, which is the ordinary practice,\\nor the s e. g. duco, duxi rego, rexi traho, traxi coquo,\\ncoxi; scribo, scrip si claudo, clausi but defendo, defendL\\nVerbs in po present no difficulty carpo, carpsi sculpo,\\nscidpsi. That lego makes legi, bibo, bibi, and emo, emi, is\\nirregular but figo, fixi nubo, nupsi demo, demsi (or\\ndempsi), are perfectly in accordance with the rule.\\n5. The supine adds turn to the stem of the verb, with some\\nchange of the preceding consonants b is changed into p\\ng, h, and qu into c instead of dtum in the verbs in do, we\\nfind sum e. g. scribo, scriptum rego, rectum traho, trac-\\ntum coquo, coctum (verbs in co remain unchanged, as dic-\\ntum, ductum) defendo, defensum; claudo, clausum. The\\nsupine in xum is a deviation from the rule, as in figo, fixum,\\nand so also the throwing out of the n of the stem, as in\\npingo, pictum stringo, strictum although this is not done\\nwithout reason. Of the words in which o is preceded by I,\\nm, n, r, or s, only a few in mo follow the ordinary rule\\ne. g. como, demo perf. comsi, or compsi sup. comtum or\\ncomptum all the others have mixed forms.\\n6. Two irregularities are especially common in the forma-\\ntion of the perfect of the third conjugation. The first is the\\naddition of a syllable at the beginning of the verb, called\\nreduplication, in which the first consonant of the verb is\\nrepeated either with the vowel which follows it, or with an\\ne e. g. tundo, tutudi tendo, tetendi cano, cecini curro,\\ncucurri ;fallo, fefelli parco,peperci. In the compounds of\\nsuch words the reduplication is generally not used, except in\\nthose of do, sto, disco, posco, and in some of curro. The\\nsecond irregularity is that many verbs of the third conjuga-\\ntion form their perfect like those of the second. This is the\\ncase especially with many verbs in lo and mo, as alo, alui,\\nalitum (altum) molo, molui, molitum gemo, gemui,gemitum.\\nConcerning this and other special irregularities, see the list\\nof verbs in Chap. L.\\n155.] 7. The derivation of the other tenses and forms\\nof a verb from these four (present, perfect, supine, and in-\\nfinitive), which are supposed to be known, is easy and with-\\nout irregularity in the- detail.\\nFrom the infinitive active are formed\\na) The imperative passive, which has in all conjugations\\nthe same form as the infinitive active.", "height": "4135", "width": "2403", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0100.jp2"}, "101": {"fulltext": "FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 83\\nb) The imperative active, by dropping the termination re.\\nIt thus ends in conjugation, 1. in a, 2. e, 3. e, 4. i, as ama,\\nmone, lege, audi.\\nc) The imperfect subjunctive active, by the addition of wt,\\nso that it ends in the four conjugations in arem, erem, erem,\\nIrem, e. g. amarem, monerem, legerem, audirem.\\nd) The imperfect subjunctive passive, by the addition of\\nr, as in amarer, monerer, legerer, audirer.\\ne) The infinitive present passive, by changing e into i, e. g.\\namari, moneri, audiri, but in the third conjugation the whole\\ntermination ere is changed into i, as in legere, legi.\\nFrom the present indicative active are derived\\na) The present indicative passive, by the addition of r, as\\namor, moneor, leg or, audior.\\nb) The present subjunctive active, by changing the o into\\nem in the first conjugation, and in the three others into am\\nas amem, moneam, legam, audiam.\\nc) The present subjunctive passive, by changing the m of\\nthe present subjunctive active into r, as amer, monear, legar,\\naudiar.\\nd) The imperfect indicative active, by changing o into\\nabam in the first conjugation, in the second into bam, and\\nin the third and fourth into ebam. A change of the m into\\nr makes the imperfect indicative passive, e. g. amabam,\\namabar monebam, monebar legebam, legebar audiebam,\\naudiebar.\\ne) The first future active, by changing o into abo in the\\nfirst conjugation, in the second into bo, and in the third and\\nfourth into am. From this is formed the first future passive\\nby adding r in the first and second conjugations, and by\\nchanging m into r in the third and fourth e. g. laudabo,\\nlaudabor monebo, monebor legam, legar audiam, audiar.\\nf) The participle present active, by changing o in the\\nfirst conjugation into arts, in the second into ns, and in the\\nthird and fourth into ens e. g. laudo, laudans moneo, mo-\\nnens lego, legens audio, audiens. From this participle is\\nderived the participle future passive, by changing s into\\ndus e. g. amandus, monendus, legendus, audiendus and\\nthe gerund amandum, monendum, legendum, audiendum.\\nFrom the perfect indicative active are derived\\na) The pluperfect indicative, by changing i into eram:\\nlaudaveram, monueram, legeram, audiveram.\\nE 6", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0101.jp2"}, "102": {"fulltext": "84 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nb) The future perfect, by changing i into ero laudavero,\\nmonuero, legero, audivero.\\nc) The perfect subjunctive, by changing i into erim lau-\\ndaverim, monuerim, legerim, audiverim.\\nd) The pluperfect subjunctive, by changing i into issem\\n(originally essem) laudavissem, monuissem, legissem, audi-\\nvissem.\\ne) The perfect infinitive active, by changing i into isse\\n(originally esse) laudavisse, monuisse, legisse, audivisse.\\nFrom the supine are derived\\na) The participle perfect passive, by changing um into\\nus, a, um laudatus, a, um monitus, a, um lectus, a, um\\nauditus, a, um.\\nb) The participle future active, by changing um into urus,\\na, um laudaturus, a, um moniturus, a, um lecturus, a,\\num auditurus, a, um.\\nBy means of the former participle we form the tenses of\\nthe passive, which express a completed action and by means\\nof the participle future we may form a new conjugation ex-\\npressing actions which are to come. See Chap. XLIIL\\nCHAP. XLL\\nTHE VERB ESSE.\\n156.] The verb esse, to be, is called an auxiliary verb,\\nbecause it is necessary for the formation of some tenses of\\nthe passive voice. It is also called a substantive verb, be-\\ncause it is the most general expression of existence. Its con-\\njugation is very irregular, like the English lam. The supine\\nand gerund are wanting, but the inflection in the persons is\\nregular.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Sum, I am. Sing. Sim, 1 may be.\\nes, thou art. sis, thou mayst be.\\nest, he is. sit, he may be.\\nPlur. sumus, we are. Plur. simus, we may be.\\nestis, ye are. sltis, ye may be.\\nsunt, they are. sint, they may be.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0102.jp2"}, "103": {"fulltext": "THE VERB ESSE.\\n85\\nIndicative.\\nSing. Eram, I was.\\neras, thou wast.\\nerat, he was.\\nPlur. eramus, we were.\\neratis, ye were.\\nerant, they were.\\nSing. Ero, I shall be.\\neris, thou wilt be.\\nerit, he will be.\\nPlur. erimus, we shall be.\\neritis* ye will be.\\nerunt, they will be.\\nSing. Fui, I have been, or I was,\\nfuisti, thou hast been.\\nfuit, he has been.\\nPlur. fuimus, we have been.\\nfuistis, ye have been.\\n~TZ they have been.\\nfuere, J\\nSubjunctive.\\nImperfect.\\nSin\\nEssem, I might be.\\nesses, thou mightst be.\\nesset, he might be.\\nPlur. essemus, we might be.\\nessetis, ye might be.\\nessent, they might be.\\nFuture.\\nInstead of a subjunctive, the parti-\\nciple futurus is used with sim.\\nFuturus sim, sis, c. I may be\\nabout to be.\\nPerfect.\\nSing. Fuerim, I may have been.\\nfueris, thou mayst have been.\\nfuerit, he may have been.\\nPlur. fuerlmus, we may have been.\\nfuerltis, ye may have been.\\nfuerint, they may have been.\\nSing. Fueram, I had been.\\nfueras, thou hadst been.\\nfuerat, he had been.\\nPlur. fueramus, we had been.\\nfueratis, ye had been.\\nfuerant, they had been.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing.\\nFuissem, I should, or would\\nhave been.\\nfuisses, thou shouldst, c.\\nfuisset, he should, c.\\nPlur. fuissemus, we should, c.\\nfuissetis, ye should, See.\\nfuissent, they should, c.\\nFuture Perfect.\\nSing. Fuero, I shall have been.\\nfueris, thou wilt have been.\\nfuerit, he will have been.\\nfuerlmus, we shall have been.\\nfueritis, ye will have been.\\nfuerint, they will have been.\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing. Es, be thou.\\nFuture, Sing, Esto, thou shalt be.\\nNo Subjunctive.\\nesto, he shall be.\\nPlur. este, be ye.\\nPlur. estote, ye shall be.\\nsunto, they shall be.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0103.jp2"}, "104": {"fulltext": "86\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nInfinitive.\\nPresent, state not terminated, esse, to be.\\nPerfect, terminated, fuisse, to have been.\\nFuture, futurum (am, urn) esse, or fore, to be about to be.\\nParticiples.\\nPresent, not terminated (ens), being.\\nFuture, futurus, a, urn, one who is about to be.\\nNote. The compounds absum, adsum, desum, insum, inter sum, obsum,prae-\\nsum, subsum, super sum, have the same conjugation as sum. Prosum inserts\\na d when pro is followed by e e. g. prodes, prodest, c. The participle\\nens is not used, but appears in the two compounds absens and praesens.\\nCHAP. XLIL\\nTHE FOUR CONJUGATIONS.\\n157] I. ACTIVE VOICE.\\nFirst Conjugation.\\nIndicative.\\nSing. Am-o, I love.\\num-as, thou lovest.\\nam-at, he loves.\\nPlur. am-dmus, we love.\\nam-dtis, ye love.\\nam-ant, they love.\\nSing, am-dbam, I was loving,\\nor I loved.\\nam- abas.\\nam-abat.\\nPlur. am-abdmus.\\nam-abdtis.\\nam-abant.\\nSing, am-dbo, I shall love.\\nam-abis.\\nam-abit.\\nPlur. am-abimus.\\nam-abitis.\\nam-abunt.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Am-em, I may love.\\nam-es, thou mayst love.\\nam-et, he may love.\\nPlur. am- emits, we may love\\nam-etis, ye may love.\\nam-ent, they may love.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, am-drem, I might love.\\nam- ares,\\nam-aret.\\nPlur. am-aremus.\\nam-aretis.\\nam-arent\\nFuture.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0104.jp2"}, "105": {"fulltext": "THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 87\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, am-dvi, I have loved, or Sing, am-averim, I may have loved.\\nI loved.\\nam-avisti. am-averis.\\nam-avit. am-averit.\\nPlur. am-avimus. Plur. am-averlmus.\\nam-avistis. am-averltis.\\nam-averunt (e). am-averint.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, am-averam, I had loved. Sing, am-avissem, I might have loved.\\nam-averds. am-avisses.\\nam-averat. am-avisset.\\nPI r. am-averdmus. Plur. am-avissemus.\\nam-averatis. am-avissetis,\\n.am-averant, am-avissent.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, am-avero, I shall have loved.\\nam-averis,\\nam-averit,\\nPlur. am-averimus.\\nam-averltis,\\nam-averint.\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing. am-d 9 love thou. Plur. am-dte, love ye,\\nFuture, Sing, am-dto, thou shalt love. Plur. am-atote, ye shall love.\\nam-dto, he shall love. am-anto, they shall love,\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. (of an action still going on) am-are, to love.\\nPerf. and Pluperf. (of an action completed) am-avisse, to have loved.\\nFuture, am-aturum esse, to be about to love.\\nGerund.\\nGen. am-andi Dat. am-ando Ace. am-andum Abl. am-ando.\\nSupine.\\nam-atum am-atu.\\nParticiples.\\nPres. and Imperf. (of an action still going on) am-ans, loving.\\nFuture, am-aturus, about to love.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0105.jp2"}, "106": {"fulltext": "88 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSecond Conjugation.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Mon-eo, I advise. Sing. Mon-eam, I may advise.\\nmon-es. mon-eds.\\nmon-et. mon-eat.\\nPlur. mon-emus. Plur. mon-edmus.\\nmon-etis. mon-eatis.\\nmon-ent. mon-eant.\\nImperfect.\\nSing. mon-ebam, I was advising, Sing, mon-erem, I might advise,\\nor I advised.\\nmon-ebds. mon-eres.\\nmon-ebat. mon-eret.\\nPlur. mon-ebdmus. Plur. mon-eremus.\\nmon-ebatis. mon-eretis.\\nmon-ebant. mon-erent.\\nFuture.\\nSing, mon-ebo, I shall advise.\\nmon-ebis.\\nmon-ebit.\\nPlur. mon-ebimus.\\nmon-ebitis.\\nmon-ebunt.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, mon-iti, I have advised, or Sing, mon-uerim, I may have advised.\\nI advised.\\nmon-uisti. mon-ueris.\\nmon-uit. mon-uerit.\\nPlur. mon-uimus. Plur. mon-uerimus.\\nmon-uistis. mon-uerltis.\\nmon-uerunt (e). mon-uerint.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, mon-ueram, I had advised. Sing, mon-uissem, I should have ad-\\nmon-ueras. mon-uisses. [vised.\\nmon-uerat. mon-uisset.\\nPlur. mon-ueramus. Plur. mon-uissemus.\\nmon-uerdtis. mon-uissetis.\\nmon-uerant. mon-uissent.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, mon-uero, I shall have advised.\\nmon-ueris.\\nmon-uerit.\\nPlur. mon-uerimus.\\nmon-uerltis.\\nmon-uerint.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0106.jp2"}, "107": {"fulltext": "THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 89\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing, mon-e, advise thou. Plur. mon-ete, advise ye.\\nFuture, Sing, mon-eto, thou shalt advise. Plur. mon-etote, ye shall advise.\\nmon-eto, he shall advise. mon-enio, they shall advise.\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. mon-ere, to advise.\\nPerf. and. Pluperf. mon-uisse, to have advised.\\nFuture, mon-iturum esse, to be about to advise.\\nGerund.\\nen. mon-endi Dat. mon-endo Ace. mon-endum Abl. mon-endo.\\nSupine.\\nmon-itum mon-itu.\\nParticiples.\\nPres. and Imperf. mon-ens, advising.\\nFuture, mon-iturus, about to advise.\\nThird Conjugation.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Leg-o, I read. Sing. Leg-am, I may read.\\nleg-is. leg- as.\\nleg-it. leg-at.\\nPlur. hg-imus. Plur. leg-dmus.\\nleg-ids. leg-atis.\\nleg-unt. leg-ant.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, leg-ebam, I was reading, or Sing, leg-erem, I might read.\\nI read.\\nleg-ebds. leg-eres.\\nleg-ebat. leg-eret.\\nPlur. leg-ebdmus. Plur. leg-eremus,\\nleg-ebatis. leg-eretis.\\nleg-ebant. leg-erent.\\nFuture.\\nSing, leg-am, I shall read.\\nleg-es.\\nleg-et.\\nPlur. leg- emus.\\nleg-etis.\\nleg-ent.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0107.jp2"}, "108": {"fulltext": "90\\nLATIN GBAMMAR.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, leg-i, I have read, or I read. Sing, leg-erim, I may have read.\\nleg-isti, leg-eris.\\nleg-it. leg-erit.\\nPlur. leg-imus. Plur. leg-erlmus.\\nleg-istis. leg-erltis.\\nleg-erunt (e). leg-erint.\\nSing, leg-eram, I had read.\\nleg -eras.\\nleg-erat.\\nPlur. leg-erdmus.\\nleg-eratis.\\nleg-erant.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, leg-issem, 1 should have read.\\nleg-isset.\\nPlur. leg-isscmus.\\nleg-issetis.\\nleg-issent.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, leg-ero, I shall have read.\\nleg-eris.\\nleg-erit,\\nPlur. leg-erlmus.\\nleg-eritis.\\nleg-erint.\\nImperative.\\nPresgit, Sing, leg-e, read thou. Plur. leg-ite, read ye.\\nFuture, Sing, leg-ito, thou shalt read. Plur. leg-itote, ye shall read.\\nleg-ito, he shall read. leg-unto, they shall read.\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imp erf. leg- ere, to read.\\nPerf. and Pluperf. leg-isse, to have read.\\nFuture, lec-turum esse, to be about to read.\\nGerund.\\nGen. leg-endi Dat. leg-endo Ace. leg-endum Abl. leg-endo.\\nSupine.\\nlec-tum lec-tu.\\nParticiples.\\nPres. and Imperf. leg-ens, reading.\\nFuture? tectums, about to read.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0108.jp2"}, "109": {"fulltext": "THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS.\\n91\\nIndicative.\\nSing. Aud-io, I hear.\\naud-ls.\\naud-it.\\nPlur. aud-imus.\\naud-itis.\\naud- iunt.\\nFourth Conjugation*\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. And-iam, I may hear.\\naud-ids.\\naud-iat.\\nPlur. aud-idmus.\\naud-iatis.\\naud-iant.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, aud-iebam, I was hearing, Sing, aud-lrem, I might hear.\\nor I heard.\\naud-iebds.\\naud-ires.\\naud-iebat.\\naud-iret.\\nPlur. aud-iebdmus.\\nPlur\\naud-iremus.\\naud-iebdtis.\\naad-iretis.\\naud-iebant.\\nFuture.\\naud-irent.\\nSing\\naud-iam, I shall hear.\\naud-ies.\\naud-iet.\\nPlur\\naud-iemus.\\naud-ietis.\\naud ient.\\nPerfect.\\nSing.\\naud-lvi, I have\\nheard, or Sing.\\naud-iverim, I\\nmay\\nhave heard.\\nI heard.\\naud-ivisti.\\naud-iveris.\\naud-ivit.\\naud-iverit.\\nPlur\\naud-ivbnus.\\nPlur. aud-iverlmus.\\naud-ivistis.\\naud-iverltis.\\naud-iverunt (e).\\nPluperfect.\\naud-iverint.\\nSing.\\naud-iveram, I had heard\\nSing, aud-ivissem, I\\nmight have heard.\\naud-iverds.\\naud-ivisses.\\naud-iveraU\\naud-ivisset.\\nPlur.\\naud-iverdmus.\\nPlur. aud-ivissemus\\naud-iveratis.\\naud-ivissetis.\\naud-iverant.\\nand- iv is sent.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, aud-ivero, I shall have heard.\\naud-iveris.\\naud-iverit.\\nPlur. aud-iverlmus.\\naud-iverltis.\\naud-iverint.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0109.jp2"}, "110": {"fulltext": "92 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing, aud-i, hear thou. Plur. aud-lte, hear ye.\\nFuture, Sing, aud-tto, thou shalt hear. Plur. aud-itote, ye shall hear.\\naud-ito, he shall hear. aud-iunto, they shall hear.\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. aud-ire, to hear.\\nPerf and Pluperf. aud-ivisse, to have heard.\\nFuture, aud-iturum esse, to be about to hear.\\nGerund.\\nGen. aud-iendi Dat. aud-iendo; Ace. aud-iendwn Abl. aud-iendo.\\nSupine.\\naud-ltum aud-itu.\\nParticiples.\\nPres. Imperf. aud-iens, hearing.\\nFuture, aud-iturus, about to hear.\\n158.] II. PASSIVE VOICE.\\nFirst Conjugation.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Am-or, I am loved. Sing. Am-er, I may be loved.\\nam-dris (e). am-eris (e).\\nam-atur. am-etur.\\nPlur. am-amur, Plur. am-emur.\\nam-aminu am^emini.\\nam-antur. am-entur.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, am-dbar, I was being loved, Sing. am-arer, I might be loved,\\nor I was loved.\\nam-abdris (e). am-areris (e).\\nam-abatur. am-aretur.\\nPlur. am-abamur. Plur. am-aremur.\\nam-abamini. am-aremini.\\nam-abantur. am-arentur.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0110.jp2"}, "111": {"fulltext": "THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 93\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nFuture.\\nSing, am-dbor, I shall be loved.\\nam-aberis (e).\\nam-abitur.\\nPlur. am-abimur.\\nam-abimini.\\nam-abuntur.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, am-dtus (a, um) sum, I have Sing, am-dtus (a, um) sim, I may\\nbeen loved, or I was loved. have been loved.\\nam-atus es, am-atus sis.\\nam-atus est. am-atus sit.\\nPlur. am-ati (ae, a) sumus. Plur, am-ati (ae, a) simus.\\nam-ati estis. am-ati sitis.\\nam-ati sunt. am-ati suit.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, am-dtus (a, um) eram, I had Sing, am-atus (a, um) essem, I might\\nbeen loved. have been loved.\\nam-atus eras. am-atus esses.\\nam-atus erat. am-atus esset.\\nPlur. am-ati (ae, a) eramus. Plur. am-ati (ae, a) essemus.\\nam-ati eratis. am-ati essetis.\\nam-ati eranU am-ati essent.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, am-atus (a, um) ero, I shall have been loved.\\nam-atus eris.\\nam-atus erit.\\nPlur. am-ati (ae, a) erimus.\\nam-ati eritis.\\nam-ati erunt.\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing, am-are, be thou loved. Plur. am-amini, be ye loved.\\nFuture, Sing, am-ator, thou shalt be loved. PI. am-aminor, ye shall be loved.\\nam-ator, he shall beloved. am-antor, they shall be loved.\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. (of a passive state still going on), am-ari, to be loved.\\nPerf. and Pluperf. (of a state completed), am-dtum (am, um) esse, to\\nhave been loved.\\nFuture, am-dtum iri, to be about to be loved.\\nParticiples.\\nPerfect, am-dtus, a, um, loved.\\nIn dus (commonly called Future, or Future of Necessity), am-andus, a,\\num, deserving or requiring to be loved.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0111.jp2"}, "112": {"fulltext": "94\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSecond Conjugation.\\nIndicative.\\nSing. Mon-eor, I am advised.\\nmon-eris (e).\\nmon-etur.\\nPlur. mon-emur.\\nmon-emini.\\nmon-entur.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Mon-ear, I may be advised.\\nmon-edris (e).\\nmon-eutur.\\nPlur. mon-eamur.\\nmon-eamini.\\nmon-eantur.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, mon-ebar, I was being advised, Sing, mon-erer, I might be advised,\\nor I was advised.\\nmon-ebdris (e). mon-ereris (e).\\nmon-ebatur. mon-eretur.\\nPlur. mon-ebamur. Plur. mon-eremur.\\nmon-ebamini. mon-ereminL\\nmon-ebantur, mon-erentur.\\nFuture.\\nSing, mon-ebor, I shall be advised.\\nmon-eberis (e).\\nmon-ebitur.\\nPlur. mon-ebimur.\\nmon-ebimini.\\nmon-ebuntur.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, mon-itus (a, um) sum, I\\nhave been advised, or\\nI was advised.\\nmon-itus es.\\nmon-itus est.\\nPlur. mon-iti (ae, a) sumus.\\nmon-iti estis.\\nmon-iti sunt.\\nSing, mon-itus (a, \u00c2\u00abm) S2?ra, I may\\nhave been advised.\\nmon-itus sis.\\nmon-itus sit.\\nPlur. mon-iti (ae, a) simus.\\nmon-iti sitis.\\nmon-iti sint.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, mon-itus (a, um) eram, I\\nhad been advised.\\nmon-itus eras.\\nmon-itus erat.\\nPlur. mon-iti (ae, a) eramus.\\nmon-iti eratis.\\nmon-iti erant.\\nSing, mon-itus (a, \u00c2\u00abm) essem, I should\\nhave been advised.\\nmon-itus esses.\\nmon-itus esset.\\nPlur. mon-iti (ae, a) essemus.\\nmon-iti essetis.\\nmon-iti essent.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0112.jp2"}, "113": {"fulltext": "THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 95\\nIndicative. Subjunctive,\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, mon-itus (a, wri) ero, I shall have been advised.\\nmon-itus eris.\\nmon-itus erit.\\nPlur. mon-iti (ae, a) erimus.\\nmon-iti eritis.\\nmon-iti erunt.\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing, mon-ere, be thou advised. Plur. mon-emini, be ye advised.\\nFuture, Sing, mon-etor, thou shalt be Plur. mon-eminor, ye shall be\\nadvised. advised.\\nmon-etor, he shall be, c. mon-entor, they shall be, c.\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. mon-eri, to be advised.\\nPerf. and Pluperf. mon-itum (am, urn) esse, to have been advised.\\nFuture, mon-itum iri, to be about to be advised.\\nParticiples.\\nPerfect, mon-itus, advised.\\nIn dus (commonly called Future, or Future of Necessity), mon-endus,\\ndeserving or requiring to be advised.\\nThird Conjugation.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Leg-or, I am read. Sing. Leg-ar, I may be read.\\nleg-eris (e). leg-dris (e).\\nleg-itur. leg-atur.\\nPlur. leg-imur. Plur. leg-amur.\\nleg-imini. leg-amini.\\nleg-untur. leg-antur.\\nImperfect.\\nSing. leg-ebar, I was being read, Sing, leg-erer, I might be read,\\nor I was read.\\nleg-ebaris (e). leg-ereris (e),\\nleg-ebatur. leg-eretur.\\nPlur. leg-ebamur. Plur. leg-eremur.\\nleg-ebamini. leg-eremini.\\nleg-ebantur. leg-erentur.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0113.jp2"}, "114": {"fulltext": "96 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nFuture.\\nSing, leg-ar, I shall be read.\\nleg-eris (e).\\nleg-etur.\\nPlur. leg-emur.\\nleg-emini.\\nleg-entur.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, lec-tus (a, um) sum, I have Sing, lec-tus (a, um) sim, I may h c\\nbeen read, or I was read. been read.\\nlec-tus es. lec-tus sis.\\nlec-tus est. lec-tus sit.\\nPlur. lec-ti (ae, a) sumus. Plur. lec-ti (ae, a) sinius.\\nlec-ti estis. lec-ti sitis.\\nlec-ti sunt. lec-ti sint.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, lec-tus (a, um) eram, I had Sing, lec-tus (a, um) essem, I should\\nbeen read. have been read.\\nlec-tus eras. lec-tus esses,\\nlec-tus erat. lec-tus esset.\\nPlur. lec-ti (ae, a) eramus. Plur. lec-ti (ae, a) essemus.\\nlec-ti eraiis. lec-ti essetis.\\nlec-ti erant. lec-ti essent.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing, lec-tus (a, um) ero, I shall have been read.\\nlec-tus eris.\\nlec-tus erit.\\nPlur. lec-ti erimus.\\nlec-ti eritis.\\nlec-ti erunt\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing, leg-ere, be thou read. Plur. leg-imini, be ye read.\\nFuture, Sing, leg-itor, thou shalt be read. Plur. leg-iminor, ye shall be read.\\nleg-itor, he shall be read. leg-untor,they shall be read.\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. leg-i, to be read.\\nPerf. and Pluperf. lec-tum {am, um) esse, to have been read.\\nFuture, lec-tum iri, to be about to be read.\\nParticiples.\\nPerfect, lec-tus, read.\\nIn dus (commonly called Future, or Future of Necessity), leg-endus, de-\\nserving or requiring to be read.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0114.jp2"}, "115": {"fulltext": "THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 97\\nFourth Conjugation.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent,\\nSing. Aud-ior 9 1 am heard. Sing. Aud-iar, I may be heard.\\naud-lris (e). aud-idris (e).\\naud-ltur. aud-iatur.\\nPlur. aud-lmur. Plur. aud-iamur.\\naud-imini. audr-iamini.\\naud-iuntur. aud-iantur.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, aud-iebar, I was being Sing, aud-irer, I might be heard,\\nheard, or I was heard.\\naucLiebdris (e). aud-ireris (e\\\\\\naud-iebatur. aud-iretur.\\nPlur. aud-iebamur. Plur. aud-iremur.\\naud-iebamini. aud-iremini.\\naud-iebantur. aud-irentur.\\nFuture.\\nSing, aud-iar, I shall be heard.\\naud-ieris (e).\\naud-ietur.\\nPlur. aud-iemur.\\naudAemini.\\naud-ientur.\\nPerfect.\\nSing, aud-itus (a, um) sum, I have Sing. aud-itus (a, um)sim t I may have\\nbeen heard, or I was heard. been heard.\\naud-itus es. aud-itus sis.\\naud-itus est. aud-itus sit.\\nPlur. aud-iti (ae, a) sumus. Plur. aud-iti (ae 9 a) simus.\\naud-iti estis. aud-iti sitis.\\naud-iti sunt. aud-iti sint.\\nPluperfect.\\nSing, aud-itus (a, um) eram, I had Sing, aud-itus (a, um) essem, I might\\nbeen heard. have been heard.\\naud-itus eras. aud-itus esses,\\naud-itus erat. aud-itus esset.\\nPlur. aud-iti (ae, a) eramus. Plur. aud-iti (ae, a) essemus.\\naud-iti eratis. aud-iti essetis.\\naud-iti erant. aud-iti essent.\\nF", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0115.jp2"}, "116": {"fulltext": "98 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSecond Future, or Future Perfect.\\nSing. aud-itus (a, um) ero, I shall have been heard.\\naud-itus eris.\\naud-itus erit.\\nPlur. aud-lti (ae, a) erimus.\\naud-lti eritis.\\naud-lti erunt.\\nImperative.\\nPresent, Sing, aud-lre, be thou heard. Plur. aud-imini, be ye heard.\\nFuture, Sing, aud-ltor, thou shalt be Plur. aud-iminor, ye shall be\\nheard. heard. [be, c.\\naud-ltor, he shall be heard. aud-iuntor, they shall,\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. and Imperf. aud-lri, to be heard.\\nPerf. and Pluperf. aud-ltum {am, um) esse, to have been heard.\\nFuture, aud-ltum iri, to be about to be heard.\\nParticiples.\\nPerfect, aud-itus, heard.\\nIn dus (commonly called Future, or Future of Necessity), aud-iendus,\\ndeserving or requiring to be heard.\\nIII. DEPONENTS.\\n159.] The conjugation of deponents differs from the\\npassive only by the fact that it has both the participles\\nof the active and of the passive voice, that is, for all the\\nthree states of an action that in ns for an action not\\ncompleted that in us, a, um for an action completed and\\nthat in urus, a, um for one about to take place. The fourth\\nparticiple in ndus with a passive signification is an irregu-\\nlarity, and is used only in those deponents which have a\\ntransitive signification e. g. hortandus, one who should be\\nexhorted. Of deponents which have an intransitive mean-\\ning, e. g. loquiy this participle is used only sometimes, chiefly\\nin the neuter gender (often, but erroneously, called the ge-\\nrund), and in a somewhat different sense, e. g. loquendum\\nest, there is a necessity for speaking. It will be sufficient in\\nthe following table to give the first persons of each tense,\\nfor there is no difficulty, except that these verbs with a\\npassive form have an active meaning.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0116.jp2"}, "117": {"fulltext": "1st Conjug.\\nS. hort-or, I ex-\\nhort.\\nP. hort-amur.\\nS. hort-abar.\\nP.hort-abamur.\\nDEPONENTS.\\nA. Indicative.\\n2d Conjug. 3d Conjug.\\nPresent.\\nver-eor, I fear, sequ-or, I follow.\\nver-emur. sequ-imur.\\nver-ebar.\\nver-ebamur.\\nImperfect.\\nsequ-ebar.\\nsequ-ebamur.\\n99\\n4th Conjug.\\nbland-ior, I flatter,\\nbland-imur.\\nbland-iebar.\\nbland- iebamur.\\nS. hort-abor.\\nP. hort-abimur.\\nS. hort-atus (a,\\num) sum.\\nP. hort-ati (ae,\\na) surnus.\\nS. hort-atus (a,\\n?zm) eram.\\nP. hort-ati (ae,\\na) eramus.\\nS. hort-atus (a,\\num) ero.\\nP. hort-ati (ae,\\na) erimus.\\nver-ebor.\\nver-ebimur.\\nFirst Future.\\nseaw-ar.\\nsequ-emur.\\nPerfect.\\nver-itus (a, um) secu-tus (a, ww)\\nver-fti (ae, a) secw-tf (ae, a)\\nsumus. sumus.\\nPluperfect.\\nver-itus (a, \u00c2\u00abm) secu-tus (a, wtw)\\neram. erawi.\\nver-to (ae, a) sec^^ (ae, a)\\neramus. eramus.\\nFuture Perfect.\\nveritus (a, um) secu-tus (a, \u00c2\u00abm)\\nero. ero\\nver-iti (ae, a) secu-ti (ae, a)\\nerimus. erimus.\\nB. Subjunctive.\\nbland-iar.\\nbland-iemur.\\nbland-ltus (a, um)\\nsum.\\nbland-iti (ae, a) su-\\nmus.\\nbland-itus (a, um)\\neram.\\nbland-iti (ae, a)\\neramus.\\nbland-itus (a, um)\\nero.\\nbland-iti (ae, a) eri-\\nmus.\\nPresent.\\nS. hort-er.\\nP. hort-emur.\\nS. hort-drer.\\nP. hort-aremur.\\nS. hort-atus (a,\\num) sim.\\nP. hort-ati (ae,\\na) si?nus.\\nver-ear.\\nver-eamur.\\nver-erer.\\nver-eremur.\\nsequ-ar.\\nsequ-amur.\\nImperfect.\\nsequ-erer.\\nsequ-eremur.\\nPerfect.\\nver-itus (a, um) secu-tus (a, um)\\nsim. sim,\\nver-iti (ae, a) secu-ti (ae, a)\\nsimus. simus.\\nf 2\\nbland-iar.\\nbland-iamur.\\nbland-irer.\\nbland-iremur.\\nbland-itus (a, um)\\nsim.\\nbland-iti (ae, a) si-\\nmus.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0117.jp2"}, "118": {"fulltext": "100\\n1st Conjug.\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\n2d Conjug. 3d Conjug. 4tb Conjug,\\nPluperfect.\\nS. hort-atus (a, ver-itus (a, um) secu-tus (a, um) bland-itus (a, um)\\num) essem. essem. essem. essem.\\nP. hort-ati (ae, ver-iti (ae, a) secu-ti (ae, a) bland-iti (ae, a) es-\\nd)essemus. essemus. essemus. semus.\\nC. Imperative,\\nPresent.\\nS. 2. hort-are. ver-ere.\\nP. 2. hort-amini. ver-emini.\\nsequ-ere.\\nsequ-imini.\\nbland-ire.\\nbland-imini.\\nFuture.\\nS. 2. hort-ator. ver-e.or. sequ-itor. hland-ltor.\\n3. hort-ator. ver-etor. sequ-ltor. bland-ltor.\\nP. 2. (is wanting, but is supplied by the Future Indicative.)\\n3. hort-antor. ver-entor. sequ-untor. bland-iuntor.\\nD. Infinitive.\\nPresent and Imperfect.\\nhort-ari. ver-eri. sequ-i. bland-iru\\nPerfect and Pluperfect.\\nhort-atum (am, ver-itum (am, secu-tum (am, bland-itum (am,\\num) esse. um) esse. um esse. um) esse.\\nFuture.\\nhort-aturum (am, ver-iturum (am, secu-turum (am, bland-iturum (am,\\num) esse.\\num) esse.\\nGen. hort-andi. ver-endi.\\nDat. hort-ando. ver-endo.\\nAce. hort-andum. ver-endum.\\nAbl. hort-ando, ver-endo.\\num) esse.\\nE. Gerund.\\nsequ-endi.\\nsequ-endo.\\nsequ-endum.\\nsequ-endo.\\num) esse.\\nbland-iendi.\\nbland-iendo.\\nbland-iendum.\\nbland-iendo.\\nF. Participles.\\nPresent and Imperfect.\\nhort-ans. ver-ens. sequ-ens. bland-iens.\\nPerfect and Pluperfect.\\nhort-atus, a, um. ver-itus, a, um. secu-tus, a, um. bland-itus, a, um.\\nFuture.\\nhort-aturus, a, um. ver-iturus, a, um. secu-turus, a, um. bland-iturus, a, um.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0118.jp2"}, "119": {"fulltext": "REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 101\\n1st Conjug. 2d Conjug. 3d Conjug. 4th Con jug.\\nFuture, with Passive Signification.\\nhort-andus, a, um. ver-endus, a, um. sequ~endus a,um. bland-iendus^a^iun.\\nG. Supine.\\n1. hort-atum. ver-itum. secu-tum. bland-xtum.\\n2. hort-atu. ver-itu. secu-tu. bland-itu.\\nCHAP. XLIH.\\nREMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS.\\n160.] 1. In the terminations avi, evi, and ivi of the\\ntenses expressing a completed action, viz. of the perfect and\\npluperfect, indicative and subjunctive, and of the future per-\\nfect, as well as of the infinitive perfect active, a syncopation\\noften takes place.\\na) In the first conjugation the v is dropped and the vowels\\na-i and a-e are contracted into a long a. This is the case\\nwherever avi is followed by an s, or ave by an r; e. g.\\namavisti, amasti amavissem, amassem; amavisse, amasse;\\namaverunt, amarunt amaverim, amarim amaveram, ama-\\nram; amavero, amaro, c.\\nb) The termination evi in the second and third conju-\\ngations is treated in the same manner e. g. neo, I spin,\\nnevi, nesti, nestis, nerunt Thus we often find complessem,\\ndettram, and in the third conjugation consuerunt for con-\\nsueverunt, quiessem, decressem, decresse for decrevisse. The\\ntermination ovi however is contracted only in novi, novisse,\\nwith its compounds, and in the compounds of moveo, movi\\ne. g. norunt, nosse, cognoram, cognoro, com?nossem.\\nc) In the fourth conjugation ivi is frequently contracted\\nbefore s; hence instead of audivisse, audivisti, andivissem,\\nwe find audisse, audist% audissem. In those forms where\\ni and e meet, the v is frequently thrown out e. g. audiertcnf,\\ndesierunty definieram, quaesieram.\\n162.] 2. The e in the termination of the imperfect of\\nthe fourth conjugation is sometimes thrown out, e. g. nvtri-\\nbam. lenibam, scibam, largibar, for nutrieba?n, leniebam,\\nsciebam, largiebar, and the future of the same conjugation\\nf 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0119.jp2"}, "120": {"fulltext": "102 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nis formed in ibo instead of iam e. g. scibo, servibo, for\\nsciam, serviam but these contractions are antiquated,\\nand are retained only in the irregular verb ire.\\n163.] 3. For the third person plural of the perfect\\nactive in erunt there is in all the conjugations another form,\\nere.\\n164.] 4. The four verbs dicer e, ducere, facer e, and\\nferre, usually reject the e in the imperative hence we say\\ndie, due, fac, fer, and so also in their compounds, as educ,\\neffer, perfer, calefac, with the exception of those compounds\\nof facer -e which change a into i; e. g. confice, perfice.\\nOf scire the imperatives sci and scite are not in use, and\\ntheir place is supplied by the imperative future scito, scitote.\\n165.] 5. The quantity of the i in the terminations ri~\\nmus and ritis, in the future perfect and the perfect subjunc-\\ntive, is uncertain. The poets frequently use it long.\\n166.] 6. Instead of the termination ris in the second\\nperson in the passive, re is also used, especially in the present\\nand imperfect subjunctive, and in the imperfect and future\\nindicative, as amere, moneare, loquare, audiare amarere,\\namabare, amabere, monerere, loquerere, c. But, generally\\nspeaking, these forms do not occur in the present indicative.\\n167 -3 7. The participle future passive of the third and\\nfourth conjugations (including the deponents) is formed also\\nin undus instead of endus, especially when i precedes. In the\\nverb potior, potiundus is the usual form.\\n168.] 8. The conjugatio periphrastica, or the conjuga-\\ntion by circumlocution, is formed by means of the two parti-\\nciples future, in the active and passive, and of the verb esse,\\nfor a conjugation made up of the participle present and esse\\ndoes not occur in Latin, (e. g. amans sum would be the same\\nas amo,) and the combinations of the participle perfect passive\\nwith sum, sim, eram, essem, ero, esse, are considered as a part\\nof the ordinary conjugation of a verb in the passive voice, as\\nfor example amatus eram, which is the pluperfect passive of\\namo. But it must be observed, that in the conjugation of the\\npassive the perfects of esse are sometimes used instead of the\\nabove-mentioned forms sum, eram, ero, c. Amatum fuisse,\\ntherefore, is equal to amatum esse as an infinitive perfect\\npassive amatus fueram is equivalent to amatus eram, and\\namatus fuero to amatus ero. Amatus fuero, in particular, is\\nused so frequently for amatus ero, that it may be looked\\nupon as the ordinary future perfect passive.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0120.jp2"}, "121": {"fulltext": "REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 103\\n169.] But by the combination of the participle future\\nactive with the tenses of esse, a really new conjugation is\\nformed, denoting an intention to do something. This inten-\\ntion may arise either from the person s own will, or from out-\\nward circumstances, so that, e. g., scripturus sum may either\\nmean I have a mind to write, or I am to write, or I have\\nto write. The former sense is also expressed by I am on\\nthe point of writing, or I am about to write, and this sig-\\nnification is carried through all the tenses of esse*\\nScripturus sum, I am about Scripturus fui, I was or have\\nto write. been about to write.\\nScripturus eram, I was about Scripturus fuer am, I had been\\nto write. about to write.\\nScripturus ero, I shall be Scripturus fuer o, I shall have\\nabout to write. been about to write.\\nThe subjunctive occurs in the same manner.\\nScripturus sim, Scripturus fuerim.\\nScripturus essem. Scripturus fuissem.\\nScripturus sim and scripturus essem serve at the same time\\nas subjunctives to the future scribam; but scripturus fuerim\\nand scripturus fuissem are not used as subjunctives to the\\nfuture perfect, scripsero. The infinitive scripturum fuisse\\ndenotes an action to which a person was formerly disposed,\\nand answers to the English I should have written, so that\\nin hypothetical sentences it supplies the place of an infinitive\\nof the pluperfect subjunctive e. g. Pollio Asinius Caesar em\\nexistimat suos rescripturum et correcturum commentarios\\nfuisse, that is, that he would have re-written and corrected,\\nif he had lived longer. The infinitive with esse likewise origin-\\nally denotes an intention scripturum esse, to intend writing,\\nor to be on the point of writing but it then assumes, in ordi-\\nnary language, the nature of a simple infinitive future, for\\nwhich reason it is incorporated in the table of conjugations.\\nFor the particulars, see the Syntax, Chap. LXXVI.\\n170.] The participle future passive expresses (in the\\nnominative) the necessity of suffering an action, and in combi-\\nnation with the tenses of esse it likewise forms a new and\\ncomplete conjugation {tempora necessitatis) e. g. amandus\\nsum, I must be loved amandus eram, it was necessary for\\nme to be loved, and so on with all the tenses of esse. Its\\nneuter combined with esse and the dative of .a person ex-\\nF 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0121.jp2"}, "122": {"fulltext": "104 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\npresses the necessity of performing the action on the part of\\nthat person, and may likewise be carried through all the\\ntenses, as,\\nmihi, tibi, illi scribendum est, mihi scribendum fuit, I have\\nI, thou, he must write. been, or was obliged to write.\\nmihi scribendum erat, I was mihi scribendum fuerat, I had\\nobliged to write. been obliged to write.\\nmihi scribendum erit, I shall mihi scribendum fuerit, I shall\\nbe obliged to write. have been obliged to write.\\nAnd so also in the subjunctive and infinitive mihi scri-\\nbendum esse mihi scribendum fuisse.\\nLIST OF VERBS\\nWHICH ARE\\nIRREGULAR IN THE FORMATION OF THEIR\\nPERFECT AND SUPINE,\\nCHAP. XLIV.\\nFIRST CONJUGATION.\\nR\\n171.] The irregularity of the verbs of this conjugation\\nconsists chiefly in their taking ui in the perfect, and itum in\\nthe supine, like verbs of the second the i, however, is\\nsometimes thrown out. It will be seen from the following\\nlist that some verbs, in some form or other, again incline\\ntowards a regular formation of their tenses.\\nCrepo, crepui, crepitum, make a noise, rattle, creak.\\nCompounds: concrepo, make an intense noise; discrepo, differ; tn-\\nerepo, chide, rattle.\\nCiibo, cubuiy cubitum, cubare, lie.\\nCompounds accicbo, recline at table excubo, keep watch incubo,\\nlie upon recubo, lie upon the back secubo, lie apart, and some others.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0122.jp2"}, "123": {"fulltext": "FIRST CONJUGATION. 105\\nWhen the compounds take an m before b, they are conjugated after the\\nthird, but keep their perfect and supine in ui, itum. (See 191.)\\nDomo, ui, itum, tame, subdue.\\nEdomo and perdomo strengthen the meaning.\\nSono, ui, itum, resound. (Participle sonatarus.)\\nConsono, agree in sound dissono, disagree in sound persono, sound\\nthrough resono, resound.\\nTono, ui, (itum,) thunder.\\nAttono (active), strike with astonishment irttono, commonly intran-\\nsitive, make a sound circumtono.\\nVeto, ui, itum, forbid.\\nFrico, fricui, fricatum, and frictum, rub.\\nDefrico, infrico, perfrico, refrico, are conjugated in the same way.\\nMico, ui, (without supine.) dart out, glitter.\\nErnico, ui, atum, dart forth rays but dimico, fight, makes dimicavi,\\natum.\\nSeco, ui, sectum, cut. (Part, secaturus.)\\nDeseco, reseco, cut off; disseco, cut in parts.\\nJuvo,juvi, support assist. (Part.juvaturus.)\\nSo also the compound adjuvo, adjuvi, adjutum, participle cKlju unts\\nand adjuvaturus.\\nLdvo, lavi, lavatum, lautum, lotum, lavare, wash, or bath\\nNeco, kill, is regular but from it are formed, with the same\\nmeaning, eneco, avi, atum, and enecui, enectum the par-\\nticiple is usually enectus.\\nFrom Plico, fold, are formed applico, avi, atum, and ui, itum\\nso explico, avi, atum, unfold, explain implico, implicate.\\nThe perfect ui and the supine atum are most common.\\nBut those derived from nouns in plex form the perf. and\\nsup. regularly supplico, duplico, multiplico.\\nPoto, drink, is regular, except that the supine usually, in-\\nstead of potatum, is potum, whence potus, which is both\\nactive and passive, having been drunk, and having drunk.\\nCompounds, appbtus, active and epotus, passive.\\nDo, dedi, datum, dare, give.\\nCircumdo, surround pes sundo, ruin satisdo, give security venv.ndo*\\nsell are formed like do. The other compounds addo, condo, reddo,\\nbelong to the third conjugation. (See 187.)", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0123.jp2"}, "124": {"fulltext": "106\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSto, steti, stdtum, stare, stand.\\nThe compounds have iti in the perfect e. g. adsto, stand near cow-\\nsto, consist of; exsto, exist or am visible insto, insist; obsto, hinder;\\npersto, persevere praesto, surpass ?*esto, remain over and above. Only\\nthose compounded with a preposition of two syllables retain eti in the\\nperfect, viz. antesto, circumsto, intersto, supersto. The supine does not\\nexist in all the compounds, but wherever it is found it is dtum. Praesto\\nhowever has praestitum and praestaturus.\\nThe active verbs juro and coeno have a participle with a\\npassive form, but an active signification juratus (with the\\ncompounds conjuratus and injuratus), one who has sworn\\nand coenatuSy one who has dined.\\nCHAP. XLV.\\nSECOND CONJUGATION.\\n172.] The irregularity of verbs of the second conjugation\\nconsists partly in their being defective in their forms, and\\npartly in their forming the perfect and supine, or one of them,\\nlike verbs of the third conjugation. With regard to the first\\nirregularity, there are a great many verbs in this conjugation\\nwhich have no supine, that is, which not only have no parti-\\nciple perfect passive (which cannot be a matter of surprise,\\nsince their meaning does not admit of it), but also no parti-\\nciple future active. The regular form of the perfect is ui,\\nand of the supine itum but some verbs throw out the short\\ni in the supine and all verbs which in the present have a\\nv before eo undergo a sort of contraction, since, e. g., we\\nfind cdvi, cautum, instead of cavui, cavitum, from caveo, but\\nthis can scarcely be considered as an irregularity, since v\\nand u was only one letter with the Romans. Respecting the\\nlengthening of the vowel in dissyllabic perfects, see 18.\\nWe shall subjoin a list of the regular verbs of this conju-\\ngation as exercises for the beginner, confining ourselves to\\nthe form of the present.\\nCaleo, am warm.\\nInchoat. calesco.\\nCdreo, am without.\\nJDebeo, owe.\\nDoleo, feel pain.\\nHabeo, have\\nCompounds adhibeo, cohibeo,\\nc, a being changed into i.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0124.jp2"}, "125": {"fulltext": "SECOND CONJUGATION. 107\\nJaceo, lie comp. adjaceo. Pareo, obey (appear).\\nLiceo, am to be sold. Compound appdreo, appear.\\nNot to be confounded with the Pldceo, please.\\nimpersonal licet, it is permitted. Praebeo, offer, afford.\\nSee Chap. LX. Tdceo, am silent.\\nMereo, merit. Terreo, terrify.\\nMoneo, admonish. Vdleo, am well.\\nNo ceo, injure.\\nTo these regular verbs we may first add:\\n173t a Those which make the Perfect in vi instead of\\nvui.\\nCaveo, cavi, cautum, cavere, take care.\\nFaveo, favi, fautum, am favourable.\\nFoveo, fovi, fotum, cherish.\\nMoveo, movi, motum, move.\\nCommoveo and permoveo strengthen the meaning amoveo and sub-\\nmoveo, remote admoveo, bring to promoveo, bring forwards removeo,\\nbring back, or remove.\\nPaveo, pavi, (no supine,) dread.\\nThe compound inchoat. expavesco, expavi, is more commonly used,\\nespecially in the perfect, than the simple verb.\\nVoveo, vovi, votum, vow devoveo, devote with imprecation.\\nFerveo, fervi, smdferbui, (no supine,) glow, am hot.\\nThe inchoatives of the third conjugation effervesco, refervesco, and\\nconfervesco, have more frequently bui in the perfect.\\nConniveo, nivi, and nixi, (no supine,) close the eyes.\\n174.] b) Those which make the Perfect in evi instead\\nofm.\\nDeleo, delevi, deletum, extinguish, destroy.\\nFleo, flevi, fletum, weep.\\nNeo, neviy netum, spin.\\nF6", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0125.jp2"}, "126": {"fulltext": "108 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n(From Pleo), compleo, complevi, completum, fill up expleo,\\nimpleo.\\n(From oleo, grow,) we have the compounds: aboleo, abolish;\\nabolesco, cease adoleo, adolesco, grow up exoleo or exo-\\nlesco and obsoleo or obsolesco, grow obsolete all of which\\nhave evi in the perfect but the supine of aboleo is aboli-\\ntum, of adolesco, adidtum, and the rest have etum exole-\\ntum, obsoletum. Besides abolitum, however, there exist\\nonly the adjectives adultus, exoletus, obsoletus.\\n175.] c) Those which throw out the short i in the\\nSupine.\\nDoceo, docui, doctum, teach.\\nCompounds edoceo and perdoceo f strengthen the meaning dedoceo,\\nteach otherwise.\\nTeneo, tenui, (tentum, rare,) hold, keep.\\nAbstineo, abstain attineo, keep occupied by or at a thing contineo,\\nkeep together detineo, keep back distineo, keep asunder retineo, re-\\ntain sustineo, keep upright. All these have in the supine tentum.\\nPertineo, belong to, has no supine.\\n31isceo, miscuiy mixtum or mistum, mix.\\nCompounds are, admisceo, commisceo, immisceo, permisceo.\\nTorreo, torrui, tostum, roast.\\nTo these we may add\\nCenseo, censui, censum (participle also censitus), estimate,\\nbelieve.\\nPercenseo, enumerate, without supine. Of accenseo, reckon with, we\\nfind accensus of succenseo, am angry, succensurus and recenseo, ex-\\namine, makes both recensum and recensitum.\\n176.] d) Those which make the Perject regularly in ui,\\nbut have no Supine.\\nArceo, arcui, arcere, keep off.\\nBut the compounds coerceo, coerce exerceo, exercise have a supine\\nin itum.\\n1\\nCalleo, have a hard skin, am skilled in (cattidus). f", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0126.jp2"}, "127": {"fulltext": "SECOND CONJUGATION. 109\\nf\\nCandeo, shine, glow (candidus).\\nJEgeo, want. Compound, indigeo.\\n(From mineo\\\\ emzneo, stand forth.\\nFloreo, flourish.\\nFrondeo, have foliage effrondui.\\nHorreo, shudder, am horrified (korridus).\\nCompounds abhorreo, and a number of inchoatives, as horresco,\\nperh-orresco.\\nLangueo, am languid (Janguidus).\\nLateo, am concealed.\\nCompounds interlateo, perlateo, sublateo.\\nMddeo, am wet (madidus).\\nJYiteOy shine {nitidus).\\nCompounds eniteo, interniteo, praeniteo.\\nOleo, smell.\\nCompounds: aboleo and redoleo, have the smell of; suboleo t smell a\\nlittle.\\nPalleo, am pale.\\nPdteo, am open.\\nRigeo, am stiff (rigidus).\\nliubeo, am red (rubidus).\\nSileo, am silent.\\nSorbeo, sorbui, sip.\\nCompounds absorbeo and exsorbeo.\\nSordeo, am dirty (sordidus).\\nSplendeo, am splendid (splendidus).\\nStudeo, endeavour, study.\\nStupeo, am startled, astonished (stupidus).\\nTimeo, fear (timidus).\\nTorpeo, am torpid.\\nTumeo, swell, am swollen {tumidus)\\nVigeo, am animated.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0127.jp2"}, "128": {"fulltext": "110 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nVireo, am green or nourish.\\nBesides these, there is a number of similar intransitive\\nverbs which occur more rarely, and chiefly in the form of\\ninchoatives. (See 204.) Compare 235. respecting their\\nderivation from adjectives.\\nThe following are really irregular verbs, and follow the\\nanalogy of the third conjugation\\n177 1- Verbs which make the Perfect in si and the\\nSupine in sum.\\nArdeOy arsi, arsum, ardere* burn.\\nHaereo, haesi, haesum, cleave.\\nCompounds adhaereo, cohaereo, inhaereo.\\nJiibeo, jussi, jussum, command.\\nMdneo, mansi, mansum, remain. (But mano, as, flow).\\nPermaneo (permdnes), wait remaneo, remain behind.\\nMulceo, mulsi, mulsum, stroke, caress.\\nThe compounds demulceo and permulceo strengthen the meaning.\\nMulgeo, mulsi, mulsum, milk.\\nRideo, risi, risum, laugh.\\nCompounds arrideo (arrldes), smile upon or please derideo and\\nirrideo, laugh at, scorn; subrideo, smile.\\nSuadeo, suasi, suasum, advise.\\nDissuadeo, dissuade persuadeo, persuade.\\nTergeo, tersi, tersu?n, tergere, wipe is used also as a verb of\\nthe third conjugation tergo, tersi, tersum, tergere.\\n178.] 2. Verbs which make the Perfect in si, but have\\nno Supine.\\nft Algeo, alsi, algere, shiver with cold.\\nFidgeo, fidsi, fulgere, shine, am bright.\\nTurgeo, tursi, swell.\\nUrgeo or urgueo, ursi, press.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0128.jp2"}, "129": {"fulltext": "SECOND CONJUGATION. Ill\\n3. Verbs with the Perfect in si and the Supine in turn.\\nIndulgeo, indulsi, indultum, indulge.\\nTorqueo, torsi, tortum, twist.\\nCompounds contorqueo, twist together distorqueo, twist away ex-\\ntorqueo, wrest out or from.\\n4. Verbs with the Perfect in xi and the Supine in turn.\\nAugeo, auxi, auctum, increase.\\nLuceo, luxi, lucere, shine has no supine.\\nLugeo, luxi, lugere, mourn has no supine.\\nFrlgeo, frixi, frigere, am cold has no supine.\\n179.] 5. Verbs with the Perfect in i and the Supine\\nin sum.\\nPrandeo, prandi, pransum, dine. The participle pransus\\nhas an active signification one who has dined.\\nSedeo, sedi, sessum, sit.\\nAssideo (assides), sit by desideo, sit down circumsedeo or circum-\\nsideo, surround insideo, sit upon supersedeo, do without possideo,\\npossess dissideo, dissent praesideo, preside resideo, settle down. The\\nlast three have no supine.\\nVideo, vidi, visum, see.\\nInvideo (invides), envy pervideo, see through praevideo, foresee\\nprovideo, provide.\\nStrideo, strldi, without supine.\\n6. Verbs with a Reduplication in the Perfect.\\nMordeo, momordi, morsum, bite.\\nPendeo, pependi, pensum, am suspended.\\nDependeoy depend, and impendeo, soar above, am impending, lose the\\nreduplication.\\nSpondeo, spopondi, sponsum, vow.\\nDespondeo, despondi, promise respondeo, respondi, answer, are with-\\nout the reduplication.\\nTondeo, totondi, tonsum, shear.\\nThe compounds lose the reduplication, as attondeo, detondeo*", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0129.jp2"}, "130": {"fulltext": "112 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n180.] 7. Verbs without Perfect and Supine.\\nAveo, desire.\\nCalveo, am bald, (calvus).\\nCdneo, am grey (canus).\\nFlaveo, am yellow (flavus).\\nFoeteo, stink (foetidus).\\nUebeo, am dull, stupid (hebes).\\nHumeo, am damp {humidus).\\nLiveo, am pale or envious (lividus).\\n{Mined) immineo, to be imminent, threatening. Promineo,\\nam prominent.\\nMaereo, mourn (maestus).\\nPolleo, am strong.\\nPenideo, shine, smile.\\nScateo, gush forth Scatere in Lucretius).\\nSqudleo, am dirty (squalidus).\\nVegeo, am gay (vege tus).\\nCieo, ciere, is the same word as the rare and obsolete cio,\\ncire, stir up both make the perfect civi, according to the\\nfourth conjugation in the supine they differ in quantity,\\ncieo making citum, and cio, citum.\\nNote. In the compounds too, e. g. co?tcieo, excieo, the forms of the\\nsecond and fourth conjugation cannot be separated but in the signifi-\\ncation of to call, the forms of the fourth are preferred, e. g. imperf.\\ncibam, cirem infinit. ciri the participles concitus, excitus, and incitus*\\nsignify excited; whereas excitus means called out. Percieo and\\nincieo retain the signification of to excite; but acclre, to call towards,\\nsummon or invite (of which the present indicative does not. occur),\\nhas only accitus. Derived from citum are cito, quick the frequenta-\\ntive citare, and hence excito, inclto, and suscito.\\n181.] 8. Semideponents. (See above 148.)\\nAudeo, ausus sum, venture. (Partic. future ausurus.)\\nThe ancient future subjunctive ausim ausis, ausit, ansint, are rem\\nnants of the obsolete perfect ausi, and are contractions from auserim.", "height": "4091", "width": "2486", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0130.jp2"}, "131": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 113\\nGaudeo, gavisus sum, rejoice.\\nSoleo, solitus sum, am accustomed (to do something).\\nThe impersonal compound assolet, signifies it usually happens.\\nCHAP. XLVI.\\nTHIRD CONJUGATION.\\n182.] In the list of verbs of this conjugation it is still\\nmore necessary, than in the preceding one, to include those\\nverbs which, according to Chapter XL., form their per-\\nfect and supine regularly. We divide them into several\\nclasses according to the characteristic letter which precedes\\nthe o in the present.\\n1. Verbs which have a Voivel before o including those in vo.\\nThe following have the Perfect and Supine regular\\nAcuo, acui, acutum, sharpen.\\nExacuo and peracuo strengthen the meaning praeacuo, sharpen at\\nthe end.\\nArguo, accuse, convict of (perf. passive in the latter sense\\nusually convictus, from convincere),\\nCoarguo, the same redarguo, refute a charge.\\nImbuo, to dip, imbue.\\nInduo, put on exuo, strip off.\\nLuo (participle luiturus), pay, atone for.\\nAhluo and eluo, wash off; polluo, defile diluo, refute are derived\\nfrom another luo (lavo) and all make the supine in liitum.\\nMinuo, lessen.\\nComminuo, deminuo, diminuo, imminuo, perminuo, strengthen the\\nmeaning.\\n(Nuo, nod, does not occur from it are formed)\\nAbnuo, refuse annuo, assent innuo, allude, or refer to renuo, de-\\ncline all of which have no supine abnuo alone has a participle future,\\nabnuiturus.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0131.jp2"}, "132": {"fulltext": "114 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nRuo (supine ruitum ruiturus at least is derived from it;\\nrutum occurs only in compounds), fall.\\nDiruo, diriii, dirutum, destroy obruo, overwhelm proruo, rush for-\\nwards. Corruo, fall down, and irruo, rush on, have no supine.\\nSpuo, spit.\\nConspuo, spit on despuo, reject with disgust.\\nStatuo, establish.\\nConstituo and i?istituo, institute restituo, re-establish substituo,\\nestablish instead of; destituo, abandon.\\nSternuo, sneeze (without supine) the frequentative sternuto\\nis more commonly used.\\nSuo, sew.\\nConsuo, sew together dissuo and resuo, unsew.\\nTribuo, allot to.\\nAttribuo, the same distribuo, divide contribuo, contribute.\\nSolvo, solvi, solutum, loosen.\\nAbsolvo, acquit dissolvo, dissolve exsolvo, release persolvo, pay.\\nVolvo, roll (frequentative voluto).\\nEvolvo, unroll involvo, roll up pervolvo, read through.\\nThe following are without a Supine\\nCongruo, congrui, agree, and ingruo, penetrate. The simple\\nverb does not exist.\\nMetuo, metui, fear. Timeo is likewise without a supine.)\\nPluo^ pluvi, usually impersonal, it rains. Comp. impluo,\\nimpluvi, or implui. Compluo and perpluo do not occur in\\nthe perfect.\\nThe following are irregular\\n183.] Capio, cepi, captum, caper e, take hold of.\\nAccipio, receive excipio, receive as a guest, succeed recipio, recover\\nsuscipio, undertake decipio, deceive percipio, comprehend praecipio,\\ngive a precept.\\nFacio, feci, factum, do, make.\\nArefacio, dry up assuefacio and consuefacio, accustom calefacio and\\ntepefacio, warm frigefacio, cool labefacio, make to totter patefacio,", "height": "4098", "width": "2493", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0132.jp2"}, "133": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 115\\nopen satisfacio, satisfy. These have in the passive -fio. -factus sum,\\n-fieri. But those which change a into I form their own passive in -fi-\\ncior, and make the supine in -fectum officio, affect conficio and perfi-\\ncio, complete deficio, fall off, am wanting interficio, kill proficio,\\nmake progress reficio, revive, repair officio, stand in the way, injure.\\nOther compounds of facio follow the first conjugation amplifico,\\nsacrifico, and the deponents gratificor, ludificor.\\nJdcio, jeci, j actum, throw.\\nThe compouuds change a into t, and in the supine into e. Abjicio,\\nthrow away adjicio, add dejicio, throw down; ejicio, throw out injicio,\\nthrow in; objicio, throw against r ejicio, throw back; transjicio or tra-\\njicio, throw or carry across.\\n184.] The following have x in the Perfect\\n(From the obsolete lacio, entice, of which lacto is the fre-\\nquentative), allicio, exi, ectum, allure illicio, entice in\\npellicio, lead astray but elicio makes elicui, elicitum, draw\\nout.\\n(From specio, xi, ctum, see, of which the frequentative is\\nspecto) aspicio, exi, ectum, look on conspicio, the same\\ndespicio, look down, despise dispicio and perspicio,\\nunderstand inspicio, look into respicio, look back\\nsuspicio, look up, reverence.\\nFluo, fiuxi, fiuctum, flow.\\nAffluo, flow in confluo, flow together effluo, flow out interfluo,\\nflow between.\\nStruo, struxi, s true turn, build, pile.\\nConstruo and exstruo, build up destruo, pull down instruo, set in\\norder.\\nVivo, vixi, victum, live.\\n185.] Other Irregularities.\\nFodio, fodi, fossum, dig.\\nEffodio, dig out confodio and perfodio, dig, pierce through suffodio,\\nundermine.\\nFugio, fugi, fugitum, flee.\\nAufugio and ejfugio, flee away, escape confugio and perfugio, take\\nrefuge.\\nCupio, -ivi, -Hum, desire.\\nJDiscupio, percupio, concupio, strengthen the meaning.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0133.jp2"}, "134": {"fulltext": "116 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nRdpio, rapui, raptum, rob, snatch.\\nArripio, arripui, arreptum^ seize abripio and eripio, snatch away\\nderipio, plunder surripio, steal clandestinely.\\nPdrio, peperi, partum, bring forth. (But the particip. fat.\\nact. pariturus.)\\nQuatio, (quassi is not found,) quassum, shake.\\nConditio, ussi, ussum, shake violently dzscutio, shake asunder\\nexcutio, shake out, off (fig. examine) incutio, drive into percutio,\\nstrike repercutio, rebound.\\nSapio, ivi, and ui 9 (no supine,) am wise.\\nDesipio, am foolish resipio, have a taste of, or become, wise again.\\n(From the obsolete present coepio,) coepi and coeptus sum,\\ncoeptum, (coepere,) have begun.\\nCHAP. XLVIL\\n186.] 2. VERBS IN DO AND TO.\\nThe following are regular\\nClaudo, clausi, clausum, claudere, close.\\nConcludo, shut up, conclude excludo and secludo, shut out includo,\\nshut in.\\nDivido, divisi, divlsum, divide.\\nLaedo, injure.\\nAUido, strike against illido, strike upon collldo, strike together\\nelldo, strike out.\\nLildo, sport.\\nColludo, play with alludo, play upon eludo, deludo, and illudo,\\nridicule.\\nPlaudo, si, sum, clap.\\nApplaudo, applaud. The other compounds (with a different pro-\\nnunciation) have -odo, ~osi, -osum; as explodo, explode; complodo, clap\\nthe hands supplodo, stamp with the feet.\\nBddo, shave, scrape so in abrddo, circumrado, derddo,\\nerddo corrado, scrape together.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0134.jp2"}, "135": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 117\\nRodo, gnaw.\\nAbrodo and derodo, gnaw off; arrodo, nibble circumrodo, nibble all\\nround; perrodo, gnaw through.\\nTrudo, thrust, with its compounds detrudo, thrust down\\nextrudo y thrust out; protrudo, thrust forwards.\\nVado, (no perfect or supine,) go.\\nBut evddo, evasi, evasum, escape invado, attack pervado, go\\nthrough.\\n187.] The following are irregular:\\na) With a Reduplication in the Perfect.\\nCadOy cecMi, casum, fall.\\nOf the compounds, these have a supine incido, incldi, incdsum, fall\\nin or upon occido, set recido, fall back. The rest have none concido,\\nsink together decido, fall down excido, fall out of; accidit, it happens\\n(used most commonly of a misfortune).\\nCaedo, cecidi, caesum, cut.\\nAbscido, abscldi, abscisum, cut off; concido, cut to pieces; incido, cut\\ninto occldo, kill recido, cut away. So decido, excido, praecldo, and\\nothers.\\nPendo, pependiy pensum, weigh.\\nAppendo, appendi, appensum, weigh out to expendo, spend, also con-\\nsider, like perpendo suspendo, hang from dependo, pay impendo,\\nemploy upon or in something.\\nTendo, tetendi, tensum, and tentum, stretch.\\nExtendo, ostendo, protendo, and retendo, have both supines; but\\nex- and protentum are more frequent. The other compounds have\\nonly turn in the supine attendo (sc. animurri), attend contendo,\\n(sc. me), strive distendo, separate or enlarge by stretching intendo,\\nstrain; obtendo and praetendo, commonly used in the figurative sense of\\nalleging; subtendo, stretch beneath.\\nTundo, tutudi, tunsum, and tusum y beat, pound.\\nThe compounds have only tusum contundo, contudi, contusum, pound\\nsmall extundo, (figurative) elaborate obtundo and retundo, blunt.\\nCredo 4 credidi, creditum, believe.\\nAccredo, accredidi, give credit to.\\nThe compounds of do T except those mentioned in 171.\\nCondo, condidi, conditum, build, conceal abdo, abdldi, abditum, hide.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0135.jp2"}, "136": {"fulltext": "118 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSo addo, add dedo, give up edo, give out, publish; perdo, ruin, lose\\nreddo, give back, render trado, deliver vendo, sell. But abscondo\\nappears in the perfect more frequently without the reduplication, a\\nscondi, than with it, abscondidi. Instead of the passive, veneo is used\\n(see 215.), except the participles venditus and vendendus.\\n188.] b) Making di in the Perfect, and sum in the\\nSupine.\\nAccendo, incendo, succendo, -cendi, -censum, light, kindle.\\nCudo, forge.\\nDefendo, defend, ward off.\\nEdo, eat. See 212.\\nExedo and comedo, -edi, -esum, (but also comestus,) consume. Ibid.\\nMando (perfect very rare), chew.\\nOffendo, offend.\\nPrehendo, seize frequently contracted into prendo.\\nApprehendo, comprehendo, lay hold of, (figurative) understand depre-\\nhendo, detect, seize in the fact; reprehendo, blame.\\nScando, climb.\\nAscendo and escendo, climb up descendo, descend conscendo and\\ninscendo, mount, embark.\\nStrldo (also strideo), stridi (no supine), grate, make a harsh\\nnoise.\\nFundo, fudi, fusum, pour.\\nDiffundo, pour out, spread abroad offundo, pour over prof undo,\\nwaste; afflundo, confundo, effundo, infundo.\\n189 c Other Irregularities, especially that of a double\\ns in the Supine.\\nCedo, cessi, cessum, yield, go.\\nAbscedo, go away; accedo, go to antecedo, surpass; concedo, give way;\\ndecedo, go away discedo, separate myself; excedo, go out incedo,\\nmarch; inter cedo, come between, interpose; recedo, retreat; succedo,\\ncome into one s place.\\nFindo, fidi, fissum, split.\\nDiffindo, diffldi, split asunder.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0136.jp2"}, "137": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 119\\nScindo, scidi, scissum, cut.\\nConscindo, conscidi, conscissum, tear to pieces e. g vestem, epistolam;\\ndiscindo, interscindo (e. g. pontem), perscindo, and proscindo have similar\\nmeanings. Bescindo, annul. Respecting the forms of abscindo, cut\\noff*, and exscindo, destroy, there is considerable doubt but the forms\\nabscissum and exscissum do not exist at all, because in pronunciation,\\nthey are the same as abscisum and excisum, from abscidere and excidere\\nand the perfect exscidi also is not founded on any authority, since the s\\nby which it is distinguished is not heard in pronunciation, and is better\\nnot introduced in writing.\\nFrendo (frendi), fressum and fresum, gnash with the teeth\\nalso frendeoy frendere.\\nMeto, messuij messum, cut, reap.\\nMitto, misi, missum, send.\\nAdmitto, admit, commit amitto, lose committo, intrust commit a\\nfault demitto and dimitto, dismiss emitto, send forth imviitto, send\\nin, against intermitto, omit omitto and praetermitto, leave out\\npermitto, permit promitto, promise remitto, send back submitto, send\\nup, send aid.\\nPando, pandi, passum (pansum rare), spread abroad.\\nExpando has expansum and expassum dispando only dispansum,\\nPeto, petivi, (in poetry petii), petitum, ask, seek.\\nAppeto and expeto, strive for oppeto, encounter repeto, repeat, seek\\nagain.\\nSldo (the perfect and supine usually from sedeo), sit down.\\nThe compounds, too, usually take the perfect and supine from sedeo\\nconsldo, consedi, consessum so assido, seat myself beside; subsido, sink;\\ninsido, sit upon desido and resido, seat myself down.\\nSisto, stiti, statum, stop (whence status^), but sisto, in a\\nneutral sense, makes the perfect and supine from stare.\\nThe compounds are all intransitive, and have stiti, stltum subsisto 9\\nsubstiti, substitum, stand still absisto (no supine) and desisto, desist\\nassisto, place myself beside consisto, halt, consist existo, come forth\\n(perf. exist) insisto. tread upon obsisto and resisto, resist persisto,\\npersist.\\nSterto, stertui, (no supine,) snore.\\nVerto, verti, versum, turn.\\nAdverto and converto, turn towards animadverto (animum adverto),\\nPturn attention to averto, turn from everto, destroy perverto and\\nsubverto, overturn.\\nDeverto, turn in to a house of entertainment praeverto, anticipate\\nand reverto, turn back are used in the present, imperfect, and future\\nas deponents more commonly than as actives.\\nFido, fisus sum, Jidere, trust.\\nSo confldo, confide diffldo, distrust.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0137.jp2"}, "138": {"fulltext": "120 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP. XLVIH.\\n190.] 3. VERBS IN BO AND PO.\\nRegular are\\nGlubo (glupsi), gluptum (at least degluptum), glubere, peel.\\nJVubo, cover, am married (applied only to the female), par-\\nticiple nupta, one who is married.\\nScribo, write.\\nDescrlbo, copy ascribo, inscribo, perscribo, praescribo.\\nCarpo, pluck.\\nConcerpo, and discerpo, tear asunder decerpo, gather,\\nJRepo, creep.\\nArrepo, creep up to irrepo, obrepo, subrepo, prorepo.\\nScalpo. grave with a pointed tool, or scratch with the finger.\\nSculpo, work with the chisel.\\nExculpo, cut out insculpo, engrave.\\nSerpOy creep inserpo, proserpo.\\n191.] The following are irregular:\\nThe compounds of cubare, to lie, which take an m with a\\nchange of meaning.\\nAccumbo, -cubui, -cubitum, recline at table incumbo, lean upon, apply\\nto something; procumbo, lie down; succumbo, fall under; occumbo\\n(suppl. mortem), die.\\nBibo, bibi bibttum, drink.\\nEbibo, imblbo.\\nLamboy Iambi, (lambitum,) lambere, lick.\\nJRumpo, rupiy rupturriy break, tear.\\nAbrumpo, break off erumpo, break out corrumpo, destroy inter-\\nrumpo, interrupt irrumpo, break in perrumpo, break through pro-\\nrumpo, break forth.\\nScaboy scabi, scabere, scratch with the finger.\\nStrepOy strepuiy strepituniy make a noise.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0138.jp2"}, "139": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 121\\nCHAP. XLIX.\\n192.] 4. VERBS WITH A PALATAL LETTER G, C, CT, H,\\nQU, AND GU (IN WHICH U IS NOT CONSIDERED AS A\\nVOWEL), BEFORE 0.\\nRegular are\\nCingo, ci?ixi, cinctum, cingere, gird, surround.\\nAccingor, the passive (or accingo me), has the same meaning discingo,\\nungird and others.\\nFrom fligO) which rarely occurs, are formed\\nAffllgo, strike to the ground covfllgo, fight infligo, strike upon.\\nProfligo belongs to the first conjugation.\\nFrigo (supine regular, frictum, rarely frixum), roast, parch,\\nJungo, join.\\nAdjungo and conjungo, join to, with disjungo and sejungo, separate\\nsubjungo, annex.\\nLingo, lick. (Hence ligurio or ligurrio.)\\nMungo, blow the nose (rare) emungo.\\nPlango, beat, lament.\\nMego, rule, guide.\\nArrigo, arrexi, arrectum, and erigo, raise on high corrigo, amend\\ndirigo, direct porrigo, stretch out. Per go (for perrigo), perrexi, per~\\nrectum, go on surgo (for surrigo), surrexi, surrectum, rise and hence\\nassurgOf consurgo, exurgo, insurgo.\\nSugo, suck, exugo.\\nTego, cover.\\nContego and obtego, cover up detego and retego, uncover protego,\\nprotect.\\nTingo, or tinguo, dip, dye.\\nUngo or unguo, anoint.\\nPerungo, strengthens the meaning inungo* anoint.\\nStinguo put out (has no perfect or supine, and is of rare\\noccurrence.)\\nCompounds extinguo, and restinguo, -ijixi, -inctum so also\\ndistinguo.\\nG", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0139.jp2"}, "140": {"fulltext": "122 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nTraho, draw.\\nPertraho, strengthens the meaning attraho, contraho, detrako, ex-\\ntraho, protraho, retraho subtraho, withdraw secretly.\\nVeho, carry (active) frequent, vecto, -as.\\nAdveho, carry to inveho, carry or bring in. The passive of this\\nverb vehor, vectus sum, vehi, is best rendered by a neuter verb of\\nmotion. So circumvehor, travel round; praetervehor, sail past invehor,\\ninveigh against. These verbs therefore are classed among the\\ndeponents.\\nDico, say.\\nAddico, adjudge contradico, edico, indico interdico, praedico.\\nDuco, guide, lead, draw.\\nAbduco, adduco, circumduco conduco, hire deduco, diduco, educo,\\ninduco, introduco, obduco, perduco, produco, r educo seduco, lead aside\\nsubduco, traduco.\\nCoquo, coxiy coctum, dress concoquo, digest.\\n193.] Irregular in the Supine, throwing out n, or\\nassuming x.\\nFingo, Jinxi, jfictum, feign.\\nConjingo, the same affingo, falsely ascribe effingo, imitate refingo,\\nfashion anew.\\nMingo (a more common form of the present is meio), minxi,\\nmictum, make water.\\nPingo, pinxi, pictum, paint.\\nDepingo, represent by painting appingo, expingo.\\nStringo, strinxi, strictum, squeeze together.\\nAstringo, draw close constringo, draw together destringo, draw\\nout distringo, draw asunder obstringo, bind by obligation.\\nFigo, Jixi, jftxum, fasten.\\nAfflgo, affix transfigo, pierce through.\\nVerbs in cto, in which t only strengthens the form of. the\\nPresent\\nFlecto, flexi, flexum, bend. Comp. inflecto.\\nNectOy nexi and nexui, nexum, bind.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0140.jp2"}, "141": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 123\\nPecto, pexi, pexum, comb.\\nPlecto, without perfect and supine, usually only in the pas-\\nsive, plector, am punished, smart for. Another plecto.\\ntwist, is obsolete as an active, but forms the foundation\\nof the deponents: amplector, complector participle\\namplexus, complexus.\\nOf ango, anxi, torment and ningo, ninxi, snow, no supine\\nis found.\\nOf clango, ring loudly, neither perfect nor supine exists;\\naccording to analogy the former would be clanxL\\n194.] The following are irregular in the formation of\\nthe Perfect.\\na) Taking a Reduplication,\\nParco, peperci, parsum, spare parsi is rare parcitum is\\nuncertain but we have the compound comparsi, or com-\\npersi,\\nPungo, pupugi, punctum, pierce.\\nThe compounds have in the perfect punxi as compungo, dispungo,\\nand interpungo, distinguish with points.\\nTango, tetigi, factum, touch.\\nAtdngo and contingo, -tigi, -tactum, touch contingit, contigit obtingit,\\nobhgit (as impersonate), it falls to the lot usually in a good sense.\\nPango, in the sense of strike, drive in, panxi, panctum in\\nthe sense of bargain, pepigi, pactum. In this sense\\npaciscor is employed in the present.\\nThe compounds have pegi, pactum as compingo, fasten together\\nimpingo.\\n195.] b) Without changing the Characteristic Letter.\\nAgo, egi, actum, agere, drive.\\nCogo (coago), coegi, coactum, drive together, force; perago, carry\\nthrough; abigo, drive away; adigo, exigo, redigo, subigo, transigo.\\nDego, degi (rare), no supine, spend (vitam, aetatem).\\nFrango; fregi, fractum, break.\\nConfringo and perfringo strengthen the meaning effringo andrefringo,\\ng 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0141.jp2"}, "142": {"fulltext": "124 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nLego, legi, ledum, read. (But lego, as, send off.)\\nSo perlego, praelego, with those changing e into i, as cottigo, deligo,\\neligo, and seligo, are conjugated. But diligo, intelligo (obsolete intellego\\nand negligo (obsolete neglegd), have -exi in the perfect.\\nJco, or icio, lei, ictum, strike, in connection Ytitiifoedus.\\nVinco, vlci, victum, conquer.\\nConvinco, persuade devinco, overcome; evinco, carry a point.\\nLinquo, liqui, leave (no supine), chiefly used in poetry.\\nThe compounds relinquo, derelinquo, delinquo, have lictum in the\\nsupine.\\n196# c Perfect si, Supine sum.\\nMergo, mersi, mersum, dip.\\nEmergo, demergo, immergo, submergo.\\nSpargo, sparsi, sparsum, scatter.\\nAspergo, conspergo, and respergo, besprinkle expergo, sprinkle abroad.\\nTergo, tersi, tersum, wipe; sometimes follows the second\\nconjugation. (See above, 177.)\\nSo also the compounds detergere, extergere.\\nVergo, vergere, incline towards, without perfect and supine.\\nCHAP. L.\\n197.] 5. VERBS WHICH HAVE L, M, N, R, BEFORE 0.\\nEegular verbs in mo.\\nComo, compsi, comptum, comere, adorn.\\nDemo, take away.\\nPromo, bring out. Depromo, expromo, the same in signifi-\\ncation.\\nSumo, take,\\nAbsumo and consumo, consume assumo, desumo.\\nTemno, temnere, despise (poetical).\\nContemno, contempsi, contemptum, the same meaning.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0142.jp2"}, "143": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 125\\nIrregular.\\n198.] a) Conjugated according to the Analogy of the\\nSecond Conjugation.\\nAlo, alui, alitum (or altum), alere, nourish.\\nColo, coluiy cultum, till.\\nExcolo and percoh strengthen the meaning incolo, inhabit a country.\\nConsiilo, consului, consultum, ask advice.\\nMolo, molui, molitum, grind.\\nOcculo, occului y occultum, conceal.\\nFremo, fremui, fremitum, murmur. Adfremo, confremo.\\nGemo, gemui, gemitum, groan.\\nCongemo (congemisco), ingemo (jngemisco), ui t no supine, lament.\\nTremo, tremui (no supine), tremble. Contremo strengthens\\nthe meaning.\\nVomo, vomui vomitum, vomit. Fvomo, revomo.\\nGigno, beget (from the obsolete geno), genui, genitum.\\nIngigno, implant progigno, bring forth.\\nPono, posui, positum, place.\\nAntepono, prefer; appono, place by; compono, arrange; depono, lay\\ndown; dispono, set out, or in order; expono, explain; oppono, oppose;\\npostpono, to place after praepono, prefer sepono, set on one side. Re-\\nspecting the short o in the perfect and supine see 18. 3.\\n(From the obsolete cello)\\nAntecello, excello, praecello, ui, (without supine,) surpass but per cello,\\nperculi, perculsum, strike down.\\n199.] b) Forming the Perfect with Reduplication.\\nCano, cecini, cantum, ca?iere, sing.\\nSuccino, succinuiy succentum, sing to so occino sing, sound against\\nconcino, harmonize.\\nCurro, cucurri, cursum, run.\\nThe compounds, accurro, decurro, excurrro, incvrro, percurro, praecurro,\\nand others, sometimes retain, but more frequently drop the reduplica-\\ntion in the perfect.\\ng 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0143.jp2"}, "144": {"fulltext": "126 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nFallo, fefelli, falsum, cheat.\\nPello, pepuli, pulsum, drive away.\\nAppello, appuli, appulsum, come to land. In the same way are con-\\njugated cornpello, urge, compel depello, propello, repello, drive away ex-\\npello, drive out impello and perpello, urge on.\\n200.] c) Making vi in the Perfect\\nCerno, crevi, cretum, separate. In the sense of seeing, per-\\nceiving, it has neither perfect nor supine.\\nCompounds Decerno, decrevi, decretum, decree so discerno, excerno,\\nsecerno, separate, distinguish.\\nLino, levi (or livi), Utum, smear. Linio belongs to the fourth\\nconjugation.\\nCollino, illino, perlino, dblino (participle oblitus, not to be confounded\\nwith oblitus from obliiriscory* perlino, besmear.\\nSino, sivi, situm, allow.\\nDesmOf desivi, and desii, desitum, cease.\\nSperno, sprevi, spretum, despise.\\nSterno, stravi, stratum, stretch out on the ground.\\nConsterno, insterno, spread out prosterno, throw down.\\nSero, in the sense of sowing, has sevi, satum in that of ar-\\nranging and connecting together it has serui, sertum.\\nThe compounds consero and insero make -ui ~ertum, in the sense of\\njoining -evi, -itum, in the sense of sowing. The following compounds\\nare used only in the sense of joining Desero, dissero, exsero, and ac-\\ncordingly make only serui, sertum.\\nTero, trlvi, tritum, rub.\\nContero, rub to pieces attero, rub away, injure.\\n201.] d) Other Irregularities.\\nVelio, velli, and vulsi (but more rarely), vulsum, pluck out.\\nThe compounds convello, revello, and divello, have only velli in the\\nperfect, but avello and evello have also avulsi and evulsi.\\nPsallo, psalli, psallere, play on a stringed instrument.\\nEmo, emi, empturn, buy.\\nCoemo, collect by purchase redimo purchase back. The significa-\\ntion take appears in the compounds adimo, take away; dirimo, divide\\neximo, take out; inter imo, take away, kill; perimo, destroy.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0144.jp2"}, "145": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 127\\nPremo, pressi, pressum, press.\\nComprimo, press together deprimo, opprimo, supprimo, press down\\nexprimo, press out.\\nGero, gessi, gestum, carry, transact.\\nCongero, bring together digero, arrange ingero, introduce.\\nUro, ussi, ustum, burn.\\nAduro, kindle comburo, consume by fire inuro, burn in, brand\\nexuro, burn out.\\nVerro, verri, versum, sweep out.\\nQuaero, quaesivi, quaesltum, seek.\\nAcquiro, acquire conquiro, collect anquiro, exquiro, inquire, per-\\nquiroy examine requiro, miss, require.\\n(Furo), fur ere, rage (without perfect or supine) insanivi, is\\nused as a perfect instead.\\nFero, tuli, latum, ferre, is irregular in several points. See\\nbelow, 213.\\nCHAP. LI.\\n202.] 6. VERBS IN SO AND XO.\\nJDepso, depsui, depsitum and depstum, knead.\\nPinso, pinsui and pinsi, pinsitum and pistum, pound, grind.\\nViso, visi, visere, visit. The supine visum belongs to videre,\\nfrom which visere itself is derived.\\nTexo, texui, textum, weave.\\nCompounds frequently with a figurative signification attexo, add\\ncontexo, put together obtexo, cover pertexo, carry out praetexo, add\\na hem retexo, to undo that which is woven, destroy.\\nAfter the Analogy of the Fourth Conjugation\\nArcesso, or accerso, -ivi, -itum, summon.\\nCapesso, undertake.\\nG 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0145.jp2"}, "146": {"fulltext": "128 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nFacesso, give trouble.\\nIncesso, attack no supine.\\nLacesso, provoke.\\n203.] 7. Verbs in sco, either not Inchoatives, or of which\\nthe Simple is not found.\\nCresco, crevi, cretum, grow.\\nSo also con-, de-, excresco, and without a supine accresco f increscoj\\ngrow up, and succresco, grow up gradually.\\nNosco, novi, notum^ become acquainted with. The original\\nform is gnosco, and the g reappears in the compounds, if\\npossible.\\nThe perfect novi takes the signification of the present, I know\\n221.). The comp. agnosco, recognise, cognosco (perf. cognovi, I\\nknow), and recognosco, recognise, have in the supine agnitum, cognitum,\\nrecognltum.\\nPasco, pavi, pastum, feed.\\nDepasco, feed down.\\nQuiesco, quievi, quietum, rest.\\nAcquiesco, repose with satisfaction conquiesco, requiesco, rest.\\nSuesco, suevi, suetum, mostly intransitive, grow accustomed,\\nor, more rarely, accustom another.\\nSo also assuesco, consuesco, insuesco, generally accustom one s self;\\ndesuesco, disaccustom one s self.\\nCompesco, compescui, (no supine,) restrain.\\nDispesco, dispescui, (no supine,) divide.\\nDisco, didici, (no supine disciturus in Appuleius,) learn.\\nAddisco, addidici, learn in addition dedisco, unlearn edisco, learn\\nby heart.\\nPosco, poposci, (no supine,) demand.\\nDeposco, depoposci, and reposco, demand back exposco, expoposci,\\nchallenge.\\nGlisco, gliscere, increase.\\nHisco, hiscere, open the mouth, gape.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0146.jp2"}, "147": {"fulltext": "THIRD CONJUGATION. 129\\nCHAP. LH.\\nINCHOATIVES.\\n204.] The inchoatives in sco are partly formed from\\nverbs (chiefly of the second conjugation), and partly from\\nnouns (substantives or adjectives), and are accordingly called\\ninchoativa verbalia or inchoativa nominalia, that is, verbal\\nor nominal inchoatives. The first have no other perfect\\nthan that of the simple verb the others either have none,\\nor form it in a similar way in uL Few of the verbal incho-\\natives have the supine of the simple verb.\\n1. Verbal Inchoatives with the Perfect of the Simple Verb.\\nAcesco (aceo), acui, grow sour coacesco, peracesco.\\nAlbesco, and exalbesco (albeo), exalbui, grow white.\\nAresco z?*eo), arui, grow dry.\\nCalesco (caleo), calui, become warm.\\nCanesco (caweo), canui, become grey.\\nConticesco (taceo), conticui, am reduced to silence.\\nContremisco (tremo), contremui, tremble.\\nDefervesco (ferveo), deferbui, gradually lose my heat.\\n.Delitesco (lateo), delitui, lurk.\\nEffervesco (ferveo), efferbui, grow hot.\\nExcandesco (candeo), excandui, grow of a white heat; figuratively, am\\nenraged.\\nExtlmescOy pertimesco (timeo), extimui, am terrified.\\nFioresco, de-, effloresco {floreo), effiorui, bloom.\\nHaeresco, and ad-, inhaeresco (kaereo), ad-, inhaesi, adhere to.\\nHorresco, exhorresco, perhorresco (horreo}, exhorrui, am struck, with horror.\\nIngemisco (gernd), ingemui, groan.\\nIntumesco (iumeo), intumui, swell up.\\nIrraucisco (raucio), irrausi, become hoarse.\\nLanguesco, elanguesco, relanauesco (langueo), elangui, become feeble.\\nJLiquesco (liqueo), licui, melt away.\\nMadesco {inadeo), madui, become wet.\\nMarcesco {marceo), comp. commarcesco, emarcesco, emareui, fade.\\nOccallesco (calleo\\\\ occalui, acquire a callous surface.\\nPallesco, expallesco (palleo), pallid, turn pale.\\nPutresco (putreo), putrui, moulder.\\nJResipisco (sapio), resipui and resipivi, recover wisdom.\\nRubesco, erube co (rubeo), grow red, blush.\\nSenesco, consenesco (seneo), consenui, grow old. The participle senectus,\\ngrown old, is little used.\\nStupesco and obstupesco (stv.peo), obstvpui. am struck.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0147.jp2"}, "148": {"fulltext": "130 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nTabesco (tabeo), tabui, pine, waste away.\\nTepesco (tepeo), tepui, grow lukewarm.\\nViresco, comp. conviresco, eviresco, reviresco (vireo), virui, grow green.\\n2. Verbal Inchoatives ivhich have the Supine as ivell as\\nPerfect of the Simple Verb.\\n{Abolesco, abolevi, aboUtum, cease, am annihilated.\\nExolesco, exolevi, exoletum, grow useless by age. So also obsolesco.\\nAdolesco, adolevi, adultum, grow up. See 174. Oleo.\\nCcalesco (alere), coalui, coalitum, grow together.\\nConcupisco (cupere), concupivi, concupitum, desire.\\nConvalesco (valere), convalui, convaMum, recover health.\\nExardesco (ardere), exarsi, exarsum, am inflamed.\\nIndolesco (dolere), indolui, itum, feel pain.\\nInveterasco (inveterare), inveteravi, atum, grow old.\\nObdormisco (dormire), ivi, itum, fall asleep edormisco, sleep out.\\nRevivisco (vivere), revixi, revictum, recover life.\\nScisco (scire), scivi, scltum, resolve, decree. Hence plebiscitum, populi-\\nscltum,\\n205.] 3. Inchoatives derived from Nouns.\\na) Without a Perfect, y\\nAegresco (aeger), grow sick.\\nDitesco (dives), grow rich.\\nDulcesco (dulcis), grow sweet.\\nGrandesco (grandis), grow large.\\nGravesco and ingravesco (gravis), grow heavy.\\nIncur vesco (curvus), become crooked.\\nIntegrasco (integer), become renovated.\\nJuvenesco (juvenis), grow young.\\nMitesco (mitis), grow mild.\\nMollesco (mollis), grow soft.\\nPinguesco (pinguis), grow fat. V\\nPlumesco (pluma), get feathers.\\nPuerasco, repuerasco (puer), become a child (again).\\nSterilesco (sterilis), become barren.\\nTeneresco, tenerasco (tener), become tender.\\nb) With a Perfect.\\nCrebresco, increbresco, and percrebresco (creber), crebui, grow frequent or\\ncurrent.\\nDuresco, obduresco (durus), durui, grow hard.\\nEvanesco (vanus), evanui, disappear.\\nInnotesco (notus), innotui, become known.\\nMacresco (macer)j macrui, grow lean.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0148.jp2"}, "149": {"fulltext": "FOURTH CONJUGATION. 131\\nMansuesco (mansuetus), mansuevi, grow tame.\\nMaturesco (maturus), maturui, grow ripe.\\nNigresco (niger), nigrui, grow black.\\nObmutesco (rnutus), obmutui, become dumb.\\nObsurdesco (surdus), obsurdui, become deaf.\\nMecrudesco (crudus), recrudui, to open again (of a wound that had been\\nclosed).\\nVilesco and evilesco (vilis), evilui, become cheap or worthless.\\nCHAP. LIH.\\nFOURTH CONJUGATION.\\n208.] The desiderative verbs in urio, e. g. coenaturio,\\ndormitario, empturio, have neither perfect nor supine with\\nthe exception of esurio, desire to eat.\\nThe following verbs differ, either in the perfect or in the\\nsupine, or in both, from the regular form (ivi, itum).\\nCio, civi, citum, regular; but see 180.\\nEo, ivi, itum, with its compounds. See Defective Verbs,\\n\u00c2\u00a7215.\\nFar cio, far si, fartum, farcire, stuff.\\nConfer cio and refercio, fersi, fertum, fill up; effercio, infer cio are con-\\njugated like the simple verb.\\nFulcio, falsi, fultum, fidcire, prop.\\nHaurio, hausi, haustum (the part. fut. however, is also hau-\\nsums), haurire, draw.\\nQueo, quivi or quii, quitum, quire. See 216.\\nRaucio, rausi, rausum, raucire, am hoarse (raucus).\\nSaepio, saepsi, saeptum, saepire, hedge in.\\nSdlio, salui, saltum, salire, spring.\\nThe regular verb salire, salt, must not be confounded with salire,\\nspring. The compounds desilio, exilio, insilio, make the perfect in\\nsilui the supine does not occur, but it might be formed by the termi-\\nnation sultum.\\nSancio, sanxi, sancitum and sanctum, sancire, decree, sanc-\\ntion.\\nG 6", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0149.jp2"}, "150": {"fulltext": "132 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSarcio, sarsi, sartum, sarcire, patch.\\nSentio, sensi, sensum, sentire, feel, think.\\nConsentio, agree dissentio, disagree praesentio, perceive beforehand.\\nThe compound assentio is not as common as the deponent assentior.\\nSepelio, -ivi, seputtum, sepelire, bury.\\nVenio, veni, ventum, venire, come.\\nAdvenio, arrive convenio, meet obvenio, encounter pervenio, reach\\ninvenio, find.\\nVi?icio, vinxi, vinctum, vincire, bind.\\nAmicio, amictum, amicire, clothe.\\nAperio, ui, rtum, aperire, open.\\nSo cperio and cooperio, cover. But comperio makes comperi, comper-\\nto, comperire (is used in the present and infinitive, also as a deponent,\\ncomperior, comperiri), experience* and reperio, reperi (or repperi), reper-\\ntum, find.\\nFerio ferire, strike. (In the active percussi is used as a\\nperfect, and in the passive ictus sum.)\\nFerocio ferocire, am wild or insolent.\\nCHAP. LIV.\\nLIST OF DEPONENT VERBS.\\n207 DEPONENT VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.\\nAdminicular, aid. Alucinor (also alluc. and haUuc),\\nAdversor, oppose myself. dote, talk idly.\\nAdulor, flatter. Amplexor, embrace.\\nAemulor, rival. Ancillor, am a handmaid.\\nAlter cor, quarrel. Apricor, sun myself.\\nThe words to which an asterisk is prefixed are used also as actives,\\nbut better as deponents. Some deponents have been omitted in the list,\\nwhich are either of very rare occurrence or more commonly used as ac-\\ntives. Respecting the latter see the note at the end.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0150.jp2"}, "151": {"fulltext": "DEPONENT VERBS.\\n133\\nAqnor, fetch water frumentor, col-\\nlect corn lignor, collect wood\\nmaterior, fell timber; pabulor,\\nforage.\\nArbitror, think.\\nArchitector, build (arckitectus).\\nArgumentor, prove.\\nArgutor, chatter, am argutus.\\nAspernor, despise.\\nAssentor, agree, flatter.\\nAuctionor, sell at auction.\\nAuciipor, catch birds, am anceps.\\nAversor, dislike, avoid with horror.\\nAuguror {augur),\\nAuspicor (auspex), I practise\\nHariolor (hariolus), soothsaying.\\nVaticinor (vates), J\\nAuxilior, aid.\\nBacchor, revel as a Bacchanal.\\nCalumnior, cavil.\\nCavillor, ridicule.\\nCauponor, deal, retail.\\nCausor, allege.\\nCircular, form a circle around me.\\nComissor, feast.\\nComitor, accompany (comes, active\\nonly in the poets).\\nCommentor, reflect upon, dispute.\\nConcionor, harangue.\\nConflictor, contend.\\nConor, attempt.\\nConsilior, advise.\\nConspicor, behold.\\nContemplor, contemplate.\\nConvicior, revile.\\nConvivor, feast (conviva).\\nCornlcor, chatter as a crow.\\nCriminor, accuse.\\nCunctor, delay.\\nDepeculor, plunder.\\nDe.spicor, despise despicio, but de-\\nspicatus is passive, despised.\\nDeversor, lodge.\\nDigladior, fight.\\nDignor, think worthy. Cicero how-\\never sometimes uses it in a passive\\nsense, I am thought worthy.\\nDedignor, disdain.\\nDominor, rule (dominus).\\nElucubror, produce by dint of labour.\\nEpidor, feast.\\nExecror, execrate.\\n*Fabricor, fashion.\\nFabulor, confabulor, talk.\\nFamulor, serve (famulus).\\nFeneror, lend at interest (the active,\\nto restore with interest, occurs\\nin Terence in later writers it is\\nthe same as the deponent).\\nFerior, keep holiday.\\nFrustror, disappoint.\\nFuror, suffuror, steal.\\nGlorior, boast.\\nGraecor, live in the Greek style,\\nthat is, luxuriously.\\nGrassor, advance, attack.\\nGratificor, comply with.\\nGrator and gratulor, give thanks,\\npresent congratulations.\\nGravor, think heavy, is the passive\\nof gravo.\\nHelluor, gluttonise (helluo).\\nHortor, exhort adhortor, exhortor^\\ndehortor.\\nHospitor, am a guest (kospes), lodge.\\nImaginor, imagine.\\nImitor, imitate.\\nIndignor, am indignant, spurn.\\nIvfitiGr, deny.\\nInsidior, plot.\\nInterpretor, explain, am an interpres.\\nJaculor, throw, dart.\\nJocor, jest.\\nLaetor, rejoice (laetus).\\nLamentor, lament.\\nLatrocinor, rob, am a latro.\\nLenocinor (alicui), flatter.\\nLibidinor, am voluptuous.\\nLicitor, bid at an auction.\\nLucror, gain.\\nLuctor, strive, wrestle (obluctor and\\nreluctor, resist).\\nLudificor, ridicule.\\nMachinor, devise.\\nMedicor, heal.\\nMeditor, meditate.\\nMercor, buy.\\nMeridior, repose at noon.\\nMetor, measure out.\\nMinor and minitor, threaten.\\nMiror, wonder demiror, the same\\nadmiror, admire.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0151.jp2"}, "152": {"fulltext": "134\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nMiser or, commiseror, pity.\\nModeror, restrain, temper.\\nModulor, modulate.\\nMorigeror, comply, am morigerus.\\nMoror, delay trans, and intrans. r\\ncomp. commoror.\\n*Muneror, remuneror, aliquem ali-\\nqua re, reward.\\nMutuor, borrow.\\nNegotior, carry on business.\\nNidulor, build a nest.\\nNugor, trifle.\\nNundinor, deal in buying and selling.\\nNutricof, nourish.\\nOdoror, smell out.\\nOminor, prophesy abominor, abo-\\nminate.\\nOperor, bestow labour on.\\nOplnor, think.\\nOpitulor, lend help.\\nOscitor, yawn.\\nOsculor, kiss.\\nOtior, have leisure.\\n*Palpor, stroke, flatter.\\nParasltor, act the parasite (parasi\\ntus).\\nPatrocinor, patronize.\\nPercontor, inquire.\\nPeregrlnor, dwell as a stranger.\\nPericlitor, try, in later writers, am\\nin danger.\\nPhilosophor, philosophize.\\n*Pigneror, take a pledge, bind by a\\npledge.\\nPigror, am idle (piger),\\nPiscor, fish.\\n*Populor, lay waste.\\nPraedor, plunder.\\nPraestolor, wait for, with the dat.\\nor accus. (the quantity of the o\\nis uncertain, though probably\\nshort).\\nPraevaricor, walk with crooked legs,\\nact dishonestly, as a praevaricator,\\nthat is, as a false accuser.\\nPrecor, pray comprecor, invoke\\ndeprecor, deprecate imprecor, im-\\nprecate.\\nProelior, fight a battle.\\nRatiocinor, reason.\\nRecordor, remember.\\nRefrdgor, oppose.\\nRimor, examine minutely.\\nRixor, wrangle.\\nRusticor, live in the country.\\nScitor, and sciscitor, inquire.\\nScrutor, perscrUtor, search.\\nSector, the frequentative of sequor,\\nfollow assector, consector, inseetor,\\nSermocinor, hold discourse.\\nSolor, consolor, comfort.\\nSpatior, expatior, walk.\\nSpeculor, keep a look out.\\nStipulor, make a bargain adstipit-\\nlor, agree.\\nStomdchor, am indignant.\\nSuavior, kiss.\\nSuffragor (the contrary of refragor),\\nassent to.\\nSuspicor, suspect.\\nTergiversor, shuffle.\\nTestor and testificor, bear witness.\\nTricor, make unreasonable difficul-\\nties (tricas).\\nTristor, am sad.\\nTrutinor, weigh.\\nTumidtuor, make uproar.\\nTutor, defend.\\nVador, summon to trial.\\nVdgor and pdlor, wander.\\nVelificor, steer towards (figuratively,\\ngain a purpose), whence it is con-\\nstrued with the dat., as honori\\nmeo.\\nVelitor, skirmish with light troops.\\nVeneror, venerate.\\nVenor, hunt.\\nVerecundor, feel shame at doing.\\nVersor (properly, the passive of\\nverso), dwell, am occupied in;\\naversor, detest obversor, float\\nbefore.\\nVociferor, vociferate.\\nUrlnor, dip under water (to void\\nurine is urinam facere or reddtre).", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0152.jp2"}, "153": {"fulltext": "DEPONENT VERBS. 135\\nCHAP. LV.\\n208.] DEPONENTS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.\\nFateor, fassus sum,fateri, acknowledge.\\nConfiteor, confessus sum, the same, but usually, confess a crime pro-\\nfiteoi, profess.\\nLiceor, licitus sum, with the accus., bid at an auction.\\nPolliceor, promise.\\nMedeor, without a participle, for which medicatus, from me-\\ndicari, is commonly used.\\nMereor, meritus sum (merui is more common), deserve.\\nCommereor, demereor, promereor, have the same meaning.\\nMisereor, miseritus or misertus sum, pity.\\nEeor, ratus sum, reri, think.\\nTueor, tuitus sum, look upon, fig. defend.\\nContueor, intueor, look upon.\\nVereor, veritus sum, fear.\\nRevereor* reverence subvereor, slightly fear.\\nCHAP. LVI.\\n209.] DEPONENTS OP THE THIRD CONJUGATION.\\nFrom the obsolete apiscor, aptus sum, apisci, are derived\\nAdipiscor, adeptus sum, and indipiscor, obtain.\\nExpergiseor, experrectus sum, expergisci, awake.\\nFruor, fruitus and fructus sum, frui, enj oy. (Particip. frui*\\nturus.)\\nPerfruor, perfructus sum, strengthens the meaning.\\nFungor, functus sum, fungi, perform, discharge.\\nDefungor, perfungor, completely discharge, finish,", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0153.jp2"}, "154": {"fulltext": "136 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nGradior, gressus sum, grddi, proceed.\\nAggredior, aggressus sum, aggredi, assail congredior. meet digredior,\\ndepart egredior, go out of; ingredior, enter on progredior, advance\\nregredior, return.\\nIrascor, irasci, properly an inchoative, grow angry iratus\\nsum means only, I am angry. I have been or was angry\\nmay be expressed by succensui.\\nLabor, lapsus sum, labi, fall.\\nCollabor, sink together dilcibor, fall in pieces prolabor, fall down\\ndelabor, relabor.\\nLoquor, locutus sum, loqui, speak.\\nAlloquor, address colloquor, speak with eloquor, interloquor oblo-\\nquor, speak against, revile.\\n(From the obsolete miniscor,)\\nComminiscor, commentus sum, comminisci, devise, imagine; reminiscor,\\nreminisci, has no perfect recordatus sum is used instead of it.\\nMorior, mortuus sum, (partic. fut., moriturus,) mori, die.\\nEmorior, commorior, demorior.\\nNauciscor, nactus sum, nancisci, obtain.\\nNascor, natus sum, nasci, am born.\\nInnascor, renascor.\\nNitor, nisus or nixus sum, niti, lean upon, strive.\\nAdnltor, strive for comiitor and enitor, exert myself obnitor, strive\\nagainst.\\nObliviscor, oblltus sum, oblivisci, forget.\\nPaciscor, partus sum (or pepigi), make a bargain.\\nPascor, pastus sum, feed intransitive. Properly the passive\\nof pasco, pavi, pastum, give food. See above, Chap. LI.\\nPatior, passus sum, pdti, suffer.\\nPerpetior, perpessus sum, perpeti, endure.\\n(From plecto, twine,)\\nAmplecior and complector, complexus sum, embrace.\\nPrqficiscor, profectus sum, proficisci, travel.\\nQueror, quesius sum, queri, complain. Conqueror, lament.\\nRingor, ringi, grin, show the teeth, whence rictus.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0154.jp2"}, "155": {"fulltext": "DEPONENT VERBS. 137\\nSequor, secutus sum, sequi, follow.\\nAssequor and consequor, overtake, attain exequor, execute insequor,\\nfollow; obsequor, comply with persequor, pursue; prosequor, attend;\\nsubsequor, follow close after.\\nVehor, vectus sum, vehi, ride, is properly the passive of\\nveho, see 192. Comp. circumvehor, invehor, praeter-\\nvehor.\\nVescor, vesci, eat. Edi is used as the perfect.\\nUlciscor, ultus sum, ulcisci, revenge, punish.\\nUtor, usus sum, uti, use. Abutor, abuse.\\nDevertor, praevertor, and revertor, see under verto. They\\ntake their perfects from the active form reverti, reverte-\\nram, revertissem; the participle reversus, however, is used\\nin an active sense, one who has returned.\\nCHAP. LVII.\\n210.] DEPONENTS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.\\nAssentior, assensus sum, assentiri, assent. (As an active, as-\\nsentio, asse?isi, assensum, assentire, it is not so common).\\nBlandior, blanditus sum, blandiri, flatter.\\nExperior, expertus sum, experiri, experience, try.\\nComjierior, am informed, is used only in the present tense, along with\\ncomperio the perfect therefore is comperi.\\nLargior, largitus sum, largiri, give money dilargior, dis-\\ntribute money.\\nMentior, mentitus sum, mentiri, lie ementior, the same.\\nMetior. mensus sum^ metiri, measure.\\nDimetior, measure out permetior.\\n31olior, molitus sum, moliri, move a mass {moles), plan.\\nAmolior, remove from the way demolior, demolish, and others.\\nOpperior, oppertus sum, (also opperitus sum,) opperiri,\\nwait for.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0155.jp2"}, "156": {"fulltext": "138 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nOrdior, orsus sum, ordiri, begin.\\nEx ordior, the same.\\nOrior, ortus sum, oriri, (partic. oriturus,) rise. The\\npresent indieat. follows the third conjugation oreris,\\noritur, orimur. In the imperf. subjunct. both forms orerer\\nand orirer are found.\\nSo also the compounds co-orior and exorior but adorior, under-\\ntake,, entirely follows the fourth conjugation, adoriris, adorltur.\\nPartior, partitus sum, partiri, divide (rarely active).\\nPotior, potitus sum, potiri, possess myself of.\\nSortior, sortitus sum, sortiri, cast lots.\\nCHAP. LVIIL\\nIRREGULAR VERBS.\\n211.] The term Irregular Verbs is here applied to those\\nwhich depart from the rule not only in the formation of\\ntheir perfect and supine, but have something anomalous in\\ntheir conjugation itself. They are, besides sum (treated of\\nbefore, 156.), possum, edo, fero, volo, nolo, malo, eo,\\nqueo, nequeo, fio*\\n1. Possum, I am able.\\nPossum is composed of potis and sum by dropping the\\ntermination of potis, we obtain potsum, possum. It there-\\nfore follows the conjugation of sum in its terminations, but\\nthe consonants t, s, and f, produce some changes, when they\\ncome together.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nPossum, potes, potest. possim, possis, possit\\npossumus, potestis, j^ossunt. posslmus, possltis, possint.\\nImperfect.\\npoteram, poteras, poterat. possem, posses, posset,\\npoteramus, -eratis, -erant. possemus, possetis, possent.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0156.jp2"}, "157": {"fulltext": "IRREGULAR VERBS.\\nFuture.\\npotero, poieris, poterit.\\npoterimus, -eritis, -erunt.\\nPerfect.\\npotui, potuisti,potuit. potuerim, -eris, -erit.\\npotuimus, -istis, -erunt. potuerlmus, -His, -int.\\n139\\npotueram, -eras, -erat.\\npotueramus, -eratis, -erant\\nPluperfect.\\npotuissem, -isses, -isset.\\npotuissemus, -issetis, -issent,\\nFuture Perfect.\\npotuero, potueris, potuerit.\\npotuerlmus, potuerltis, potuerint.\\n(No Imperative.)\\nInfinitive.\\nPres. Imp. posse.\\nPerf. Plup. potuisse.\\nParticiple.\\n(Potens has become an adjective.)\\n2. Edo, I eat.\\n212.] The verb edo, edi, esum, edere, is declined\\nregularly according to the third conjugation, but here and\\nthere it has syncopated forms, besides its regular ones,\\nsimilar to the corresponding tenses of sum, except that the\\nquantity of the vowel in the second person singular of the\\nindie, present and of the imperative makes a difference, the\\ne in es from edo being long by nature. The tenses in which\\nthis resemblance occurs are seen in the following table\\nIndicative.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Edo, edis, edit,\\nor es, est.\\nPlur. edimus, editis, edunt.\\n(esti\\nImperative.\\nPres -f Sing ede e 5\\nPlur. edite, este.\\n\u00e2\u0080\u00a2p, J Sing, edito, esto.\\nPlur. edito, esto, editote, estote.\\nedunto.\\nSubjunctive*\\nImperfect.\\nSing* ederem, ederes, ederet,\\n(or essem, esses, esset.^)\\nPlur. ederemus, edereiis, ederent,\\n(or essemus, essetis, essent\\nInfinitive.\\nedere or esse.\\nIn the Passive only editur, estur\\nederetur, essetur.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0157.jp2"}, "158": {"fulltext": "140\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nIn the same way the compounds abedo, ambedo, comedo,\\nexedo, and per edo are conjugated.\\n3. Fero, I bear.\\n213.] Fero consists of very different parts, perfect\\ntuli supine, latum infinitive, ferre passive, ferri. But\\nwith the exception of the present indicat* and the imperative,\\nthe detail is regular.\\nActive.\\nIndicative.\\nPres. Sing. Fero, fers, fert.\\nPlur. ferlmus, fertis, ferunt.\\nImperative.\\nPres. Sing./er. Ylur.ferte.\\nFut. Sing, ferto. Plur. fertote,\\nferto, ferunto.\\nPassive.\\nIndicative.\\nPres. Sing, feror,ferris, fertur.\\nVhiY.ferimur, ferimini, fe-\\nruntur.\\nImperative.\\nPres. Sing, ferre. Plur. feriminL\\nFut. Sing, fertor. Plur. feruntor.\\nfertor.\\nNote. The rest is regular imperfect, ferebam future, feram, -es\\nfuture passive, ferar, fereris (ferere), feretur, c. present subjunctive,\\nferam, feras passive, ferar, feraris, feratur imperfect subjunctive,\\nf err em p assiv e, ferrer.\\nThe compounds of fero affero, antefero, circumfero, confer o, defer o,\\nand others, have little that is remarkable. Aufero (originally abfero)\\nmakes dbstuli, ablatum, auferre. Suffero has no perfect or supine, for\\nsustuli, sublatum, belong to tollo but sustinui is commonly used as a\\nperfect of suffero.\\n4. Volo, I will.\\n5. Nolo, I will not.\\n6. Malo, I will rather.\\n214.] Nolo is composed of ne (for non) and volo\\nmalo of mage (i. e. magis) and volo, properly mavolo, ma-\\nvellem, contracted malo, mallem.\\nIndicative.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Volo\\nNolo\\nMalo\\nvis\\nnon vis\\nmavis\\nvult\\nnon vult\\nrnavult\\nPlur. volumus\\nnolumus\\nmalumus\\nvultis\\nnon vultis\\nmavultis\\nvolunt.\\nnolunt.\\nmalunt.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0158.jp2"}, "159": {"fulltext": "IRREGULAR VERBS.\\n141\\nImperfect.\\nSing, volebam, c.\\nPlur. volebamus, c.\\nnolebam, c.\\nnolebamus, c.\\nFuture.\\nmalebam, c.\\nmalebamus, c.\\nSing, volam, voles, et.\\nPlur. volemus, etis, ent\\nnolam, noles, et.\\nnolemus, etis, ent.\\nPerfect.\\nmalam, males, et.\\nmalemus, etis, ent.\\nSing, volui\\nvoluisti, c.\\nnoluisti, c.\\nPluperfect.\\nmalui\\nmaluisti, c.\\nSing, volueram, c.\\nnolueram, c.\\nFuture Perfect.\\nmalueram, c.\\nvoluero, is, c.\\nnoluero, is, c.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nmaluero, is, c.\\nSing, velim\\nveils\\nvelit\\nPlur. vellmus\\nvelitis\\nvelint.\\nnolit\\nnollmus\\nnolitis\\nnolint.\\nImperfect.\\nmalim\\nmalls\\nmalit\\nmatimus\\nmalitis\\nmalint.\\nSing, vellem, c.\\nPlur. vellemus, c.\\nnoUem, c.\\nnollemus, c.\\nPerfect.\\nmallem, c.\\nmaUemus, c.\\nSing, voluerim, c.\\nnoluerim, c.\\nmaluerim, c.\\nPlur. voluerlmus, c.\\nnoluerlmus, c.\\nPluperfect.\\nmaluerlmus, c.\\nSing, voluissem, c.\\nPlur. voluissemus, c.\\nnoluissem, c.\\nnoluissemus, c.\\nmaluissem, c.\\nmaluissemus, c.\\nImperative.\\n2d Pers. rao/z, TioZlfe.\\n2d Pers. nollto, nolitote.\\n3d Pers. nolito, nolunto.\\nPres. uetfe\\nPerf. voluisse.\\nInfinitive.\\nnolle\\nnoluisse.\\nmalle\\nmaluisse.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0159.jp2"}, "160": {"fulltext": "142\\nLATIN GRAMIVIAR.\\nvolens.\\nvolendi\\nvolendo.\\nParticiple.\\nnolens.\\nGerund.\\nnolendi.\\n7. Eo, I go.\\n215.] The verb eo, tvi, itum, ire, is for the most part\\nformed regularly, according to the fourth conjugation only\\nthe present, and the tenses derived from it, are irregular.\\nRespecting the fut. ibo, see 162.\\nIndicative.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nEo, is, it.\\nImus, itis, eunt.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nearn, eas, eat.\\neamus, edtis, eant.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nImperfect.\\nibam, ibas, ibat. Sing.\\nibamus, ibatis, ibant. Plur.\\nirem, ires, iret.\\niremus, iretis, irent.\\nFuture.\\nImperative.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nIbo, ibis, ibit.\\nibimus, ibitis,\\nibunt\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nInfinitive.\\ni. Sing. 2. ito. 3. ito.\\nite. Plur. 2. itote. 3. eunto\\nPres.\\nPerf.\\nFut.\\nire.\\nivisse or isse\\niturum {-am\\n-urn) esse.\\nGerund.\\nSupine.\\nGen. eundi. Dat. eundo,\\nc.\\nitum, itu.\\nParticiples\\nPres. iens, euntis.\\nFut. iturus, -a, -urn.\\nIn the passive voice it exists only as an impersonal, itur,\\nitum est (See 229.) Some compounds, however, acquire\\na transitive meaning, and accordingly have a complete\\npassive e. g. adeo, I approach ineo, I enter praetereo, I\\npass by. These and all other compounds, abeo, coeo, exeo,\\nintereo and pereo (perish), prodeo, redeo, have usually only", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0160.jp2"}, "161": {"fulltext": "IRREGULAR VERBS. 143\\nii in the perfect peril, redii. Veneo, I am sold, a neutral\\npassive verb, without a supine, is composed of venum and\\neo, and is accordingly declined like ire; whereas ambio, I\\ngo about, is declined regularly according to the fourth con-\\njugation.\\n216.] 8. Queo, I can. 9. JVequeo, I cannot.\\nThese two verbs are both conjugated like eo perfect,\\nquivi, nequivi (nequii) supine, quitum, nequitum. Most\\nof their forms occur but with the exception of the present,\\nthey are not very frequent in prose. Instead of nequeo,\\nnon queo also is used.\\nIndicative.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Queo, quis, quit. Nequeo, non quis, non quit.\\nPlur. quimus, quitis, queunt. nequimus, nequltis, nequeunt.\\nImperfect.\\nSing. Quibam, quibat, c. nequlbam, nequibat, -ant.\\nFuture.\\nSing. Quibo. Plur. quibunt. Sing. Plur. nequibunt.\\nPerfect.\\nSing. Quivi, quivit. nequivi, nequisti, nequivit (iit).\\nPlur. quiverunt. nequiverunt or\\nnequierunt (e).\\nPluperfect.\\nnequierat, nequierant.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Queam, queas, queat. nequeam, nequeas, nequeat.\\nPlur. queamus, queatis, queant. nequeamus, nequeatis, nequeant.\\nImperfect.\\nSing. Quirem, quiret. nequirem, nequiret.\\nPlur. quirent. nequiremm, nequirent.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0161.jp2"}, "162": {"fulltext": "144\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nPerfect.\\nSing. quiverit. nequiverim, nequierit, nequierint.\\nPluperfect.\\nnequisset.\\nSing.\\nPlur. quissent.\\nnequissent.\\nInfinitive.\\nQuire, quivisse (quisse) nequire, nequivisse (nequisse).\\nParticiple.\\nQuiens (gen. queuntis). nequiens (gen. nequeuntis).\\n217.] 10. Fio, I become, or am made.\\nFio is properly an intransitive verb, the Greek (j vio,\\nwithout a supine. But it is used also as a passive of facto,\\nfrom which it takes the perfect /actus sum, and the latter\\nthen receives the meaning I have become, along with that\\nof I have been made. The infinitive fieri has the passive\\ntermination. In the present, imperfect, and future, it follows\\nthe third conjugation for the i belongs to the root of the\\nword, and is long, except in fit and those forms in which an\\nr occurs in the inflection. (See 16.)\\nIndicative.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nPresent.\\nSing. Fio,fis,fit.\\nPlur. fimus, fitis, fiunt.\\nfiam, fias, fiat,\\nfiamus, fiatis, fiant.\\nImperfect.\\nImperfect.\\nSing, fiebam, as, at.\\nPlur. fiebamus, atis, ant.\\nfierem, es, et.\\nfieremus, etis, ent*\\nFuture.\\nSing, fiam, fies, fiet.\\nPlur. fiemus, fietis, fient.\\nInfinitive.\\nfieri (factum esse, factum iri).\\nPart. Pres. is wanting.\\nThe rest is supplied by the passive forms of facer e partic. f actus, fa*\\nciendus perf. f actus sum, eram, ero infinit. factum esse, factum iri.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0162.jp2"}, "163": {"fulltext": "DEFECTIVE VERBS. 145\\nCHAP. LIX.\\n218.] DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\nThe term Defective Verbs is here applied to those only in\\nwhich the defectiveness is striking, and which are found only\\nin certain forms and combinations for there is, besides, a very\\nt large number of defective verbs, of which certain tenses are\\nP not found on account of their meaning, or cannot be shown\\n1 to have been used by the writers whose works have come\\ndowm to us. Many of them have been noticed in the lists of\\nP verbs in the preceding Chapters. We shall here treat of the\\nverbs ajo and inquam, I say; fari, to speak; the perfects\\ncoepi, memint, novi and odi the imperatives apage, ave,\\nI salve, vale cedo and quaeso and lastly oiforem.\\n1. Ajo, I say, say yes, or affirm.\\nIndicative. Subjunctive.\\nt Present. Present.\\nI Sing. Ajo, ais, ait Sing. ajas, ajat.\\nPlur. ajunt. Plur. ajant.\\nImperfect. (The imperative ai is obsolete.\\nI Sing, ajebam, ajebas, ajebat. The participle ajens is used only as\\nPlur. qjebamus, ajebatis, ajebant, an adject, instead of ajfirmativus.\\nPerfect. All the rest is wanting or unclas-\\nF Sing. dit (like the present). sical.\\n219.] 2. Inquam, I say.\\nThis verb is used only between the words of a quotation*\\nIndicative.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPresent.\\nPresent.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nInquam, inquis, inquit\\ninquimus, inquitis, inquiunt.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\ninquias, inquiat.\\ninquiatis, inquiant.\\nImperfect.\\nFuture.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\ninquiebam, c.\\ninquiebamus, c.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\ninquies, inquiet\\nPerfect.\\nImperative.\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\ninquisti, inquit,\\ninquistis,\\nSing.\\nPlur.\\nH\\ninque, inquito,\\ninquite.", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0163.jp2"}, "164": {"fulltext": "146\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\n220.] 3. Fari, to speak, say.\\nThis very irregular verb, with its compounds affari, effdri,\\nprofari, is, generally speaking, more used in poetry than in\\nprose. The third persons of the present, fatur, fantur,\\nthe imperative fare, and the participle fatus, a, urn, occur\\nmost frequently. The ablative of the gerund, fando, is used\\nin a passive sense even in prose, in the phrase fando audire,\\nto know by hearsay. The first person for, and the subjunc-\\ntiv e fer, feris, fetur, c. do not occur.\\n221.] 4. Coepi,\\nI have begun.\\n5. Memini,\\nI remember.\\n6. Novi,\\nI know.\\n7. Odi,\\nI hate.\\nThese four verbs are perfects of obsolete presents, which\\nhave gone out of use, with the exception of nosco, and coepio,\\ncoepere. They consequently have those tenses only, which\\nare derived from the perfect. In meaning, memini, novi, and\\nodi are presents novi, I know, shows the transition most\\nclearly, for it properly means I have learnt to know. Hence\\nthe pluperfect has the meaning of an imperfect memineram,\\nI remembered noveram, I knew oderam, I hated, not I\\nhad hated, and the future perfect has the signification of a\\nsimple future, e. g. odero, I shall hate meminero, I shall re-\\nmember. Otherwise the terminations are quite regular.\\nIndicative.\\nPerfect.\\nCoepi,\\nMemini,\\nNovi,\\nOdi,\\ncoepisti,\\nmeministi,\\nnovisti (nosti),\\nodisti,\\ncoepit.\\nmeminit.\\nnovit.\\nodit.\\ncoepimus,\\nmeminimus,\\nnovimus,\\nodimus.\\ncoepistis,\\nmeministis,\\nnovistis (nostis),\\nodistis,\\ncoeperunt.\\nmeminerunt.\\nnoverunt (noruni).\\nPluperfect.\\noderunU\\ncoeperam, c.\\nmemineram,\\nc. noveram, c.\\n(noram.\\nFuture.\\noderam, c\u00c2\u00ab\\ncoepero, c.\\nmeminerOf c. novero,\\nodero, c.\\nnoveris, c.\\n(noris.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0164.jp2"}, "165": {"fulltext": "DEFECTIVE VERBS.\\nSubjunctive.\\nPerfect.\\ncoeperim, c. meminerim, c. noverim, c.\\n(norim.\\nPluperfect.\\ncoepissem, c. meminissem, c. novissem, c.\\n(nossem.\\nImperative.\\ncoepisse.\\nonly the sing, me-\\nmento and plur.\\nInfinitive.\\nmeminisse. novisse.\\nParticiples.\\noderim, c.\\nodissem, c.\\nPerf. pass, coeptus\\n(begun).\\nFut. act. coepturus.\\nodisse.\\n(perosus, exosus, with an\\nactive meaning).\\nosurus.\\n222.]\\n8. Apage,\\nbe gone.\\n9. ^e,\\nhail.\\n10. Salve,\\nhail.\\n11. Fafe,\\nfarewell.\\nA T o\u00c2\u00a3e. Apage is the Greek imperative a7ra76 of a7ra7cy, and is therefore\\njoined with the accus. apage istas sorores away with them apage te,\\nget thyself off, or, with the omission of the pronoun, apage, begone SaU\\nveo, which rarely occurs, may be regarded as the present of salve. Vale\\nand ave are regular imperatives of valeo, I am well, and aveo, I desire\\nand they are mentioned here only on account of their change of meaning.\\nThe plural is, avete, salvete, valete the imperat. fut. aveto, salveto,\\n^valeto. The future is salvebis, valebis, and the infinitives avere, solvere,\\n^valere.\\n223.] 12. Cedo, give, tell.\\nThis word is used as an imperative in familiar language,\\nfor da and die, both with and without an accusative. A plu-\\nral eette for eedite occurs in old Latin. (The complete verb\\ncedo, yield, has a long e.)\\nH 2", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0165.jp2"}, "166": {"fulltext": "LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n224.] 13. Quaeso, I beseech.\\nQuaeso is originally the same as quaero, but in good prose\\nit is generally inserted in another sentence. Besides this first\\nperson singular, we find only the first person plural quaesu-\\nmus.\\n14. For em, I should be.\\nThis imperfect subjunctive, which is otherwise conjugated\\nregularly, has arisen from fuerem of the obsolete verb fuo,\\nand belongs to sum. It is equivalent to essem the singular\\nexists complete, but of the plural we have only forent. Its\\ninfinit. fore is equivalent to futurum (am, urn, os, as, a)\\nCHAP. LX.\\nIMPERSONAL VERBS.\\n225.] 1. The term Impersonal Verbs strictly applies only\\nto those of which no other but the third person singular is\\nused, and which do not admit a personal subject (I, thou, he),\\nthe subject being a proposition, an infinitive, or a neuter noun\\nunderstood. (See 441. c.) Verbs of this kind are:\\nMiseret (me), I pity, perfect misertum or miseritum est.\\nPiget (me), I regret, piguil or pigitum est.\\nPoenitet (me), I repent, poenituit, fut. poenitebit.\\nPudet (me), I am ashamed, puduit or puditum est.\\nTaedet (me), I am disgusted with (taeduit very rare), per-\\ntaesum est.\\nOportet, it is necessary, oportuit, fut. oportebit.\\n226.] 2. Besides these impersonals, there are some\\nothers, which likewise have no personal subject, but yet are\\nused in the third person plural, and may have a nominative\\n(at least a neuter pronoun) as their subject. Such verbs are\\nLibet (mihi), I like, choose perf. libuit or libitum est.\\nLicet (mihi), I am permitted perf. licuit or licitum est.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0166.jp2"}, "167": {"fulltext": "IMPERSONAL VERBS. 149\\nDecet (me), it becomes me, and dedecet, it does not become\\nme perf. decuit, dedecuit.\\nLiquet, it is obvious perf. licuit.\\n227.] 3. There is also a considerable number of verbs\\nwhich are used impersonally in the third person, while their\\nother persons occur with more or less difference in meaning.\\nTo these belong interest and refert in the sense of it is of\\nimportance to, with which no nominative can be used as a\\nsubject further, accidit,fit, evenit, and contingit, it happens;\\naccedit, it is added to, or in addition to attinet and pertinet\\n(ad aliquid), it concerns conducit, it is conducive convenit,\\nit suits constat, it is known or established expedit, it is\\nexpedient delectat and juvat, it delights, pleases fallit,\\nfugit, and praeterit me, it escapes me, I do not know placet,\\nit pleases; perf. placuit and placitum est praestat, it is\\nbetter restat, it remains vacat, it is wanting est, in the\\nsense of licet, it is permitted or possible, e. g. est videre, non\\nest dicere verum.\\n228.] 4. The verbs which denote the changes of the\\nweather: pluit, it rains ningit, it snows grandinat, it hails;\\nlapidat (perf. also lapidatum est), stones fall from heaven\\nfulgurat and fulminat, it lightens (with this difference, that\\nfulminat is used of a flash of lightning which strikes an ob-\\nject) tonat, it thunders lucescit and illucescit, it dawns\\nvesperascit, the evening approaches in all these cases the\\nsubject understood is supposed to be deus or coelum y which\\nare in fact often added as their subjects.\\n229.] 5. The third person singular passive of a great\\nmany words, especially of those denoting movement or say-\\ning, is or may be used impersonally, even when the verb is\\nneuter, and has no personal passive, e. g. curritur, they or\\npeople run itur, ventum est, clamatur, fletur, scvibitur,\\nbibitur, c.\\n230.] 6. All these impersonal verbs, as such, have no\\nimperative, the place of which is supplied by the present\\nsubjunctive, e. g. pudeat te, be ashamed of! The participles\\nalso (together with the forms derived from them, the gerund\\nand the infinitive future) are wanting, with a few exceptions,\\nguch as libens, pudendus*\\nH 3", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0167.jp2"}, "168": {"fulltext": "150 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP. LXI.\\nETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VERBS.\\n231.] The formation of new words from others pre-\\nviously existing takes place either by Derivation, that is,\\nthe addition of certain terminations or by Composition.\\nIn regard to derivation, we have to distinguish primitive\\nand derivative words and, with regard to composition,\\nsimple and compound words. We shall first treat of\\nderivation.\\nNote. We have hitherto treated of the changes which one particular\\nform of nouns and verbs, which was supposed to be known (the nomina-\\ntive in nouns, and the infinitive in verbs), may undergo in forming cases\\nand numbers, persons, tenses, moods, c. But the origin of that form\\nitself, which is taken as the basis in inflection, is explained in a special\\nbranch of the study of language which is called Etymology. Its object is\\nto trace all the words of the language to their roots, and therefore leads\\nus from the Latin to the Greek language, since both are nearly allied,\\nand since the Greek was developed at an earlier period than the Latin.\\nWe cannot, however, here enter into these investigations, and must con-\\ntent ourselves with ascertaining, within the Latin language itself, the\\nmost prominent rules in the formation of new words from other more\\nsimple ones a knowledge of these rules is useful to the beginner, since\\nit facilitates his acquiring the language. We shall confine ourselves\\nto nouns (substantive and adjective) and verbs, for the derivation and\\ncomposition of pronouns and numerals have been discussed in a former\\npart of this work with regard to the (unchangeable) particles, on the\\nother hand, etymology is necessary, as it supplies the place of inflection.\\nI. Verbs.\\nVerbs are derived either from other verbs or from nouns-\\nA. With regard to the former, we distinguish four classes\\nof verbs 1. Frequentatives 2. Desiderative s 3. Diminu\\ntives^ and 4. Inchoative s.\\n1. Frequentatives follow the first coniugatiou ^anddenote\\nthe frequent repetition or an increase of the action, ~ex\\nrjressed by the primitive verb. They are derived fr om the\\nsupr np. b y chan g ing fop, regular atum. in the first conj u-\\ngation into it o* itare other verbs re main unchanged, t he\\nTermination of the supine. um r alone being changed i nto o 9", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0168.jp2"}, "169": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VEHBS. 151\\nare\u00c2\u00b1 Of the former kind are, e. g., clamo, clamito impero,\\nimperito rogito, volito of the latter, domo, domitum, do-\\nmito adjuvo, adjutum, adjicto and from verbs of the third\\nconjugation, curro, cur sum, cur so cano, cantum, canto\\ndico, dictum, dicto nosco, notum, noto and so also accepto,\\npulso, defenso, gesto, quasso, tracto. Some of these latter\\nfrequentatives, derived from verbs of the third conjugation,\\nserve again as primitives from which new frequentatives are\\nformed, as cursito, dictito, defensito.\\nSome few frequentatives with the termination ito, itare,\\nare not derived from the supine, but from the present of the\\nprimitive verb agito, noscito, quaerito. Some frequenta-\\ntives have the deponential form, as amplexor from amplector,\\nminitor from minor, tutor from tueor, scitor and sciscitor from\\nscisco.\\n232.] 2. Desidera t ives end in urio, iirire th ey fol-\\nlow the fourth ~conj u gation, a rid express a desireT 5f_ that\\nwhich is implied in jtne primitive Thev are formed from\\nthe supme of the latter, e. g. esiirio, esuris, I want to eat,\\nfrom edo, esum so also dicturio from dictum, empturio from\\nemptum.\\n233.] 3. Diminutives have the termination illo, Mar e,\\nwhic h is added to~*the stem of fne primitive verb, withou t\\nanj further _change ano^ triev_d escribe the action expresse d\\nas something trilling or i nsignificant e. g. cantillare from\\nca\u00c2\u00abtare3cPsmg itt arTunder voice, or sing with a shaking\\nconscribillare, scribble sorbillare from sorbere, sip. The\\nnumber of these verbs is not great.\\n234.] 4. Inchoatives have the terminatio n sco, and\\nfollow the third conj ligation. They express the ^Beginning\\nof the act orj ndi tion denoted by the primitive e. g. caleo,\\nI am warm, calesco, I am getting or becoming warm areo 3\\nI am dry, aresco, I begin to be dry langueo, I am languid,\\nlanguesco, I am becoming languid. It frequently happens\\nthat a preposition is prefixed to an inchoative, as in timeo,\\npertimesco taceo, conticesco. The vowel preceding the ter-\\nmination sco, scere, is either a (asco), e (esco), or i (isco),\\naccording as the inchoative is derived from a primitive of the\\nfirst, second, or third and fourth conjugation (in the last two\\ncases it is i) e. g.\\nlabasco from labare, totter.\\npallesco from pallere, be pale.\\nh 4", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0169.jp2"}, "170": {"fulltext": "152 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ningemisco from gemere, sigh.\\nobdormisco from dormire, sleep.\\nMany incho atives, ho wever, are not de rived from verb s,\\nbut from substantives ancTad]ectives~ I e.g.\\npuerascOy I become childish, from puer.\\nmaturesco, I become ripe, from maturus, a, um.\\nAll inchoatives take their perfect and the tenses de rived\\nj^nTT ytrom the primitive verf\u00c2\u00a3 and where no primitive\\nverb exists, from a supposed form of it. (See Chap. LIL,\\nthe list of the most important inchoatives.) It must, how-\\never, be observed, that not all verbs ending in sco are incho-\\natives. See 203.\\n235.] B. In regard to the derivation of verbs from\\nnou ns, the language in general follows the nrinciplel^givin g;\\nt he termination of the second conjugat ion to ver bs of an i n-\\ntransit ive signification, and thaTof the first to such asTiav e\\na t ransitive sign ification. Thus we have, e. g.\\na) flos.floris, florere, bloom. and from adjectives,\\nfrom, frondis, frondere, have fo- albus, albere, be white.\\nliage. calvus, calvere, be bald.\\nvis, vires, virere, be strong. flavus, jlavere, be yellow.\\nlux, lucis, lucere, shine. hebes, hebere, be blunt or dull,\\nbut, albus, albare, whitewash.\\nb) Humerus, numerare, count aptus, aptare, fit.\\nsignum, signare, mark. liber, a, urn, liberate, liberate.\\nfraus, fraudis, fraudare, deceive. celeber, bris, bre, celebrare, make\\nnomen, nominis, nominare, name. frequent, or celebrate.\\nvulnus, vuhieris, vulnerare, wound. memor, memorare, mention.\\nanna, armare, arm. communis, communicate, com-\\nmunicate.\\nBoth kinds are found compounded with prepositions e. g.\\nLaqueus, illaqueare, entwine acervus, coacervare, accumulate stirps,\\nextirpate, extirpate; cavus, excavate, hollow out.\\nThe observation of 147. must be repeated here, that\\nmany de ponents of the first conjugation (in ari) are derived\\nirom su bstantives for the purpos~ot expressin g to be that\\nwhich Tti e_subsjyiMrve indicates e. g. among the first verbs\\nin the list there given, we find aemulari, ancillari, architec-\\ntari, aucupari, augur ari and in like manner comes, comi-\\nUs, comitari dominus, dominari fur furari.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0170.jp2"}, "171": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OP NOUNS AND VERBS. 153\\nII. Substantives.\\n236.] Substantives are derived\\nA. From Verbs.\\n1. By the termination or, appende d in place of the um of\\nthe supine in transitive- verbs, to d enote, a man perfo rming\\nthe action implied in the verb e. g.\\namator, monitor, lector, auditor,\\nadulator, fautor, conditor, conditor,\\nadjutor, censor, petltor, largltor,\\nand a great many others. Those which end in tor form\\nfeminines in trix, as fautrix, adjutrix, victrix. In regard to\\nthe masculines in sor, the formation of feminines is more\\ndifficult, but tonsor makes tonstrix defensor, defenstrix\\nand expulsor makes expidtrix.\\nSome few substantives ending in tor are formed also from\\nnouns; as aleator, gambler, from alea janitor, from janua\\nviator from via.\\n2. The sam e_ termination or. when added to the unaltere d\\nstem of a word, espec iall y of intransitive verbs, expresse s\\nthe action or condition denoted by t he verb substantively\\ne. g. pavere, pavor, fear fur ere, furor, fury niter e, nitor,\\nshine or gloss. So also, e. g.\\nclamor, albor, horror, favor, ardor,\\namor, rubor, timor, maeror, splendor,\\n[\u00c2\u00a7237.] 3. Two terminations^ viz. io, gen, ionis, an d us,\\ngen. us when added to the supine after throwing oWjEeum.\\nexpress the action or condition denote^ by the verb ab stract-\\nedly. Both terminations are frequently met with in sub-\\nstantives derived from the same verb, without any material\\ndifference, as concursio and concursus, consensio and con-\\nsensus so also contemptio and contemptus, digressio and\\ndiyressus, ?notio and motus, and others.\\nIn this manner are formed from actives and deponents*\\nfor example,\\na) accubitio. motio. lectio, auditio,\\ncunctatio. cautio. ultio. sortitio.\\nacclamatio. admonitio. actio. largitio.\\nb) metus. fletus. cantus. ambitus,\\nsonitus. visus. congressus. ortus.\\n2\\\\ T ote. A third termination prod ucing pretty nearly the same meaning\\nis ura as in pictura, painting conjectura, conjecture cultura, Jul-", "height": "4090", "width": "2381", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0171.jp2"}, "172": {"fulltext": "154 LATIN GKAMMAft.\\ntivation. Sometimes it exists along with the other two, as in posifw\\npositus, positura censio, census, censura. Usually, however, one of them\\nis preferred, in practice, with a special meaning. Thus we have mercatus,\\nthe market, and mercatura, commerce.\\n238.] 4. The termination men, or more frequen tly\\nmentum, denotes the means of flt.tajrn ncr what the v erb\\nexpresses e. g. solamen, a means of consolation nomen\\n(from novimen), a means of recognising, that is, a name;\\ntegumentum, velamentum, adjumentum from adjuvare, a\\nmeans of relief, condimentum from condire, condiment,\\ni. e. a means of seasoning documentum, a document, a\\nmeans of showing or proving a thing. Similar words are\\nallevamentum. monumentum. additamentum, experimentum.\\nornamentum. /omentum. alimentum. blandimentum.\\nSome substantives of this kind are derived from nouns\\nthus from ater, black, we have atramentum. The connect-\\ning vowel a before mentum, however, may show that a link\\nwas conceived to exist between the primitive ater and the\\nderivative atramentum, such, perhaps, as a verb atrare,\\nblacken. In like manner we have calceamentum, a covering\\nfor the feet capillamentum, a head-dress, wig.\\n239.] 5. The terminations bulum and culum (or ulum.\\nwjjenjc__ojr_g precedes) denote g,n inRtmrpp.nt or a pi ace\\nse rving a certain purpose e. g. venabulum, a hunter s spear\\nvehiculum, a vehicle jaculum, a javelin cingulum, a\\ngirdle stabulum, a stable. So also,\\numbraculum. cubiculum. ferculum. vinculum.\\nThe termination culum is som e times contracted into clu m.\\nas in vinclum; and clum is changed into crum and b~uliem\\ninto brum, when there is already an I in the stem of the\\nword e. g. fulcrum, support lavacrum, bath sepulcrum,\\nsepulchre Jlagrum, scourge ventilabrum. A similar mean-\\ning belongs to trum in aratrum, plough claustrum, lock\\nrostrum, beak. Some words of this class are derived from\\nsubstantives, as turibulum, censer (tus, turis) acetabulum,\\nvinegar cruet.\\n6. Other and less productive termination s are a and o,\\nwhich, wnen appended to the stem of the word denote ^th e\\nsubject of the action conviva, guest advena, stranger\\nscriba, scribe erro, vagrant bibo, drunkard. By means\\nof the termination io words are derived from substantives,\\ndenoting a trade to which a person belongs, as pellio, furrier;\\nrestio, rope-maker.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0172.jp2"}, "173": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VERBS. 155\\n-ium expresses the effect of the verb a nd th e place of the\\naction e. g. gaudium, joy odium, hatred aedijicium,\\nBuilding, edifice re- and confugium, place of refuge comi-\\ntium, place of assembly.\\nAgo expresses a state or condition, and mo^ly^a_diseased\\none vertigo, giddiness prurigo, itcET^an^Tbthers.\\n240.] B. From other Substantive s.\\n1. Diminutives, or vocabida deminuta, are mostly formed\\nb y the terminations ulus, ula r ulum, or cuius, a, um, ac\\ncording to the gender of the primitive word^ ulus, a, um,\\nis appended to the stem after the removal of the termination\\nof the oblique cases, e. g. virga, virgula puer, puerulus\\nrex {regis), regulus. So also,\\nportula. nummulus. rapulum. facida.\\nlitterula. horiidus. oppidulum. adolescentulus.\\nI nstead of ulus, a, um, we find olus, a, um, when the termi-\\nnation of the pri mitive substantia up, o, um.^ is preceded\\nby a vowel, e. g.\\nfiliolus. gloriola. ingeniolum,\\nalveolus, lineola. horreolum.\\nThe termination cuius, a, um, is sometimes appended to the\\nnominative, without any change, viz. in words ending in\\nand r, and in those ending in os and us of the third declen-\\nsion, which take an r in the genitive e. g,\\ncorcidum. frater cuius. fiosadus. munusculum.\\ntuberculum. sororcula. oscidum. corpusculum.\\nAnd so also animaladum, uxorcula, later cuius. Sometimes\\nthe s of the nominative terminations is and es is dropped,\\nas in\\nigniculus. aedicula. nubecula. diecula.\\npisciculus. pellicula. vulpecula. plebecula.\\nIn words of other terminations of the third declension, and\\nin* 13lose of theTourth, i steps in as a connecting jyj\u00c2\u00bbw eH\\nbetween the stem of the word and the diminutive termi-\\nnation cuius. cuTcL.c uIuolj- e. g. *_\u00e2\u0080\u0094\\nponticulus. denticulus. versiculus. anicula,\\nparticula. ossiculum. articidus. corniculum.\\ncoticula reticulum. sensiculus. geniculum.\\nH 6", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0173.jp2"}, "174": {"fulltext": "156 LATIK GRAMMAR.\\nThe termination ellus, 7, T um^ occurs only in those wor ds\\nof the^first^nd second declensions which have Z r n t or r^ in\\ntheir ]termmatiqn sl Thus oculus makes ocellus; tabula,\\ntabeltcT; asinus, asellus liber, libellus; libra, libella\\nlucrum, lucellum. So also popellus, fabella, lamella, patella,\\nagellus, cultellus, fiabellum, fiagellum, labellum, sacellum*\\nThe termin ation illus, a, u?n, occurs more rarely as in bacil-\\nlum, sigillum, hgiLlum codicillus, lapillus, anguilla. The\\ntermination unculus, a, um, is, appended chiefly to wor dlTm\\no, gen, onis or i nis as,\\nsermunculus. ratiuncula, homunculus,\\npugiunculus. quaestiuncula. virguncula,\\n241.] 2. The termination turn appended to the radical\\nsyllable of th e primitiv^exnre sses either an assemblage o f\\nthings or persons, or ^The i r relation to one another e. g.\\ncollega, collegium, an assembly of men who are collegae\\n(colleagues) of one another so convivium, repast, or\\nassembly of convivae servitium, the domestics, also servi-\\ntude sacerdotium, the office of priest minister, minis-\\nterium, service. When this termination is appended to\\nverbal substantives in or, it denotes the place of the action,\\nas in repositorium, repository conditorium, a place where\\na thing is kept, tomb auditorium, a place where people\\nassemble for the purpose of listening to a person.\\n242.] 3. -avium denotes a receptacle e. g. granarium,\\na granary or place where grain is kept armarium (armd),\\na cupboard armamentarium, arsenal, or place where the\\narmamenta are kept. So also plantarium and seminarium,\\ncolumbarium, tabularium.\\n243.] 4. -etum appended to the n ames of plants denote s\\nthe place wherel;h y gTO W in great number e. g! quercus,\\nquercetum, a plantation of oaks so also vinetum, lauretum,\\nesculetum, dumetum, myrtetum, olivetum and with some\\nchange, salictum (from salix), pasture, instead of salicetum,\\nvirgultum instead of virguletum, arbustum from arbos (for\\narbor), instead of arboretum.\\n^,[\u00c2\u00a7244.] 5. Ale appended to names of animals indicates\\nthe place in which they a re kept e. g. bubile or bovile* stall\\nof oxen; equile, stable (of horses) so also caprile, hoedile,\\novile. All these words are properly neuters of adjectives,\\nbut their other genders are not used.\\n245.] 6. With regard to patronymics, or names of", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0174.jp2"}, "175": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VERES. 157\\ndescent, which the Latin poets have adopted from the\\np oetical language ot tne Greeks, the student must be referred\\nto the Greek gramma r. The most common term ination is\\nides, as Priamus, Priamides Cecrops, Cecropides names\\n.in eus and cles make ides e. g.Atrides, Pelides, Heraclidae.\\n.N ames in dS Of tile first declension mak e t heir patronymi cs\\nTfT ades as Aeneas, Aeneades. Ine termination tacte?\\nshould pro perly oc cur only in names ending m iii s. such as\\nThesthcs, 1 hestiades but it is used also in other names,\\naccording to the requirements of the particular verse; as\\nLaertes, Laertiades Atlas, Atlantiades Telamon, Tela-\\nmoniades.\\nThe fe minine patronymics are derived from thg^ maSen*\\nlines by ides being changed into is, Ides into eis^ and iadesj\\ninto ias e. g. Tanialides, Tantalis Nereus, Nereis\\nThestius, Thestias. Aeneades (from Aeneas) alone makes\\nthe feminine Aeneis, because the regular feminine, Aeneas,\\nwould be the same as the primitive.\\n246.] C. From Adjectives\\n1. The termination itas is the most common in formi ng\\nsubs tantives denoting the quality expressed by the adjective\\nas ~an abstract notion, and is equivalent to the English\\nit?/. The adjective itself in appending itas undergoes the\\nsame changes as in its oblique cases. Thus from atrox,\\natroci, we obtain atrocitas from cupidus, cupidi, cupiditas.\\nSo also eapax, capacitas celer, celeritas crudelis, crude-\\nlitas facilis, facilitas clarus, claritas vents, Veritas.\\nLibertas and paupertas are formed without the i, and facultas\\nand difficultas with a change of the vowel, as in the adverb\\ndifficulter.\\nThe adjectives in ius mak e their substantives in ietas\\ne. g. anxietds^pietas, varietas; those in stus make tnem m\\nstas honestas, venustas, vetustas.\\n2. Another very common termination is ia, but it o ccurs\\nonly in substantives derived from adjectives o f one termi-\\nnation, ia being added to the crude form ot the oblique cases.\\nFrom audax, we have audacia, an cT from concors, concordia.\\nSo also clemens, dementia; constans, constantia impudentia,\\nelegantia, appetentia. Some adjectives in us and er, how^-\\never, likewise form their substantives in ia e. g. miser,\\nmiseria angustus, angustia; perftdus, perjzdia.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0175.jp2"}, "176": {"fulltext": "158 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n247.] 3. There are nume rous substanti ves in which\\ntudo is append ed to the case oF the a^tecTrv^jen ding in i\\ne. g. aegritudo, altitudo, magmtudo and in polysyllable s\\nin t us, tudo directly gro ws out of this terminat ion, as in\\nconsuetudd, munsuetul^b\\\\i?iquietudo, sollicitudo. Sbme of\\nthese substantives exist along with other forms, as beatitudo,\\nclaritudo, firmitudo, lenitudo, and sanctitudo] along with\\nbeatitas, claritas, firmitas, c. Valetudo stands alone.\\n4. Substantives in itia, from adjectives in us, are of more\\nrare occurrence, as justitia from Justus. So avdritia,\\nlaetitia, maestitia] pudicitia but also tristitia from tristis.\\n5. .The termination edo occurs only in a few substant ives\\nas albedo, dalcedo, pinguedo.\\nIII. Adjectives.\\nAdjectives are derived\\nA. From Verbs.\\n248.] 1. With the termination bundus, chiefly from\\nverbs of the first conjugat ion, e. g. errabundus irom err are,\\ngratulabundus from gratidari, populabundus from populari.\\nTheir signification is. in general, that of a participle presen t,\\nwith the meaning; strengthened, a circumstance which we\\nmust express in English by the addition of other words\\ne. g. haesitabundus, full of hesitation deliberabundus, full\\nof deliberation mirabundus, full of admiration venerabun-\\ndus, full of veneration lacrimabundus, weeping profusely.\\nThere are but few adjectives of this kind derived from verbs\\nof the third conjugation fremebundus, gemebundus, furi-\\nbundus, ludibundus, moribundus, nitibundus. There is\\nonly one from a verb of the second conjugation, viz. pudi-\\nbundus and likewise one only from a verb of the fourth,\\nlascivibundus.\\nSome verbal adjectives in cundus are of a similar kind\\nfacundus, eloquent iracundus, irascible verecundus, full\\nof bashfulness rubicundus, the same as rubens, reddish.\\n249.] 2. The ending idus, chiefly in adjectives formed\\nf^lJritT^^^^vprhSj simpiylrienotes t he quality expressed\\nb y the verb\\ncalidus, from cohere, rubidus, from rubere.\\nalgidus, from algere. turgidus, from turgere.\\nmadidus, from madere. rapidus, from rapere.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0176.jp2"}, "177": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VERBS. L59\\n3. The term inations ills and bills denote the po ssib ility of\\na thing in a passive^ sense e. g. amabilis, easy to love, hence\\namiable placabiiis, easy to be conciliated; delebilis, easy to\\nbe destroyed vincibilis, easy to be conquered facilis, easy\\nto do docilis, docile fragilis, fragile. Some of these adjec-\\ntives, however, have an active meaning horribilis, produ-\\ncing horror, horrible terribilis, terrible, that is, producing\\nterror ;fertilis, fertile.\\n4. -ax appended to the stem of the verb expresses a pro-\\npensit~and generally a faulty one:\\nedax and vorax. audax.\\nloquax. rapax.\\n2c;o.] B. From Substantives, viz.\\na) From Appellatives\\n1. T he ending eus denotes the material, and sometimes\\nsimilarity e. g.\\nferreus. ligneus. plumbeus, virgineus.\\naureus. citreus. cinereus. igneus.\\nargenteus* buxeus. corporeus. vitreus,\\n2. -icus expresses belonging or relating to a thing e. g.\\nclassicus from classis civicus, relating to a citizen cLomini-\\ncus, belonging to a master bellicus, relating to war, c.\\n3. The termination ills has th e same mea ning, but assumes\\nalso a moral signification, e g. civilis and hostihs, the same\\nas civicus and hosticus, but also answering to our civil and\\nhostile. So servilis, senilis, anilis, juvenilis, puerilis, virilis.\\n4. The endings aceus and icius sometimes express a ma-\\nterial and sometimes t he origin, e. g. chartaceus, papyraceus,\\npatricius, tribumcius.\\n251.] 5. The termination ali s (in English a!) is ap-\\npended not only to words in a, buj^also to substantives o f\\not her terminations in which cas^however, the terminatio n! s\\nappended to the crude form of theVblique cases e. g. ancora;\\nconviva, letum ancoralis, convivatis, letaiis /but from rex,\\nregis, we have regalis virgo, virginalis sacerdos, sacerdo*\\ntalis caput, capitalis. So also auguralis, comitialis, anna-\\nlis, fluvialis, mortalis, and others.\\nThe ending aris is somewhat more ^eldom, and princi*", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0177.jp2"}, "178": {"fulltext": "160 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\npally occurs in suck word s as contain an I such as, articu-\\nlaris, consularis, popularis, puellaris, vulgaris, Apollinaris.\\nThe term ination atilis denotes fitness fo r the thing ex\\npressed bv the root as, aquatilis, fiuviatiUs, volatilis,\\n6. The t ermination ius occurs most frequently in deriv a-\\ntives from p ersonal nouns in or e. g. accusatorius, amator-\\nius, aleatorius, censorius, imperatorius, praetorius. It\\noccurs more rarely in substantives of other terminations,\\nthough we have regius, patrius, aquilonius.\\n252.] 7. Inus is found especially in derivatives fro m\\n5^]]^.oX.aninials_ (espj3ci ally to^dejioje^the ir flesh e. g.\\nasininus. ferinus. haedinus. anserinus.\\ncaninus. equinus. caballinus. anatinus.\\ncamelinus. taurinus, arietinus. viperinus.\\nAjid in a few derived from names of o th er living beings e. g.\\ndivinus, masculinus, marinus.\\nThe termination inus, on the other hand, occurs chiefly i n\\nderivatives from names of plants and minerals., to denote th e\\nmaterial of which a thing is m ade e. g. cedrinus, faginus,\\n^aSamantinus, crystallinus. See 20.\\n8. The termination arius expr esses a general relation to\\nJ he noun from wh ich the adjective |s former!, but m ore par-\\ntjc_ularly the occu pation or profession of a perso n e. g.\\ncoriarius. carbonarius. scapharius. ostiarius*\\nstatuarius. aerarius. navicularius. consiliarius.\\nsicarius. argentarius. codicarius. classiarius.\\n9. The ending osus denotes f ulness or abundance as in\\naerumnosus. aquosus. bellicosus.\\nanimosuSs lapidosus. caliginosus.\\nartificiosus. vinosus. tenebricosus.\\nactuosus. portuosus. saltuosus.\\n10. The termination lentus denotes plenty, and is com-\\nmonly pr^cede^nByTn^vowel^ and sometimes by o\\nfraudulentus. vinolentus. pulverulentus.\\nturbulentus. opulentus. violentus.\\n11. Less productive and significant terminations are\\n-anus which denotes belonging to a thin g urbanus, mon-\\ntanus, liumanus Ivus generally denotes the manner or\\nnatur e of a thing furtivus, votivus, aestivwT; ern^j^z^\\nfraternus, maternus, paternus, infernus, ex-", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0178.jp2"}, "179": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VERBS. 161\\nternus. The same termination and urnus occur in adjectives\\ndenoting time vermis, hiberaus, hesternus, diurnus, noctur-\\nnus itiinus occurs in fini timus, le gitimus, maritimu s.\\n253 7I 1^. -A very extensive class 01 derivative adjec\\ntives end in atus Hkp. pnrtiViplp.s perfect passive of the first\\nrpTrp^o-ntmrij hut thpy rA d^rivpri nncp from sub stantives,\\nw ithout its bein f*; p^Hhle fr c1i w the e v a ^lC^J2! nn nTPT\\nmediate verb. Thus we have, e. g., aurum and aurams,\\ngilt but a verb aurare does not occur, and its existence is\\nassumed only for the sake of derivation. Some adjectives of\\nthis kind are formed from substantives in is and end in itus,\\nas auritus, provided with ears pellitus, covered with a skin;\\nturritus, having towers. Some few are formed by the end-\\ning utus from substantives in us, gen. us as cornutus, astu-\\ntus. Those in atus are very numerous, e. g.,\\nbarbatus. calceatus. aeratus.\\ntogatus. clipeatus. dentatus.\\ngaleatus. oculatus. falcatus.\\n254.] b) From Proper Names\\nWe may here distinguish four classes 1 names of men,\\n2. of town Si 8 of nations 4. of countries\\n1. The termination ianus is the most common in forming\\nad jectives from Roman names ot men, as Tullianus, !Ser~\\nvilianus, Crassianus, Marcellianus, Paulianus, Caesarianus,\\nCatonianus, Ciceronianus anus occurs less frequentl y as\\nCinnanus, Gracchanus, Sullanus. The termination inus is\\nfound chiefly in Wi vfltivp.fi fro m names of families, e. g.\\nMessalinus, Paulinus, Bufinus. T h e termination eus, as in\\nCaesareus, Herculeus is used only by poets.\\nThere are two terminations tor lorming adjectives from\\nGreek names of men, eus or lus (in Greek eloq) and tcus,\\nas Homericus, Platonicus, Socraticus, Achilleus, Epicureus,\\nSophocleus.\\n255.] 2. Fromjoamesofjpjace s, and ch iefly fr pm tho se\\no f^towns. adjectives are derived ending in en s is 7 inus as and\\nani^ s.\\na) -ensis, also from some common or appellative n ouns,\\ne. g. cdstrensis from castra circensis from circus and from\\nnames of towns Cannae, Cannensis Catina, Catinensis\\nAriminum, Ariminensis Comum, Comensis; Mediolanum,\\nMediolanensis Sulrno, Sulmonensis from (Greek) towns\\nin la (ea) Antiochensis, Nicomedensis.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0179.jp2"}, "180": {"fulltext": "162 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n(3) -inns from nn^ p in. ar rl iurp. e. g. Ameria, Ameri-\\nnus Tiricia, A ricinus Florentia, Florentinus; Caudium,\\nCaudinus Clusium, Clusinus Canusium, Canusinus, And\\nso also from Latium, Latinus, and from Capitolium, CapU\\ntolinus.\\ny) -asjfor all ^^0 j s 11SPi a i ftSS pxt.p.rtsivply and form s\\njuiljpptWpg nTl1 7 fl nTn a\u00e2\u0084\u00a2P a nf tnwng in y/?/ fh Oil fib not\\nfrom all. It occurs in Arpinum, Arpinas Aquinum, Aqui-\\nnas Frivernum, Privernas Casilinum, Casilinas (along\\nwith Casilinensis). But Ravenna also makes Ravennas\\nCapena, Capenas Ardea, Ardeas.\\nc) -anus from some appellative nouns as monta nus, fon-\\ntanus* urb anus (from mons. /ons, zirbs^) and from names i o f\\ntownsjn. a and ae e. g. Roma, Romanics Alba, Albanus\\nSparta, Spartanus Curnae, Cumanus Syracusae, Syra-\\ncusanus Thebae, Thebanus also from some in um and i\\nTusculum, Tusculanus Fundi, Fundanus.\\n256.] Greek adjectives, however, formed from names of towns, or\\nsuch as were introduced into Latin through the literature of the Greeks,\\nfollow different rules which must be learned from a Greek grammar.\\nWe will here only remark that the most frequent ending is ius e. g.\\nAegyptus, Aegyptius Lesbos, Lesbius Rhodus, Rhodius Corinthus,\\nCorintkius Ephesus, Ephesius Chius, Chlus (instead of Chiius) Lace-\\ndaemon, Lacedaemonius MaratJwn, Marathonius Salamis, Salaminius\\nEretria, Eretrius. Names in a take the termination aeus, as Smyrna,\\nSmymaeus Tegea, Tegeaeus Larissa, Larissaeus Perga, Pergaeus.\\nIn the case of towns not in Greece, even when they are of Greek origin,\\nwe most frequently find the termination Inus Tarentum, Tarentinus\\nAgrigentum, Agrigentinus Centuripae, Centuripinus Metapontum, Meta-\\npontinus. It not unfrequently happened that the Romans formed adjec-\\ntives from Greek names of towns in their own way, and without any\\nregard to the Greek forms e. g. Atheniensis instead of Athenaeus, The-\\nbanus instead of Thebaeus, Syracusanus along with Syracusius. The\\nGreek ending evs was most commonly changed into ensis and irrjs into\\nanus, as in Panormitanus, Tyndaritanus, especially in all the Greek\\nnames of towns compounded with polls, as Neapolitanus, Megalopolitanus.\\nThe terminations ens and itis, however, are often retained in Latin,\\n257.] 3. From names which origina ll y belong to n a-\\ntionSj adjectives are formed in icus anoTmore rarely in ius\\ne.g. from Afer, Britannus, (Callus, (Jermanus, Italus, we have\\nthe adjectives Africus y Britannicus, Gallicus, Italicus, c;\\nSyrus, Syrius Cilix, Cilicius Thrax, Thracius. Other\\nnames of nations are at once substantives and adjectives, as\\nGraecus, Etruscus, Sardus.\\n258.] 4. T he names of countries, with some exceptio ns.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0180.jp2"}, "181": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF NOUNS AND VERBS.\\n163\\nsuch as Latium and Samnium, and those borrowed from the\\nGreek, Aegyptus, Persis, are themselves derived from the\\nnames of nations e. g. Britannia, Gallia, Italia, Thracia,\\nsometimes with slight changes, as in Sardi, Sardinia and\\nSiculi, Sicilia. From some of these countries, adjectives\\nare formed with the terminations ensis and anus, as Hispa-\\nniensis, Siciliensis Africanus, Gallicanus.\\n259.] C. From other Adjecti ves.\\nDiminutives arP- fornix! frm^ znrru* n(1]P.r ,tJYP.ft by thp tftr,\\nurination^ nlus^ culus^ and ellus r aeeording to the ru les\\nwhich were given above. 240. Thus we have parvulus,\\nhorndulus aureolus pauperculus, leviculus misellus, pul-\\nchellus.\\n260.] Besides derivation new words are also formed by\\ncomposition. In examining such words we may consider\\neither the first or the second part of which a compound\\nconsists.\\nThe fir st word is either a noun, a verb, or a particle. The\\nsecond remains unchange d, e. g. benefacio, beneficium, male-\\ndico, satago a contraction takes place only in nolo, from ne\\n(for non) and volo, and in malo, from mage (for magis) and\\nvolo. Prepositions are used more frequently than any other\\nparticles in forming compound words. Respecting their\\nsignification and the changes produced in pronunciation by\\nthe meeting of heterogeneous consonants, see Chap. LXYI.\\nThere are only a few words in which verbs form the firs t\\npart of a compou niL-and wherever this is the case,~ the ver b\\nfacio forms the latter_pa j$j as in arefacio. caletacio. made-\\nfacio, patefacio, condocefacio, commonefacio, assuefacio, and\\nconsuefacio. The only change in the first verbs (which be-\\nlong to the second conjugation) is that they throw off the o\\nof the present.\\nWhen the^ first w ordJ s_a noun (substantive _or adjective),\\nit regularly end _in a sj ^ort^.* which is the connecting\\nYTTwel\\npatricida,\\nart if ex.\\ntubicen.\\ncausidicus.\\naedi/zco,\\narmiger.\\naquilifer.\\ncapripes.\\ncarnivorus,\\nbelligero.\\nparticeps.\\nignivomus.\\nmisericors.\\nrupicapra.\\nstillicidium.\\naequiparo.\\namplifico.\\nbreviloquens.\\nalienigena.\\nvilipendo.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0181.jp2"}, "182": {"fulltext": "164 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSo also centifolia rosa, centimanus Gyges, from centum. A\\ncontraction takes place in tiblcen for tibiicen, from tibia and\\ncano, whereas in tubicen and fidicen the connecting vowel is\\nshort according to the rule, there being no i in the words\\ntuba nd Jides. When the second word begins with a vowel,\\nthe connecting i is thrown out, as in magnanimus, unanimis,\\nwith which we may compare unimanus and uniformis.\\nThose words, the parts of which are declined separately,\\nmay likewise be regarded as compounds, although they form\\none word only* in so far as they are commonly written as\\nsuch as respublica, jusjurandum, or those of which the\\nfirst word is a genitive, as senatusconsultum, plebiscitum,\\nduumvir, triumvir.\\n261.] The latter word in _a.jiomp ound determines t o\\nwhat part of speech the whole belongs In compositions\\nwitii particles, the second word either remains unchanged, or\\nundergoes only a slight variation in its vowel. This varia-\\ntion must be here considered, especially with regard to the\\nradical vowel of the verb for the vowels i, o, u, a and e re-\u00c2\u00bb\\nmain unchanged, as in ascrlbo, comminor, appono, excolo,\\nadduco, illabor, subrepo but a and e and the diphthong ae\\nfrequently undergo a change: 1. a remains only in the com-\\npounds of caveo, maneo, and traho but in most other cases\\nit is changed into i, e. g. constituo from statuo, accipio from\\ncapio, abjicio from jacio, arripio from rapio, incido from cado,\\nadigo from ago so also attingo from tango, confringo from\\nfrango it is changed into e in ascendo, aspergo, confer do,\\n2. e sometimes remains unchanged, as in appeto, contego,\\ncontero, congero, but sometimes it is changed into i assideo\\nrrom sedeo, abstineo from teneo, arrigo from rego, aspicio\\nfrom specio. Both forms occur in the compounds of legere,\\ne. g. perlego, read through intelligo, understand. 3. The\\ndiphthong ae remains unchanged only in the compounds of\\nhaereo, as adhaereo it is changed into I in the compounds\\nof caedo, laedo, quaero, e. g. incido, illldo, inguiro. Other\\nparticulars may be gathered from the lists of irregular verbs.\\nIn the c omposition of nou ns wj-tl^vjRTJTHjJihft second word\\nundergoes more violent changes, and the rules already given\\nrespecting derivation must be ta k enjfoto account here BuT\\nnouns are also formed in composition with verbs \u00c2\u00a3y~the mere\\nabbreviation of the ending, and without any characteristic\\nsyllable of derivation. Thus we have from gero, claviger,\\narmiger from fero, cistifer, signifer from facio, artifex", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0182.jp2"}, "183": {"fulltext": "ETYMOLOGY OF PARTICLES. 165\\npontifex from capio, princeps, particeps. Compound\\nadjectives are derived from verbs by the termination us,\\nwhich is appended to the verbal stem mortiferus, ignivo-\\nmus, dulcisonus, like consonus, carnivorus, causidicus and\\nfrom substantives with a very slight or no change at all, e. g.\\ncentimanus, capripes, misericors, uniformis.\\nCHAP. LXH.\\nETYMOLOGY OF PARTICLES.\\nADVERBS.\\n262.] L As the adjective qualifies a substantive, so the\\nadverb qualifies a verb, an adjective (consequently a parti-\\nciple also), and even another adverb; e.g. prudens homo\\nprudenter agit felix homo feliciter vivit eximie doctus\\ndomus celeriter extructa satis bene scripsit.\\n2. Adverbs belong to those parts of speech which are in-\\ncapable of inflexion, for they have neither cases nor any\\nother forms to denote the difference of persons, tenses, or\\nmoods. But an adverb approaches nearest the declinable\\nparts of speech, inasmuch as it is derived from adjectives or\\nparticiples, and takes the same degrees of comparison as the\\nlatter. We have, therefore, in the first place to consider the\\netymology of adverbs and then their degrees of comparison.\\nWith regard to their etymology, adverbs are either simple\\nor primitive (primitiva), or derived (derivatd). We shall first\\ntreat of derivative adverbs their number is great, and cer-\\ntain laws are followed in their formation.\\n263.] 3. By far the greater number of derivative ad-\\nverbs end in e and ter, and are derived from adjectives and\\nparticiples (present active and perfect passive).\\nAdjectives and participles in us, a, um, and adjectives in\\ner, a, um (that is, those which follow the second declension),\\nmake adverbs with the termination e. Thus alius, longus,\\nmolestus, doctus, emendatus, ornatus, make the adverbs alte,\\nlonge, moleste, docte, emendate, ornate. With regard to\\nadjectives in er, a, um, the formation of adverbs varies ac-", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0183.jp2"}, "184": {"fulltext": "166 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ncording as they throw out the e in the oblique cases or retain\\nit (see 48. and ol.), for the adverbs follow the oblique\\ncases. Thus liber and miser make libere and misere but\\naeger (aegri) and pulcher (pulchri) make aegre and pulchre.\\nBonus makes the adverb bene, from an ancient form benus.\\nBene and male are the only adverbs of this class that end in\\na short e.\\n264.] 4. All other adjectives and the participles in ns\\n(consequently all adjectives which follow the third declen-\\nsion) form their adverbs in ter, and retain the changes which\\noccur in the genitive. The genitive is is changed into iter,\\nexcept the genitive in ntis (from the nom. in ns), which\\nmakes the adverb in nter e. g. elegans, eleganter amans,\\namanter; conveniens, convenienter but par, pariter utilis,\\nutiliter; tenuis, tenuiter; celer, eris, celeriter saluber, salu-\\nbriter, and so also ferociter, simpliciter, dupliciter, concorditer,\\naudaciter (or more frequently contracted into audacter).\\n265.] 5. Although in grammar an adverb is assigned\\nto every adjective, yet the dictionary must frequently be con-\\nsulted, for there are some adjectives whose very signification\\ndoes not admit the formation of an adverb, as, for example,\\nthose which denote a material or colour while with respect\\nto others we can say no more than that no adverb of them is\\nfound in the writers whose works have come down to us, as\\nof the adjectives aniens, dirus, discors, gnarus, rudis, trux,\\nimbellis, immobilis, inftexibilis, and other compounds of the\\nsame kind. Of vetus the adverbs are vetuste and antique, and\\nof jidus, Jideliter, which are derived from other adjectives of\\nthe same meaning. The adverb magne does not occur, but\\nits irregular comparative magis, and the superlative maxime,\\nare of very common occurrence.\\n266.] 6. Sometimes particular cases of adjectives sup-\\nply the place of the regularly formed adverbs in e and ter\\na) of some adjectives in us, a, um, and er, a, um, the abla-\\ntive singular in d is used as an adverb e. g. arcano and\\nsecreto, secretly; cito, quickly; continuo, immediately; ere-\\nbro, frequently /also, wrongly; liquido, clearly; manifesto,\\nmanifestly; necessario, necessarily; perpetuo, perpetually;\\nprecario, by intreaties raro, rarely; sedulo, sedulously; sero,\\ntoo late serio, seriously subito, suddenly tuto, safely. To\\nthese must be added some adverbs formed from participles\\nauspicato, consulto, directo, festinato nee- or inopinato, im-\\nproviso, iterato, merito, sortito.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0184.jp2"}, "185": {"fulltext": "ADVERBS. 167\\n267.] 7. b) In some adjectives of the third declension\\nthe neuter singular supplies the place of the adverb as fa-\\ncile, difficile, recens, sublime, impitne. To these we must add\\nsome belonging to adjectives of the second declension: ce-\\nterum, commodum, plerumque, plurimum, potissirnum, mul-\\nturn, nimium, parum, and lastly the numeral adverbs primum,\\niterum, tertium, quartum, c, which have also the termina-\\ntion o (see 123.), and postremum (o), and ultimum (o).\\n268.] 8. A considerable number of adverbs have the\\ntermination im; they are for the most part derived from par-\\nticiples e. g. caesim, punctim, conjunctim, contemptim, cur-\\nsim, nominatim, passim (from pandere), praesertim (from\\nprae and sero), privatim, raptim, sensim, statim. Adverbs\\nof this kind however are formed also from other parts of\\nspeech, but they generally take the participial termination\\natim, even when they are not derived from nouns of the first\\ndeclension gradatim, ostiatim, paulatim, singulatim. Also\\nconfestim (connected with festinare), furtim, singultim, viri-\\ntim, vicissim.\\n269.] 9. A smaller class of adverbs is formed from\\nnouns by the termination Uus, generally to denote origin\\nfrom that which is expressed by the primitive as coelitus,\\nfrom heaven funditus, radicitus, from the foundation, radi-\\ncally. Some are derived from adjectives, as antiquitus, di-\\nvinitus, and humanitus.\\n270.] 10. A large number of adverbs, lastly, arises\\nfrom the adverbial use of different cases of substantives, and\\nfrom the composition of different parts of speech. In this\\nmanner arose the adverbs of time: noctu, vesperi, mane,\\ntempore or tempori, diu and dudum, quamdiu, tamdiu, all-\\nquamdiu, interdiu, hodie, quotidie, quotannis, postridie,\\nperendie, pridie, nudius tertius (from nunc dies tertius, the\\nday before yesterday, or the third day from the present),\\nnudius quartus, nudius quintus, nudius tertiusdecimus, pro-\\npediem, initio, principio, repente and derepente (ablative of\\nrepens), imprimis, protenus and protinus (from pro and the\\npreposition tenus), alias, partim (the same as partem),\\nactutum, modo, postmodo, alternis, interdum, cummaxime,\\ntummaxime, paulisper, tantisper, denuo (i. e. de novo), illico\\n(properly in loco), interea, praeterea, hactenus. So also the\\nadverbs of place /oris, for as, domum, domi and domo, rus,\\nruri and rure, humi and humo, insuper, obviam, peregre\\npraesto, recta (scil. via), una.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0185.jp2"}, "186": {"fulltext": "168 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n[\u00c2\u00a727i.] The mode or manner of an action, in answer to\\nthe question how is expressed by adverbs of the same class\\nas sponte, forte and fortuito, forsitan {fors sit an), nimirum,\\nscilicet, videlicet, utpote (from ut and pote, properly as\\npossible, hence namely, or as dumtaxat, praeterquam,\\nquomodo, quemadmodum, admodum, quamobrem, quapropter,\\nquantopere, tantopere, maximopere and summopere, alioqui\\nor alioquin, ceteroqui or ceteroquin, frustra, neqiticquam,\\ngratis (from gratiis), vulgo.\\nCHAP. LXIII.\\nPRIMITIVE ADVERBS.\\n276.] 1. The Simple or Primitive Adverbs are few in\\nnumber, when compared with the derivatives, especially\\nwith those derived from adjectives, and ending in e and ter.\\nThe signification of the latter depends upon that of their\\nadjective, and has generally a very definite extent but the\\nprimitive adverbs express the most general circumstances\\nthat are considered in connection with a fact, and answer\\nto the questions how when where whether but they\\nare for this reason deserving of particular attention, together\\nwith their compounds and derivatives.\\n2. To this class belong the negative particles non, haud,\\nand ne the affirmatives nae, quidem, and utique, certainly\\n(from which word the negative adverb neutiquam, by no\\nmeans, is formed), nempe, namely, surely, and the interro-\\ngative cur, why the words which express, in a general\\nway, the mode of an action, viz. paene, fere, and ferme\\nnearly, almost temere, at random rite, duly, according to\\ncustom vix, scarcely nimis (and nimium, see 267.), too\\nmuch satis or sat, enough, sufficiently saltern, at least\\nsic and ita, so, thus and item and itidem, just so, and the\\ndouble form identidem, which, however, has assumed the\\nmeaning of a particle of time, constantly, one time like\\nthe other perinde and proinde (derived from inde), as\\nthough, like secus, otherwise, differently immo (that is, hi\\nmodo), in some manner the adverbs of place uspiam and\\nusquam, somewhere nusquam, no where procul, far prope^", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0186.jp2"}, "187": {"fulltext": "PRIMITIVE ADVERBS. 169\\nnear; ubi, where? ibi, there; unde, whence? inde, hence,\\ntogether with their numerous compounds and correlatives, of\\nwhich we shall speak presently; the adverbs of time quando,\\nwhen with its compounds aliquando, once quandoque, at\\nsome time quandocunque, whenever quondam, formerly\\nnunc, now tunc and turn, then unquam, ever nunquam,\\nnever jam, already; etiam (from et and jam) and quoque,\\nalso etiamnunc and etiamtum, still, yet semel, once bis,\\ntwice (the other adverbial numerals, see Chap. XXXIII.)\\nsaepe, often usque, ever heri or here, yesterday eras, to-\\nmorrow olim, formerly mox, soon after simul, at once\\ntandem, at last or length demum, not until from inde are\\nderived deinde and exinde, or abridged dein and exin, there-\\nupon, afterwards subinde, immediately after, or repeatedly\\ndeinceps, in succession denique, lastly further, the adverbs\\nwith the suffix per semper, always nuper, lately parum-\\nper and paulisper, for a short time tantisper, for so long,\\ncommonly to indicate a short time, for so short a time.\\n(See 270.)\\nMost of the prepositions are originally adverbs, but as\\nthey usually take the case of a substantive after them, they\\nare regarded as a distinct class of the parts of speech. But\\nthey must still be looked upon as adverbs when they are\\njoined with a verb without a case as i prae, go before\\npone subit conjunx, behind there follows the wife. Hence\\nit happens that clam, secretly, and coram, in the presence\\nof, are generally reckoned among the prepositions, whereas\\npalam, publicly, is universally called an adverb, though it is\\nformed precisely in the same manner. Ante and post, when\\nused as adverbs, generally have the lengthened forms anted\\nand posted (also antehac and posthac), but occur as adverbs\\nalso without any change of form.\\n288.] 3. The Adverbs of Place, mentioned above,\\ntibi, where and unde, whence together with the adverbs\\nderived from the relative pronoun, viz. quo, whither? and\\nqua, in what way stand in a certain relation to other ad-\\nverbSj demonstratives, relatives, and indefinites, which are\\nformed in the same manner. All together form a system of\\nadverbial correlatives, similar to that of the pronominal\\nadjectives. (See above, 130.) The interrogative form is\\nthe simplest, and (as in English) is the same as that of the\\nrelative. The relative acquires a more general meaning,\\neither by being doubled, or by the suffix cunque, which is\\nI", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0187.jp2"}, "188": {"fulltext": "170\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nexpressed in English by ever, as in wherever. With-\\nout any relative meaning, the simple form acquires a more\\ngeneral signification by the suffix que, or by the addition of\\nthe particular words vis and libet. The demonstrative is\\nformed from the pronoun is, and its meaning is strengthened\\nby the suffix dem. The indefinite is formed by the prefix\\nali, or before a vowel alio, from aliquis. We thus obtain the\\nfollowing correlative adverbs\\nInterrog.\\nRelative.\\nDemonstr.\\nIndefinite.\\nUniv\\nersal.\\nUbi, where\\nubi, where.\\nibi, there.\\nalicubi, some-\\nubique,\\nubiubi.\\nibidem.\\nwhere.\\nubivis,\\n1 every\\nwhen\\nubicunqne.\\nubilibet,\\nUnde, whence\\nunde, whence.\\nhide, thence.\\nalicunde, from\\nundlque\\n1 from\\nundeunde.\\nindidem.\\nsome place.\\nundevis,\\nI every\\nundecunqne.\\nundelibet,\\nJ wher\\nQuo, whither\\nquo, whither.\\neo, thither.\\naliquo, to some\\nquovis,\\ni to\\nquoquo.\\neodem.\\nplace.\\nquolibet,\\nI ever}\\nquocunque.\\nJ plact\\nQua, in what\\nqua, in the\\nea, in that\\naliqua, in some\\nquavis,\\n1 in\\ndirection in\\nway in which.\\nway.\\nway.\\nqualibet,\\nJ- ever;\\nwhat way.\\nquaqua.\\nquacunque.\\neddem.\\nway\\n289.] To these we must add those which are formed\\nby composition with alius, nullus, uter, and answer to the\\nquestion where alibi, elsewhere nullibi, nowhere (for\\nwhich, however, nusquam is more commonly used) utrubi\\nor utrobi, in which of two places with the answer utrobique\\nin each of the two places. Inibi is a strengthening form of\\nibi, and signifies in the place itself. To the question\\nwhence answer aliunde, from another place utrimque, from\\nboth sides. To the question whither answer alio, to another\\nplace to utro, to which of two sides answer utroque, to\\nboth sides, and neutro, to neither further, quopiam and\\nquoquam, to some place intro, into retro, back ultro, be-\\nyond citro, this side.\\nWe add the correlatives to the question whither quorsum\\nor quorsus (contracted from quoversum or quoversus). The\\nanswers to them likewise end in us and um: horsum, hither;\\naliorsum, towards another place quoquoversus, towards every", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0188.jp2"}, "189": {"fulltext": "COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 171\\nside introrsum, inward prorsum, forward retrorsum, back-\\nward, and others.\\n291.] 4. The above-mentioned demonstratives, ibi, there,\\ninde, hence, and eo, thither, are used only with reference to\\nrelative sentences, which precede e. g. ubi te heri vidi, ibi\\nnolim te iterum conspicere, where I saw thee yesterday, there\\nI do not wish to see thee again unde venerat, eo rediit, he\\nreturned thither, whence he had come. More definite demon-\\nstratives, therefore, are requisite, and they are formed in\\nLatin from the three demonstrative pronouns by means of\\nspecial terminations.\\nThe place where hie, istic, illic, (there),\\nwhither? hue, istuc, illuc, (thither),\\nwhence? hinc, istine, Mine, (thence).\\nThese adverbs are employed with the same difference which\\nwe pointed out above 127.) as existing between the pro-\\nnouns hie, iste, and ille, so that hie, hue, and hinc point to the\\nplace where I, the speaker, am istic, istuc, and istine, to the\\nplace of the second person, to whom I speak and illic, illuc,\\nand Mine to the place of the third person or persons, who are\\nspoken of. The following are compounds of hue and hinc\\nadhuc, until now hucusque, as far as this place abhinc and\\ndehinc, from this moment (counting backwards).\\nCHAP. LXIV.\\nCOMPARISON OF ADVERBS.\\n293.] 1. The Comparison of Adverbs is throughout de-\\npendent upon the comparison of adjectives, for those adverbs\\nonly have degrees of comparison, which are derived from\\nadjectives or participles by the termination e (o) or ter and\\nwherever the comparison of adjectives is wanting altogether\\nor partly, the same deficiency occurs in their adverbs.\\n2. The comparative of adverbs is the same as the neuter\\nof the comparative of adjectives, and the superlative is de-\\nrived from the superlative of the adjectives by changing the\\ntermination us into e; e. g. doctior, doctius elegantior, ele-\\ni 2", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0189.jp2"}, "190": {"fulltext": "172 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ngantius emendatior, emendatius superlative: doctissimus,\\ndoctissime elegantissime, emendatissime summus, summe.\\nThe positives in o (e. g. cito, raro) also make the superlative\\nin e meritissimo and tutissimo however are more commonly\\nused than meritissime and tutissime.\\n294.] 3. The primitive adverbs, and those derived from\\nother words by the terminations im and tus, together with\\nthe various adverbs enumerated in 270. foil., that is, in\\ngeneral all adverbs which are not derived from adjectives\\nand participles by the endings e (or o instead of it) and ter,\\ndo not admit the degrees of comparison. The only exceptions\\nare diu and saepe: diutius, diutissime saepius, saepissime.\\nNuper has a superlative nuperrime, but no comparative.\\nCHAP. LXV.\\nPREPOSITIONS.\\n295.] 1. Prepositions are indeclinable words, or, to use\\nthe grammatical term, particles, which express the relations\\nof nouns to one another or to verbs e. g. a town in Italy a\\njourney through Italy my love for you the first century\\nafter Christ he came out of his house he lives near Berlin\\non the Rhine, c. They govern in Latin either the accusa-\\ntive or ablative, and some (though mostly in a different sense)\\nboth cases. Their Latin name is derived from the fact of\\ntheir being placed, with a few exceptions, before the noun.\\nWe have already observed 276.) that a considerable num-\\nber of these particles are properly adverbs, but are justly\\nreckoned among the prepositions, as they more or less\\nfrequently govern a case. Apart from their etymology, and\\nconsidering only their practical application in the language,\\nwe have the following classes of prepositions\\n1. Prepositions with the Accusative,\\nAd, to, or up to.\\nApud, with, near.\\nAnte, before (in regard to both time and place).", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0190.jp2"}, "191": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 173\\nAdversus and adversum, against.\\nCis, citra,, on this Side.\\nCirca and circum, around, about.\\nCirciter, about (indefinite time or number).\\nContrciy against.\\nErga, towards.\\nExtra, without.\\nInfra, beneath, below (the contrary of supra).\\nInter, among, between.\\nIntray within (the contrary of extra).\\nJuxta, near, beside.\\nOb, on account of.\\nPenes, in the power of.\\nPer, through.\\nPone, behindc\\nPost, after (both of time and space).\\nPraeter, beside.\\nPrope, near.\\nPropter, near, on account of.\\nSecundum, after (in time or succession), in accordance with,\\nas secundum naturam vivere.\\nSupra, above.\\nTrans, on the other side.\\nVersus (is put after its noun), towards a place e. g. in Gal-\\nHam versus, Massiliam versus.\\nUltra, beyond.\\n2. Prepositions with the Ablative.\\nA, ab, abs {a, before consonants ab, before vowels and some\\nconsonants and abs only in the combination of abs te\\nfor which, however, a te also is used), from, by.\\nAbsque, without (obsolete).\\nCoram, before, or in the presence of.\\nCum, with.\\nDe, down from, concerning.\\nE and ex (e before consonants only, ex before both vowels\\nand consonants), out of, from.\\nPrae, before, owing to.\\nPro, before, for.\\nSine, without.\\nTenus (is put after its noun), as far as, up to.\\ni 3", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0191.jp2"}, "192": {"fulltext": "174 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n3. Prepositions with the Accusative and Ablative.\\nIn, with the accus. 1. into, on, to, to the question Whither?\\n2. against. With the ablat. in, on, to the question\\nWhere\\nSub, with the accus. 1. under, to the question Whither?\\n2. about or towards, in an indefinite statement of time,\\nas sub vesperam, towards evening. With the ablat.\\nunder, to the question Where Desub is also used in\\nthis sense.\\nSuper, with the accus., above, over with the ablat., upon,\\nconcerning, like de.\\nSubter, under, beneath, is used with the accusative, whether\\nit expresses being in or motion to a place it rarely oc-\\ncurs w T ith the ablative, and is in general little used.\\n324.] As regards the position of prepositions, it was\\nremarked above, that versus and tenus are placed after their\\ncase. The same is the case with the four prepositions ante,\\ncontra, inter and propter, when they are joined with a\\nrelative pronoun e. g. quos inter, for inter quos. These\\nsame four prepositions ante, contra, inter, and propter,\\ntogether with the monosyllabic ob, post, de, ex, and in, are\\nfrequently placed between the adjective and substantive\\ne. g. medios inter hostes, magna ex parte, aliquot post menses,\\nand still more frequently between the relative pronoun and\\nthe substantive e. g. qua in re, quam ob causam. The\\npreposition cum is always placed after or rather appended to\\nthe ablative of the personal pronouns me, te, se, nobis and\\nvobis as mecum, tecum, nobiscum, c. The same is com-\\nmonly the case with the ablatives of the relative pronoun,\\nquo, qua, and quibus, but we may also say, cum quo, cum\\nqua and cum quibus.", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0192.jp2"}, "193": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 175\\nCHAP. LXV1.\\nPREPOSITIONS IN COMPOUND WORDS.\\n325.] The majority of the prepositions are used also\\nto form compound words, especially verbs, modifying,\\nby their own meaning, that of the words to which they are\\njoined. The prepositions themselves often undergo a change\\nin their pronunciation and orthography, on account of the\\ninitial letter of the verb to which they are prefixed. But\\nthere is no established usage, and we find, e. g. sometimes\\nadloquor, and sometimes alloquor, and in like manner impono\\nand inpono, conlega and collega. But we prefer the system\\nof assimilation.\\nAd remains unchanged before vowels, and before the con-\\nsonants d, j, v, m before other consonants it undergoes an\\nassimilation, that is, the d is changed into the letter which\\nfollows it, and before qu into the kindred c, as in acquiro,\\nacquiesco. Its signification remains the same as usual, as in\\nadjungo, assilmo, affero, appono, alloquor.\\nAnte remains unchanged; its meaning is before, as in\\nantepono, antefero.\\nCircum remains unchanged, and retains, in writing, its m\\neven before vowels, although in pronunciation it was lost.\\nOnly in circumeo and its derivatives the m is often dropped,\\nas circueo. Its meaning is around, about, as in cir-\\ncumago, circumdo, circumfero.\\nInter remains unchanged, except in the word intelligo.\\nIts meaning is between or among, as in interpono,\\ninterloquor.\\nOb remains generally unchanged, and undergoes the\\nassimilation only before c, f, g, and p. Its meaning of\\nagainst or before appears in oppono, offero, occurro,\\noggannio.\\n328.] Per remains unchanged, except in pellicio. The\\nr is dropped only in the word pejero, I commit a perjurium.\\nIts meaning is through, as in perlego, perluceo, perago.\\nWhen added to adjectives it strengthens their meaning\\n107.), but in perfidies and perjuries, it has the power of a\\nnegative particle.\\nPost remains unchanged, except in pomoerium and pomeri-\\nI 4", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0193.jp2"}, "194": {"fulltext": "176 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ndianus, in which st is dropped its meaning is after/ as in\\npostpono,\\nPraeter remains unchanged, and signifies passing by, as\\nin praetereo, praetermitto.\\nTrans remains unchanged before vowels, and for the\\nmost part also before consonants but trado, traduco, trajicio,\\nare more frequent than transdo, transduco, transjicio.\\nWhen the verb begins with s, the s at the end of trans is\\nbetter omitted, and we should write transcribo, transilio.\\nIts meaning through, over, or across, appears in\\ntranseo, trajicib, and transmitto, I cross (a river J trado,\\nsurrender.\\n327.] A, ab, abs, viz. a before m and v ab before\\nvowels and most consonants; in aufero (to distingnish it\\nfrom affero) and aufugio, ab is changed into av or au abs\\noccurs only before c and t Its meaning is from or\\naway, as in amitto, avehor, abeo, abjicio, abrado, aufero,\\nabscondo, abstineo.\\nDe, down or away from, as in dejicio, descendo,\\ndetraho, detero, rub off; despicio, look down upon, despise.\\nIn some compounds, especially adjectives, it has a negative\\npower, as in decolor, deformis, demens, desipio, despero.\\nE and ex, viz. ex before vowels, and before consonants\\nsometimes e and sometimes ex ex before c, p, q, s, t, except\\nin escendo and epbto before f it assimilates to it e is used\\nbefore all the other consonants, except in exlex. The s after x\\nis generally thrown out, as exequor, exilium, expecto, extinguo.\\nIts meaning out of or from, appears in ejicio, emineo,\\nendto, eripio, effero (extuli), excello, expono, exquiro, extraho,\\nexaudio, exigo, exulcero, c. The idea of completion is\\nimplied in several of these compounds, as in efficio, enarro,\\nexoro.\\n328.] In is changed into im, before b and p and\\nanother m, and is assimilated to I and Its meaning is\\nin or into, as in incurro, impono, illido, irrumpo.\\nWhen prefixed to adjectives and participles it has a negative\\npower, e. g. indoctus, incautus, ineptus (from aptus), insi-\\npiens, improvidus, imprudens, imparatus, the negative of\\nparatus, because there is no verb imparo.\\nPrae remains unchanged, and its meaning is before, as\\nin praefero, praecipio, pfaeripio.\\nPro remains unchanged. For the purpose of avoiding\\nhiatus, a d is inserted in prodeo, prodigo, and in those forms", "height": "4098", "width": "2456", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0194.jp2"}, "195": {"fulltext": "PREPOSITIONS. 177\\nof the verb prosum in which the initial e would cause hiatus,\\nas prodes, prodcst, proderam. (See above, 156.) Its\\nmeaning forth or forward, appears in profero, procurro,\\nprodco, projicio, prospicio.\\n329.] Sub remains unchanged before vowels, but under-\\ngoes assimilation before consonants, or the b is dropped. Its\\nmeaning is under, as in summitto, suppono, sustineo or\\nfrom under, as in subduco, summoveo, surripio an\\napproach from below, is expressed in subeo, succedo, suspicio,\\nlook up to, esteem; and to do a thing instead of another\\nperson, in subsortior. It weakens the meaning in such\\nverbs as subrideo, subvereor, and in adjectives, such as sub-\\nabsurdus, subtristis, subrusticus, subobscurus. In this last\\nsense the b is not assimilated to r.\\nSuper, above, as in superimpono, supersto, supersedeo,\\nset myself above, or omit.\\nSubter, from under, as in subterfugio.\\nCom for cum appears in this form only before b, p, m\\nbefore Z, n, r, the final m is assimilated to these letters, and\\nbefore all other consonants it is changed into n. Before\\nvowels the m is dropped, e. g. co eo, cohaereo, and in addition\\nto this a contraction takes place in cogo and cogito (from\\ncoago, coagito). The m is retained only in a few words, as\\ncomes, comitium, comitor, comedo. It signifies with or\\ntogether, as in conjungo, confero, compono, collido, colligo,\\ncor r ado, co eo, coalesco, cohaereo. In some verbs and par-\\nticiples it merely strengthens the meaning, as corrumpo,\\nconcerpo, confringo, consceleratus.\\n330.] Note. We must not leave unnoticed here what are called the\\ninseparable prepositions, that is, some little words, which are never used\\nby themselves, but occur only in compound verbs and adjectives, where\\nthey modify the meaning in the same way as the above-mentioned se-\\nparable prepositions. The following is a list of them\\nAmb (from the Greek aficpi), around, about, as in ambio, amburo\\n(ambustus,) ambigo, ambiguus. In amplector, amputo, the b is dropped on\\naccount of the p before palatals amb is changed into an e. g. anceps,\\nanquiro, and also before/, in the word anfractus.\\nDis or di, denotes separation, as in disjicio, diripio, distraho, digero,\\ndijudi ro, dispono, dissero, distinguo, dimitto (to be distinguished from\\ndemitto). It strengthens the meaning in discupio.\\nRe signifies back remitto, rejicio, revertor. Before a vowel or an h 9\\na d is inserted redeo, redigo, redhibeo. The d in reddo, I give back, is of\\na different kind. Re denotes separation in resolvo, revello, retego, recingo,\\nrecludo, refringo, reseco and in relego, rebibo, and others, it denotes\\nrepetition.\\ni 5", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0195.jp2"}, "196": {"fulltext": "178 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSe, aside, on one side seduco, sevoco, secubo, sepono, sejungo. In\\nadjectives it signifies without: securus, sobrius for sebrius (non ebrius),\\nsocors for secors.\\nThe prefixes ne and ve are of a somewhat different nature ne has\\nnegative power, as in vefas, nemo (ne homo), nescio. Ve is likewise negative,\\nbut occurs in a much smaller number of words, viz. in vesanus and vecors\\n(vecordia), senseless. In vegrandis and vepattidus, it seems to denote\\nugliness.\\nCHAP. LXVH.\\nCONJUNCTIONS.\\n[\u00c2\u00a733i.] 1. Conjunctions are those indeclinable parts of\\nspeech which express the relations in which sentences stand\\nto one another. They therefore are, as it were, the links of\\npropositions, whence their name conjunctions.\\n2. In regard to their form (jigura), they are either simple\\nor compound. Of the former kind are, e. g. et, ac, at, sed,\\nnam; and of the latter atque, itaque, attamen, siquidem,\\nenimvero, verumenimvero.\\n3. In reference to their signification, they may be divided\\ninto the following classes. They denote\\n332.] 1. A union {conjunctions copulativae), as et, ac,\\natque, and the enclitic que, as well as the negative belong-\\ning to the verb, neque or nee, or doubled so as to become an\\naffirmative, nee {neque) non, equivalent to et. Etiam and\\nquoque also belong to this class, together with the adverbial\\nitem and itidem. As these particles unite things which are\\nof a kind, so the disjunctive conjunctions, signifying or,\\nconnect things which are distinct from each other. They\\nare aut, vel, the suffix ve, and sive or seu.\\nNote. Ac is never used before vowels (which, however, do not include\\nj) or before an h atque occurs most frequently before vowels, but before\\nconsonants also.\\nEtiam stands before the word whieh has the emphasis, and quoque\\nafter it. When propositions are to be connected, etiam is better than\\nquoque.\\nThe Latin language is fond of doubling the conjunctions of this\\nkind, whereby words and propositions are more emphatically brought\\nunder one general idea. The English as well as is expressed by", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0196.jp2"}, "197": {"fulltext": "CONJUNCTIONS. 179\\nei\u00e2\u0080\u0094et,\\net que,\\nque et, and\\nque que, which is found only in poetry.\\nNegative propositions are connected in English by neither nor, and\\nin Latin by\\nneque neque, or nee nee.\\nPropositions, one of which is negative and the other affirmative, on the\\none hand, but not on the other, or not on the one hand, but on the\\nother, are connected by\\net neque\\nneque et.\\nOur either or, is expressed by aut aut, or vel vel. Sive\\nsive leaves it undecided, as to how a matter is to be taken. Modo\\nmodo, and nunc nunc, are equivalent to sometimes sometimes; quum\\nturn to both and.\\n340.] 2. The following express a comparison, as,\\nlike, than as if {conjunctiones co?nparativae) ut or\\nuti, sicut, velut, prout, praeut, the poetical ceu, quam, tam-\\nquam, quasi, ut si, ac si, together with ac and atque, when\\nthey signify as, which is the case after adjectives and\\nadverbs denoting similarity or dissimilarity, such as par,\\naeque, juxta, perinde, alius, aliter, c.\\n341.] 3. The following express a concession with the\\ngeneral signification although (conjunctiones concessivae)\\netsi, etiamsi, tametsi (or tamenetsi), quamquam, quamvis,\\nquantumvis, quamlibet, licet, together with ut in the sense\\nof even if or although, and quum, when it signifies\\nalthough.\\n342.] 4. The following express a condition, the funda-\\nmental signification being if (conjunctiones conditionales):\\nsi. sin, nisi or ni, simodo, dummodo, if only, if but (for which\\ndam and modo are also used alone), dummodo ne, or simply\\nmodo ne or dumne.\\n344.] o. The following express a conclusion or infer-\\nence with the general signification of therefore conse-\\nquently (conjunctiones conclusivae) ergo, igitur, itaque, eo,\\nideo, iccirco, proinde, propterea, and the relative conjunc-\\ntions, signifying wherefore: quapropter quare, quamob-\\nrem, quocirca, unde.\\n345.] 6. The following express a cause, or reason,\\nwith the meaning of for, and because (conjunctiones\\ncausales): nam, namque, enim, etenim, quia, quod, quoniam,\\nquippe, quum, quando, quandoquidem, siquidem.\\n34 7.] 7. The following express a purpose or object,\\n6", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0197.jp2"}, "198": {"fulltext": "380 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nwith the signification of in order that, or, in order that\\nnot {conjunctiones finales): ut or uti, quo, ne or ut ne, neve\\nor neu, quln, quominus.\\n348.] 8. The following express an opposition, with the\\nsignification of but (conjunctiones adversativae) sed,\\nautem, verum, vero, at, at enim, atqui, tamen, attdmen, sed-\\ntamen, veruntdmen, at vero, enimvero, verumenimvero, ce-\\nterum,\\n350.] 9. Time is expressed by the conjunctiones tern-\\nporales quum, quum primum, ut, ut primum, ubi, postquam,\\nantequam and priusquam, quando, simulac or simulatque or\\nsimul alone, dum, usque dum, donee, quoad,\\n351.] 10. The following interrogative particles likewise\\nbelong to the conjunctions num, utrum, an, and the suffix\\nne, which forms with non a special interrogative particle\\nnonne also ec and en, as they appear in ecquis, ecquando\\nand enumquam, and numquid, ecquid, when used as pure in-\\nterrogative particles.\\nNote. Num and ec (ew) and their compounds give a negative meaning\\nto direct questions, that is, they are used in the supposition that the answer\\nwill be no e. g. num putas me tarn dementem fuisse you surely do not\\nbelieve that, c.\\nUtrum in accordance with its derivation (from uter, which of two) is\\nused only in double questions, and is followed by an,\\n355.] 11. Most conjunctions are placed at the begin-\\nning of the proposition, which they introduce only these\\nfew, enim, autem, vero, together with quidem and quoque,\\nare placed after the first word of a proposition, or after the\\nsecond, when the first two belong together, or when one of\\nthem is the auxiliary verb esse. Quidem and quoque, when\\nbelonging to single words, may take any place in a proposi-\\ntion, but they are always placed after the word, which has\\nthe emphasis. Itaque and igitur are commonly used with\\nthis distinction, that itaque stands first, while igitur is placed\\nafter the first, and sometimes even after several words of a\\nproposition. But tamen may be put either at the beginning\\nof a proposition, or after the first word.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0198.jp2"}, "199": {"fulltext": "INTERJECTIONS. 181\\nCHAP. Lxvni.\\nINTERJECTIONS.\\n359.] 1. Interjections are sounds uttered under the in-\\nfluence of strong emotions. They are indeclinable, and stand\\nin no close connection with the rest of a sentence for the\\ndative and accusative, which are joined with some of them,\\nare easily explained by an ellipsis. See 402. and 403.\\n2. The number of interjections in any language cannot be\\nfixed. Those which occur most frequently in Latin authors\\nare the following.\\na) Of joy io, iu, ha, he, hahahe, euoe, euax.\\nb) Of grief: vae, heu, eheu, ohe, au, hei, pro.\\nc) Of astonishment o, en or ecce, hui, hem, ehem, aha,\\natat, papae, vah and of disgust phui, apage. (See 222.)\\nd) Of calling heus, o, eho, ehodum of attestation pro,\\nalso written proh.\\ne) Of praise or flattery eia, euge.\\n360.] 3. Other parts of speech, especially substantives\\nand adjectives, adverbs and verbs, and even complex expres-\\nsions, such as oaths and invocations, must in particular con-\\nnections be regarded as interjections. Such nouns are pax\\n(be still malum, indignum, nefandum, miserum, misera-\\nble to express astonishment and indignation macte, and\\nwith a plural macti, expresses approbation. Adverbs nae,\\nprofecto, cito, bene, belle Verbs used as interjections are,\\nquaeso, precor, oro, obsecro, amabo (to all of which te or vos\\nmay be added), used in imploring and requesting. So also\\nage, agite, cedo, sodes (for si audes), sis, sultis (for si vis, si\\nwltis), and agesis, agedum, agitedum.\\n361 4. Among the invocations of the gods, the fol-\\nlowing are particularly frequent mehercule, mehercle, her-\\ncule, hercle, or mehercides, medius fidius, mecastor, ecastor,\\npol, edepol, per deum, per deum immortalem, per deos, per\\nJovem, pro (or proh) Juppiter, pro sancte (supreme) Jup-\\npiter, pro dii immortales, pro deum fidem, pro deum atque\\nhominum fidem, pro deum or pro deum immortalium (scil.\\nfidem), and several others of this kind.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0199.jp2"}, "200": {"fulltext": "182 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nSYNTAX,\\nI. CONNECTION OF SUBJECT AND PREDTCATE.\\nCHAP. LXIX.\\n362.] 1. The subject of a proposition is that of which\\nany thing is declared, and the predicate that which is declared\\nof the subject.\\nThe subject appears either in the form of a substantive, or\\nin that of an adjective or pronoun, supplying the place of a\\nsubstantive. Whenever there is no such grammatical sub-\\nject, the indeclinable part of speech or proposition which\\ntakes its place, is treated as a substantive of the neuter gen-\\nder. (Comp. 43.)\\n|_\u00c2\u00a7 365. 2. The predicate appears either in the form of a\\nverb, or of the auxiliary esse combined with a noun.\\nThe predicate accommodates itself as much as possible to\\nits subject. When the predicate is a verb, it must be in the\\nsame number as the subject; e.g. arbor viret, the tree is\\ngreen; arbores virent, the trees are green. When the predi-\\ncate is an adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun, combined\\nwith the auxiliary esse, it takes the number and gender of\\nthe subject, and esse takes the number of the subject, e. g.\\npuer est modestus, libri sunt met, prata sunt secta.\\nWhen the predicate is a substantive with the auxiliary\\nesse, it is independent of the subject both in regard to number\\nand gender e. g. captivi militum praeda fuerant amicitia\\nvinculum quoddam est hominum inter se. But when a sub-\\nstantive has two forms, one masculine and the other feminine,\\nas rex, regina magister, magistra inventor, inventrix cor-\\nrupter, corruptrix praeceptor, praeceptrix, the predicate\\nmust be in the same gender as the subject; e. g. licentia cor-\\nruptrix est morum; stilus optimus est dicendi effector et ma-", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0200.jp2"}, "201": {"fulltext": "SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 183\\ngister. When the subject is a neuter the predicate takes the\\nmasculine form, the latter being more nearly allied to the\\nneuter than the feminine; e.g. tempus vitae magister est\\nWhen the subject is a noun epicene (see 42.), the predicate\\nfollows its grammatical gender as aquila volucrum regina,\\njida ministra Jovis.\\nIt is only by way of exception that esse is sometimes con-\\nnected with adverbs of place, such as aliquis or aliquid prope,\\npropter, longe, procul est, or when esse signifies to be in a\\ncondition e. g. rectissime sunt apud te omnia, everything\\nwith you is in a very good state or condition.\\n366.] Note. Collective nouns, that is, such as denote a multitude\\nof individual persons or things, e. g. multitude, turba, vis, exercitus,juventus,\\nnobilitas, gens, plebs, vulyus, sometimes have a plural verb for their pre-\\ndicate. For the same reason a plural verb is sometimes joined as\\npredicate with quisque and uterque.\\n37O 3. When nouns are combined with one another,\\nwithout being connected by the verb esse, or by a relative\\npronoun and esse, in such a manner as to form only one idea,\\nas in a good man, the adjective, participle, or pronoun\\nfollows the substantive in gender, number, and case e. g.\\nhuic modesto puero credo, hanc modestam virginem diligo.\\nWhen two substantives are united with each other in this\\nway, they are said to stand in apposition to each other, and\\nthe one substantive explains and defines the other e. g.\\noppidum Paestum, arbor laurus, Taurus rnons, Socrates\\nvir sapientissimus. The explanatory substantive (substan-\\ntivum appositum) takes the same case as the one which it\\nserves to explain e. g. Socratem, sapientissimum virum,\\nAthenienses interfecerunt They may differ in number and\\ngender, as urbs Athenae pisces signum fratrem tuum,\\ndelicias mea s, vidi but when the substantive in apposition\\nhas two genders, it takes the one which answers to that\\nof the other substantive. The predicate likewise follows\\nthe substantive which is to be explained, as Tulliola, deli-\\nciolae nostrae, tuum munusculum flagitat Quum duo\\nfulmina nostri imperii subito in Hispania, On. et P. Sci-\\npiones, extincti occidissent, for the words duo fulmina, though\\nplaced first, are only in apposition. When plural names of\\nplaces are explained by the apposition urbs, oppidum, civitas,\\nthe predicate generally agrees with the apposition e. g.\\nVolsinii, oppidum Tuscorum opulentissimum, concrematum\\nestfulmine.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0201.jp2"}, "202": {"fulltext": "184 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nO vitae philosophia dux (magistra), virtutis indagatrix ex-\\npultrixque vitiorum\\nPythagoras velut genitricem virtutum frugalitatem omnibus\\ningerebat (commendabat).\\n371.] 4. When a relative or demonstrative pronoun\\nrefers to a noun in another sentence, the pronoun agrees\\nwith it in gender and number e. g. tarn modestus Me puer\\nest, quern vidisti, de quo audivisti, cujus tutor es, ut omnes\\neum diligant,\\n372.] Note, Exception to this rule when a word of a preceding\\nproposition or this proposition itself, is explained by a substantive with\\nthe verbs esse, dicere, vocare, appellare, nominare, habere, putare, c. or their\\npassives, the relative pronoun usually takes the gender and number of the\\nexplanatory substantive which follows e. g. Thebae ipsae, quod Boeotiae\\ncaput est animal plenum rationis, quern vocamus hominem domicilia con-\\njuncta, quas urbes dicimus Romae fanum Dianae populi Latini cum\\npopulo Romano fecerunt: ea erat confessio, caput rerum Romam esse; Si\\nomnia facienda sunt, quae amid velint, non amicitiae tales, sed conjurationes\\nputandae sunt, i. e. such things or connections cannot be looked upon as\\nfriendships, but are conspiracies. So also ista quidem vis, surely this is\\nforce haec fuga est, non profectio ea ipsa causa belli fuit, for id ipsum, c.\\nIdem velle et idem nolle, ea demum Jirma amicitia est,\\n373.] 5. When the subject consists of several nouns in\\nthe singular, the predicate is generally in the plural, if either\\nall or some of those nouns denote persons but if they denote\\nthings, either the singular or plural may be used.. If, how-\\never, one of the nouns is in the plural, the predicate must\\nlikewise be in the plural, unless it attach itself more espe-\\ncially to the nearest substantive in the singular.\\nAntonius et Octavianus vicerunt Brutum et Cassium apud\\nPhilippos.\\nCum tempus necessitasque postulate decertandum manu est y\\net mors servituti turpitudinique anteponenda.\\nBeneficium et gratia homines inter se conjungunt.\\nVita, mors, divitiae, paupertas omnes homines vehementis-\\nsime permovenU\\n376 6. With regard to the gender, which the predi-\\ncate (an adjective, participle, or pronoun), takes, when it\\nbelongs to several nouns, the following rules must be ob-\\nserved\\na) When the nouns are of one gender, the predicate (ad-\\njective, participle, or pronoun,) takes the same.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0202.jp2"}, "203": {"fulltext": "SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 185\\nb) When they are of different genders, the masculine (in\\ncase of their denoting living beings) is preferred to the\\nfeminine, and the predicate accordingly takes the masculine.\\nWhen the nouns denote things, the predicate takes the\\nneuter, and when they denote both living beings and things\\nmixed together, it takes either the gender of the living\\nbeings, or the neuter.\\nJam pridem pater milii et mater mortui sunt.\\nLabor voluptasque, dissimilia natura, societate quadam inter\\nse naturali juncta sunt.\\nJane, fac aeternos pacem pacisque ministros\\nRomani, si me scelus fratris, te senectus absumpserit, regem\\nregnumque Macedoniae suafutura sciunt.\\nOr the predicate (adjective, participle, or pronoun), agrees\\nonly with one of the nouns, and is supplied by the mind for\\nthe others this is the case especially, when the subject con-\\nsists of nouns denoting both living beings and things.\\nThrasybulus contemptus est primo a tyrannis atque ejus soli-\\ntudo.\\nL. Brutus exulem et regem ipsum et liberos ejus, et gentem\\nTarquiniorum essejussit\\nHominis utilitati agri omnes et maria parent.\\n378 7. When the personal pronouns ego, tu, nos, vos,\\ncombined with one or more other nouns, form the subject of\\na proposition, the predicate follows the first person in pre-\\nference to the second and third, and the second in preference\\nto the third.\\nSi tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis, ego et suavissimus Cicero\\nvalemus.\\nQuid est quod tu aut ilia cum Fortuna hoc nomine queri\\npossitis?", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0203.jp2"}, "204": {"fulltext": "186 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nII. ON THE USE OF CASES.\\nCHAP. LXX.\\nNOMINATIVE CASE.\\n379 The subject of a proposition is in the nomina-\\ntive (see 362.), and the noun of the predicate only when it\\nis connected with the subject by esse or the similar verbs\\napparere, appear existere, fieri, evadere, come into exist-\\nence, become yvideri, seem, appear; manere, remain or the\\npassives of the actives mentioned in 394. viz. did, appel-\\nlari, existimari, haberi, c. e. g. Justus videbatur, he ap-\\npeared just; rex appellabatur, he was called king. The\\npersonal pronouns ego, tu, ille, nos, vos, and Mi are implied\\nin the terminations of the verb, and are expressed only when\\nthey denote emphasis or opposition.\\nIn rebus angustis animosus atquefortis appare.\\nAppius adeo novum sibi ingenium induerat, ut plebicola re-\\npente omnisque aurae popularis captator evaderet.\\nEgo reges ejeci, vos tyrannos introdueitis ego libertatem,\\nquae non erat, peperi, vos partani servare non vidtis, says\\nL. Brutus to the Romans.\\nNote. The construction of the accusative with the infinitive is the\\nonly case in which the subject is not in the nominative, but in the\\naccusative. (See 599.) In this case the noun of the predicate, with\\nthe above-mentioned verbs, is likewise in the accusative.\\n381.] 2. The nominative is sometimes not expressed in\\nLatin, and the word homines is understood with a verb in\\nthe third person plural active, in such phrases as laudant\\nhunc regem, they, or people, praise this king dicunt, tra-\\ndunt, ferunt hunc regem esse justum, people say that this\\nking is just.\\nCHAP. LXXI.\\nACCUSATIVE CASE.\\n.382.] 1. The accusative denotes the immediate object of\\nan action, and is therefore joined to all transitive verbs,", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0204.jp2"}, "205": {"fulltext": "ACCUSATIVE CASE. 187\\nwhether active or deponent, to express the person or thing\\naffected by the action implied in such verbs e. g. pater amat\\n(tuetur) jilium. When the verb is active, the same proposi-\\ntion may be expressed without change of meaning in the\\npassive voice, the object or accusative becoming the subject\\nor nominative thus instead of pater amat filium, we may\\nsay filius amatur a patre. v\\nThe transitive or intransitive nature of a verb depends\\nentirely upon its meaning (see 142.), which must be learned\\nfrom the dictionary. It must however be observed that many\\nLatin verbs may acquire a transitive meaning, besides their\\noriginal intransitive one, and accordingly govern the accusa-\\ntive e. g. doleo signifies, I feel pain, or I am sorry but it\\nhas also a transitive meaning, I lament, and may therefore\\ngovern an accusative e. g. doleo casum tuum, I lament thy\\nmisfortune. Real intransitives are, by way of exception,\\njoined sometimes with the accusative of some neuter pronoun;\\ne.g. hoc gaudeo, hoc laetor, I rejoice at this; unum omnes\\nstudent; but not gaudeo hanc rem, or student hanc rem.\\n386.] 2. Intransitive verbs which imply motion, as ire,\\nvadere, volare, and some also which imply being in a place,\\nasjacere, stare, and seder e, acquire a transitive meaning by\\nbeing compounded with a preposition, and accordingly govern\\nthe accusative. This, however, is generally the case only in\\nverbs compounded with the prepositions circum, per, praeter,\\ntrans, and super, and in those compound verbs which have\\nacquired a figurative meaning. Such verbs become perfect\\ntransitives, and the accusative which they take in the active\\nform of a proposition as their object, becomes the nominative\\nof the subject, when the proposition is changed into the pas-\\nsive form e. g. Jiumen transitur, societas initur, mors pro\\nrepublica obitur. With other compounds the accusative is\\nonly tolerated, for generally the preposition is repeated, or\\nthe dative is used instead of the preposition with its case\\n415.).\\n387.] Note. Hence we commonly say, e. g. accedo ad te, I step up to thee,\\nor tibi, 1 join thee but rarely accedo muros or terrain. Adno, I swim up to,\\ncommonly ad naves, urbem, or navibus, urbi but rarely naves, urbem. Homo\\nadvolvitur ad genua, or genibus advolvitur genua also may be said. Some\\ncompound verbs (though not those compounded with circum, per, praeter,\\ntrans and super) either lose their intransitive meaning altogether, or\\nretain it along with the transitive one, and accordingly govern the ac-\\ncusative either exclusively, or only in their particular transitive meaning.\\nOf this kind are adeo and convenio in the sense of I step up to a person", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0205.jp2"}, "206": {"fulltext": "188 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nfor the purpose of speaking to him aggredior (and adorior), coeo, I con-\\nclude, e. g. an alliance excedo and egredior, I transgress, e. g. the\\nbounds obto, I visit, undertake occumbo (mortem), I suffer death, or\\ndie subeo, I undertake. But every thing depends upon the meaning of\\nsuch verbs, which must be learned from a Dictionary.\\n388.] 3. The active verbs deficio, juvo, adjuvo, defugio,\\neffugio, profugio, refugio, and subterfugio, and the deponents\\nimitor, sequor, and sector govern the accusative. They are\\nreal transitives and the actives have a personal passive.\\nFortes for tuna adjuvat.\\nNemo mortem effugere potest,\\nGloria virtutem tanquam umbra sequitur.\\nNote. The compounds of sequor (\u00c2\u00a7209.) likewise govern the ac-\\ncusative obsequor, I comply with, alone governs the dative.\\n390.] 4. Five impersonal verbs 225.), which ex-\\npress certain feelings, viz. piget (I am) vexed pudet (I am)\\nashamed poenitet (I) repent taedet (I am) disgusted, and\\nmiseret, (I) pity, take an accusative of the person affected.\\nAs to the case by which the thing exciting such a feeling is\\nexpressed, see 441.\\nDecet, it is becoming, and its compounds likewise govern\\nthe accusative of the person, but they differ from the above-\\nmentioned impersonal verbs, inasmuch as decet and its com-\\npounds may have a nominative for their subject, though not\\na personal one.\\nCandida pax homines, trux decet iraferas.\\n391.] 5. The verbs docere (teach) with its compounds\\nedocere and dedocere and celare (conceal), have two accusa-\\ntives of the object, one of the thing, and another of the\\nperson, as Antigonus iter, quod habebat adversus Eumenem,\\nomnes celabat.\\nFortuna belli artem victos quoque docet\\nCatilina juventutem, quam illexerat, multis modis mala fact-\\nnora edocebat\\nNote. When such a proposition takes the passive form, the accusative\\nof the person becomes the nominative, as omnes celabantur ab Antigono\\nbut the thing may remain in the accusative, e. g. Latinae legiones longa\\nsocietate militiam Romanam edoctae omnes belli artes edoctus. But the\\nthing may be expressed also by the preposition de, as celatus sum a te hac\\nde re judices de his rebus docentur. t\\n393.] 6. The verbs posco, reposco, fiagito, I demand\\noro, rogo, I entreat interrogo and percontor, I ask or in-", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0206.jp2"}, "207": {"fulltext": "ACCUSATIVE CASE. 189\\nquire, also admit a double accusative, one of the person, and\\nanother of the thing, but the verbs which denote demanding\\nor entreating also take the ablative of the person with the\\npreposition ab, and those denoting inquiring may take the\\nablative of the thing with de. Peto, postulo and quaero are\\nnever used with a double accusative, but the first two have\\nalways the ablative of the person with ab, and quaero with\\nab, de or ex.\\nNulla salus bello, pacem te poscimus omnes.\\nLegati Hennenses ad Verrem adeunt eumque simulacrum Ce-\\nreris et Victoriae reposcunt,\\nPusionem quendam Socrates apudPlatonem interrogat quae*\\ndam geometrica.\\n394.] 7. The following verbs (which in the passive\\nvoice have two nominatives) have in the active two accusa-\\ntives, one of the object and the other of the predicate di-\\ncere, vocare, appellare, nominare, nuncupare, also scribere\\nand inscribere ducere, habere, judicare, existimare, nume-\\nrare, putare {arbitrarily intelligerey agnoscere, reperire,\\ninvenirey facere (pass. fieri), reddere, instituerey constituerey\\ncreare, deligerey designare, declarare, renwitiare, and others;\\nse praebere, se praestare. Thus we say in the active, Cicero-\\nnem universus populus adversus Catilinam consulem decla-\\nravity and in the passive, Cicero ab universe populo consul\\ndeclaratus est\\nRomulus urbem, quam condidit, Romam vocavit.\\nSocrates totius mundi se incolam et civem arbitrabatur.\\nBene de me meritis gratum me praebeo.\\nScytharum gens antiquissima semper habita est\\n395.] 8. The accusative is used with verbs and adjec-\\ntives to express the extent of time and space, in answer to\\nthe questions: how far? how long?, how broad? how deep?\\nhow thick e. g. nunquam pedem a me discessity he never\\nmoved one step from me a recta conscientia non transver-\\nsum unguem oportet discedere, not one finger s breadth fossa\\nduos pedes lata or longa cogitationem sobrii hominis punc-\\ntum temporis suscipe, take, for one moment, the thought of a\\nrational man tres annos mecum habitavit, or per tres annoSy\\nwhich however implies that the period was a long one. The\\nablative is not often used in this sense.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0207.jp2"}, "208": {"fulltext": "190 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCampus Marathon ab Athenis circiter milia passuum decern\\nabest\\nQuaedam bestiolae unum tantum diem vivunt.\\nDecern annos Troja oppugnata est ab universa Graecia.\\nLacrimans in carcere mater nodes diesque assidebat.\\n397.] Note. Old, in reference to the years which a person has lived,\\nis expressed in Latin by natus, with an accusative of the time e. g.\\nDecessit Alexander mensem unum, annos tres et triginta natus.\\n398.] 9. The names of towns, and not unfrequently of\\nsmall islands, are put in the accusative with verbs implying\\nmotion, without the preposition in or ad, which are required\\nwith the names of countries e. g. Juvenes JRomani Athenas\\nstudiorum causa projicisci solebant\\nWe may here mention at once all the rules relating to the\\nconstruction of the names of towns. When they denote the\\nplace whence, they are in the ablative when the place where?\\nin the dative (locative). When we have to express through\\na town, the preposition per is required.\\nNote, With regard to names of towns denoting the place where there\\nis no difficulty when they belong to the first declension or are plurals, as\\nRomae, at Rome; Athenis, at Athens. If the names belong to the second\\ndeclension they take the termination i, as Beneventi, Tarenti, c, for\\nthe ending i is an ancient form of the dative of the second declension as\\nin unl, nulll, When a name of a town belongs to the 3d declension, it\\noften happens that by a natural change the i of the dative or locative has\\nbecome e, e. g. Carthagini, Anxuri, Tiburi, Lacedaemoni, but also Car-\\ntkagine, Lacedaemone; and the change of Carthagini into Carthagine is\\nprecisely similar to the change of heri into here.\\nDemaratus quidam, Tarquinii regis pater, tyrannum Cypse-\\nlum quod f err e non poterat, Tarquinios Corintho fugit, et\\nibi suas fortunas constituit.\\nDionysius tyrannus Syracusis expulsus Corinthi pueros do-\\ncebat\\nRomae Consules, Athenis Archontes, Carthagine Suffetes, sive\\njudices, quotannis creabantur,\\n399 Note 1. When the words urbs, oppidum, locus, c. follow the\\nnames of towns as appositions, they generally take a preposition e. g.\\nDemaratus Corinthius se contulit Tarquinios, in urbem Etruriae floren-\\ntissimam. In answer to the question where however, the simple ablative\\nmay be used, but never the dative or genitive e. g. Archias Antiochiae\\nnatus est, celebri quondam urbe et copiosa (or in celebri urbe). When these\\nwords, with their prepositions, precede the names of towns, the latter are\\ninvariably put in the same case e. g. ad urbem Ancyram, ex urbe Roma,\\nex oppido Thermis, in oppido Athenis, in oppido Adrumeio.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0208.jp2"}, "209": {"fulltext": "DATIVE CASE. 191\\n400.] Note 2, The words domus and rus are treated like the names\\nof towns, consequently domum (also domos in the plur. and rus, home,\\ninto the country domo and rure, from home, from the country domi,\\nruri (more frequent than rure), at home, in the country. Domi also takes\\nthe datives meae,tuae, suae, nostrae, vestrae, and alienae but if any other\\nadjective is joined with it, or if the name of the possessor is added in the\\ngenitive, a preposition is commonly used; e. g. in ilia domo, in domo pub-\\nlica, in privata domo, in domo Caesaris or ipsius. In the case of domum\\nand domo, the rule is on the whole the same. Humi, on the ground, is\\nused in the same way in answer to the question where and belli and\\nmilitiae, always in combination with, or in opposition to, domi belli\\ndomique, or domi bellique, domi militiaeque, at home and in the camp.\\n401.] The poets may express by the accusative any\\nlocality answering to the question whither as Italiam fato\\nprofugus Laviniaque venit litora Speluncam Dido dux et\\nTrojanus eandem deveniunt Verba refers aures non per-\\nvenientia nostras.\\n402.] 10. In exclamations the accusative of the per-\\nson or thing wondered at is used, either with the interjec-\\ntions o, heu, eheu, or without them e. g. Heu me miserum\\nO wretched man that I am heu dementiam existimantium\\nO the folly of those who believe c. me miserum I\\nHuncine hominem hancine impudentiam, judices hancine\\naudaciam fallacem hominum spem fragilemque fortu-\\nnam et inaiies nostras contentiones\\n403.] Note. With these as with all other interjections the vocative\\nalso is used when the person or thing itself is invoked. Vae and hei are\\nusually joined with the dative, as vaemisero mihi vae victis Ecce and en\\nare preferred with the nominative.\\n[\u00c2\u00a7404.] 11. The following prepositions govern the accu-\\nsative ad, apud, ante, adversus and adversum, cis and citra,\\ncirca and circum, circiter, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter,\\nintra, juxta, ob, penes, per, pone, post, praeter, prope, prop-\\nter, secundum, supra, trans, versus, ultra, and in and sub\\nwhen joined with verbs of motion. Respecting super and\\nsubter see 320.\\nCHAP. LXXH.\\nDATIVE CASE.\\n405.] 1. The dative is the case of reference, or if we\\ncompare it with the accusative, the case denoting the remoter", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0209.jp2"}, "210": {"fulltext": "192 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nobject; for as the accusative serves to denote the effect or\\nthat which is acted upon, in contrast to the agent or active\\nsubject, so the dative denotes that with reference to which\\nthe subject acts, or in reference to which it possesses this or\\nthat quality. Hence the dative is used\\na) With all transitive verbs, along with the accusative, either\\nexpressed or understood, to denote the person in reference to\\nwhom or for whom a thing is done e. g. date panem pau-\\nperibus, mitto tibi librum, suadeo tibi, nuntiavit imperatori,\\npromisit militibus. This rule implies that the person for\\nwhose benefit or loss anything is done, is expressed hy the\\ndative (dativus commodi et incommodi) e. g. Pisistratus\\nsibi, non patriae, Megarenses vicit Non scholae, sed vitae\\ndiscimus,\\n406.] b) With intransitive verbs, which though they\\nusually do not govern any case, may yet express that the\\naction is done with reference to something or somebody. We\\nmention here especially vacare, nubere, and supplicare. Vaco\\nsignifies I am free, hence vaco aliciii rei, I have leisure\\nfor a thing or occupy myself with it, as vaco philosophiae.\\nNubo originally signifies I cover and as according to an\\nancient custom the bride on her wedding-day covered her\\nface, she was said nubere aliciii viro, to cover herself for a\\nman, that is, to marry. Supplico signifies I am a sup-\\npliant (supplex), hence supplico alicui, I implore a person.\\nHomo non sibi soli natus est, sed patriae, sed suis.\\nCivitas Romana inter bellorum strepitum parum olim vacabat\\nliberalibus disciplinis.\\nPlures in Asia mulieres singulis viris solent nubere.\\nNeque Caesari solum, sed etiam amicis ejus omnibus pro te,\\nsicut adhuc feci, libentissime supplicabo.\\nI[\u00c2\u00a7 407.] Note. Suadeo tibi hanc rem has nothing that is strange to us,\\nas we use the same construction in English. Persuadeo denotes the com-\\npletion of suadeo, and must be noticed here because its construction differs\\nfrom that of our verb to persuade. We use the passive form I am\\npersuaded, but in Latin we must say hoc (or any other neuter pronoun)\\nmihi versuadetur, as the construction is managed in such a way as to make\\ntrie clause wnich follows the subject persuadetur mihi, persuasum mihi est,\\nmihi persuasum habeo.\\nMihi quidem nunquam persuaderi potuit, animos, dum in corporibus essent\\nmortalibus, vivere, quum exissent ex his, emori.\\n409.] 2. The dative is joined with all adjectives (and\\nadverbs) whose meaning is incomplete, unless a person or an", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0210.jp2"}, "211": {"fulltext": "DATIVE CASE. 193\\nobject is mentioned for or against whom, for whose benefit\\nor loss the quality exists. Of this kind are those which ex-\\npress utility or injury, pleasantness or unpleasantness, in-\\nclination or disinclination, ease or difficulty, suitableness\\nor unsuitableness, similarity or dissimilarity, equality or in-\\nequality.\\nAdjectives expressing a friendly or hostile disposition to-\\nwards a person, sometimes take the prepositions in, erga, ad-\\nversus, instead of the dative; and utilis, inutilis, aptus, ineptus^\\ngenerally take the preposition ad to express the thing for which\\nany thing is useful or fit e. g. homo ad nullam rem utilis\\nlocus aptus ad insidias but the person to or for whom a\\nthing is useful or fit, is always expressed by the dative.\\nCanis nonne similis lupo atque, ut Ennius, simia quam\\nsimilis, turpissima bestia, nobis I\\nFidelissimi ante omnia homini canis et equus.\\nInvia virtuti nulla est via.\\nCunctis esto benignus, nulli blandus, paucis familiaris, omni-\\nbus aequus.\\nNote. The adjectives similis^ assimilis, consimilis, dissimilis, par and dis-\\npar, take the genitive, when an internal resemblance, or a resemblance in\\ncharacter and disposition, is to be expressed.\\n412.] 3. Hence the dative is joined with those intran-\\nsitive verbs which express the same ideas as the adjectives\\nmentioned in 409., and also with those denoting, to com-\\nmand, serve, trust, mistrust, approach, threaten, and to be\\nangry. The following list contains the principal ones pro-\\nsum, auxilior, patrocinor, subvenio, medeor noceo, obsum,\\nofficio, incommodo, insidior faveo, indulgeo, studeo, parco,\\nadulor, blandior, assentior; adversor, refragor, obsto, invideo,\\naemulor, obtrecto, convicior, maledico impero, pareo, cedo,\\nobedio, obtempero, servio, inservio, ministro, Jido, confido,\\nappropinquo, minor, irascor, stomachor, succenseo. To these\\nmust be added the impersonals convenit, it suits conducit\\nand expedit, it is conducive, expedient dolet, it grieves. The\\nbeginner must take especial care not to use the passive of\\nthese verbs personally, to which he might easily be tempted\\nby the English equivalents e. g. am envied, I am molested,\\nI am scolded, I am spared, and the like. In Latin the pas-\\nsive is impersonal mihi invidetur, obtrectatur, incommo-\\ndatur, mihi maledicitur, parcitur.\\nK", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0211.jp2"}, "212": {"fulltext": "194 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nProbus invidet nemini.\\nPhilosophia medetur animis.\\nAntiochus se nee impensae, nee labori, nee periculo parsurum\\npollicebatur, donee liberam vere Graeciam atque in ea\\nprincipes Aetolos fecisset\\nDemosthenes ejus ipsius artis, cui studebat, primam litteram\\nnon peterat dicere.\\n415.] 4. Verbs compounded with the prepositions ad,\\nante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, and super, preserving,\\nas compounds, the meaning of the prepositions, may be joined\\nwith a dative instead of repeating the preposition, or an\\nequivalent one with the case it requires e. g. Romani leges\\nincidebant in aes, or aeri natura inscripsit in mentibus nos-\\ntris, or mentibus nostris comparare bellum cum pace, or pact.\\nThey are either transitives, and as such have an accusative\\nbesides, or intransitives without an accusative of the object.\\nThe following are the most important transitive verbs of this kind\\naddo, affero, afflgo, adhibeo, adjicio, adjungo, admoveo, alligo, applico cir-\\ncumjicio comparo, compono, confero, conjungo immisceo, impono, imprimo,\\nincido, includo, infero, ingero* injicio, insero, inuro interjicio, interpono\\nobjicio, off undo, oppono postkabeo, postpono prae faro, praejicio, praepono\\nsubjicio, suppono, substerno.\\nThe following are intransitive accedo, acquiesco, adhaereo, alludo, annuo,\\narrepo, assideo, asplro antecello cohaereo, colludo, congruo, consentio, con-\\nsono excello incido, incubo and incumbo, indormio, inhaereo, inhio,\\nimmorior, immoror, innascor, insisto inierjaceo, intervenio obrepo, obstrepo,\\nobversor praemineo, praesideo, praevaleo succumbo, supersto, supervivo,\\nand the compounds of esse adsum, insum, intersum, praesum., subsum,\\nsupersum,\\n416.] It must be remarked in general that the preposi-\\ntion or one equivalent to it, is usually repeated in verbs com-\\npounded with ad, con, and in e. g. adhibeo, confero, con-\\njungo, communico, comparo, imprimo, inscribo, insum, and\\nalso interest in the sense of there is a difference e. g.\\nstudium adhibere ad disciplinas conferte (comparate, con-\\ntendite) hanc pacem cum illo belio hospitio et amicitia\\nmecum conjunctus est; consilia sua mecum communicavit\\nin hac vita nihil inest nisi miseria.\\n417.] The compounds of verbs of motion are construed\\nwith either the dative or the accusative, and some compounds\\nofjacere, stare and seder e, follow their analogy. (See 386.)\\nHence the verbs o\u00c2\u00a3 excelling, if their simple verbs denote mo-\\ntion, are mostly construed with the accusative, and antecello,\\npraecello and praemineo, which at least admit the accusative,\\nfollow their example.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0212.jp2"}, "213": {"fulltext": "DATIVE CASE. 195\\n418.] 5. The verbs aspergo and inspergo, circumdo,\\nand circumfundo, dono and impertio, exuo and induo, are\\nused, either like the above-mentioned transitives, with an\\naccusative of the thing and a dative of the person, or with\\nan accusative of the person and an ablative of the thing\\ne. g. circumdo alicui custodias, or circumdo aliquem cus-\\ntodiis, and consequently in the passive voice custodiae tibi\\ncircumdantur or (tu) circumdaris custodiis. So also ma-\\nculas aspergo vitae tuae, or maculis vitam tuam aspergo;\\ndono tibi pecuniam, or pecunid te dono impertio tibi laudes,\\nor laudibus te impertio, c.\\n419.] 6. With passive verbs the dative is sometimes\\nused, instead of ab with the ablative.\\nQuidquid in hac causa mild susceptum est, Quirites, id\\nomne me rei publicae causa suscepisse confirmo.\\nBarbarus hie ego sum, quia non intelligor ulli.\\nNote. It is a rule of the Latin language always to join the dative in-\\nstead of ab with the ablat. to the gerund and the participle future passive\\ne g. moriendum mihi est. See 649.\\n420.] 7. Esse with the dative of a person expresses\\nthe English to have, e. g. sunt mihi multi libri, I have\\nmany books, the same as habeo multos libros.\\nHomini cum deo similitudo est.\\nAn nescis, longas regibus esse manus\\n[\u00c2\u00a742i.] Hence mihi est nomen or cognomen (also cogno-\\nmentum) signifies I have a name, that is, my name is\\nor I am called. The name itself is put either in the\\nnominative or the dative, being attracted by the dative of\\nthe person.\\nSyracusis est fons aquae dulcis, cui nomen Arethusa est.\\nConsules leges decemvirales, quibus tabulis duodecim est\\nnomen, in aes incisas, in publico proposuerunt\\nNote. The same is the case with the (passive) expressions datum,\\ninditum, factum est nomen e. g. Tarquinius, cui cognomen Superbo ex\\nmoribus datum. The name itself is commonly put in the dative also with\\nthe active verbs dare, addere, indere, dicere, ponere, imponere, tribuere alicui\\nnomen e. g. dare alicui cognomen tardo ac pingui desipiunt omnes aeque\\nac tu, qui tibi nomen insano posuere but it may also be put in the same\\ncase as nomen, that is, in the accus., as: stirps virilis, cui Ascanium parentes\\ndixere nomen.\\nThe name may be expressed also by the genitive, according to the\\ngeneral rule that of two substantives joined to each other, one is put in\\nthe genitive e. g. Metellus praetor, cui ex virtute Macedonici nomen inditum\\nK 2", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0213.jp2"}, "214": {"fulltext": "196\\nLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nerat. This, however, is not the ordinary practice in the case of real proper\\nnames, but is generally confined to surnames.\\n422.] 8. With the verbs esse, dare, mittere and venire,\\nand others of the same meaning, besides the dative of the\\nperson, another is used to express the purpose, intention,\\nand destination.\\nNote. Dare belongs to this class both in its sense of to give,* and in\\nthat of to put to one s account. Its analogy is followed by mitto and\\nrelinquo. The following verbs have a similar meaning apponere, ducere,\\nIwbere, tribuere and vertere. Esse, in this respect, is equivalent to the\\nEnglish to do, in it does him honour, and the passives fieri, dari,\\nduci, haberi, tribui, verti, have a similar meaning. Proficisci is sometimes\\nconstrued like venire.\\nVirtutes hominibus decori gloriaeque sunt.\\nAttains, Asiae rex, regnum suum Romanis dono dedit.\\nMille Plataeenses Atheniensibus adversus Persas auxilio\\nvenerunt.\\nNote. There is a great variety of datives of this kind e. g. dono\\naliquid muneri, praemio relinquo milites auxilio, subsidio, praesidio, cus-\\ntodiae tribuitur or datur mihi vitio, crimini, odio, probro, opprobrio, laudi,\\nsaluti, utilitati, emolumento, c.\\nCHAP. Lxxm.\\nGENITIVE CASE.\\n423.] 1. When two substantives not expressing the same\\nthing are united with each other so as to form the expression\\nof only one idea, one of them is in the genitive. This genitive,\\ndependent upon a substantive, is in Latin of a double kind,\\naccording as it expresses either the subject or the object.\\nThe genitive is subjective, when it denotes that which does\\nsomething or to which a thing belongs e. g. hominum facta,\\nliber pueri: it is objective when it denotes that which is\\naffected by the action or feeling spoken of; e. g. amor vir-\\ntutis, taedium laboris, desiderium otii, remedium doloris.\\nThe objective genitive is used very extensively in Latin,\\nfor it is not only joined with those substantives which are\\nderived from verbs governing the accusative e. g. expug-", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0214.jp2"}, "215": {"fulltext": "GENITIVE CASE. 197\\nnatio urbis, the taking of the town; indagatio veri, the\\ninvestigation of truth scientia linguae, the knowledge of a\\nlanguage amor patriae, the love of one s country cupiditas\\npecuniae, desire for money but with those also, the cor-\\nresponding verb of which requires either a different case,\\nor a preposition e. g. taedium laboris, disgust for work\\nfiducia virium suarum, confidence in his own strength con-\\ntentio honorum, a contest for honours, c.\\nNuper Gn. Domitium scimus M. Silano, consulari homini,\\ndiem dixisse propter unius hominis, Aegritomari, paterni\\namici atque hospitis, injurias.\\nEst autem amicitia nihil aliud, nisi omnium divinarum\\nhumanarumque rerum cum benevolentia et caritate summa\\nconsensio.\\nInitium et causa belli (civilis) inexplebilis honorum Marii\\nfames (fuit).\\nNote. Something analogous to the Latin subjective and objective\\ngenitive occurs in English in such expressions as God s love, that is,\\nthe love which God shows to men, and the love of God, that is, the\\nlove which men bear to God. The Latin language having no such means\\nof distinguishing, is frequently ambiguous; e. g. j ug a hominum may be\\neither the escape from men, or the flight or escape of men, and in\\nall such combinations as metus hostium, injuria mulierum, judicium Ferris,\\ntriumphus Bojorum, opinio deorwn, the genitive may be either subjective\\n(active) or objective (passive) but the context generally shows what is\\nmeant. In case of any real ambiguity, a preposition may be used\\nin Latin instead of the genitive e. g. ex injuria in or adversus mulieres,\\nin opinione de diis. This is the case especially with substantives denoting\\na disposition, either friendly or hostile towards any thing e. g. amor\\n(animus) meus erga te odium, ira, simultas adversus inimicum. In general,\\nhowever, a preposition is much more rarely used in joining two sub-\\nstantives, and it is a part of the conciseness of the Latin language\\nto express the relation of the genitive, if possible, by the genitive\\nitself.\\n426.] 2. The genitive in the connection of two sub-\\nstantives also expresses the external condition or the internal\\nnature of a thing and if any of the tenses of esse, fieri,\\nhaberi, appears in such a combination, the genitive is not\\ndependent upon these verbs, but must be explained by the\\nomission of a substantive, such as homo and res. This at the\\nsame time constitutes the difference between the genitive\\nof quality {genitivus qualitatis) and the ablative of quality\\nwith the verb esse. But as there is a special part of speech\\nto express qualities, viz., the adjective, the quality can be\\nexpressed by a substantive only when this substantive itself\\nK 3", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0215.jp2"}, "216": {"fulltext": "198 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nis qualified by an adjective. We cannot say, for example^\\nhomo ingenii, a man of talent (which is expressed by homo\\ningeniosus), but we may say homo magni, summi, excellentis\\ningenii. Again, we cannot say homo annorum, but we may\\nsay homo viginti or quadraginta annorum. Comp. 468.\\nAthenienses belli duos duces deligunt? Periclem, spectatae\\nvirtutis virum, et Sophoclem, scriptorem tragoediarum.\\nTitus facilitatis tantae fuit et liber alitatis, ut nemini quid-\\nquam negaret.\\nHamilcar secum in Hispaniam duxit filium Hannibalem\\nannorum novem.\\nSpes unica populi Romania L. Quinctius, trans Tiberim\\nquattuor jugerum colebat agrum.\\n427 Note. The genitive thus serves to express all the attributes of\\na person or thing, relating to its extent, number, weight, duration, age,\\nand the like, provided such attributes are expressed by the immediate con-\\nnection of substantives. Thus we say colossus centum viginti pedum, a\\ncolossus of 120 feet in height; corona parvi ponderis, a crown of little\\nweight Aristides exilio decern annorum multatus est but when the ad-\\njective longus or lotus is added, we must say fossa quindecim pedes lata\\nin like manner puer decern annorum, but puer decern annos natus. 395.\\nfoil.)\\n429.] 3. The genitive is used to express the whole, of\\nwhich anything is a part, or to which it belongs as a part.\\nThis is the case a) with substantives denoting a certain\\nmeasure of things of the same kind e. g. modius, medimnum\\ntritici, libra /arris, magna vis auri, jugerum agri, ala equi-\\ntum. This genitive may be termed genitivus generis, b)\\nWith all words which denote a part of a whole {genitivus\\npartitivus) where we often use the preposition, of or\\namong. All comparatives and superlatives belong to this\\nclass of words e. g. doctior horum (duorum) juvenum doc-\\ntissimus omnium eloquentissimus Romanorum, and also all\\nwords implying a number, whether they are real numerals,\\nor pronouns and adjectives, as quis, aliquis, quidam, uter,\\nalter, neuter, alteruter, uterque, utervis, aliquot, solus,\\nnullus, nonnulli, multi, pauci or substantives, as nemo,\\npars, numerus. The genitive belonging to the superlative\\nof adjectives is retained also with superlatives as adverbs.\\nThus we say optimus omnium est, and also optime omnium\\nvixit\\nGraecorum oratorum praestantissimus fait Demosthenes.\\nPopulus Romanus legem dedit, ut consulum alter ex plebe\\ncrearetur.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0216.jp2"}, "217": {"fulltext": "GENITIVE CASE. 199\\nDuo sunt aditus in Ciliciam ex Syria, quorum liter que par-\\nvis praesidiis propter angustias intercludi potest.\\nNote. Instead of the genitive we may also use the prepositions ex and\\ninter, and sometimes de, but never ah.\\nThe words uter, alter, neuter, differ from quis, alius, nullus, by their\\nreferring to a whole consisting of only two. The difference between\\nnostri, vestri, and nostrum, vestrum is that the forms ending in um are\\nused as partitive genitives comp. 131.\\n432.] 4. The neuters of pronouns and of some adjec-\\ntives used as pronouns, are joined with a genitive for two\\nreasons first, because in meaning they have become substan-\\ntives, and secondly, because they express a part of a whole.\\nSuch neuters are hoc, id, Mud, istud, idem, quid and quod\\nwith their compounds (aliquid, quidquid, quippiam, quid-\\nquam, quodcunque), aliud tantum, quantum, aliquantum,\\nmultum, plus, plurimum, minus, minimum, paulum and ni-\\nmium with their diminutives and compounds tantulum, tan-\\ntundem, quantulum, quantulumcunque, c. To these we must\\nadd nihil, nothing, which is always used as a substantive\\nand the adverbs satis, enough parum, too little abunde,\\naffatim, abundantly.\\nIt is however to be observed that these neuters are used\\nas substantives only in the nominative and accusative, and\\nthat they must not be dependent upon prepositions.\\nQuantum incrementi Nilus capit, tantum spei in annum est.\\nProcellae quanto plus habent virium, tanto minus temporis.\\nPythagoras, quum in geometria quiddam novi invenisset,\\nMusis bovem immolasse dicitur.\\nJustitia nihil expetit praemii, nihil pretii.\\nSatis eloquentiae, sapientiae parum in Catilina fuit.\\n433.] Note. The genitive joined with these neuters is often not a\\nreal substantive, but the neuter of an adjective, which is used as a sub-\\nstantive, as above quiddam novi. It must be observed here, that only\\nadjectives of the second declension (in um) can be treated as substantives,\\nand not those of the third in e, nor the comparatives in us. We may\\ntherefore say aliquid novum and aliquid novi, but only aliquid memorabik,\\nand gravius aliquid and not aliquid memorabilis, or aliquid gravioris.\\n435.] 5. The neuters of adjectives in general, both in\\nthe singular and plural, are sometimes used as substantives,\\nand joined with a genitive, e. g. exiguum campi ante castra\\nerat, for which it would be more common to say, exiguus\\ncampus; in ultima Celtiberiae penetrare, summa tectorum\\nk 4", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0217.jp2"}, "218": {"fulltext": "200 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nobtinere, instead of in ultimam Celtiberiam penetrare, and\\nsumma tecta obtinere.\\n436.] 6. Many adjectives denoting a relation to a thing\\n(adjectiva relatiya), especially those which express partak-\\ning, desiring, fulness, experience, capacity, or remembering,\\nand their contraries, are joined with the genitive of a sub-\\nstantive or pronoun. Thus we say memor promissi, remem-\\nbering a promise compos mentis, in possession of his mind.\\nSuch relations are expressed in English by prepositions.\\nThe following in particular are construed in this way\\nparticeps, expers, consors, exsors cupidus, studiosus, avidus,\\navarus plenus, capax, insatiabilis, fecundus, fertilis, ferax,\\nsterilis peritus, imperitus, conscius, inscius, gnarus, ignarus,\\nrudis, prudens, providus, compos, impos, potens and impotens\\nmemor, immemor, tenax, curiosus, incuriosus.\\nPythagoras sapientiae studiosos appellavit philosophos.\\nThemistocles peritissimos belli navalis fecit Athenienses.\\nVenturae memor es jam nunc estote senectae.\\nNescia mens hominumfati sortisque futurae.\\n438.] 7. The participles present active are joined with\\na genitive wheiythey do not express a simple act or a mo-\\nmentary condition, but, like adjectives, a permanent quality\\nor condition. The following list contains those most in\\nuse: amans, appetens, colens, fugiens, intelligens, metuens,\\nnegligens, observans, retinens, tolerans, patiens, impatiens,\\ntemperans, intemperans e. g. amans patriae, Gracchi aman-\\nfissimi plebis Romanae, appetens laudis, fugiens laboris, immi-\\nnentium intelligens, officii negligens, miles patiens or impa-\\ntiens solis, pulveris, tempestatum.\\nEpaminondas adeo fuit veritatis diligens, ut ne joco quidem\\nmentiretur.\\nMomatffesemper appetentes gloriae praeter ceteras gentes at-\\nque^pidi laudis fuerunt\\n439.] 8. VVith verbs of reminding, remembering and\\nforgetting (admoneo, commoneo, commonefacio aliquem me-\\nmini, reminiscor, recordor, also in mentem mihi venit obli-\\nviscor), the person or the thing, of which any one reminds\\nanother or himself, or which he forgets, is expressed by the\\ngenitive but there are many instances also in which the\\nthing is expressed by the accusative.\\nMedicus, ut primum mentis compotem esse regem sensit, modo", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0218.jp2"}, "219": {"fulltext": "GENITIVE CASE. 201\\nmatris sororumque, modo tantae victoriae appropinquantis\\nadmonere non destitit\\nHannibal milites adhortatus est, ut reminiscerentur pristinae\\nvirtutis suae, neve mulierum libeimmque (for et liberorum)\\nobliviscerentur.\\nTu, C. Caesar, oblivisci nihil soles, nisi injurias.\\nUlud semper memento qui ipse sibi sapiens prodesse nequit,\\nnequicquam sapit.\\n441.] 9. The impersonal verbs pudet, piget, poenitet,\\ntaedet and miseret, require the person in whom the feeling\\nexists to be in the accusative, and the thing which produces\\nthe feeling in the genitive. The thing producing the feeling\\nmay also be expressed by an infinitive, or by a sentence with\\nquod or with an interrogative particle, e. g. pudet me hoc fe-\\ncisse, poenitet me quod te offendi, non poenitet me quantum\\nprqfecerim. As to the forms of these verbs, see 22 o.\\nMalo, me fortunae poeniteat, quam victoriae pudeat.\\nEorum nos magis miseret, qui nostram misericordiam non\\nrequirunt, quam qui illam ejfiagitant.\\nSocratem non puduit fateri, se multas res nescire.\\nQuern poenitet peccasse, paene est innocens.\\n442.] Note. The personal verbs misereor and miseresco, I pity,\\nare joined with a genitive, like the impersonal verb miseret. Miserari and\\nci/mmiserari (to pity), on the other hand, require the accusative.\\nPudet requires a genit. also, in the sense of being restrained by shame\\nor respect for a person.\\n444.] 10. The verbs of estimating or valuing and their\\npassives (aestimare, ducere, facere, fieri, habere, pendere,\\nputare, taxaresmdL esse) are joined with the genitive, when the\\nvalue is expressed in a general way by an adjective, but with\\nthe ablative, when it is expressed by a substantive. (Comp.\\n456.) Genitives of this kind are i magni, permagni,\\npluris, plurimi, maximi, parvi, minoris, minimi, tanti, quanti,\\nand the compounds tantldem, quantlvis, quanticunque but\\nnever multi and majoris. The substantive to be understood\\nwith these genitives is pretii, which is sometimes expressed\\n(with esse).\\nSi prata et hortidos tanti aestimamus, quanti est aestimanda\\nvirtus\\nMea mihi conscientia pluris est, quam omnium sermo.\\n445.] The same rule applies^|gfegeneral statements of\\nK 5", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0219.jp2"}, "220": {"fulltext": "202 LATIN GKAMMAR.\\nprice with the verbs of buying selling lending and hiring\\n(emere, vender e, the passive venire, conducere, locare, and as\\npassives in sense, stare and constare, prostare and licere, to\\nbe exposed for sale). But the ablatives magno, permagno,\\nplurimo, parvo, minimo, nihilo, are used very frequently in-\\nstead of the genitives.\\nMercatores non tantldem vendunt, quanti emerunt\\nNulla pestis humano generi pluris stetit, quam ira.\\nNon potest parvo res magna constare.\\nParvo fames constat, magno fastidium.\\n448.] 1 1 The genitive is used to denote the crime or\\noffence, with the verbs accuso, incuso, arguo, interrogo, in*\\nsimulo, increpo, infamo convinco, coarguo judico, damno,\\ncondemno absolvo, liber o, pur go arcesso, cito, defer v, pos-\\ntulo, reum facio, alicui diem dico, cum aliquo ago. The\\ngenitive joined to these verbs depends upon the substantive\\ncrimine or nomine, which is understood, but sometimes also\\nexpressed.\\nMiltiades proditionis est accusatus, quod, quum Parum ex-\\npugnare posset, e pugna discessisset\\nThrasybulus legem tulit, ne quis ante actarum rerum accusa-\\nretur neve multaretur.\\n447 Note. The punishment, with the verbs of condemning, is\\ncommonly expressed by the genitive e. g. capitis, mortis, multae, pecuniae,\\nquadrupli, octupli, and less frequently by the ablative, capile, morte, multa,\\npecunia. The ablative, however, is used invariably when a definite sum\\nis mentioned e. g. decern, quindecim, milibus aeris. Sometimes we find\\nthe preposition ad or in adpoenam, ad bestias, ad metalla, in metaUum, in\\nexpensas.\\n448.] 12. The genitive is used with the verbs esse and\\nfieri, in the sense of it is a person s business, office, lot, or\\nproperty, the substantive res or negotium being understood\\ne. g. hoc est praeceptoris, this is the business of the teacher\\nnon est mearum virium, it is beyond my strength Asia\\nRomanorum facta est, Asia became the property of the\\nRomans.\\nBut instead of the genitive of the personal pronouns mei,\\ntui, sui, nostri, vestri, the neuters of the possessives meum,\\ntuum, suum, nostrum, vestrum est, erat, c, are used.\\nCujusvis hominis est errare, nullius nisi insipientis in errore\\nperseverare.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0220.jp2"}, "221": {"fulltext": "ABLATIVE CASE. 203\\nSapientis judicis est, semper non quid ipse velit, sed quid lex\\net religio cogat, cogitare.\\nBello Gallico praeter Capitolium omnia hostium erant.\\nTuum est, videre quid agatur.\\n449.] 13. A similar ellipsis takes place with the imper-\\nsonal verb interest, it is of interest or importance (to me), the\\nperson to whom any thing is of importance being expressed\\nby the genitive but instead of the genitive of the personal\\npronouns, the possessives mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, are\\nused. The same is the case with the impersonal refert (pro-\\nbably a compound for remfert), which has the same meaning.\\nThese possessives in the case of interest are accusatives neu-\\nter plural, commoda being understood but in the case of\\nrefert the a of those pronouns is long, which is accounted for\\nby supposing that originally the phrase was rem fert meam,\\ntuam, c. The thing which is of interest or importance is\\nnot expressed by a substantive, but sometimes by the neuter\\nof a pronoun e. g. hoc mea interest, and usually by an accusa-\\ntive with the infinitive, or by ut and the interrogative parti-\\ncles with the subjunctive: e. g. multum mea interest te esse\\ndiligent em, or ut diligens sis, (utrum) diligens sis nee ne.\\nSemper Milo, quantum interesset P. Clodii, se perire, cogi-\\ntabat.\\nCaesar dicere solebat, non tarn sua, quam reipublicae inter-\\nesse, uti salvus esset.\\nQuid refert, utrum voluerim fieri, an factum gaudeam\\n450.] Note. The degree of importance is expressed by adverbs or\\nneuter adjectives, or by their genitives magis, magnopere, vehementer,\\nparum, minime, tarn, tantopere multum, plus., plurimum, permultum, infinitum,\\nmirum quantum, minus, nihil, aliquid, quiddam, tantum, quantum; tanti,\\nquanti, magni, permagni, parvi.\\nCHAP. LXXIV\\nABLATIVE CASE.\\n451.] The Ablative serves to denote certain relations\\nof substantives, which are expressed in most other languages\\nby prepositions.\\nK 6", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0221.jp2"}, "222": {"fulltext": "204 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nNote. This is an important difference between the ablative and the\\nother oblique cases for the latter expressing necessary relations between\\nnouns, occur in all languages which possess cases of inflection, and do not,\\nlike the French or English, express those relations by prepositions. But\\nthe ablative is a peculiarity of the Latin language, which might indeed\\nbe dispensed with, but which contributes greatly to its expressive con-\\nciseness.\\n1. The ablative is used first with passive verbs to denote\\nthe thing by which any thing is effected {ahlativus rei efficien-\\ntis), and which in the active construction is expressed by the\\nnominative e. g. sol mundum illustrate and sole mundus\\nillustratur fecunditas arborum me delectat, smdfecunditate\\narborum delector. If that by which any thing is effected is\\na person, the preposition ab is required with the ablative,\\nwith the sole exception of the participles of verbs denoting\\nto be born (natus, genitus, ortus), to which the name of\\nthe father or family is generally joined in the ablative without\\na preposition. Ab cannot be used with the ablative of a\\nthing by which any thing is effected, unless the thing be\\npersonified.\\nDei providentid mundus administratur.\\nNon est consentaneum, qui metu non frangatur, eum frangi\\ncupiditate nee qui invictum se a labore praestiterit, vinci\\na voluptate.\\n452.] 2. An ablative expressing the cause (ahlativus\\ncausae) is joined with adjectives, which, if changed into a\\nverb, would require a passive construction e. g.fessus, aeger,\\nsaucius (equivalent to qui fatigatus, morbo affectus, vulne-\\nratus est) and with intransitive verbs, for which we may\\ngenerally substitute some passive verb, of at least a similar\\nmeaning, as interiit fame, consumptus est fame gaudeo ho-\\nnore tuo, delector honore tuo. Thus verbs expressing feeling\\nor emotion are construed with the ablative of the thing which\\nis the cause of the feeling or emotion, as doleo fratris morte,\\nlacrimabat gaudio. Sometimes the prepositions propter and\\nper are used instead of such an ablative, and when a person\\nis described as the cause of an emotion, they are just as neces-\\nsary as ab is with passive verbs.\\nWe must notice in particular the following verbs Glo-\\nrior, I boast laboro, I suffer from nitor and innitor, I lean\\nupon sto, I depend upon a thing fido and confido, I trust\\nin a thing, and the verbs constare, contineri 9 to consist of,\\nare construed with the ablat, to denote that of which a thing", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0222.jp2"}, "223": {"fulltext": "ABLATIVE CASE. 205\\nconsists but constare is joined more frequently with ex or\\nin, and contineri in the sense of to be contained in a thing,\\nis generally used with in nitor with in and the ablat., and\\nfido and confido with the dat.\\nConcordia res parvae crescunt, discordid maximae dila-\\nbuntur.\\nEst adolescentis majores natu vereri exque his deligere opti-\\nmos et probatissimos, quorum consilio atque auctoritate\\nnitatur.\\nVirtute decet, non sanguine niti.\\nDiversis duobus vitiis, avaritia et luxuria, civitas Romana\\nlaborabat.\\nDelicto dolere, correctione gaudere nos oportet\\n454.] Note. With transitive verbs also, the cause or the thing in\\nconsequence of which anything is done, is not expressed by the ablative\\nbut by the preposition propter or a circumlocution with causa, e. g.\\ninstead of joco dicere,joco mentiri, we find joci causa dicere or mentiri hoc\\nonus suscepi tua causa honoris tui causa, propter amicitiam nostram.\\nWhen the cause is a state of feeling, the best Latin writers prefer a cir-\\ncumlocution with the perfect participle of some verb denoting to in-\\nduce e. g. to do a thing from some desire, cupiditate ductus, motus,\\ncaptus, c.\\n455.] 3. An ablative is joined with verbs of every kind\\nto express the means or instrument by which a thing is done\\n(ablativus instrument). Thus we say manu ducere aliquem,\\nto lead a person by the hand equo, curru, nave vehi, the\\nhorse, carriage, and ships being the means of moving.\\nBenivolentiam civium blanditiis colligere turpe est\\nCornibus tauri, apri deniibus, morsu leones, aliae fuga se,\\naliae (bestiae) occultatione tutantur.\\nNaturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret\\nNote. When a person is the instrument by which anything is effected,\\nthe ablative is rarely used, but generally the preposition per, or the cir-\\ncumlocution with opera alicujus, which is so frequent, especially with\\npossessive pronouns, that mea, tua, sua, Sec. opera are exactly the same\\nas per me, per te, per se, c.\\n456.] 4. Hence with verbs of buying and selling, of\\nestimation, value, and the like, the price or value of a thing\\nis expressed by the ablative, provided it is indicated by a\\ndefinite sum or a substantive.\\nNote. Respecting the genitive in general expressions, see 444.,", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0223.jp2"}, "224": {"fulltext": "206 LATIN GRAMMAB.\\nwhere it is observed that, contrary to the general rule, the ablatives\\nmagna, permagno, piurimo, parvo, minima, are often joined to verbs denoting\\nto buy and sell.\\nDarius mille talentis percussorem Alexandri emere voluit\\nViginti talentis unam orationem Isocrates vendidit.\\nDenis in diem assibus anima et corpus militum aestimantur.\\nE\u00c2\u00a7 457 5. The ablative is joined with nouns (both sub-\\nstantive and adjective) and verbs to express a particular\\ncircumstance or limitation, where in English the expressions\\nwith regard to, as to, or in are used: e. g. Nemo\\nRomanorum Ciceroni par fait, or Ciceronem aequavit elo-\\nquentia, in eloquence, or with regard to eloquence. Hence\\na great number of expressions by which a statement is\\nmodified or limited, as mea sententia, frequently with the\\naddition of quidem natione Syrus, a Syrian by birth\\ngenere facile primus Hamilcar cognomine Barcas, c.\\nAgesilaus claudus fait (claudicabat) altero pede.\\nSunt quidam homines, non re, sed nomine.\\n460.] 6. The ablative is used with verbs denoting\\nplenty or want, and with the corresponding transitives of\\nfilling, endowing, depriving. (Ablativus copiae aut inopiae.)\\nVerbs of this kind are: 1. abundare, redundare, affluere,\\ncircumfluere, florere, vigere car ere, egere, indigere, vacare\\n2. complere, explere, implere, cumulare, satiare ajfficere,\\ndonare, ornare, auger e privare, spoliare, orbare, fraudare,\\nnudare, exuere, and many others of a similar meaning.\\nGer mania rivis fluminibusque abundat\\nQuam Dionysio erat miserum, car ere consuetudine amicorum,\\nsocietate victus, sermone omnino familiari\\nArcesilas philosophus quum acumine ingenii floruit, turn\\nadmirabili quodam lepore dicendi.\\nConsilio et auctoritate non modo non orbari, sed etiam augeri\\nsenectus solet\\nMens est praedita motu sempiterno,\\n46i.] Note 1. We must pay especial attention to the verb afficere,\\nproperly endow with, but it is used in a great many ways, and may\\nsometimes be translated by to do something to a person afficere\\naliquem honore, beneficio, laetitia* praemio, ignominia, injuria, poena, morte,\\nsepultura. Notice also praeditus, endowed, equivalent to affectus.\\n462.] Note 2. The adjectives denoting full and empty are some-\\ntimes joined with the ablative although as adjectiva relativa they take a", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0224.jp2"}, "225": {"fulltext": "ABLATIVE CASE. 207\\ngenitive (see 436). Refertus, filled, as a participle of the verb refercio\\nhas regularly the ablative.\\nIndigeo is very frequently joined with a genitive.\\n464.] 7. Opus est, there is need, is used either as an\\nimpersonal verb, in which case it takes, like the verbs\\ndenoting want, an ablative, e. g. duce (exemplis) nobis opus\\nest, or personally, in which case the thing needed is ex-\\npressed by the nominative, e. g. dux nobis opus est, exempla\\nnobis opus sunt. The latter construction is most frequent\\nwith the neuters of pronouns and adjectives.\\nAthenienses Philippidem cursorem Lacedaemonem miserunt,\\nut nuntiaret, quam celeri opus esset auxilio.\\nThemistocles celeriter quae opus erant reperiebat\\n465.] 8. The ablative is joined with the deponent\\nverbs utor, fruor, fungor, potior and vescor, and their com-\\npounds abutor, perfruor, defungor and perfungor.\\nHannibal quum victoria posset uti, frui maluit.\\nQui adipisci veram gloriam volet, justitiae fungatur of-\\nficiis,\\nNumidae plerumque lacte etferina came vesceba?itur.\\n466.] Note. The five deponents here mentioned were joined in the\\nearly language with the accusative, whence afterward their participle fut.\\npass, continued to be regularly used. Potior occurs also with the gen-\\nitive e. g. regni, imperii, and especially in the phrase rerum potiri, to\\nassume the supremacy.\\n467 9. The adjectives dignus, indignus and contentus\\nare joined with the ablative of the thing of which we are\\nworthy, unworthy, and with which we are satisfied. Dig-\\nnari, to be deemed worthy, or, as a deponent, to deem\\nworthy, is construed like dignus.\\nQuam multi luce indigni sunt, et tamen dies oritur\\nQuod cuique temporis ad vivendum datur, eo debet esse con-\\ntentus.\\n468.] 10. The verbs of removing, preventing, deliver-\\ning, and others which denote separation, are construed with\\nthe ablative of the thing, without any of the prepositions\\nab, de or ex but when separation from a person is expressed\\nthe preposition ab is always used. The principal verbs of\\nthis class are: pellere, depellere, expellere, ejicere, movere,\\namovere, demovere, removere; abire, exire, decedere, desistere,\\nevadere liberare, expedire, solvere; arcere, prohibere, ex-", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0225.jp2"}, "226": {"fulltext": "208 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\ncludere, inter cludere, ahstinere together with the adjectives\\nliber i immunis, purus, vacuus and alienus, which may be\\nused either with the preposition ab or the ablative alone,\\ne. g. liber a delictis and liber omni metu, but the verbs\\nexolvere, exonerare and levare, although implying liberation,\\nare always construed with the ablative alone.\\nNote. The verbs which denote to distinguish and to differ, viz.\\ndistinguere, discernere, secernere, differre, discrepare, dissidere, distare, abhor-\\nrere, together with alienare and abalienare, are generally joined only with\\nthe preposition ab, and the ablat. alone is rare and poetical.\\nX. Brutus civitatem dominatu regio liberavit.\\nEsse pro cive, qui civis non sit, rectum est non licere, usu\\nvero urbis prohibere peregrinos sane inhumanum est.\\nApud veteres Germanos quemcunque mortalium arcere tecto\\nnefas habebatur.\\nTu, Juppiter, hunc a tuis aris, a tectis urbis, a moenibus, a\\nvita for tunis que civium arcebis.\\n[\u00c2\u00a7471.] 11. The ablative is used with esse (either ex-\\npressed or understood) to denote a quality of a person or a\\nthing (ablativus qualitatis). But the ablative is used only\\nwhen the substantive denoting the quality does not stand\\nalone (as in the case of the genitive, see 426.), but is\\njoined with an adjective or pronoun-adjective. Hence we\\ncannot say, e. g. Caesar fuit ingenio, or homo ingenio, a man\\nof talent (which would be expressed by an adjective), but\\nwe say Caesar magno, summo, or excettenti ingenio, or homo\\nsummo ingenio.\\nAgesilaus staturafuit humili et corpore exiguo.\\nOmnes habentur et dicuniur tyranni, qui potestate sunt per~\\npetua in ea civitate, quae libertate usa est.\\nL. Catilina, nobili genere natus, fuit magna vi et animi et\\ncorporis, sed ingenio malo pravoque.\\nNote. With regard to the difference between the ablative and the\\ngenitive of quality, the genitive is more comprehensive, all ideas of\\nmeasure being expressed by this case alone but in other respects the dis-\\ntinction is not very clear. Thus we may say homo magna prudentia or\\nmagnae prudentiae. But the ablat. depends upon esse, while the genit. is\\nin immediate connection with the noun.\\n472.] 12. If the manner in which any thing is done is\\nexpressed by a substantive, it usually takes the preposition\\ncum e. g. cum fide amicitiam colere litter ae cum cur a\\ndiligentiaque scriptae cum voluptate audire. These ex-", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0226.jp2"}, "227": {"fulltext": "ABLATIVE CASE. 209\\npressions are equivalent to fideliter colere, diligenter scrip tae,\\nlibenter audire, c. If an adjective is joined with the sub-\\nstantive, the ablative alone (ablativus modi) is generally\\nused, and the preposition cum is joined to it only when an\\nadditional circumstance, and not an essential characteristic of\\nthe action, is to be expressed. The substantives denoting\\nmanner, as modus, ratio, mos, and others, never take the\\npreposition cum.\\nQuid est aliud gigantum modo bellare cum diis, nisi naturae\\nrepugnare\\nLegiones nostrae in eum saepe locum profectae sunt alacri\\nanimo et erecto, unde se nunquam redituras arbitraren-\\ntur.\\nEpaminondas a judicio capitis maxima discessit gloria.\\nMiltiades, cum Parum expugnare non potuisset, Athenas\\nmagna cum qffensione civium suorum rediit.\\n473.] Note. If we compare the above rules with those given under\\nNos. 1. and 2., the ablative expressing company alone is excluded, for\\ncompany is expressed by cum, even in such cases as servi cum tells\\ncomprehensi sunt, cum ferro in aliquem invader e, when we are speaking of\\ninstruments which a person has (if he uses them, it becomes an ablativus\\ninstrumenti) further, Romam veni cum febri, I came to Rome as soon\\nas the fever broke out cum nuntio exire, as soon as the news arrived\\ncum occasu solis copias educere, as soon as the sun set.\\n475.] 13. a) The ablative, without a preposition, is\\nused to express the point of time at which any thing hap-\\npens.\\nQua node natus Alexander est, eddem Dianae Ephesiae tern-\\nplum deflagravit.\\nPompejus extrema pueritia miles fuit summi imperatoris,\\nineunte adolescentia maximi ipse exercitus imperator.\\n476.] b) The ablative is also used to express the time\\nbefore and the time after a thing happened, and ante and\\npost are in this case placed after the ablative. The meaning,\\nhowever, is the same as when ante and post are joined with\\nthe accusative in the usual order, just as we may sometimes\\nsay, in the same sense, three years after, and after three\\nyears, post tres annos decessit, and tribus annis post decessit.\\nIn this connection the ordinal numerals may be employed, as\\nwell as the cardinal ones post tertium annum, and tertio\\nanno post, are the same as tribus annis post for by this, as\\nby the former expressions, the Romans did not imply that a", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0227.jp2"}, "228": {"fulltext": "210 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nperiod of three full years bad intervened, but tbey included\\nin the calculation the beginning and the end. When ante or\\npost stands last (as in tribus annis post or tertio anno post),\\nit may be followed by an accusative to denote the time after\\nand before which any thing took place.\\nThemistocles fecit idem, quod viginti annis ante apud nosfe-\\ncerat Coriolanus.\\nL. Sextius primus de plebe consul f actus est annis post Bo-\\nmam conditam trecentis duodenonaginta,\\n478.] c) The length of time before the present moment\\nis expressed by abhinc, generally with the accusative, but\\nalso with the ablative; e. g. Demosthenes abhinc annos prope\\ntrecentos fuit, and abhinc annis quattuor. The same mean-\\ning is also expressed by ante, with the pronoun hie, as in\\nante hos sex menses ante haec tria saecula.\\n479.] d) The length of time ivithin which a thing hap-\\npens may be expressed either by the ablative alone or by in\\nwith the ablative, or by intra with the accusative.\\nAgamemnon cum universa Graecia vix decern annis unam\\ncepit urbem.\\nSenatus decrevit, ut legati Jugurthae, nisi regnum ipsumque\\ndeditum venissent, in diebus proximis decern Italia dece-\\nderent.\\n481.] 14. The ablative without a preposition is used\\nin some particular combinations, to denote the place where\\nas terra marique, by land and by sea. Eespecting names\\nof towns, see 398. The preposition in is omitted with\\nthe word loco (and locis), when it is joined with an ad-\\njective, and has the derivative meaning of occasion; e.g.\\nhoc loco, multis locis, aliquot locis, secundo loco, meliore loco\\nres nostrae sunt; but this is done more rarely when locus has\\nits proper meaning of spot or place. Libro joined with\\nan adjective or pronoun, as hoc, primo, tertio, is used without\\nin, when the whole book is meant, and with in when merely\\na portion or passage is meant.\\nThe poets observe no limits in the use of the ablative\\nwithout in to denote a place where They further use the\\nablative without ex or ab to indicate the place whence\\n483.] 15. The ablative is used with adjectives in the\\ncomparative degree, instead of quam with the nominative, or\\nin the construction of the accusative with the infinitive, instead", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0228.jp2"}, "229": {"fulltext": "ABLATIVE CASE. 211\\nof quam with the accusative of the subject e. g. Nemo Ro-\\nmanorum fuit eloquentior Cicerone neminem Romanorum\\neloquentiorem fuisse vetere$ judicarunt Cicerone. The abla-\\ntive instead of quam with the accusative of the object occurs\\nmore rarely, but when the object is a relative pronoun, the\\nablative is generally used.\\nVilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum.\\nPhidiae simulacris, quibus nihil in illo genere perfectius vi-\\ndemus, cogitare tamen possumus pulchriora.\\n485.] Note 1. Minus, plus, and amplius, when joined to numerals\\nare used with and without quam, generally as indeclinable words, and\\nwithout influence upon the construction minus duo milia hominum ex\\ntanto exercitu effugerunt, instead of quam duo millia amplius trecentos\\nmilites (or trecentos amplius milites) habuit cum trecentis non amplius mi-\\nlitibus effugit.\\n486.] Note 2. The English word still, joined with comparatives,\\nis expressed by etiam, and sometimes by vel, but never by adhuc.\\n487.] 16. The ablative is used to express the measure\\nor amount by which one thing surpasses another, or is sur-\\npassed by it. Paulo, multo, quo, eo, quanto, tanto, tantulo,\\naliquanto, hoc, are ablatives of this kind.\\nHibernia dimidio minor est quam Britannia.\\nHomines quo plura habent, eo cupiunt ampliora.\\n489.] 17. The ablative is governed by the prepositions\\nab (a, abs), absque, clam, coram, cum, de, ex (e), prae, pro,\\nsine, tenus (is placed after its case) by in and sub when\\nthey answer to the question where and by super in the\\nsense of de, concerning, or with regard to. Subter is\\njoined indifferently either with the ablative or the accusative,\\nthough more frequently with the latter.\\nThe preposition in is generally joined with the ablative\\nafter the verbs of placing (pono, loco, colloco, statuo, constituo,\\nand consido), although strictly speaking they express motion,\\nand therefore should have in with the accusative.\\nAegyptii ac Babylonii omnem cur am in siderum cognitione\\nposuerunt.\\nHerculem hominum fama, beneficiorum memor, in concilio\\ncoelestium collocavit", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0229.jp2"}, "230": {"fulltext": "212 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nCHAP. LXXV.\\nVOCATIVE CASE.\\n492.] The vocative is not in any immediate connection\\nwith either nouns or verbs, but is inserted to express the\\nobject to which our words are addressed.\\nIII. USE OF THE TENSES.\\nCHAP. LXXYI.\\n493.] 1. The tenses of the Latin verb are used on the\\nwhole in the same way as those of the English verb, with\\nthe exception of some peculiarities, which are explained in\\n500. foil. (Comp. 150.) The only general rule that can be\\nlaid down is this we must first determine whether the action\\nor condition to be expressed falls in the present, the past, or\\nthe future, and in what relation it stands to other actions or\\nconditions with which it is connected. For example, Iiuas\\nwriting, and had vjritten, are both actions belonging to the\\npast, but in regard to their relation they differ, for in the\\nsentence, was ivriting ivhen the shot ivas heard the act\\nj of writing was not completed when the shot was heard\\nwhereas in the sentence had written, when my friend\\narrived, the act of writing was completed when the other\\n(the arrival of my friend) occurred. The -same difference\\nexists between, 1 shall ivrite to-morrow, and shall have\\nwritten to-morrow between am writing to-day, i. e. I am\\nengaged in an act not yet terminated, and have written to-\\nday, which expresses an act already terminated. This last\\nis the proper signification of the Latin perfect, as advenit\\npater, the father has arrived, that is, he is here now. Ho-\\nrace, at the close of a work, says exegi monumentum aere\\nperennius an orator, at the conclusion of his speech, says\\ndixi, that is, I have done and Virgil, with great emphasis\\nfuimus Troes, fait Ilium, i. e. we are no longer Trojans,\\nIlium is no more.\\n494.] 2. The Latin language therefore has two tenses", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0230.jp2"}, "231": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE TEXSES. 213\\nfor each of the three great divisions of time, past, present,\\nand future one expressing a complete and the other an in-\\ncomplete action. And the six tenses of the Latin verb are\\nthus the result of a combination of time and relation.\\nf scribo, I write, or am writing present time, and action going on.\\nscripsi, I nave written, present time, and action terminated.\\nf scribebam, I was writing, or wrote, past time, and action going on.\\nscripseram, I had written, past time, and action terminated.\\n{scribam, I shall write, or be writing, future time, and action not\\ncompleted.\\nscripsero, I shall have written, future time and action completed.\\n3. The passive has the same tenses with the same mean-\\nings but with this difference, that they do not express an\\naction, but a condition or suffering.\\nflaudor, I am praised, present time, and condition still going on.\\n1 laudatus sum, I have been praised, present time, and condition ter-\\nminated.\\nflaudabar, I was praised, past time, and condition going on.\\ni laudatus eram, I had been praised, past time, and condition ter-\\nminated.\\nf laudabor, I shall be praised, future time, and condition not completed.\\ni laudatus ero, I shall have been praised, future time, and condition\\n(_ completed.\\n496.] 4. The tenses of the present and past time, that;\\nis, the present, perfect, imperfect, and pluperfect, have also a\\nsubjunctive mood, as scribam, scripserim, scribebam, scrip-\\nsissem, and in the passive, scribar, scriptus sim, scribere?\\\\\\nscriptus essem. For the relations in which the subjunctive\\nis required, see Chap. LXXVUX As tenses, these subjunc-\\ntives do not differ from the tenses of the indicative.\\no. Neither the active nor the passive voice has a subjunc-\\ntive of the future, and the deficiency is supplied by other\\nmeans. When the idea of futurity is already implied in\\nanother part of the proposition, some other tense of the sub-\\njunctive supplies the place of the future, viz. the present and\\nimperfect supply the place of the future subjunctive, and the\\nperfect and pluperfect that of the future perfect. The choice\\nof one or other of these four subjunctives is to be determined\\nby the time expressed by the leading verb of the proposition,\\nand by the relation of the action, being either completed or\\nnot completed e. g. Affirmo tibi, si hoc beneficium mihi tri-\\nbuas, me magnopere gavisurum, and affirmabam tibi, si illud", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0231.jp2"}, "232": {"fulltext": "214 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nbeneficium mihi tribueres, magnopere me gavisurum. It is\\nclear that tribuas and tribueres here supply the place of the\\nfuture subjunctive, for in the indicative we say si mihi tri-\\nbues magnopere gaudebo. Again, Affirmo tibi, si hoc\\\\\\nbeneficium mihi tribueris, me quamcunque possim gratiam tibi\\nrelaturum, and affirmabat mihi, si illud beneficium ipsi tri-\\nbuissem, se quamcunque posset gratiam mihi relaturum,\\nwhere tribueris and tribuissem supply the place of the future\\nperfect, for in the indicative we should say si hoc beneficium\\nmihi tribueris (from tribuero), quamcunque potero gratiam\\ntibi referam, when you shall have shown me this kindness.\\nThe same is the case in the passive voice affirmo tibi, si\\nhoc beneficium mihi tribuatur, me magnopere gavisurum\\naffirmabam tibi, si illud beneficium mihi tribueretur, magno-\\npere me gavisurum affirmo tibi, me, si hoc beneficium mihi\\ntributum sit (or fuerit), quamcunque possim gratiam tibi re-\\nlaturum affirmabam tibi, si illud beneficium mihi tributum\\nesset (or fuisset), quamcunque possem gratiam me tibi rela-\\nturum.\\n497.] If no future has gone before, and the construc-\\ntion of the sentence requires the subjunctive, the participle\\nfuture active is employed for this purpose, with the appro-\\npriate tense of the verb esse. This paraphrased conjugation\\n(conjugatio paraphrasticd), as it is called, properly expresses\\nan intended action; but the subjunctives with sim and essem\\nare used also as regular subjunctives of the future, the idea\\nof intention passing over into that of futurity e.g.JVon dubito\\nquin rediturus sit, I do not doubt that he will return non\\ndubitabam quin rediturus esset, I did not doubt that he would\\nreturn. The perfects rediturus fuerim and rediturus fuissem\\nretain their original meaning, implying intention e. g. non\\ndubito quin rediturus fuerit, I do not doubt that he has had\\nthe intention to return. If we want simply to express fu-\\nturity, we must use the circumlocution with futurum sit and\\nfuturum esset; e. g. nescio num futurum sit, ut eras hoc ipso\\ntempore jam redierit, and nesciebam num futurum esset, ut\\npostridie eo ipso tempore jam redisset. This same circumlo-\\ncution must be employed in the passive, since the participle\\nfuture passive implies necessity, and cannot be used in the\\nsense of a simple future e. g. non dubito, quin futurum sit,\\nut laudetur, I do not doubt that he will be praised multi\\nnon dubitabant, quin futurum esset, ut Caesar a Pompejo\\nvinceretur, that Caesar would be conquered by Pompey.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0232.jp2"}, "233": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE TENSES. 215\\n498.] 6. This conjugatio periphrastica, which is\\nformed by means of the participle future active and the\\nauxiliary verb esse, is peculiar to the Latin language, and\\nis used to express an intended action, or, in the case of\\nintransitive verbs, a state or condition which is to come\\nto pass. It has its six tenses like the ordinary conjuga-\\ntion. The realization depends either on the will of the\\nsubject or on that of others, or upon circumstances. In the\\nfirst case we say in English, I intend, or am on the point\\nof, and in the others, I am to (be, or do a thing), i. e.\\nothers wish that I should do it e. g. scripturus sum, I in-\\ntend writing, or am to write scripturus eram, I intended\\nwriting, or was to write scripturus fui, I have been intend-\\ning to write, c.-\\\\\\n499.] 7. The participle future passive in ndus, or the\\nparticiple of necessity (participium necessitatis), in combina-\\ntion w r ith the tenses of the verb esse, forms another distinct\\nconjugation denoting future necessity and not future suffer-\\ning, for epistola scribenda est, for example, does not signify\\nthe letter is about to be written, which is expressed by the\\nsimple future epistola scribelur, but the letter must be writ-\\nten, there being either an internal or external necessity for\\nits being written, either of which is expressed in English by\\nthe letter is to be written. This conjugation may accord-\\ningly be regarded as the passive of the conjugatio periphras-\\ntica. The tenses are the same as those of the auxiliary verb\\nesse, and in so far do not differ from the general rule.\\n500.] 8. The perfect indicative, both active and passive,\\nhas in Latin, besides its signification of an action terminated\\nat the present time, that of an aorist, that is, it is used to\\nrelate events of the past, which are simply conceived as facts,\\nwithout any regard to their being terminated or not termi-\\nnated, in respect to each other e. g. Itaque Caesar armis\\nrem gerere constituit, exercitum finibus Italiae admovit, Ru-\\nbiconem tvansiit, Romam et aer avium occupavit, Pompejum\\ncedentem pevsecutus est, eumque in campis Phavsalicis devicit.\\nIn English the imperfect (or more correctly called the pre-\\nterite) is used as an aorist to relate events of the past, and\\nhence we translate the above passage: Caesar resolved\\nto use armed force, he advanced with his army to the\\nfrontiers of Italy, passed the Rubicon, took possession of\\nRome and the treasury, pursued Pompey, and defeated him\\nin the plain of Pharsalus. But the Latin imperfect is never", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0233.jp2"}, "234": {"fulltext": "216 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nused in this sense it always expresses an incomplete or con-\\ntinuing action or condition in past time, the ancient correct\\nrule being perfecto procedit, imperfecto insistit oratio.\\n5oi.] Note. In L atin, as in many modern languages, the present\\ntense is often used instead of the aorist of the past, when the writer or\\nspeaker in his imagination transfers himself to the past, which thus\\nbecomes to him present, as it were. Narrators by this figure frequently\\nrender their descriptions very animated; but in regard to dependent\\nsentences, they often regard such a present as a regular perfect, and\\naccordingly use the imperfect or pluperfect in the dependent sentence\\nwhich follows.\\n502.] 9. The peculiar character of the Latin imperfect\\ntherefore is to express a repeated action, manners, customs,\\nand institutions, which are described as continuing at\\nsome given period in past time, and completely answers to\\nthe English compound tense, I was writing, he was\\nwaiting.\\nSocrates dicere solebat (or dicebat), omnes in eo, quod scirent,\\nsatis esse eloquentes.\\nAnseres Romae publice alebantur in Capitblio.\\n504.] 10. The perfect subjunctive has not this mean-\\ning of an aorist, but is always used to express a terminated\\naction with reference to the present time, and thus completely\\nanswers to the perfect in English. The imperfect subjunctive,\\non the other hand, in historical narratives has the aorist sense\\nof the perfect indicative, when past events are mentioned\\nwithout reference to the action or condition being continued\\nor not.\\nNote. This difference is easily perceived; e.g. puer de tecto decidit,ut cms\\nfregerit, the boy has fallen from the roof, so that he has broken his leg,\\nis not a narrative but the statement of an event completed at the present\\ntime but puer de tecto decidit, ut crus frangeret, the boy fell from the\\nroof, so that he broke his leg, is a real historical narrative, for the per-\\nfect decidit is here used in its aorist sense, and the imperfect subjunctive-\\nsupplies its place in the dependent clause.\\nA comparison with the English language thus leads to this\\nconclusion, that the perfect and imperfect subjunctive are\\nused in Latin in the same sense as in English but the per-\\nfect indicative in Latin, as an historical tense, answers to the\\nEnglish imperfect, and the Latin imperfect indicative to the\\nEnglish paraphrased tense I was with a participle.\\nMulier tarn vehementer lapidem de tecto dejecit, ut regis\\n(Pyrrhi) caput et galeam perfringcret.\\n505.] 11. The duration and completion of an action in", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0234.jp2"}, "235": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE TENSES. 217\\nreference to another are expressed in Latin more accurately\\nthan in English, by the imperfect and pluperfect When one\\naction must be completed before another can begin, the for-\\nmer is invariably expressed by the pluperfect e. g. quum\\ndomum intrasset, quum in forum venisset, animadvertit\\nquum amicum conspexisset, dixit, c, when he had entered\\nthe house, he perceived. We are less accurate in saying\\nwhen I entered the house, I perceived, or I entered the\\nhouse, and perceived. But this cannot be done in Latin,\\nand the pluperfect is used wherever the relation of the actions\\nrequires it.\\nLysander quum per speculatores comperisset, vidgum Athe-\\nniensium in terram exisse navesque paene inanes relictas,\\ntempus rei gerendae non dimisit.\\n\u00c2\u00a306.] But in narratives the conjunction dum (while,\\nas) is generally joined with the present indicative and the\\nconjunctions postquam, ubi, ubi primum, ut, ut primum,\\nquum primum, simul ac, simul atque, all of which are\\nequivalent to the English as soon as, are generally joined\\nwith the historical perfect, and not with the pluperfect, as\\nmight be expected from the succession of the actions indi-\\ncated by these conjunctions.\\nDum ea Romani parant consult antque, jam Saguntum sum-\\nma vi oppugnabatur.\\nUnus ex captivis domum abiit, quod fallaci reditu in castra\\njurejurando se exsolvisset Quod ubi innotuit relatumque\\nad senatum est, omnes censuerunt comprehendendum et\\ncustodibus publice datis deducendum ad Hannibalem esse.\\n509.] 12. In the use of the two futures the Latin lan-\\nguage is likewise more accurate than the English. For when\\na future action is spoken of, either in the future or in the\\nimperative (or in the subjunctive used imperatively), and\\nanother is joined with it, which has not yet come to* pass,\\nthe latter also is put in the future if the actions are conceived\\nas continuing together, and in the future perfect, if the one\\nmust be completed before the other can begin. This is per-\\nfectly in accordance with the ideas expressed by these tenses;\\nbut it must be specially mentioned, because in English we\\noften use the present instead of the future, especially in the\\ncase of the verbs I can and I will; e. g. faciam si po-\\ntero, I shall do it, if I can facito hoc, ubi voles, do it when", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0235.jp2"}, "236": {"fulltext": "218 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nyou will because owing to the awkwardness of the future\\nperfect, we frequently supply its place either by the simple\\nfuture or by the present e. g. ut sementem feceris, ita metes,\\nas you sow, so will you reap.\\nAdolescentes quum relaxare animos et dare se jucunditati\\nvolent, caveant intemperantiam, meminerint verecundiae.\\nDe Carthagine vereri non ante desinam, quam illam excisam\\nesse cognovero.\\n512.] 13. The tenses of the indicative may be con-\\nnected in any way which the intention of the speaker may\\nrequire e. g. I am writing now, but this time yesterday I\\ntook a walk; \\\\know the person whom you will see to-\\nmorrow. But in dependent clauses, that is, in the sub-\\njunctive, similar tenses alone can be connected with one\\nanother, that is, the tenses of the present (present and\\nperfect) and the tenses of the past (imperfect and pluperfect).\\nIn the rules respecting the succession of tenses, or the depend-\\nence of sentences upon one another, everything depends\\nupon time, for the present time is suited only to the present,\\nand the past only to the past; the relation of an action\\ndepending only upon itself, is never doubtful. Hence we\\nhave only to remember, that the perfect naturally, and in\\nthe subjunctive always, expresses present time, and that\\nconsequently\\nThe Present and Perfect are followed by a Present and\\nPerfect, and\\nThe Imperfect and Pluperfect by an Imperfect and Plu-\\nperfect\\nE. g. scio quid agas and scio quid egeris; audivi quid agas\\nand audivi quid egeris but sciebam quid ageres, and sciebam\\nquid egisses audiveram quid ageres, and audiveram quid\\negisses.\\n513.] This simple rule respecting the succession of\\ntenses becomes somewhat difficult through the double sig-\\nnification of the perfect indicative. In the above rule it was\\ntreated only as the present of a completed action (in which\\nsense it is equivalent to the English perfect) but as it is at\\nthe same time an aorist of the past (see 500.), it is also\\nconnected with the tenses of past time, viz. with the im-\\nperfect and pluperfect. The above rule, therefore, must be\\ncompleted by the following addition", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0236.jp2"}, "237": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE TENSES. 219\\nThe historical perfect is followed by the imperfect and\\npluperfect.\\nE. g. Audivi quid ageres and audivi quid egisses. The\\ntwo meanings of the perfect and their influence upon the\\ntense of the dependent verb may be seen in the following\\nexamples\\nVerves Siciliam per triennium ita vexavit ac perdidit, ut ea\\nrestitui in antiquum statum nullo modo possit, says Cicero\\nwith reference to the actual state of Sicily.\\nConon quum patriam obsideri audisset, non quaesivit, ubi\\nipse tuto viveret, sed unde praesidio posset esse civibus\\nsuis, says Nepos in speaking of past events.\\n516.] The futures are similar to the tenses of the\\npresent, for only that which is past stands apart and by itself.\\nHence, a future is followed by a present or a perfect, e. g.\\nmox intelligam, quantum me ames or amaveris, but not\\nquantum me amares or amasses. The same is the case with\\nthe future perfect si cognovero, quemadmodum te geras or\\nte gesseris. But as the four subjunctives of the conjugatio\\nperiphrastica (formed by the future participle and esse) are\\nregarded as subjunctives of the futures, these paraphrased\\ntenses may be dependent upon preterites, and a mutual\\ndependence exists between the presents and futures, but\\nonly a partial one between the preterites and futures, since\\nthe futures only may depend upon preterites, but not vice\\nversa e. g ignorabam quid dicturus esset, but not discam\\nquid heri facer es for discam quid heri feceris.\\nThe complete rule respecting the succession of tenses,\\ntherefore, is this the tenses of the present and future, i. e.\\nthe present, perfect (in its proper sense), and the two futures\\nare followed by the tenses of the present, i. e. by the present\\nand the perfect subjunctive and the tenses of the past, i. e.\\nthe imperfect, pluperfect, and the historical perfect, are fol-\\nlowed by the tenses of the past, i. e. by the imperfect and\\npluperfect subjunctive.\\nlS", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0237.jp2"}, "238": {"fulltext": "220 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nIV. OF THE MOODS.\\nCHAP. LXXYII.\\nINDICATIVE MOOD.\\n517.] 1. The indicative is used in every proposition the\\nsubstance of which is expressed absolutely and as a fact,\\ne. g. I go, thou wrotest, he believed.\\nHence the indicative is employed even in the expression\\nof conditions and suppositions with the particles si, nisi, etsi\\nand etiamsi, if an event is supposed actually to take place, or\\n(with nisi) not to take place.\\nMors aut plane negligenda est, si omnino extinguit animum,\\naut etiam optanda, si aliquo eum deducit, ubi sit futurus\\naeternus.\\nSifeceris id, quod ostendis, magnam habebo gratiam, si non\\nfeceris, ignoscam.\\nAdhuc certe, nisi ego insanio, stulte omnia et ineaute fiunt.\\nIsta Veritas, etiamsi jucunda non est, mihi tamen grata est.\\n518.] Notel. The following peculiarities deserve to be noticed as\\ndiffering from the English.\\nThe verbs oportet, necesse est, debeo, convenit, possum, licet, and par, fas,\\naequum, justum, consentaneum est, or aequius, melius, utilius, optabilius est,\\nare put in the indicative of a preterite (imperf., pluperf., and the his-\\ntorical perfect), where we should expect the imperfect or pluperfect\\nsubjunctive. The imperfect indicative in this case expresses things which\\nare not, but the time for which is not yet passed and the perfect and\\npluperfect indicative things which have not been, but the time for which\\nis passed e. g. Ad mortem te ducijam pridem oportebat, i. e. thy execution\\nwas necessary and is still so hence it ought to take place.\\n521.] Note 2. The Latins commonly use the indicative after many\\ngeneral and relative expressions, some/\u00c2\u00abc^ being implied. This is the\\ncase after pronouns and relative adverbs which are either doubled or\\nhave the suffix cunque quisquis, quicunque, utut, utcunque, and others\\ne. g. Utcunque sese res habet, tua est culpa, however this may be, the\\nfault is thine quicunque is est, whoever he may be.\\n522.] Note 3. In the same way sentences connected by sive sive\\ncommonly have the verb in the indicative e. g. sive tacebis, sive loquere\\nmihi perinde est sive verum est, sive falsum, mihi quidem ita renuntiatum\\nest", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0238.jp2"}, "239": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 221\\nCHAP. LXXVIH.\\nSUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.\\n523.] 1. The subjunctive is used in general, when a pro-\\nposition is stated, not as a fact, but merely as a conception\\nof the mind.\\nNote. The subjunctive is only a particular form which is given to a\\nproposition its substance does not come into consideration. Hence u I\\nbelieve, I suspect, are expressed by the indicative, although these words\\nindicate only certain conceptions, but my belief and suspicion are stated as\\nreal acts. When, on the other hand, I say I should believe, I should\\nthink, the acts of believing and thinking are represented as mere con-\\nceptions, which perhaps do not exist at all, or even cannot exist. Hence\\nthe Latins always use the subjunctive when a sentence is to express an\\nintention either that something is to be effected or prevented, for the\\nactions here exist only as conceptions e. g. pecuniam homini do, ut me\\ndefendat, ne me accuset. The English language, which has no subjunctive,\\navails itself of a variety of auxiliary verbs to express the nature of the\\nsubjunctive, as may, might, could, should, would.\\n524.] 2. We must here first notice the difference be-\\ntween the four tenses of the subjunctive in hypothetical or\\nconditional sentences, both in that part of the sentence\\ncontaining the condition (protasis, beginning with the con-\\njunctions si, nisi, etsi, etiamsi, tdmetsi), and in the one con-\\ntaining the inference or conclusion (apodosis). The present\\nand perfect subjunctive are used when a condition is to be\\nexpressed together with the suggestion that it does exist or\\nmay exist but the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive are\\nused when a condition is expressed together with the sug-\\ngestion that it did not or could not exist and the imperfect\\nin this case implies present time as in English e. g. si velit,\\nif he wishes, or should wish/ implying that he either\\nactually wishes or at least may wish in the consequent\\nmember of the proposition (the apodosis), the present or per-\\nfect subjunctive or indicative may stand but si vellet, if he\\nwished, implies that he does not or cannot wish, and here\\nthe apodosis requires the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive.\\nThe subjunctive without si may have the same meaning, e. g.\\nfacer em, I should do, implying that I do not or cannot do;\\nvellem, I should wish, implying that I might have a wish,\\nbut that in fact I do not wish, seeing that it would be of no\\nL 3", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0239.jp2"}, "240": {"fulltext": "222 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\navail. Velim and cupiam thus do not much differ from volo\\nand cupio.\\nThe imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive therefore are\\nnecessary in hypothetical sentences but the present and\\nperfect subj unctive differ only slightly from the indicative,\\nand their use cannot be fixed by grammatical rules. The\\nindicative gives to a sentence the form of reality whereas\\nthe subjunctive represents it as a mere conception, which\\nhowever may at the same time be a reality e. g. etiamsi\\nte non laudo or laudabo, tamen, c, even if I do not or\\nshall not praise thee, the reality is admitted etiamsi te\\nnon laudem or laudaverim, if (perhaps) I should not praise\\nthee, or should not have praised thee, the possibility is\\nconceived. The use of the present and perfect subjunctive\\nin these cases arises in some measure from the circumstance\\nthat an indefinite person is addressed in Latin by the second\\nperson singular, but only in the subjunctive hence the sub-\\njunctive is used in such cases even where the indicative\\nwould be necessary, if a definite person were addressed. It\\nmust further be observed that these two subjunctives supply\\nthe place of the subjunctive of the two futures. Comp. 496.\\nThe following may serve as examples of both cases\\nSi Neptunus, quod Theseo promiserat, nonfecisset, Theseus\\nfilio Hippolyto non esset orbatus.\\nDies deficiat, si velim numerare, quibus bonis male evenerit,\\nnee minus si commemorem, quibus improbis optime.\\nSi gladium quis apud te sana mente deposuerit, repetat in-\\nsaniens reddere peccatum sit, officium non reddere.\\nMemoria minuitur 9 nisi earn exerceas, aut si sis natura tar-\\ndior.\\nNote. The above rule respecting the difference of the subjunctives, is\\nobserved also in hypothetical sentences, if the leading verb is in the pre-\\nsent but if an historical tense precedes, the rule respecting the succession\\nof tenses 512. again comes into operation, and the distinction between\\nthings possible and not possible is not expressed.\\n527.] 3. Hence the present subjunctive is used also in\\nindependent propositions to soften an assertion or statement,\\nand without any essential difference from the present indica-\\ntive or the future. We generally express the same by I\\nmay or I might (the subjunctive as a potential mood)\\ne. g. Forsitan quaeratis nemo istud tibi concedat quis du-\\nbitet f velim (nolim, malim) sic existimes.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0240.jp2"}, "241": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 223\\nThe perfect subjunctive may likewise be used in the sense\\nof a softened perfect indicative e. g.forsitan temere fecerim,\\nI may perhaps have acted inconsiderately but the perfect\\nsubjunctive, when used independently, generally has the\\nmeaning of a softened future, and in so far is equivalent to\\nthe present subjunctive.\\nQuid videatur ei magnum in rebus humanis, cut aeternitas\\nomnis totiusque mundi nota sit magnitudo\\nHoc sine ulla dubitatione confirmaverim, eloquentiam rem\\nesse omnium difficillimam.\\nTu vero Platonem nee nimis valde unquam, nee nimis saepe\\nlaudaveris.\\nNil ego contulerim jucundo sanus amico. j\\n529.] 4. The subjunctive is further used in indepen-\\ndent sentences to express a wish or desire (optative). In the\\nsecond and third persons of the present (to some extent also\\nof the perfect) it supplies the place of the imperative e. g.\\ndicas equivalent to die, loquare to loquere, especially when\\nthe person is indefinite further dicat, faciat, loquatur. The\\npresent subjunctive is used in the first person to express an\\nassurance e. g. moriar, inteream, peream and in the plural\\na request, which may be addressed to ourselves as well as\\nothers e. g. eamus, moriamur, nunc revertamur ad proposi-\\ntion let us go let us die let us return The imperfect\\nand pluperfect are used to express wishes belonging to the\\npast time, when a thing ought to have been or to have been\\ndone e. g. diceret, dixisset, he should have said.\\nConnected with this optative is the use of the subjunctive\\n(called in this case concessivus), to express a concession or i\\nadmission, both with and without the conjunctions ut and\\nlicet e. g. dicat, he may say diceret, he might say dixerit,\\nhe may have said and so on through all the tenses.\\nThe negative with these subjunctives (optative and con-\\ncessive) is usually not non but ne e. g. ne dicas, ne dicat,\\nne dixeris (this negative way is the most common case of\\nthe perfect subjunct. being used in the sense of the present);\\nfurther, ne vivam, ne desperemus, ne fuerit, equivalent to\\nlicet 7ion fuerit.\\nMeminenmus, etiam adversus infimos justitiam esse servan-\\ndam.\\nNihil incommodo valetudinis tuae feceris.\\nEmas, non quod opus est, sed quod necesse est.\\nL 4", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0241.jp2"}, "242": {"fulltext": "224 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nBonis impii ne placare audeant deos Flatonem audiant,\\nqui vetat dubitare, qua sit mente futurus deus, cum vir\\nnemo bonus ab improbo se donari velit.\\nNaturam expellas Jurca, tamen usque recurret\\nJVe sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est\\n530.] 5. Lastly, the subjunctive is used, in all its tenses,\\nin independent sentences to express a doubtful question con-\\ntaining a negative sense (conjunctivus dubitativus) e. g. quo\\nearn whither shall I go quo irem whither should I go\\nquo eas whither wilt thou go quo ires whither would st\\nthou go quo iverim whither was I to have gone quo ivis-\\nsent f whither should I have gone The answer implied in\\nall these cases is nowhere; for in questions to which we\\nexpect an affirmative answer, the indicative is used.\\nCur non confitear, quod necesse est\\nCum tempestate pugnem pericuhse potius, quam illi obtem-\\nperem et paream\\nValerius quotidie cantabat erat enim scenicus quidfaceret\\naliud\\n531.] 6. Dependent sentences in which an intention or\\npurpose or a direction towards the future is expressed, take\\nthe subjunctive. The conjunctions ut, ne, quo, quln, quo-\\nminus serve to connect such sentences with others, and con-\\nsequently govern the subjunctive, the tenses of which must\\nbe chosen as required by the tense of the verb in the leading\\nclause. (See above, 512, foil.)\\na) Ut or uti (that or in order that) refers either to some-\\nthing future which is the intention, object, result or effect of\\nanother action (which is often expressed in English by in\\norder to, or simply to with the infinitive), or when used\\nafter the words sic, ita, tarn, talis, tantus, ejusmodi, c, it\\nexpresses a quality or the nature of a thing in the form of a\\nresult. The English conjunction that, which introduces\\nclauses supplying the place either of a nominative or accu-\\nsative, cannot be rendered by ut, as it is a consolation for\\nthe subjects that the king is a just man, equivalent to the\\nking s justice is a consolation, c. or I know that the king\\nis just, equivalent to I know the king s justice.\\nEsse oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut cdas.\\nPy lades Ores tern se esse dixit, ut pro illo necaretur.\\nNemo tarn malus est, ut videri velit\\nSol efficit ut omnia jftoreant", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0242.jp2"}, "243": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 225\\n532.] b) Ne (in order that not, or, lest) is used only to\\nexpress a negative intention or intended effect e. g. cur a ne\\ndenuo in morbum incidas, or haec vitae ratio effecit, ne denuo\\nin morbum inciderem. Ut non is used, on the other hand,\\nwhen an effect is to be expressed without an intention, that\\nis, a simple result or consequence, and when a quality is to\\nbe determined, in which case the adverbs ita, sic, tarn are\\neither expressed or understood e. g. turn forte aegrotabam,\\nut ad nuptias tuas venire non possem i. e. in consequence\\nof my illness, but no intention is expressed. Ut non is\\nfurther used when the negation does not refer to the whole\\nclause, but only to a part of it or to a particular word\\ne. g. dedi tibi pecuniam, ut emeres non vinum, sed panem.\\nNemo prudens punit, ut ait Plato, quia peccatum est, sed ne\\npeccetur.\\nNihil agitis, inquit Arria, potestis enim efficere, ut male mo-\\nriar ne moriar, non potestis,\\n533.] It is a peculiarity of the Latin language to treat\\nthe verbs metuo, timeo, vereor, as implying an intention.\\nThey are therefore followed by ne, when anything is to be\\nprevented, or when it is wished that something should not\\nhappen e. g. metuo, ne frustra laborem susceperis and\\nby ut, when it is wished that something should take place\\ne. g. vereor, ut mature venias. These same verbs are fol-\\nlowed by the infinitive when they express only a state of\\nmind, without implying any wish either the one way or the\\nother e. g. metuo manus admovere, vereor dicere but vereor\\nut apte dicam.\\nVereor, ne, dum minuere velim laborem, augeam.\\nAdulator es, si quern laudant, vereri se dicunt, ut illius facta\\nverbis consequi possint,\\n535.] Note. Neve (or neu, composed of ne and ve) signifies or in\\norder that not, or and in order that not, and is therefore not to be\\nconfounded with neque (or wee). It stands to ne in the same relation\\nthat neque does to non.\\n536.] c) Quo is properly the ablative of the relative\\npronoun, and stands for ut eo 567.), in order that, or\\nthat by this means. But it is commonly joined only with\\ncomparatives. Non quo answers to the English, not that,\\nor not as if (instead of which, however, we may also say\\nnon quod), and non quin to not as if not. The apodosis\\nl 5", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0243.jp2"}, "244": {"fulltext": "226 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nfollowing after such a sentence begins with sed quod or sed\\nquia and the indicative or with ut and the subjunctive.\\nAger non semel aratur, sed novatur et iteratur, quo meliores\\nfetus possit et grandiores edere.\\nLegem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teneatur.\\nAd te litter as dedi, non quo haberem magnopere, quod scri-\\nberem, sed ut loquerer tecum absens.\\n538.] d) Quin is used after negative sentences and\\ndoubtful questions with quis and qybid, which differ only in\\nform from affirmative propositions with nemo and nihil,\\nfirst, for qui non, quae non, quod non, and secondly for\\nut non that not or without when followed by a\\nparticiple). Quin, equivalent to a relative pronoun with non,\\nis used especially after the expressions nemo, nullus, nihil,\\nvix, aegre est, reperitur, invenitur the use of quin for\\nut non cannot be limited to particular expressions, but we\\nmust especially observe the phrase facere non possum quin,\\nand in the passive voice, fieri non potest quin, where the\\ndouble negative renders the affirmative meaning more em-\\nphatic.\\nNihil tarn difficile est, quin quaerendo investigari possit\\nNunquam tarn male est Siculis, quin aliquid facete et com-\\nmode dicant\\nFacere non potui, quin tibi et senteniiam et voluntatem de-\\nclararem meam,\\n540.] From this we must distinguish the use of quin\\nafter non dubito, non est dubium, non ambigo (I doubt not),\\nand many other expressions containing a negation as non\\nabest; nihil, paulum, non multum abest non, vix, aegre abs-\\ntineo tenere me, or temperari mihi non possum non impe-\\ndio, non recuso, nihil praetermitto, and the like. For in these\\ncases the negative contained in quin is superfluous, and is\\nonly a sort of continuation of the preceding non hence it is\\ngenerally not expressed in English, quin being rendered by\\nthat, or by to with an infinitive. E. g. non dubito quin\\ndomi sit, I have no doubt, (that) he is at home nulla mora\\nfuit, quin decernerent bellum, they did not hesitate to decree\\nwar. Hence, as quin in this case is only a form of expres-\\nsion, non is superadded, if the dependent clause is to have\\na really negative meaning. Thus we find not unfrequently,\\nat least, non dubito quin non, which is easily explained by\\ntranslating non dubito quin by I believe, e. g. non dubito", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0244.jp2"}, "245": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 227\\nquin qffensionem negligentiae vitare atque effugere non pos-\\nsim, I believe that I cannot escape the charge of negligence.\\nDux Me Graeciae nusquam optat, ut Ajacis similes habeat\\ndecern, sed ut Nestoris quod si acciderit, non dubitat quin\\nbrevi Troja sit peritura,\\nNum dubitas quin specimen naturae capi deceat ex optima\\nquaque natura Cic. Tusc. i. 14.\\nQuis igitur dubitet, quin in virtute divitiae sint 9\\nEgo nihil praetermisi, quantum facere potui, quin Pompejum\\na Caesaris conjunctione avocarem..\\nInfesta contio vix inhiberi potuit, quin protinus suo more\\nsaxa in Polemonem jaceret.\\nNote. When dubito and non dubito signify I scruple or hesitate,\\nand the clause following contains the same subject, they are generally\\nfollowed by the infinitive e. g. non dubito respondere.\\nQuin, in accordance with its formation from qui (the ablat. of qui, quis)\\nand non, also signifies why not? and in this sense it is joined with the\\nindicative or imperative, as quin dicis, or quin die statim, well say it at once.\\n543.] e) Quominus (for ut eo minus, in order that not)\\nis used only after verbs expressing a hindrance, where also\\nne, and if a negative precedes, quin may be used. The\\nprincipal verbs of this kind are deterrere, impedire, inter-\\ncedes, obsistere, obstare, officere, pxphibere, recusare, repug-\\nnare but there are several other expressions which convey\\nthe same meaning, e. g. stat or Jit per me, I am the cause\\nnon pugno, nihil moror, non contineo me, c. \\\\J^\\nCimon nunquam in hortis custodem imposuit, ne quis im-\\npediretur, quominus ejus rebus, quibus quisque vellet,\\nfrueretur.\\nParmenio, quum audisset, venenum a Philippo medico regi\\nparari, deterrere eum voluit epistola scripta, quominus\\nmedicamentum biberet, quod medicus dare constitueret\\n545.] 7. The subjunctive is used in clauses which are\\nintroduced into others, after relative pronouns and con-\\njunctionSj when those propositions express the thoughts or\\nwords of another person. (In many cases they are the\\nthoughts or words of the speaker himself, but he then speaks\\nof himself as of a third person.) To make this general rule\\nmore clear, we shall explain the various cases in which\\nsuch clauses are inserted.\\na) Clauses inserted in the construction of the accusative\\nwith the infinitive, when they are to express the thoughts\\nor words of the person spoken of, or when they form an\\nL 6", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0245.jp2"}, "246": {"fulltext": "228 LATEST GRAMMAR.\\nessential part of the statement implied in the accusat. with\\nthe infinitive.\\nSocrates dicere solebat, omnes in eo, quod scirent, satis esse\\neloquentes.\\nMos est Athenis laudari in contione eos, qui sint in proeliis\\ninterfecti.\\nQuid potest esse tarn apertum, tamque perspicuum, quum\\ncoelum suspeximus, coelestiaque contemplati sumus, quam\\nesse aliquod numen praestantissimae mentis, quo haec\\nregantur.\\n547.] b) Clauses introduced into a proposition which\\nis expressed by the subjunctive, are likewise in the sub-\\njunctive, when they are to be considered as an essential part\\nof the leading proposition, being included in the purpose,\\nrequest, precept or command of a person, or (with si) m the\\nsupposed circumstances, e. g. Rex imperavit, ut, quae bello\\nopus essent, pararentur.\\nEo simus animo, ut nihil in malis ducamus, quod sit vel a\\ndeo immortcdi, vel a natura constitutum.\\nMemoria erat tanta (Hortensius) quantam in nullo cogno-\\nvisse me arbitror, ut, quae secum commentatus esset, ea\\nsine scripto verbis eisdem redderet, quibus cogitavisset\\n549.] c) Lastly, when a proposition containing the\\nstatement of a fact, and therefore expressed by the indicative,\\nhas another dependent upon it or added to it (by a con-\\njunction or a relative pronoun), the dependent clause is\\nexpressed by the subjunctive, provided the substance of it\\nis alleged as the sentiment or the words of the person spoken\\nof, and not of the speaker himself. Thus the proposition\\nNoctu ambulabat in publico Themistocles, quod somnum\\ncaper e non posset suggests, that Themistocles himself gave\\nthis reason for his walking at night. But I, the writer of\\nthe proposition, may express the reason as my own remark,\\nand in this case the indicative poterat is required, as well as\\nambulabat\\nSocrates accusatus est, quod corrumperet juventutem et\\nnovas superstitiones induceret.\\nAristides nonne ob earn causam expulsus est patria, quod\\npraeter modum Justus esset?\\nNote 1. The clause beginning with quod in the second of these ex-\\namples contains the reasons alleged by the accusers of Socrates and the", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0246.jp2"}, "247": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 229\\nsubjunctive in the last example indicates that the reason there stated was\\nalleged by the Athenians themselves, according to the well-known story,\\nand it remains uncertain whether Aristides was really so just but this\\nuncertainty would not exist if the indicative had been used.\\n550.] Note 2. When a clause thus appended or inserted contains the\\nsentiment of the subject of the leading sentence, or his own words, all\\nreferences to him are expressed by the reflective pronoun sui, sibi, se, and\\nby the possessive suus e. g. necessitate coactus domino navis qui sit aperit,\\nmulta pollicens, si se conservasset f rater in somnis me rogavit ut, qnoniam\\nsihi vivo non subvenissem, mortem suam ne inultam esse paterer.\\n552. 8. All sentences which contain an indirect ques-\\ntion, that is, which state the subject of a direct question in a\\nmanner which makes them dependent upon some other verb,\\nhave the verb in the subjunctive mood. An indirect ques-\\ntion, not to mention the verb to ask itself, generally\\ndepends upon verbs and expressions which usually require\\nthe accusative with the infinitive.\\nAll the words which are used in direct questions are also\\nused in introducing indirect or dependent questions, viz.\\nquis, quid; qui, quae, quod quot, qualis, quantus, quam,\\nubi, unde, quare, cur, uter, quo (whither?), quomodo, utrum,\\nan, ne (the suffix), num.\\nSaepe ne utile quidem est scire, quidfuturum sit\\nQualis sit animus, ipse animus nescit\\nIncertum est, quo te loco mors expectet.\\nTarquinius Superbus Prisci Tarqainii regis filius neposne\\nfuerit, parum liquet\\n554.] Note. With regard to disjunctive or double questions, both\\ndirect and indirect, expressed by whether or, it must be observed\\nthat the English or is never translated by aid or vel, but by an or by\\nthe suffix ne. The first question is introduced by utrum, or likewise\\nby ne, or has no interrogative particle at all. Hence there are four forms\\nof such double questions\\n1. utrum {utrumne) an\\n2. an (mine)\\n3. the suffix ne an\\n4. the suffix ne.\\nThe English or not in the second part, which is u^ed without a\\nverb, unless the one preceding be understood, is expressed in Latin by\\nannon or necne, the latter occurring only in indirect questions.\\n5.55.] 9. Eelative pronouns and relative adverbs re-\\nquire the subjunctive (besides the cases already mentioned\\nin 549.) when the connection of the propositions is based\\nupon a conception, that is, when the clause introduced by", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0247.jp2"}, "248": {"fulltext": "230 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nthe relative does not merely contain some additional feature,\\nbut is connected with the preceding clause in such a manner\\nas to express either a consequence, an inherent quality, or a\\ncause, a motive and purpose.\\nE. g. Miles, quern metus mortis non perturbaret, a soldier whom fear of\\ndeath could not disturb. Here the clause introduced by the relative\\npronoun contains an inherent quality of the miles, which may at the same\\ntime be expressed as a consequence of such a character, that death\\ncould not frighten him. Let us take another case O miserum senem, qui\\nmortem contemnendam esse in tarn longa aetate non viderit here the clause\\nqui viderit does not contain a mere additional characteristic or quality,\\nbut rather the cause, why I call the old man wretched.\\nSubjunctives of this kind are expressed in English in\\ndifferent ways, as a soldier not to be disturbed by fear of\\ndeath, O wretched old man, not to have learnt, c. The\\nparticular cases in which a relative introduces clauses with\\nthe subjunctive, are:\\n556.~] a) When one of the demonstratives is, hie, Me,\\ntalis, tantus, ejusmodi, hujusmodi, or tarn with an adjective\\nprecedes, and is modified or qualified by a sentence which\\nfollows. Here the relative pronoun may be resolved by ut,\\nso that cujus is equivalent to ut mei, tui, sui, illius, ejus cui\\nto ut mihi, tibi, ei, sibi, and. so on through all the cases of\\nthe singular and plural.\\nQui potest temper antiam laudare is, qui summum bonum in\\nvoluptate ponat\\nNon sumus ii, quibus nihil verum esse videatur, sed ii, qui\\nomnibus veris falsa quaedam adjuncta esse dicamus.\\nNulla gens tarn /era, nemo omnium tarn immanis est, cujus\\nmentem non imbuerit deorum opinio.\\n558.] The relative pronoun is sometimes used with the\\nsubjunctive, without a demonstrative preceding it, provided\\nit be understood.\\nNunc dicis, quod ad rem pertineat.\\nNonne satius est mutum esse, quam quod nemo intelligat\\ndicer e\\n560.] In like manner the subjunctive is used with\\ncomparatives after quam qui (through all its cases), for here\\ntoo the degree is defined and modified by a clause imply-\\ning an innate quality and a consequence, so that quam qui\\nis equivalent to quam ut, which in fact sometimes occurs.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0248.jp2"}, "249": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 231\\nMajor sum quam cui possit for tuna nocere, says !Niobe in\\nher madness.\\nB 561 After indefinite and general expressions (both\\naffirmative and negative) the relative with the subjunctive\\nintroduces the clause containing the circumstances which\\ncharacterize the class indefinitely referred to. Such ex-\\npressions are est, sunt, reperiuntur, inveniuntur, existunt,\\nexoriuntur (scil. homines) the general negatives nemo,\\nnullus, nihil est the negative indefinite questions quis est\\nquid est? qui, quae, quod (as interrogative adjectives),\\nquotus, quisque, quantum est? c. In all these cases a\\ndemonstrative may be understood before the relative. V\\nSunt qui censeant, una animum et corpus occidere, ani-\\nmumque in corpore extingui.\\nNihil est, quod tarn miseros facial, quam impietas et scelus.\\nQuotus enim quisque est, cui sapientia omnibus omnium di-\\nvitiis praeponenda videatur\\nQuae latebra est, in quam non intret metus mortis\\nQuid dulcius quam habere, quicum omnia audeas sic loqui\\nut tecum\\n564.] c) When the clause introduced by the relative\\ncontains the reason of what precedes, the verb is put in the\\nsubjunctive. The connection between such sentences may\\nalso be expressed by because or since/ instead of the\\nrelative\\nfortunate adolescens, qui tuae virtutis Homerum praeconem\\ninveneris\\nCaninius fuit mirifica vigilantia, qui suo toto consulatu som-\\nnum non viderit\\nQuern ardor em studii censetis fuisse in Archimede, qui, dum\\nin pulvere quaedam describit attentius, nepatriam quidem\\ncaptam esse senserit!\\n567 d) When the clause introduced by the relative\\nexpresses the intention and object of the action of the pre-\\nceding clause, the relative is followed by the subjunctive.\\nThe relative in this case is equivalent to ut\\nSunt autem multi, qui eripiunt aliis, quod aliis largiantar.\\nPopulus Romanus sibi tribunos creavit, per quos contra se-\\nnatum et consules tutus esse posset.\\nSuper tabernaculum regis, unde ab omnibus conspici posset,\\nimago solis crystallo inclusa fulgebat,", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0249.jp2"}, "250": {"fulltext": "232 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n568.] e) After the adjectives dignus, indignus, aptus\\nand idoneus, the relatives are used with the subjunctive, as\\ndignus est, indignus est, qui laudetur.\\nVoluptas non est digna, ad quam sapiens respiciah\\n569.] f) Lastly we must here notice the circumstance\\nthat in a narrative the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive\\nare sometimes used after relative pronouns and adverbs, when\\nactions of repeated occurrence are spoken of. The indicative\\nhowever occurs in these cases, even more frequently than\\nthe subjunctive.\\nNemo Pyrrhum, qua tulisset impetum, sustinere valuit.\\n571.] 10. It has already been remarked that all con-\\njunctions, and more especially those which indicate a cause,\\nrequire the subjunctive, when they introduce sentences con-\\ntaining the thoughts or words of another person. It there-\\nfore now remains to speak of those conjunctions which\\nrequire the subjunctive on account of their peculiar signifi-\\ncation.\\nThe particles expressing a wish, utinam, ut, and O si, go-\\nvern the subjunctive, because the wish exists only as a\\nconception of the mind but there is this difference in regard\\nto the tenses, that the present and perfect are used of wishes\\nwhich are conceived as possible, and the imperfect and plu-\\nperfect of those which are to be described as not in accord-\\nance with reality. The English, Oh, would that not\\nshould properly be expressed in Latin only by utinam ne^\\nbut utinam non is frequently used instead of it.^r\\n572.] Quasi (aeque, perinde, non secus), ac si, tarn-\\nquam si, velut si, or tamquam and velut alone, all of which\\nsignify as if, as though, always introduce a clause\\nwhich contains only a conception of the mind, and are con-\\nsequently used with the subjunctive. The tense depends\\nupon that of the leading verb Sic cogitandum est, tamquam\\naliquis in pectus intimum inspicere possit.\\nDummodo (if only, if but), for which dum or modo is\\nalso used alone, governs the subjunctive because it expresses\\nan intention or a purpose conceived by the mind; when\\njoined with a negative, it becomes dummodo ne, dum ne, modo\\nne e. g. multi omnia recta et honesta negligunt, dummodo\\npotentiam consequantur.\\n573.] Ut, in the sense of even if, or although,\\nexpresses a supposition merely as a conception, and ac-", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0250.jp2"}, "251": {"fulltext": "SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 233\\ncordingly governs the subjunctive. It takes the negative\\nnon the same however may be expressed by ne with the\\nconcessive subjunctive. So also nedum or nedum ut, not to\\nmention that.\\nUt desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas.\\nOptimis temporibus elarissimi atque amplissimi viri vim\\ntribuniciam sustinere non potuerunt nedum his temporibus\\nsine judiciorum remediis salvi esse possimus.\\n574.] Quamvis, as distinct from quamquam, is often\\nused in the sense of quantumvis and quamlibet, i. e. how-\\never much, with the subjunctive. Licet (although), properly\\na verb which has become a conjunction, has the same mean-\\ning and construction as quamvis.\\nLicet strenuum metum putes esse, velocior tamen spes est\\n575 The particles of time dum, donee and quoad have\\nthe indicative, when they are used in the sense of quamdiu\\nor as long as in the sense of until, they may have\\neither mood the indicative, if a thing is expressed as a fact,\\nand the subjunctive, if it is merely conceived as a thing which\\nmay possibly be realised, or if at the same time a purpose is\\nimplied in the clause.\\nLacedaemoniorum gens fortis fuit, dum Lycurgi leges vi-\\ngebant.\\nIratis aut subtrahendi sunt ii, in quos impetum conantur\\nfacere, dum se ipsi colligant, aut rogandi orandique sunt,\\nut, si qicdki habent ulciscendi vim, differant in tempus\\naliud, dum defer v esc at ira. s,\\n576.] Antequam and priusquam in narratives are\\ngenerally used with the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive,\\nif there is some connection between the preceding and the\\nsubsequent action (but if the simple priority of one action to\\nanother is expressed, the indicative is used) e. g. discede\\nantequam rex veniat discessit antequam rex veniret.\\n577.] 1 1 With regard to quum, there is this difference,\\nthat quum cansale governs the subjunctive, and quum tern-\\nporale by itself requires the indicative, for quum is properly a\\nrelative adverb of time, corresponding to the demonstrative\\nadverb turn, as in turn quitrru, then when. If therefore\\nnothing further is to be expressed, it is j cined with the in-\\ndicative. But when quum expresses the relation of cause", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0251.jp2"}, "252": {"fulltext": "234 LATEST GRAMMAR.\\nand effect, it governs the subjunctive, e. g. quum sciam,\\nquum scirem, quum intellexerim, quum intellexissem, i. e. as\\nI know, as I knew, as I have learnt, as I had learnt I will\\ndo this or that. When it has the meaning of though or\\nalthough, it is likewise joined only with the subjunctive,\\ne. g. Phocion fuit perpetuo pauper, quum ditissimus esse\\nposset. V\\n578.] In a narrative however quum temporale is joined\\nwith the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive, because in a\\ncontinuous narrative, a preceding event is always conceived\\nand represented as the cause of a subsequent one e. g.\\nCaesar, quum Pompejum apud Pharsalum vicisset, in Asiam\\ntrajecit here we perceive a combination of time and cause,\\nwhich is expressed by the subjunctive. This is always the\\ncase in historical narratives, although if we consider only\\nthe relation of time or priority, we might believe the in-\\ndicative also to be correct. Examples are extremely nu-\\nmerous. See 505.\\n579 But when quum is a pure particle of time, that\\nis, when it does not occur in a narrative, and when no rela-\\ntion of cause and effect is to be expressed, it may be joined\\nwith all the tenses of the indicative, even with the imperfect\\nand pluperfect, in the sense of eo tempore quum, or turn\\nquum, which expressions, in fact, often occur.\\nQui non defendit injuriam, neque propulsat a suis, quum\\npotest, injuste facit.\\nSed da operam, ut valeas, et, si valebis, quum recte navigari\\npoterit, turn naviges.\\nVerres eonfecto itinere, quum ad aliquod oppidum verier at\\n(an action often repeated), eadem lectica usque in cubicu-\\nlum deferebatur.\\n580.] 12. The following must be observed as pecu-\\nliarities in the use of quum temporale: 1. Quum is joined\\nwith the perfect or imperfect indicative to express simul-\\ntaneous occurrences which are indicated in English by\\nwhile. This simultaneousness is marked more empha-\\ntically by adding interea or interim. The perfect in this\\ncase is used in historical narratives, and the imperfect in\\ndescriptions. \\\\2. Quum is joined with all tenses of the indi-\\ncative, and more especially with the present to express the\\ndecided beginning of an action, in which case it does not\\nintroduce a protasis, but rather an apodosis. It is commonly", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0252.jp2"}, "253": {"fulltext": "IMPERATIVE MOOD. 235\\npreceded by adverbs, as jam, nondum, vix, aegre, or quum\\nitself is joined with repente or subito.\\nCatulus, quum ex vobis quaereret, si in uno Cn. Pompejo\\nomnia poneretis, si quid eo factum esset, in quo spem essetis\\nhabituri: cepit magnum suae virtutis fructum ac dignitatis,\\nquum omnesprope una voce, in eo ipso vos spem habituros\\nesse, dixistis.\\nCaedebatur virgis in medio foro Messanae civis Romanics,\\njudices, quum interea nullus gemitus, nulla vox alia istius\\nmiseri inter dolorem crepitumque plagarum audiebatur,\\nnisi haec civis Romanus sum.\\nEvolarat jam e conspectu fere fugiens quadriremis, quum\\netiamtum ceterae naves uno in loco moliebantur.\\nJam in conspectu, sed extra teli jactum utraque acies erat,\\nquum priores Persae inconditum et trucem sustulere cla-\\nmorem.\\nJamque, qui Dareium veliebant equi, confossi hastis et dolore\\nefferati, jugum quatere et regem curru excutere coeperant,\\nquum ille, veritus ne vivus veniret in hostium potestatem,\\ndesilit, et in equum, qui ad hoc sequebatur, imponitur.\\nCHAP. LXXIX.\\nIMPERATIVE MOOD.\\n583.] 1. The imperative, both in the active and passive,\\nhas two forms the imperative present and the imperative\\nfuture. (See 151.) Both express a command, but also a\\nwish, an advice or exhortation. The difference in the mean-\\ning of the two imperatives is this\\nThe imperative present expresses that something is to be\\ndone directly or at once as lege, read morere, die or that\\na thing which exists at present is to continue to exist, as\\nvivefelix.\\nThe imperative future puts the command in connection\\nwith some other action, and expresses that something is to\\nbe done in future, when, or as soon as, something else h^s\\ntaken place. It is however not necessary that the other ac-\\ntion should be expressed in words, but in many cases it is\\nsupplied by the mind.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0253.jp2"}, "254": {"fulltext": "236 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nQuum valetudini tuae consulueris, turn consulito navigationi.\\nPrius audite paucis quod cum dixero, si placuerit, Jacitote.\\nCras petito dabitur nunc abi.\\n584.] 2. Hence the imperative future is properly used\\nin contracts, laws, and wills, inasmuch as it is stipulated in\\nthem that things are to be done after a certain time furtheV,\\nin precepts and rules of conduct, that is, to express actions\\nwhich are to be repeated as often as the occasion may occur.\\nRegio imperio duo sunto, iique consules appellantor, militiae\\nsummum jus habento, nemini parento, Mis salus populi\\nsuprema lex esto.\\nIgnoscito saepe alteri, nunquam tibi.^S\\n585.] 3. With the imperative the English not must\\nbe rendered by ne and nor by neve, but not by non or\\nneque.\\nHominem mortuum (inquit lex in duodecim tabulis) in urbe\\nne sepelito neve urito.\\n[\u00c2\u00a7586.] 4. The following forms are used instead of both\\ntenses of the imperative\\na) The future, which however takes the negative non, if\\nanything is forbidden e. g. fades, or non fades hoc.\\nb) The third person of the present subjunctive, both in an\\naffirmative and negative (ne) command, is even more fre-\\nquently used than the imperative.\\nc) The second person of the perfect subjunctive, usually\\nwith a negative (ne), as ne dixeris, nemini dixeris.\\n5. The affirmative imperative is paraphrased by cura (or\\ncurato) ut, fac tit, or fac alone with the subjunctive e. g.\\ncar a ut quam primum venias,facite ut recordemi?ii,fac animo\\nforti magnoque sis. The negative imperative is paraphrased\\nby fac ne, cave ne, or commonly by cave alone (without ne),\\nwith the present or perfect subjunctive cave putes, cave\\ndixeris but especially by noli with the infinitive noli pu-\\ntare, nolite (nolitote) existimare.\\nQuod dubitas, ne feceris.\\nMagnum fac animum habeas et spem bonam.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0254.jp2"}, "255": {"fulltext": "INFINITIVE MOOD. 237\\nCHAP. LXXX.\\nINFINITIVE MOOD.\\nX\\n588.] 1. The infinitive expresses the action or condition\\nimplied in the verb in the form of an abstract generality,\\nwithout specifying either person, number, or time it merely\\nindicates the relations of an action, that is, whether it is in\\nprogress or completed. Scribere, to write, expresses the\\naction as in progress scripsisse, to have written, as com-\\npleted. To what time the action thus described belongs, is\\ndetermined by the verb on which the infinitive depends.\\nNote. The one of these infinitives is usually called the present and the\\nother the perfect infinitive. The former name is incorrect, for it is not the\\npresent time that is expressed by scribere, since, besides volo scribere, we\\nmay say, (fieri) volebam scribere, volueram scribere, and (eras) volam scribere\\nbut the action is described only as in progress. The infinitives should\\ntherefore rather be called infinitivus rei infectae and infinitivus rei perfectae.\\nIf, however, we compare the two infinitives with the tenses of the verb,\\nwe are naturally struck by the resemblance between scribere and scribo,\\nand between scripsisse and scripsi although, with regard to the relation\\nof the action, the imperfect scribebam, and the pluperfect scripseram have\\nthe same claim as scribo and scripsi. Hence the first infinitive is also\\ncalled infinitivus praesentis et imperfecti, and the other infinitivus perfecti\\net plusquamperfecti but neither of these designations comprises the whole\\nof their signification.\\n591.] 2. In the passive voice there are also two infini-\\ntives, the one to express the progress of a state of suffering,\\nand the other the completed state of suffering. The one is\\ncalled the infinitive present, and the other the infinitive per-\\nfect the former is simple, laudari, to be praised the second\\nis formed by a combination of the participle perfect with the\\nverb esse, as laudatus esse, or in the accusative laudatum\\nesse, to have been praised the participle of course takes the\\nnumber and gender of the object to which it refers.\\n593.] 3. Besides these infinitives expressing an action\\nor a state in progress and completed, there is, both in the\\nactive and passive, an infinitive of future time (infinitivus\\nfuturi), which denotes an action or condition as continued.\\nIt is formed in the active by a combination of the participle\\nfuture active with esse, as laudaturum esse and in the pas-\\nsive by a combination of the supine in urn with iri, as lau-", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0255.jp2"}, "256": {"fulltext": "238 LATEST GRAMMAR.\\ndatum iri. The former, owing to its participle, may take\\ndifferent genders and numbers, the latter admits of no such\\nchange e. g. Reus videbatur damnatum iri homines arbi-\\ntrantur se beneficos visum iri. yj\\nNote. The future participle in urus properly expresses an intention\\nor desire and in this sense it takes the infinitives esse and fuisse, as\\nlaudaturum esse, to intend praising laudaturum fuisse, to have intended\\npraising; scio te scripturum fuisse, I know that you have had the intention\\nto write. The infinitive of an action that had once been intended (scrip-\\nturum fuisse) is further used, especially in the apodosis of hypothetical\\nsentences belonging to the past, where in direct speech the pluperfect\\nsubjunctive would be used, as etiamsi obtemperasset auspiciis, idem even-\\nturum fuisse puto. Laudandum esse cannot be used as an infinit. fut. pass.,\\nfor the participles in dus denote necessity.\\n594.] 4. Besides this a circumlocution may be em-\\nployed for the infinitive of future time, by means of futurum\\nesse or fore followed by ut with the subjunctive. Here, too,\\nthe difference between an action continued and an action\\ncompleted in future time may be expressed the former by\\nthe present and imperfect, and the latter by the perfect and\\npluperfect of the subjunctive. The choice of one of these\\nfour subjunctive tenses depends upon that of the leading\\nverb e. g. credo fore ut epistolam scribas, and credebam\\nfore ut epistolam scriberes, both expressing a continued ac-\\ntion in future time but credo fore ut epistolam scripseris,\\nand credebam fore ut epistolam scrip sisses, expressing a com-\\npleted action in future time. And so also in the passive\\ncredo fore ut epistola scribatur, and credebam fore ut epis-\\ntola scriberetur, both expressing a continued state of future\\nsuffering but in order to express a completed state in future\\ntime, we avail ourselves in the passive of the participle per-\\nfect scriptus, which was wanting in the active hence credo\\nand credebam epistolam scriptam fore. This circumlocution\\nby means of futurum esse or fore ut is necessary when the\\nverb has no supine or participle future active, which is the\\ncase with many intransitives. Hence we cannot say other-\\nwise, for example, than spero futurum esse {fore) ut sapias,\\nut te hujus rei poeniteat, ut brevi omnibus his incommodis\\nmedeare. But it is also used in many other cases, and in\\nthe passive this form occurs almost more frequently than the\\ninfinitive formed by the supine with iri.\\nVideo te velle in coelum migrare, et spero fore ut contingat\\nid nobis.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0256.jp2"}, "257": {"fulltext": "INFINITIVE MOOD. 239\\nNon eram nescius, fore ut hie noster labor in varias repre-\\nhensiones incurreret.\\nPtolemaeus mathematicus Othoni persuaserat, fore ut in im-\\nperium ascisceretur.\\n597 -5. The infinitive may be regarded as a verbal sub-\\nstantive of the neuter gender, with two cases the nomina-\\ntive and accusative differing from other substantives of the\\nsame kind in this respect that it governs the case which it\\nrequires as a real verb, and at the same time expresses the\\ncomplete or incomplete state of an action. The infinitive\\nmust be considered as the nominative, when it is the subject\\nof a sentence, that is, when anything is declared of it e. g.\\ninvidere non cadit in sapientem, where invidere is equivalent\\nto invidia virtus est vitium fug ere, i. e. fug a vitii est ars\\ndifficilis recte rempublicam regere, i. e. recta gubernatio rei-\\npublicae; ignoscere amico humanum est. The infinitive must\\nbe considered as the accusative, when it is the object of a\\ntransitive verb, such as volo, cupio, audeo, conor facere or\\ndicer e aliquid, just as we say cupio aliquam rem, nescio\\nmentiri, didici vera dicere.\\nMajus dedecus est parta amittere quam omnino non para-\\nvisse.\\nDidicisse fideliter artes emollit mores, nee sinit esseferos.\\nVincere scis, Hannibal, victoria uti nescis.\\n599.] 6. When the infinitive has its own subject joined\\nto it, it is put in the accusative.\\nNote. An exception here presents itself in the historical infinitive\\n(infinitivus historicus), to which the subject is joined in the nomina-\\ntive. The historical infinitive is a peculiar mode of using the present\\ninfinitive in a narrative instead of the imperfect indicative, when actions\\nor conditions are to be described in a lively and animated manner, as\\nPhilippus inopinantibus advenit. Quern quum adesse refugientes ex agris\\nquidam pavidi nuntzassent, trepidare Damocritus ceterique duces et erat\\nforte meridianum tempus, quo plerique graves cibo sopiti jacebant excitare\\nigitur alii alios, jubere arma capere, alios dimittere ad revocandos, qui palati\\nper agros praedabantur.\\n600.] This is the construction of the accusative with\\nthe infinitive, which like the infinitive alone is used in two\\nways, either as the subject or as the object of a proposition.\\nThe accusative with the infinitive is the subject, wherever, if\\nwe would or could use a substantive in its place, it would be\\nin the nominative. So it is especially when a substantive or", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0257.jp2"}, "258": {"fulltext": "240 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nadjective is added as a predicate by means of est, erat, fuit,\\nc, as justum, aequum, verisimile, consentaneum, apertum\\nest, necesse est and opus est, or an impersonal verb, as appa-\\nret, constat, convenit, decet, licet, oportet, or the third person\\nsingular of the passive, as intelligitur, perspicitur, and the\\nlike; e. g. Victorem parcere victis aequum est, it is fair\\nthat the conqueror should spare the conquered, i. e. the cle-\\nmency of the conqueror towards the conquered is fair.\\nHoc quidem apparet, nos ad agendum esse natos.\\nConstat profecto ad salutem civium inventas esse leges.\\nLegem hr event esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis te-\\nneaturtl\\nNote. It is therefore incorrect to say that this accusative with the\\ninfinitive is dependent on verum, constat, c. for the accusative with the\\ninfinitive is the nominative or governing case.\\n602.] 7. The accusative with the infinitive is the ob-\\nject, after verbs which have a sentence for their direct object,\\ni. e. after those which denote an action of our external or\\ninternal faculties or a declaration {verba sentiendi et decla-\\nrandi). The principal verbs of this kind are audio, video,\\nsentio, animadverto, cognosco, intelligo, percipio, disco, scio,\\ncredo, arbitror, puto, opinor, duco, statuo, memini, recordor,\\nobliviscor dico, trado, prodo, scribo, refero, nuntio, confir-\\nmo, nego, ostendo, demonstro, perhibeo, promitto, polliceor,\\nspondeo, and several others denoting feeling, knowing, think-\\ning, or saying. These and other verbs of the same kind,\\ninstead of being followed by a dependent clause with a\\nconjunction (that, quod), require the infinitive, and the sub-\\nject of the dependent clause is put in the accusative. (In\\nEnglish the two clauses are sometimes put in juxtaposition\\nwithout any sign of dependence or connection, e. g. he feels\\nthat he is unhappy, or he feels he is unhappy.)\\nSentit animus, se sua vi, non alien a, moverL\\nEgo ne utilem quidem arbitror esse nobis futurarum rerum\\nscientiam.\\nPompejos, celebrem Campaniae urbem, desedisse terrae motu\\naudivimus.\\n603 Note 1. The propositions which are in direct dependence\\nupon the above-mentioned verbs are put in the accusative with the infini-\\ntive the clauses inserted in such a proposition are, according to circum-\\nstances, either in the indicative or the subjunctive, and in the latter more\\nespecially when they are inseparably connected with the proposition", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0258.jp2"}, "259": {"fulltext": "INFINITIVE MOOD. 241\\nexpressed by the accus. with the infinitive, containing either the words or\\nsentiments of the person spoken of. (See 545.)\\n604.] The following remarks must be especially observed 1 The\\npersonal pronouns which are expressed in the other moods only in case\\nof their having the emphasis, are always expressed with the infinitive. 2.)\\nThe reflective pronoun se, as well as the possessive suus, is employed when\\nreference is made in the dependent clause to the subject of the leading\\none; and in explanatory clauses, when any thing is stated as the sen-\\ntiment of the subject. 550.) We say, e. g. Caesar se non sui commodi\\ncausa arma cepisse dicebat, but an explanatory clause cannot always take\\nthese pronouns, as Caesar, quum eum nonnulli injustitiae accusarent, or\\nCaesar, quod ejus causa a plerisque damnabatur, se non sui ccmmodi causa\\narma cepisse dicebat but when the explanatory clause contains the sen-\\ntiment of the subject, we use se and suus, e. g. Caesar, quod suum jus a\\nsenatu laesum esset, or postquam nihil sibi ac suis postulatis tributum esset,\\nse non sua sed ipsius rei publicae causa arma cepisse dicebat.\\n605.] This rule that the personal pronouns must be expressed (in\\nthe accus.) with the infinitive must be particularly attended to with re-\\ngard to the verbs to promise and to hope, since in English they are\\nusually joined with the infinit. present without any pronoun. In Latin\\nthe pronouns are not only expressed, but the infinitive which follows is\\nthat of the future, e. g. promisit se venturum, daturum esse, spero hoc me\\nassecuturum (with the omission of esse, as is very frequently the case with\\nthis infinitive and that of the perfect passive).\\n606.] Note 2. When the use of an infinitive active would bring\\ntwo accusatives together, one of the subject and the other of the object,\\nand an ambiguity would be likely to arise, it is the rule to prefer the\\npassive construction, by which the accusat. of the object becomes trie sub-\\nject, and the other is avoided or explained by the preposition ab or per\\nNe fando quidem auditum est, crocodilum aut ibim aut felem violatum esse\\nab Aegyptio. If we were to say crocodilum violasse Aegyptium, there would\\ncertainly be a great ambiguity.\\n607 8. The accusative of the subject in the construc-\\ntion of the accusative with the infinitive after the verbs\\ndenoting saying, showing, and believing (dicere, tradere, nar-\\nrare, nuntiare, prodere, ostendere, credere, existimare, and\\nsome others of the same meaning), is regarded also as an\\naccusative of the object, governed by those verbs, and hence\\nthe passive construction also is admissible, by which the ac-\\ncusative becomes the nominative This is the case especially\\nwhen the subject of those verbs is indefinite, as dicunt (they\\nor people say) me virum probum esse, or dicor vir probus\\nesse, and so through all persons and tenses diceris, dicitur\\nvir probus esse dicimur, dicimini, dicuntur viri probi esse\\nor fecisse. The same is frequently the case with the verbs\\njubere, vetare and prohibere, so that the passive of these\\nverbs are used personally, as vetamur^ prohibemur hoc fa-\\ncere, abire jussus sum, consules jubentur exercitum scribere.\\nM", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0259.jp2"}, "260": {"fulltext": "242 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nFurther, instead of the impersonal videtur (it appears) with\\nthe accusat. with the infinity it is more common to say per-\\nsonally videor, videris, videtur, videmur, videmini, videntur\\nwith the infinitive, as videor errasse, it appears that I have\\nerred videor deceptus esse, it appears that I have been de-\\nceived.\\nXanthippe, Socratis philosophi uxor, morosa admodumfuisse\\nfertur etjurgiosa.\\nRegnante Tarquinio Superbo Sybarim et Crotonem Pytha-\\ngoras venisse reperitur.\\nAthenis actor movere affectus vetabatur.\\n608.] 9. The subject cannot be expressed with the\\ninfinitive, when it is an indefinite person, for the Romans\\nhad no word to express the English one (French on), and\\nhence we say ignoscere amico humanum est, to forgive a\\nfriend is humane, or it is humane that one (or we) should\\nforgive a friend^V\\nBut even in this case the verb esse and those denoting to\\nappear, to be considered or called require the predi-\\ncate, if it be declinable, to agree with the non-expressed sub-\\nject in the accusative, e. g. ignoscere amico humanum est,\\nrecordantem benejiciorum ab eo acceptorum, it is humane\\nthat one should forgive a friend, remembering the benefit\\nreceived of him.\\nContentum suis rebus esse maximae sunt certissimaeque di-\\nvitiae.\\nLicet opera prodesse multis, beneficia petentem, commendan-\\ntem magistratibus, vigilantem pro re alterius.\\nAtticus maximum existimavit quaestum, memorem gratumque\\ncognoscL\\nMagnis in laudibus totd fere fuit Graecid victor em Olympiae\\ncitari.\\n609.] 10. The accusative with the infinitive sometimes\\nstands apparently quite independent, but is to be explained\\nby an ellipsis of credibile est f verumne est? This is the\\ncase in exclamations, and, when the interrogative particle\\n(ne) is annexed, in interrogations expressive of indignation\\ne. g. Juno in Virgil (Aen. i. 37.) exclaims, Mene incepto de-\\nsister e victam, Nee posse Italia Teucrorum avertere regem I\\nBut it must be observed that a clause with ut may also be\\nused to express a question with indignation, in which case", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0260.jp2"}, "261": {"fulltext": "INFINITIVE MOOD. 243\\nwe have to supply fieri potest e. g. victamne ut quisquam\\nvictrici patriae praeferat is it possible that any one should\\nprefer\\n610.] 11. The verbs, can, shall, hasten, adventure,\\nam accustomed, and others of the same kind, are followed in\\nLatin as in English by the mere infinitive and not by a pro-\\nposition. When they are joined with esse, haberi, judicari,\\nvideri, c, the predicate is put in the nominative, e. g. solet\\ntristis videri, aude sapiens esse, debes esse diligens.\\nBut the verbs volo, nolo, malo cupio, opto, studeo, admit\\nof a twofold construction the mere infinitive is used after\\nthem, when the subject remains the same, and when they\\nare followed by esse or any of the above-mentioned verbs,\\nthe predicate is in the nominative but the accusat. with\\nthe infinit. is used, when the subject is changed, or when\\nthe pronoun of the same person is repeated. On the one\\nhand, therefore, we say volo eruditus fieri, and on the other\\nvolo te eruditum fieri, and volo me eruditum fieri. Hence\\nit is indifferent whether I say discipulum me haberi volo, non\\ndoctorem, or discipulus haberi volo, non doctor principem\\nse esse maluit quam videri, or princeps esse maluit quam\\nvideri. (Comp. 613.)\\nVolo is esse, quern tu me esse voluisti.\\nQui eget multis, gratum se videri studeat.\\n613.] 12. There are many Latin verbs which, according\\nto our notions, seem to require a proposition for their direct\\nobject, that is, the accusative with the infinitive, but which,\\nnevertheless, are followed in Latin by ut with the subjunc-\\ntive, either exclusively, or admit the construction of the\\naccusat. with the infinit. besides. This arises from the cir-\\ncumstance that such propositions may be or more properly\\nmust be conceived as expressing a design, purpose, effect, or\\nresult of the leading proposition which is indicated by ut (or\\nne).\\na) The verbs patior and sino are generally followed by the\\ninfinitive, and more rarely by ut; the verbs opto, concedo,\\npermitto, which have a more forcible meaning, may have\\neither the infinitive, or ut posco, postulo, fiagito and cogo\\nhave more frequently ut than the infinitive.\\nPhaethon optavit tit in cur rum patris toller etur (instead of\\ntolli or se tolli).\\nM 2", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0261.jp2"}, "262": {"fulltext": "244 \u00c2\u00abLATIN GRAMMAR.\\nIllud natura non patitur, ut aliorum spoliis nostras facili-\\ntates, copras, opes augeamus.\\nAugustus dominum se appellari ne a liberis quidem aut ne-\\npotibus suis passus est\\n614.] b) The verbs of resolving and endeavouring to\\ndo or prevent a thing are followed by ut and ne, when the\\ndependent clause has a subject of its own, but when the same\\nsubject remains they are generally followed by the infinitive\\n(i. e. the nominat. with the infinit.), though ut is found in\\nthis case also. Verbs of this kind are statuo, constituo, de-\\ncerno, tento, paro, meditor, euro, nitor, contendo, and the\\nphrases consilium capio, in animum induco, or animum in-\\nduce. Hence, we may say constitui domi manere, as well\\nas constitui ut domi manerem but we can say only constitui\\nutfilius meustecum habitaret. Ut is used almost exclusively\\nafter the expressions operam do, I exert myself} id (hoc, illud)\\nago, I endeavour or exert myself; nihil antiquius habeo or\\nduco, quam, nothing is of more importance to me and videre\\nin the sense of curare. v\\nQui sapientes appellari volunt, inducant animum divitias,\\nhonores, opes contemnere, eaque, quae his contraria sunt,\\npro nihilo ducere.\\nDebes explicare omnia vitia filii, quibus incensus parens\\npotuerit animum inducere, ut naturam ipsam vinceret, ut\\namorem ilium penitus insitum ejiceret ex animo, ut\\ndenique patrem esse sese oblivisceretur.\\nOmne animal se ipsum diligit, ac simul ut ortum est id agit,\\nut se conservet.\\nVidendum est igitur, ut ea liberalitate utamur, quae prosit\\namicis, noceat nemini.\\n615.] c) The verbs rogo, oro, praecor, peto, moneo,\\nadmoneo, commoneo, hortor, adhortor, cohortor, exhortor,\\nsuadeo,persuadeo, impello, perpello, excito, incito, impero,\\nand some others, are followed by ut or ne in both cases,\\nwhen the subject remains the same,\\\\and when it is changed,\\nand by the infinitive! only by way of exception. The com-\\nplete accusat.\\\\with the infinit. occurs with some of them only;\\nwhen their meaning is different, as with moneo land admoneo\\nin the sense of I remind ajperson that a thing is, not is to\\nbe with persuadeo in the sense of I convince. But, on\\nthe other hand, even such verbs as nuntio, dico, scribo, are", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0262.jp2"}, "263": {"fulltext": "INFINITIVE MOOD. 245\\nfollowed by ut, when the meaning is I announce, say, or\\nwrite with the intention that, c.\\nIllud te oro et hortor, ut in extrema parte muneris tui dili-\\ngentissimus sis.^\\nMoneo obtestorque, ut kos, qui tibi genere propinqui sunt,\\ncaros habeas, neu malis alienos adjungere, quam sanguine\\nconjunctos retinere.\\nThemistocles persuasit populo, ut pecunia publica, quae ex\\nmetallis rediret, classis centum navium aedificaretur.\\nTibi persuade, praeter culpam et peccatum homini accidere\\nnihil posse, quod sit horribile aut pertimescendum.\\n617.] Note. The verbs of commanding, as imperare, mandare, prae-\\nscribere, edicere (to issue a command), legem dare, decernere, are followed\\nby ut according to the above rule. Jubere and vetare alone form an ex-\\nception, being construed with the accusat. with the infinit., but attention\\nmust be paid as to whether the infinit. active or passive is to be used\\ne. g. militem occidi jussit, he ordered the soldier to be put to death eum\\nabire jussit, he ordered him to depart vetuit castra vaUo muniri, and\\nvetuit legatos ab opere discedere.\\n618.] d) The verbs of effecting, viz. facio, efficio, per-\\nficio, impetro, and consequor, are never construed with the\\ninfinitive or the accusative with the infinitive, but with ut\\nor ne since the relation of dependence upon these verbs is\\nregarded in Latin as that of an intended result. Hence arises\\na frequent circumlocution by means of facer e ut to express a\\nreal fact, and instead of dimisit milites, we accordingly find\\nfecit ut dimitteret milites,\\nEpaminondas perfecit, ut auxilio sociorum Lacedaemonii\\nprivarentur. t y\\n620.] 13. Hence it not unfrequently happens in nar-\\nratives, that the verbs of begging, commanding, admonishing,\\nc. are first followed by ut or ne and the subjunctive, and\\nafterwards by the accusative with the infinitive, only the\\nwords or sentiments of the subject of the narrative being re-\\ncorded. For the purpose of explanation, we supply from the\\npreceding verb the general idea of thinking or saying, which\\nis implied in the leading verb e. g. Caesar exercitui imperavit,\\nne injussu suo concurreret se, quum id fieri vellet, vexillo\\nsignum daturum.\\nHis (colonis Athen.) consulentibus nominatim Pythia prae^\\ncepit, ut Miltiadem sibi imperatorem sumerent id sifecis-\\nsent, incepta prosper a futura.\\nm 3", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0263.jp2"}, "264": {"fulltext": "246 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n621.] 14. Lastly, ut is used, and not the accusative\\nwith the infinitive (which would here be the accusative of\\nthe subject):\\na) After the expressions denoting it happens fit {fieri\\nnon potest), accidit, incidit, contingit (chiefly of desirable\\nthings), evenit, usu venit, occurrit and est (it is the case or\\nhappens, and hence also after esto, be it that)._j_\\nb) After the words denoting it remains, or it follows\\nfuturum, extremum, prope, proximum, and reliquum est, re-\\nlinquitur, sequitur, restat^ n superest sometimes also acce-\\ndit ut to this must be added that, where, however, quod\\nis more common).\\nFieri autem potest, ut recte quis sentiat, et id, quod sentit,\\npolite eloqui non possit.\\nPersaepe evenit, ut utilitas cum honestate certet.\\nAmicis quoniam satisfied, reliquum est, ut egomet mihi con-\\nsulam.\\n624.] 15. The verbs denoting willingness and permis-\\nsion, which \\\\may take ut instead of the accusative with the\\ninfinitive (yolo, nolo, malo, sino, permitto and licet) those\\nwhich denote asking, advising, reminding (especially postulo,\\npeto, rogo, oro, precor, hortor, suadeo, censeo, moneo, admo-\\nneo), which are generally construed only with ut, and some\\nothers of a similar kind, as euro, decerno, mando, jubeo, may\\nalso be followed by the subjunctive alone, without ut To\\nthese we must add the two imperatives fac (in its periphras-\\ntic sense take care that which usually takes ut, and cave,\\nwhich usually takes ne for they too are frequently joined\\nwith the subjunctive alone.\\nMalo te sapiens hostis metuat, quam stulti cives laudent.\\nSumma militum alacritate, jubentium quocunque vellet duce-\\nret, oratio excepta est.\\nQuod plerumque in atroci negotio solet, senatus decrevit,\\ndarent operam consules, ne quid respublica detrimenti ca-\\nperet X\\n625.] Note. Oportet and jiecesse est may likewise be followed either\\nby the accusative with the infinitive, or by the subjunctive alone e. g.\\nleges oportet breves sint virtus necesse est vitium aspemetur atque oderit.\\nOpus est generally takes the infinitive ut occurs very rarely.\\n626.] 16. The infinitive and the accusative with the\\ninfinitive, according to 597., serve to represent a proposi-", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0264.jp2"}, "265": {"fulltext": "INFINITIVE MOOD. 247\\ntion as a single thought, so that it resembles an abstract noun.\\nQuod with a tense of the indicative or subjunctive, on the\\nother hand, represents a proposition simply as a fact. This\\nis obviously the case, e. g. when in replying to a person, we\\ntake up and repeat a previous remark of his. It is frequently\\nindifferent whether we express a proposition by the accusa-\\ntive with the infinitive, or by quod, as, for example, in those\\ncases where %e predicate it is agreeable or disagree-\\nable, it is pleasant or unpleasant, follows the propo-\\nsition. But the infinitive is always more properly made the\\nsubject, when the predicate expresses an abstract idea but\\nwhen it implies a fact, the proposition is more properly in-\\ntroduced by quod, to which is frequently joined a demonstra-\\ntive pronoun hoc, id, Mud, in order to mark its character as\\na fact still more emphatically.\\nInter causas malorum nostrorum est, quod vivimus ad exem-\\npla.\\nSupra belli Latini metum id quoque accesserat, quod triginta\\njam conjurasse populos satis constabat.\\nEx tota laude Heguli Mud est admiratione dignum, quod\\ncaptivos Poenorum retinendos censuit.\\n627.] Note. The use of quod in repeating a previous expression or\\nproposition of a person for the purpose of answering it occurs most fre-\\nquently in letters and quod in this case may be rendered in English by\\nM with regard to, or as regards e. g. Quod scribis te velle scire, qui sit\\nrei publicae status summa dissensio est. Quod mihi de filia gratularis\\nagnosco humanitatem tuam.\\n628.] 17. A purely objective proposition is expressed\\nby quod only when it depends upon the very general tran-\\nsitive verbs addere (mostly in the imperative adde hue) and\\nfacer e joined with an adverb, as bene facis quod me mones.\\nHippocrates, clarus arte medicinae, videtur honestissime\\nfecisse, quod quosdam errores suos, ne posteri errarent,\\nconfessus est\\n629.] But after the verbs denoting a feeling of pain\\nor joy, and the outward expression of these feelings, viz.\\ngaudeo, delector, angor, doleo, graviter fero, succenseo,\\npoenitet, miror, admiror, glorior, gratulor, gratias ago,\\nqueror, indignor, and others of a similar meaning, we may\\neither use quod in the sense of because, or of or\\nat the fact that, or the accusative with the infinitive.\\nWhether quod is to be joined with the indicative or\\nM 4", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0265.jp2"}, "266": {"fulltext": "248 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nsubjunctive, must be determined by the general rules con-\\ncerning these moods the indicative expresses a fact, and\\nthe subjunctive a conception.\\nMeum factum probari abs te triumpho gaudio.\\nQuod spiratis, quod vocem mittitis, quod formas hominum\\nhabetis, indignantur.\\nVetus Mud Catonis admodum scitum est, qui mirari se ajebat,\\nquod non rideret haruspex, haruspicem cum vidisset.\\n630.] 18. Quod is used exclusively in explanatory or\\nperiphrastic propositions, which refer to a preceding demon-\\nstrative pronoun {hoc, id, Mud, istud), unless this pronoun\\nbe added in the nominative or accusative, as a pleonasm to\\nverbs governing the accusative with the infinitive. Hence\\nthis rule finds its certain application only when the demon-\\nstrative pronoun is in some other case, or dependent upon a\\npreposition.\\nMihi quidem videntur homines hac re maxime beluis praes-\\ntare, quod loqui possunt.\\nSocrates apud Platonem hoc Periclem ceteris praestitisse\\noratoribus dicit, quod is Anaxagorae fuerit auditor.\\nCHAP. LXXXI.\\nUSE OF THE PARTICIPLES.\\n631 The Participle expresses the action or condition\\nof the verb in the form of an adjective, governing the case\\nof the verb, and at the same time marking the complete or\\nincomplete stateW the action or condition. In Latin, as in\\nEnglish, this form of the verb is very defective, for it has,\\nin the active, one participle to express an action still going\\non, as scribens, writing and, in the passive, one to express\\nthe completed state of suffering, as scriptus, written con-\\nsequently, there is no participle of a completed action (for\\nwhich we say having written), nor of a state of suffering still\\ngoing on. The Latin deponent is the only kind of verb which\\nhas the participles complete, its passive form having an", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0266.jp2"}, "267": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 249\\nactive meaning imitans, imitating, and imitatus, one who\\nhas imitated.\\nTo these, however, we must add two participles, one in\\nthe active and the other in the passive, which express the\\naction or suffering as not yet begun, that is, as something\\nwhich is to take place in future, whence they are called par-\\nticiples of the future. The participle future active properly\\nexpresses the intention to perform an action, as scripturus,\\none who intends or has to write, but has also the significa-\\ntion of simple futurity, one who is about to write. The\\nparticiple future passive expresses in the nominative the\\nnecessity that something should be done or suffered, as\\nepistola scribenda, a letter which must be written, and not\\none that will be written. In the other cases it serves\\nto supply the very sensible want of a participle present pas-\\nsive, expressing a state of suffering going on. But of this\\nhereafter, 652. foil.\\n632.] Note. The want of the participle of a completed action in\\nthe active is often felt very sensibly, for neither circumlocution nor the\\nchange into the passive form (e. g. victoria, parta, after he had gained the\\nvictory) always conveys exactly what is meant. But the perfect parti-\\nciples of deponents are a very convenient means of supplying this want,\\nas their number is not small, and it is always easy to find some deponent\\nwhich is synonymous with an active in the case just mentioned we may\\nsay victoriam adeptus, assecutus, or consecutus.\\nOn the other hand, the Latin writers use many perfect participles of\\ndeponents in a passive sense, along with the proper active one as juratus,\\npransus, coenatus and ausus, gavisus, solitus, fisus, confisus, which are de-\\nrived from semi-deponents. 148.)\\n635.] 2. Participles are employed in Latin more fre-\\nquently than in English,- not only to express the verb in\\nexplanatory clauses, which are connected by a relative pro-\\nnoun with a noun of the leading sentence but clauses which\\nare introduced by means of particles of time (e. g. as, ichen,\\nalthough, since), may be expressed by participles, provided\\ntheir subject occurs in the leading sentence, y\\nEst enim lex nihil aliud, nisi recta et a numine deorum tracta\\nratio, imperans honesta, prohibens contraria.\\nCurio, ad focum sedenti, magnum auri pondus Samnites\\nquum attulissent, repudiati ab eo sunt\\nDionysius tyrannus, Syracusis expulsus, Corinthi pueros\\ndocebat\\nDionysius, cultros metuens tonsorios, candenti carbone sibi\\nadurebat copillum.\\nM 5", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0267.jp2"}, "268": {"fulltext": "250 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nRisus interdum ita repente erumpit, ut eum cupientes tenere\\nnequeamus.\\n637.] 3. Substantives expressing the action of the\\nverb e. g. the building, instituting, writing, hearing, are\\nexpressed by the participles perfect and future passive, the\\nLatin language not always having substantives of this kind\\n(at least they are not in common use). There is of course\\nthis difference, that the perfect participle is employed when\\nthe action is to be represented as completed, and the future\\nparticiple, when it is conceived as still incomplete. (Eespect-\\ning the participle future passive, see 649.) This is done in\\nall the cases of such participles, and even when they are\\ngoverned by the prepositions ad, anfe, ob, post, propter, ab,\\nand ex e. g. hae litterae recitatae magnum luctum fecerunt,\\nthe reading of this letter Tarentum captum, the taking of\\nTarentum; receptus Hannibal, the reception of Hannibal;\\nob receptum Hannibalem, on account of the reception of\\nHannibal sibi quisque caesi regis expetebat decus, the glory\\nof having killed, or of killing the king (for both expressions\\nare here equivalent).\\nScipio propter Africam domitam Africanus appellatus est\\nThebae et ante Epaminondam natum et post ejus interitum\\nperpetuo alieno paruerunt imperio, (So also post Christum\\nnatum, ab urbe condita, c.)\\n639.] 4. The participle future active is used especially\\nwith verbs of motion (such as go, send, c.) to express a pur-\\npose, which we indicate in English by the particle to the\\nconjunction ut, or a relative pronoun with the subjunctive,\\nhowever, is very commonly used in Latin instead of the\\nparticiple.\\nHannibal in Etruriam ducit, earn quoque gentem aut vi aut\\nvoluntate adjuncturus.\\n640.] 5. In the cases hitherto considered the participle\\nsupplies the place of an inserted clause, the subject of which\\nis a noun contained in the leading proposition. If, however,\\na new subject is introduced, it is put with the participle in\\nthe ablative, independent of the leading proposition. This\\nconstruction is called the ablative absolute. (Ablativus\\nabsolutus or consequentiae.) A similar construction is some-\\ntimes used in English, as he could not live in his own", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0268.jp2"}, "269": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 251\\ncountry any longer, his influence being too great for the\\nrepublic but it is more common to express such sentences\\nby the conjunctions as when, or by a verbal substantive\\nwith a preposition, e. g. Cyro regnante, in the reign of\\nCyrus Cyro mortuo or occiso, after the death or fall of\\nCyrus, or after Cyrus had been killed.\\nPythagoras quum Tarquinio Superbo regnante in Italiam\\nvenisset, magnam Mam Graeciam quum honore disciplinae,\\nturn etiam auctoritate tenuit.\\nL. Valerii virtute, regibus exterminatis, libertas in re publica\\nconstituta est.\\n642.] 6. An ablative absolute may also be used instead\\nof the other particles when, since, while, although,\\nwhich were mentioned in 635. (Some writers even retain\\nthe conjunctions quamquam and quamvis with the ablat.\\nabsolute.)\\nJReluctante natura, irritus labor est.\\nEclipses non ubique cernuntur, aliquando propter nubila,\\nsaepius globo terrae obstante.\\nHand scio an, pietate adversus deos sub lata, fides etiam et\\nsocietas generis humani et una excellentissima virtus jus-\\ntitia tollatur.\\nMucins solus in castra Porsenae venit, eumque interficere,\\nproposita sibi morte, conatus est.\\n644.] 7. Instead of a participle certain substantives\\nalso may be used, which express the action of a verb, as dux,\\ncomes, adjutor, and adjutrix, auctor, testis, judex, interpres,\\nmagister, praeceptor, and magistra, praeceptrix e. g. duce\\nnatura in the sense of ducente natura, under the guidance\\nof nature comite fortuna, i. e. comitante fortuna judice\\nPoly bio, according to the judgment of Polybius. So also\\nofficial titles, as consul, praetor, imperator, rex, generally\\nonly to denote time, as Cicerone consule, in the consulship of\\nCicero.\\nMagis auctoribus (on the advice of the Magi) Xerxes infiam-\\nmasse templa Graeciae dicitur.\\nSapientia enim est una, quae maestitiam pellat ex animis,\\nquaenos exhorrescere metu non sinat qua praecep trice in\\ntranquillitate vivi potest, omni cupiditatum ardore restincto.\\nquam facile erat orbis imperium occupare, aut mihi, Ro~\\nmanis militibus, aut, me rege, Romanis!\\nM 6", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0269.jp2"}, "270": {"fulltext": "252 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\n645.] As the Latins have no participle of esse in cur-\\nrent use, an adjective alone must sometimes supply the place\\nof a participle e. g. deo propitio, when God is gracious\\nsereno coelo, aspera hieme, me ignaro, Mis consciis.\\nRomani, Hannibale vivo, nunquam se sine insidiis futuros\\narbitrabantur.\\nObvius Jit Miloni Clodius expeditus, nulla rhedd, nullis\\nimpedimentis, nullis Graecis comitibus.\\n647.] 8. The simple ablative of the participle perfect\\npassive sometimes supplies the place of the whole construction\\nof the ablative absolute, the proposition following being con-\\nsidered as a noun of the neuter gender, and as the subject of\\nthe participle, e. g. Hannibal, cognito insidias sibi parari,\\nfuga salutem quaesivit, equivalent to cognitis insidiis sibi\\nparatis. This use however is confined to a few participles,\\nas audito, cognito, comperto (in a passive sense), explorato,\\ndesperato, nuntiato, edicto.\\nAlexander, audito Dareum appropinquare cum exercitu, ob-\\nviam ire constituit\\n649.] 9. The participle future passive has in the\\nnominative (and in the construction of the accusative with\\nthe infinitive, in the accusative also) the signification of ne-\\ncessity, and less frequently that of possibility laudandus,\\none who must be praised, or ought to be praised. The\\nperson by whom a thing must be done is expressed with this\\nparticiple by the dative, and not by the preposition ab.\\nThe neuter of this participle, joined with a tense of esse,\\nretains the signification of necessity, as audendum est, mori-\\nendum est, omnibus hominibus moriendum est, we must\\nventure, we must die, c. If the verb is transitive, the par-\\nticiple is made to agree with the subject in gender and\\nnumber e. g. virtus laudanda est, virtue must be praised, or\\nwe must praise virtue omnes captivi occidendi sunt, all the\\nprisoners must be put to death, or we must put to death, c.\\nliaec via tibi ineunda (ingredienda) est, you must take this\\nroad, or this road must be taken by you.\\nQuum suo cuique judicio sit utendum, difficile factu est, me\\nid sentire semper, quod tu velis.\\nDiligentia in omnibus rebus plurimum valet liaec praecipue\\ncolenda est nobis, haec semper adhibenda.", "height": "4128", "width": "2388", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0270.jp2"}, "271": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE GERUND. JG4\\nG52 10. In the remaining cases this participle usually\\nsupplies the place of the participle present passive, that is, it\\nhas the meaning of a continued passive state e. g. occupatus\\nsum in Uteris scribendis, in letters which are being written\\nperitus rei publicae regendae. A reference to future time\\nalso may be implied, but this arises from the connection, and\\nnot from the participle itself re. g. consilium libertatis recu-\\nperandae missus erat ad naves comparandas. For the rest\\nsee the chapter on the Gerund.\\n654.] 11. This participle should properly be formed\\nonly from active transitive verbs, but it is formed also from\\ndeponents which have a transitive meaning; e.g. in imi-\\ntando hoc scriptore, i. e. if this writer is imitated. Of in-\\ntransitive verbs, however, only the neuter of this participle\\nis used with est, erat, c. quiescendum est, dormiendum\\nest, eundum est.\\nCHAP. LXXXH.\\nUSE OF THE GERUND.\\n655.] 1. The Gerund is in form nothing else than the\\nfour oblique cases of the neuter of the participle future pas-\\nsive. It governs the case of its verb, and with regard to\\nits signification it supplies the place of a declinable infi-\\nnitive present active, and is a verbal substantive, just as in\\nEnglish the present participle is used as a verbal substantive.\\nThus we find illud ediscendo scribendoque commune est,\\nthis is common to learning by heart and writing amicitia\\ndicta est ab amando.\\n656.] 2. The relation of the gerund to the real parti-\\nciple future passive is this: as the gerund has an active\\nmeaning, e. g. consilium scribendi, the design of writing or\\nto write, it may have an accusative as its object, as consilium\\nscribepidi epistolam, and this construction may, without any\\nchange of meaning, be changed into the passive consilium\\nscribendae epistolae, the design of a letter to be written, or\\nthat a letter should be written. The accusative is thus\\nchanged into the case in which the gerund stood. This", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0271.jp2"}, "272": {"fulltext": "254 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nchange into the passive may take place wherever no ambi-\\nguity is likely to arise, i. e. wherever the gender is distin-\\nguishable hence it generally does not take place, when the\\naccusative dependent upon the gerund is the neuter of a\\npronoun or adjective; e.g. studium Mud efficiendi, cupido\\nplura cognoscendi, not illius efficiendi, or plurium cognos-\\ncendorum, because it would be impossible to see whether\\nthe genitives illius said plurium are masculine or neuter.\\nHence it is better to say lex appellata est a suum cuique tri-\\nbuendo, than a suo cuique tribuendo. But independently of\\nthis reason, the change of the active construction into the pas-\\nsive with the participle future is sometimes avoided, even\\nwhere no ambiguity would arise.\\n659.] 3. The particular cases in which the gerund,\\nand, under the limitations above mentioned, the participle\\nfuture passive are used, are the following:\\na) The genitive of the gerund is used after substantives\\nand after relative adjectives. (See 436.) In English, sub-\\nstantives and relative adjectives are followed either by of\\nwith the participle present, or by to with the infinitive\\ne. g. ars dicendi, the art of speaking discendi cupidus, de-\\nsirous to learn. Such substantives, among many others, are\\nars, causa, consilium, consuetudo, cupiditas, facultas, occasio,\\npotestas, spes, studium, voluntas. The ablatives causa and\\ngratia are also joined with the genitive of the gerund e. g.\\ndiscendi causa, for the sake or purpose of learning quidam\\ncanes venandi gratia comparantur.\\nBeate vivendi cupiditate incensi omnes sumus,\\nParsimonia, est scientia vitandi sumptus supervacuos, aut ars\\nre familiari moderate utendL\\nEpaminondas studiosus erat audiendi.\\nb) If the verb governs the accusative, the passive construc-\\ntion with the participle future is commonly preferred.\\nQuis ignorat Gallos usque ad hanc diem retinere Mam im-\\nmanem ac barbaram consuetudinem hominum immolan-\\ndorum\\nInita sunt a Catilina ejusque sociis consilia urbis delendae,\\ncivium trucidandorum, nominis Romani extinguendi.\\nTimotheus rei militaris (belli gerendi) fait peritus, neque\\nminus civitatis regendae.\\n660 r e T he ru e respecting the agreement of the participle", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0272.jp2"}, "273": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE GERUND. 255\\nwith the noun in gender andnumher is apparently violated in the genitive of\\nthe personal pronouns for met, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, even when feminine,\\nare joined with the neuter form of the participle for these genitives are\\nproperly derived from the neuters meum, tuum, swan, nostrum, vestrum.\\nHence we say da mihi copiam tui placandi, both in speaking to a man\\nand to a woman; haec dixi vestri adkortandi causa.\\n664.] 4. The dative of the gerund is used after adjec-\\ntives which govern this case 409.), especially after u tills,\\ninutills, noxlus, par, aptus, idoneus, and after substantives\\nand verbs denoting a purpose or design. In this sense, how-\\never, it is more common to use ad with the accusative of the\\ngerund, or a clause with tit The expressions which from\\ntheir meaning are most frequently joined with the dative of\\nthe gerund, are studere, infantum esse, tempus impendere,\\ntempus consumere or insumere, operam dare, sujficere, satis\\nesse, deesse and esse in the sense serving for, being ade-\\nquate to. The participle future passive, as was remarked\\nabove, is used when the verb governs an accusative.\\nAqua nitrosa utilis est bibendo.\\nBrutus quum studere revocandis in urbem reglbus llberos\\nsuos comperisset, securl eos percussit.\\nTiberius quasi firmandae valetudini in Campaniam conces-\\nsit, y\\n666. 5. The accusative of the gerund is invariably\\ndependent upon prepositions, most frequently upon ad (to),\\nor inter (during or amidst), but sometimes also upon ante,\\ncirca, and ob and in this case the change into the passive\\nconstruction with the participle future, takes place almost\\ninvariably when the gerund governs an accusative.\\nMores puerorum se^ inter ludendum simplicius detegunt\\nMusicen natura ipsa nobis videtur ad tolerandos facilius la-\\nbores velut muneri dedisse.\\nNote. The beginner must particularly attend to the use of the gerund\\n(without a noun) with inter, which is equivalent to our during or\\namidst e. g. inter eundum, inter bibendum, inter ambulandum, inter\\nvapulandum.\\n[\u00c2\u00a7667.] 6. The ablative of the gerund is used: a)\\nWithout a preposition, as an ablativus instrumenti. b) With\\nthe prepositions ab, de, ex, and in. In the first case the\\nconstruction is commonly, and in the latter always, changed\\ninto the passive, when the gerund governs an accusative.", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0273.jp2"}, "274": {"fulltext": "256 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nHominis mens discendo alitur et cogitando*\\nSuper stitione tollenda non tollitur religio.\\nFortitudo in laboribus periculisque subeundis cernitur, tem~\\nperantia in praetermittendis voluptatibus, prudentia in\\ndelectu bonorum et malorum, justitia in suo cuique tri~\\nbuendo.\\nCHAP. LXXXIIL\\nUSE OF THE SUPINE.\\n668.] 1. The two Supines are, in form, cases of a verbal\\nsubstantive of the fourth declension, but they govern the case\\nof their verb.\\n2. The supine in urn is used with verbs which express\\nmotion to a place e. g. ire, prqficisci, contendere, pergere,\\nfestinare, venire, mittere, trajicere and it indicates the ob-\\nject e. g. cubitum ire, to go to sleep exploratum, frumen-\\ntatum, pabulatum mittere, oratum obsecratumque venire.\\nThe same meaning is implied in the expression alicui nup-\\ntum dare, to give a woman in marriage. But the Latin\\nwriters in general prefer using the gerund in the accusat.\\nwith ad, or in the genit. with causa, or the participle future\\nactive, instead of the supine.\\nPhilippus Argis a Pausania, quum spectatum ludos iret,\\njuxta theatrum occisus est. (The same may be expressed\\nby ad spectandos ludos, ludos spectandi causa, ludorum\\nspectandorum causa, ludos spectaturus, or ut ludos spec-\\ntar et.} f\\n670.] 3. The supine in u is used after the substantives\\nfas, nefas, and opus, and after the adjectives good or bad,\\nagreeable or disagreeable, worthy or unworthy, easy or diffi-\\ncult, and some others of similar meaning. Of the adjectives\\nwhich are joined with this supine, the following occur most\\nfrequently honestus, turpis, jucundus, facilis, incredibilis,\\nmemorabilis, utilis, dignus and indignus. But the number\\nof supines in u actually in use is very small, and almost", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0274.jp2"}, "275": {"fulltext": "USE OF THE SUPINE. 257\\nlimited to the following dictu, audit u, cognitu, factu, in-\\nventu, memoratu, to which we may add natu (by birth, ac-\\ncording to age), which occurs in the expressions grandis,\\nmajor, minor, maximus, and minimus natu.\\nPleraque dictu quam re sunt faciliora.\\nQuid est tarn jucundum cognitu atque auditu, quam sapien-\\ntibus sententiis gravibusque verbis ornata oratio", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0275.jp2"}, "276": {"fulltext": "258\\nAPPENDIX.\\nThe words of a language consist of long and short syllables.\\nIn measuring syllables the time consumed in pronouncing a\\nshort syllable is taken as a standard, and this portion of time\\nis called mora, A long syllable takes two morae, and is\\ntherefore, in this respect, equal to two short syllables. Which\\nsyllables, in the Latin language, are considered short, and\\nwhich long, has been shown in Chap. III. From the com-\\nbination of syllables of a certain quantity arise what are\\ncalled Feet (pedes), of which there are four of two syllables,\\neight of three syllables, sixteen of four syllables, thirty-two\\nof five syllables, c, since the respective number of syl-\\nlables admits of so many variations. For the sake of brevity,\\nspecific names have been given to those feet which consist\\nof two, three, and four syllables\\na) of two syllables\\nv w Pyrrhichius bone, pater, lege.\\nSpondeus audax, constans, virtus.\\nv Iambus potens, patres, legunt.\\nv Trochaeus, or Choreus laetus, fortis, gaudet.\\nb) Of three syllables\\nv v v Tribrachys domine, dubius, legere.\\nMolossus mirari, libertas, legerunt.\\nv v Dactylus improbus, omnia, legerat.\\nv w Amphibrachys amare, peritus, legebat.\\nw Anapaestus bonitas, meditans, legerent.\\nv Bacchius dolor es, amavi, legebant.\\nv Amphimacer, Creticus fecerant, leg er ant, cogitans.\\nv Palimbacchius, Antibacchlus praeclarus, peccata,\\nlegisse.", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0276.jp2"}, "277": {"fulltext": "\\\\J \\\\J \\\\J \\\\J\\n\\\\J \\\\s\\nAPPENDIX. 259\\nc) Of four syllables\\nProceleusmaticus celeriter, memoria, relegere.\\n_ _ Dispondeus praeceptores, interrumpunt, perlege-\\nrunt\\n_ Ionicus a minori adolescens, generosi, adamari.\\nw Ionicus a majori sententia, mutabilis, perlegerat.\\nw Ditrochaeus, Dichoreus educator, infidelis, eru-\\nditus.\\n_ Diiambus amoenitas, renuntians, supervenis.\\nu Antispastus verecundus, abundabit, perillustris.\\n_ Choriambus impatiens, crediditas, eximios.\\nM Paeon primus credibilis, historia, attonitus.\\n2 secundus modestia, amabilis, idoneus.\\nv tertius puerilis, opulentus, medicamen.\\nj v quartus celeritas, misericors, refugiens.\\n_ Epitritus primus laborando, reformidant, salu~\\ntantes.\\nw _ secundus administrans, imperatrix, com-\\nprobavi.\\nu _ tertius auctoritas, intelligens, dissentiens.\\n_ _ M quartus assentator, infinities, naturalis.\\n2. These feet are united with one another by Rhythm\\nthat is, the uniformity of the duration of time, in the raising\\nand sinking of the voice, or Arsis and Thesis.\\n3. The Arsis is either equal to the Thesis, or twice as\\nlong, as will be seen in the difference of the two feet, the\\nDactyl and the Trochee, t w u and the Arsis (marked\\nthus being combined with the long syllable. The same\\nproportion exists when the Thesis precedes the Arsis\\nin the Anapaest and Iambus and u i. The first\\nspecies, in which the Arsis forms the beginning, is called the\\ndescending Rhythm the other in which the Thesis forms\\nthe beginning, the ascending.\\n4. The Iambic verse usually consists of the combination of\\nsix Iambi, whence it is called in Latin senarius, and in\\nGreek trimeter, two united feet being termed a metrum (or\\ndipodia). Its metre is this\\nV \\\\J W W\u00e2\u0080\u0094 KJ O\\nbut the last syllable of all verses is anceps, and the last foot\\nof a senarius, therefore, may be a Pyrrhic u", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0277.jp2"}, "278": {"fulltext": "260 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nPure Iambic feet, however, would become monotonous,\\nand hence a tribrachys may be employed in every place\\nexcept the last, the long syllable being resolved into two\\nshorts or, secondly, a Spondee may be substituted for the\\nIambus in all places except the last, and the Spondee again\\nmay be resolved into a Dactyl or Anapaest. The last foot\\nalone is thus preserved pure. But in reciting Iambic verses\\nit is necessary to read according to the Iambic rhythm,\\nthat is, in such a manner as to place the ictus on the\\nsecond half of the foot, and if this half consists of two syl-\\nlables, upon the first of them, for two syllables cannot be\\nequally raised by the ictus. Hence the Tribrachys in Iam-\\nbics is read u (f the Spondee _ the Dactyl _ J* and\\nthe Anapaest according to its own peculiar rhythm.\\n5. We shall subjoin, as an example, the first fable of\\nPhaedrus, divided according to Dipodiae every Arsis is in-\\ndicated by the ictus. (Respecting the elisions, see 8.)\\nAd rivum eun\\\\dem Vupus et d\\\\gnus verier ant\\nSiti compul\\\\si; s uperior stab at lupus\\nLongeque inferi\\\\or dgnus. Tunc fauce improba\\nLatro incitd\\\\tus, jurgii causarn intuliL\\nCur, inquit, tur\\\\bulentam fe\\\\cisti mihi\\nIstdm biben\\\\tif Ldniger contra timens\\nQui possum, quae\\\\so, f dcere quod quereris, lupe?\\nA te decur\\\\rit ad meos haustus liquor.\\nRepulsus il\\\\le veritd\\\\tis viribus\\nAnte hos sex men\\\\ses m dle, ait, di\\\\xisti mihi.\\nRespondit d\\\\gnus e quidem nd\\\\tus non eram.\\nPater hercule tu\\\\us inquit, m dle\\\\dixit mihi.\\nAtque ltd corre\\\\ptum r deer at in\\\\justd nece.\\n6. The dactylic verse most commonly employed is the\\ndactylic hexameter, also called the heroic verse, being used\\nprincipally in heroic epics, after the example of Homer.\\nIt consists of six feet or dactyls, the last of which however\\nis shortened by one syllable. In the first four places, a\\nspondee may stand, but it rarely occurs in the fifth, because\\nsuch a verse (called spondiacus) would sound rather heavy.\\nThe scheme therefore stands thus", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0278.jp2"}, "279": {"fulltext": "APPENDIX. 261\\n7. In this verse we have to pay particular attention to\\nits incision or caesura. A caesura is the interruption of the\\nrhythm by the end of a word. For, as in reading we make a\\npause at the end of a word, in order to be understood, there\\narises a sort of opposition between the sense and the rhythm,\\nwhich is removed in good reading by making a short pause\\non account of the sense, but taking up at the same time the\\ninterrupted rhythm. An hexameter may have many caesurae.\\ne.g.\\nDonee erisfelix, multos numerabis amicos,\\nwhere the end of the words is throughout at variance with\\nthe end of the feet but one caesura in the middle of the\\nline is necessary, in order to divide the verse, which would\\notherwise be too long, into two halves. It occurs either in\\nthe third foot after the arsis, and is called penthemimeres\\n{7revQr]iJLif.iepric), because five half feet have preceded it or in\\nthe fourth, likewise after the arsis, and is called hephthe-\\nmimeres (k^drj/jLLfjLEpijg). The former is by far the most fre-\\nquent, e. g. in the following verses of Ovid, where all the\\ncaesurae are penthemimeres, with the exception of one.\\nSilva vetus stabaf, |j nulla violata securi.\\nEst specus in medio, virgis ac vimine densus,\\nEfficiens humilem lapidum compagibus arcum,\\nUberibus fecundus aquis. Hoc conditus antro\\nMartius anguis erat, cristis praesignis et auro.\\nIgne micant oculi, corpus tumet omne veneno,\\nTresque vibrant linguae, triplici stant or dine dentes.\\nIn determining the principal caesura of an hexameter, we are\\nassisted by the punctuation, which the poets usually make to\\ncoincide with the principal caesura, if it does not coincide\\nwith the end of the verse.\\n8. Next to the hexameter, the pentameter is the most\\ncommon dactylic verse. It has its name from the five com-\\nplete feet which it appears to contain, for of the six dactyls,\\nthe third and sixth are imperfect and consist only of two\\nhalves each.\\nw I MM I I I I\\nI J J _ w I _ y, I _", "height": "4120", "width": "2411", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0279.jp2"}, "280": {"fulltext": "9g 2 LATIN GRAMMAR.\\nThere is always* c\u00c2\u00bbe S *2 SS\\nWmeter ^cXg it, au/thL two verses together are\\ncalled a distich, e. g.\\nArtibus ingenuis, quarum tibi maxima cura est,\\nPectora mollescunt, aspentasque fugit.\\nTHE END.\\nr 40 06\\nLondon\\nPrinted bv A. Spottiswoode,\\nNew- Street-Square.", "height": "4120", "width": "2463", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0280.jp2"}, "281": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3862", "width": "2206", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0281.jp2"}, "282": {"fulltext": "", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0282.jp2"}, "283": {"fulltext": "", "height": "3862", "width": "2206", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0283.jp2"}, "284": {"fulltext": "\u00e2\u0096\u00a0V\\nV\\no v Y\\n1:\\n-\\\\0\\nP\\ny\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0:i\\nC", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0284.jp2"}, "285": {"fulltext": "oq x\\n3 v^\\nS\\nA*\\nN^\\nO-0 X A V s\\n^s-\\n,v\\naV", "height": "3862", "width": "2206", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0285.jp2"}, "286": {"fulltext": "UUUBUtl\\nJH m\\nmmsmi\\nLIBRARY\\nCONGRESS\\nBBlSsJ\\nIBHI\\n1\\nIS\\niilll\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0p\\nWarn\\n\u00e2\u0096\u00a0I", "height": "4188", "width": "2441", "jp2-path": "schoolgrammarofl00zump_0286.jp2"}}